Vip Exec

VIP-EXECUTIVE
Reference Manual
2001, 2002 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 159682 R2003.4

This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
Landmark, the Landmark logo, 3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3DVIEW, Active Field Surveillance, Active
Reservoir Surveillance, ARIES, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant,
DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DepthTeam, DepthTeam
Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP,
DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite, DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Surveillance System,
EarthCube, EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, EPM, e-workspace, FastTrack, FZAP!, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix
Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus, GrandBasin, GRIDGENR, I2 Enterprise, iDims,
IsoMap, LandScape, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Make Great Decisions, MathPack,
Model Builder, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks, OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenTutor,
OpenVision, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point
Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX
3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pStaX, QUICKDIF, RAVE, Real Freedom, Reservoir
Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisXchange, SigmaView, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, Stratamodel, StratAmp,
StrataSim, StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, SynTool, SystemStart, T2B, TDQ, TERAS, Total Drilling
Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP, VIP-COMP,
VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-POLYMER, VIP-
THERM, WavX, Web OpenWorks, Well Editor, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, wOW, Xsection, ZAP!, Z-MAP Plus are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Table of Contents
Preface
About This Manual
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
The Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
The Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Chapter 1
Data Overview
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.6 Shared Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2 Typical Data Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1 Well Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2 Production Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.3 Pressure History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Data Deck Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4 Input Data Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.5.1 General Utility Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
R2003.4 - Landmark iii

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE) . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File
(ENDINC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.5.1.4 Echo Print On (LIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.5.1.5 Echo Print Off (NOLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.5.1.6 Skip Data On (SKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.5.1.7 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.5.1.8 Columns To Be Read (NCOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.5.1.9 Data Line Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.5.2 Well Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.5.3 Alternative Well Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.6 Files Used by VIP-EXECUTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.7 Units Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Chapter 2
Utility Data
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.2 Control ......................................................... 2-33
2.2.1 Start of Time-Dependent Data (RUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.2.2 Calculate Memory Requirement (STORAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.2.3 Change Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.2.4 Material Balance Option (OPTMBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.2.5 Volume Balance Option (VOLBAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.3 Formulation Options (VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.3.1 Implicit form of Finite Difference Equations (IMPLICIT) . . . . . . . 2-40
2.3.2 Explicit form of Finite Difference Equations (IMPES) . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4 Results File Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4.1 Plot File Format and Data Selection (PLOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4.2 Compositional Plot File Format and Data Selection (CPLOT) . . . 2-42
2.4.3 Map File Format (MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.4.4 File Type for PLOT/MAP Files (NOVDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.4.5 Flow Vectors (FLOWVEC) (Not accepted by VIP-THERM,
see FLOWS card in VIP-CORE manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5 Conductive (Leaky) Fault Solution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.5.1 Segregated Flow Assumption (SEGREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.5.2 Fully Coupled Calculation (LKCPLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.6 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.6.1 Restarting Runs (RESTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.6.2 Descriptive Run Information (TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3) . . . . . . . 2-49
2.6.3 Beginning of Data (START) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.6.4 Time Specification for Reading Data (TIME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.6.5 Date Specification for Reading Data (DATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
iv Landmark - R2003.4
2.6.6 Run Termination (STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

2.6.7 End-of-File Marker (END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Chapter 3
Well Data
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.2 Well Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.2.1 Well Name and Location (WELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.2.2 Describe Well Perforations (FPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.2.3 Describe Well Perforations, VIP-DUAL (FPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.2.4 Set Status of Well Perforations (PRFSTAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.2.5 Well Perforation Tolerances (PERFPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.2.6 Inclined and Horizontal Well Flow Correlation (BEGGS) . . . . . . 3-74
3.2.7 Wellbore Friction Pressure Loss (NOFRICTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3.3 Surface Separation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.3.1 Compositional Separator Battery, VIP-COMP or
VIP-THERM (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.3.2 Black-Oil Separator Battery, VIP-ENCORE (SEPARATOR) . . . . . 3-78
3.3.3 K-Value Separation Data, VIP-ENCORE (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . 3-81
3.3.4 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.3.5 Separator Switching (NEWSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.3.6 Surface Facility Model Input (TSFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3.4 Well Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.4.1 Production Well Definition (PROD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.4.2 Injection Well Definition (INJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3.4.2.1 Temperature Specification (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.4.2.2 Steam Quality Specification (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.4.2.3 Pressure Specification (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3.4.2.4 Treatment of Water/Steam Injectors (VIP-THERM) . . . 3-95
3.4.3 Define Additional Injection Rate for FSTD or FRES Wells (INJA) 3-98
3.4.4 Computation of Mobility for Gas Injectors (GINJMOB) . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.4.5 Computation of Mobility for Water Injectors (WINJMOB) . . . . . 3-99
3.4.6 Production Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNSTP) . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.4.7 Water Injection Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNSTQ) . . . . . . 3-99
3.4.8 Gas Reinjection Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNGRE) . . . . . 3-100
3.4.9 Change Well Type Class (WLTYCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3.5 Well Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.5.1 Maximum Rate (QMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.5.2 Water Limit - Water Cut, Rate or Liquid-Gas Ratio Constraint
(WLIMIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.5.3 Gas Limit - GOR or Rate Constraint (GLIMIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.5.4 Steam Limit - Steam Rate or Steam-Oil Ratio Constraint
(SLIMIT) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3.5.5 Ecomonic Limit (ECOLIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
R2003.4 - Landmark v
3.5.6 Perforation Test Schedule (TSTPRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109

3.5.7 Perforation Water Cut, GOR, and/or SOR Limits (PRFLIM) . . . 3-110
3.5.8 Minimum Rate (QMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3.5.9 Multiple Rate (QMULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
3.5.10 Injection Gas Composition (YINJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.5.11 Define Additional Injection Gas Composition (YINJA) . . . . . . 3-114
3.5.12 Injection Water Salinity (WSAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
3.5.13 Time Interval Between Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.5.13.1 Global Specification (TEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.5.13.2 Specification by Well (WTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
3.5.14 Fraction of Time That Well is on Stream (ONTIME) . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3.5.15 Maximum Steam Rate for Producers (QSTMX) (VIP-THERM) 3-119
3.5.16 GOR Penalty (GORPEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
3.5.17 Well Permeability-Thickness Multiplier (WKHMULT) . . . . . . 3-120
3.6 Pressure Constraints and Productivity Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
3.6.1 Well Index (WI)(Skip if PI or FLOW orWIL or
KHWI is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
3.6.2 Productivity/Injectivity Index (PI) (Skip if WI or RFLOW
or WIL or KHWI is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.6.3 Radial Flow Equation Data (RFLOW) (Skip if WI or PI or
WIL or KHWI is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
3.6.4 Well Angle Open to Flow (FLOANG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
3.6.5 Well Datum Depth (WLWDAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3.6.6 Bottomhole Pressure (BHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
3.6.7 Tubinghead Pressure (THP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
3.6.8 Implicit Tubinghead Pressure Equations (IMPTHP) . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
3.6.9 Tubinghead Pressure Iteration Control (ITNTHP) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
3.6.10 Maximum Drawdown Constraint (DPBHMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
3.7 Wellbore Crossflow Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
3.7.1 Crossflow Option (XFON/XFOFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
3.7.2 Wellbore Gradient Calculation (MBAWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
3.7.3 Wellbore Gradient Calculation (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
3.8 Wellbore Flash Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3.8.1 THP Convergence Control (BHPITN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3.9 Wellbore Hydraulics Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
3.9.1 Wellbore Hydraulics Table Assignment (ITUBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
3.9.2 Wellbore Hydraulics Table (BHPTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
3.9.3 Wellbore Hydraulics Table Switching (NEWBHPTAB) . . . . . . . 3-144
3.9.4 Wellbore Hydraulics Table for Injectors (BHITAB) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
3.9.5 Additive Correction to BHP Tables (BHPADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
3.9.6 Artificial Lift Quantity (ALQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
3.10 Gas Producers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
3.10.1 Assignment of Gas Producer THP Tables (GTHPWL) . . . . . . . 3-149
3.10.2 Gas Well THP Calculation Data (GASTHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
vi Landmark - R2003.4
3.10.3 Z-factor/Viscosity Tables for Gas Producer THP

(THPGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
3.11 Single Phase Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
3.11.1 Tubing Length Assignment (TUBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
3.11.2 Tubing Diameter/Friction Factor (DIAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
3.11.3 Specify Density and Viscosity Values (WTRTHP) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
3.12 Pattern Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
3.12.1 Pattern Balancing Option (PATTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
3.12.2 Assign Central Injection Wells to a Pattern or Turn Off
Pattern Balancing (PATNCI ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
3.12.3 Assign a Peripheral Production Well and Production
Fractions to Multiple Patterns (PATNPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
3.12.4 Same Perforations in Pattern Gas and Water Injectors
(WAGPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
3.12.5 Voidage Calculation Based on GOR (PTNGOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.12.6 Hydrocarbon Volumes and Angles (ATWGVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.12.7 MI Injection Target and Allocation Parameters (ATWGCL) . . 3-160
3.12.8 Category Definitions and Injection Fractions (ATWGCT) . . . . 3-161
3.13 Non-Darcy Gas Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
3.13.1 Non-Darcy Gas Density and Viscosity Option (WNDGDV) . . 3-162
3.13.2 Specify Rate-Dependent Skin Factors for Non-Darcy Gas Flow
(WDNDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
3.14 Automatic Recompletion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
3.14.1 Recompletion Unit Status and Limit Data (RCMPPERF) . . . . . 3-164
3.14.2 Order for Opening Recompletion Units (RCMPOR) . . . . . . . . . 3-166
3.15 WAG (Water-Alternating-Gas) Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.15.1 WAG Injection Well Definition (WAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.15.2 Maximum Rates for WAG Injectors (QMAXWG) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
3.15.3 Bottomhole Pressure for WAG Injectors (BHPWAG) . . . . . . . . 3-171
3.15.4 Injection Temperature for WAG injectors (TINJWAG,
VIP-THERM Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
3.15.5 Timestep Controls for WAG Injectors (DTWAG) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
3.16 WBSIM (Gridded Wellbore) Well Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
3.16.1 WBSIM Well Perforations (COMPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
3.16.2 Dynamic Vertical Flow Transport Parameters Calculation . . . 3-177
3.17 Automatic Cycle Control (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
3.17.1 Cycle Tables (CYCLETABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
3.17.2 Cyclic Well Definition (CYCLIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
3.17.3 Cycle Phase Perforation Status (CPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
3.17.4 Start Cycle (CSTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
3.17.5 Stop Cycle (CSTOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-187
3.18 Condensate Banking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
3.18.1 Condensate Banking Calculation Parameters (CNDBNK) . . . . 3-188
R2003.4 - Landmark vii

3.18.2 Selective Application of Condensate Banking (CNDBWL) . . . 3-189

3.19 Well Index Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191
3.19.1 Assignment of WI Multiplier Tables (WIMUWL) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191
3.19.2 WI Multiplier Tables (WIMULTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
3.19.3 Outer Iteration Number (ITNWIMULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
Chapter 4
Well Management Level Data
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
4.2 Well Management Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
4.2.1 Well Management Level Definition (GATHER, FLOSTA,
AREA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
4.2.2 Fraction of Time Management Level is Onstream (ONTIME) . . 4-196
4.3 Production and Injection Targeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4.3.1 Production Target (PTARG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4.3.2 Production Target History Option (PTARGH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
4.3.3 Production Target Frequency (PTGFRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-202
4.3.4 Options for Reduction of Rates to Meet Target (TRGOPT) . . . . 4-202
4.3.5 Order for Checking Phase Targets (TRGORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-205
4.3.6 Minimum Rate for Use in Targeting Calculations (TRGQMN) . 4-205
4.3.7 Well Rate Maximum Tolerances (TRGTOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206
4.3.8 Injection Target (ITARG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
4.3.9 Well Rate Scaleback Options with Targeting (LSCALE) . . . . . . . 4-208
4.3.10 Minimum Production Rates (PRDMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
4.3.11 Minimum Injection Rates (INJMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-211
4.4 Gas Cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
4.4.1 Shrinkage Gas Specification (GASSKG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
4.4.2 Fuel Gas Specification (GASFUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214
4.4.3 Sales Gas Specification (GASSLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-216
4.4.4 Makeup Gas Specification (GASMKP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
4.4.5 Makeup MI Specification (MIMKP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-219
4.4.6 Effective Gas Injection Target (ETRGOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220
4.4.7 Makeup Gas Composition (YINJMK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
4.4.8 Reinjected Gas Composition (YREINJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222
4.4.9 Liquid Recovery Factors (RECFAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
4.4.10 Invoke Major Gas Sales Option (PLANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
4.4.11 Gas Conditioning for Sales Gas and Fuel Gas (GASCOND) . . 4-225
4.4.12 Natural Gas Liquid (NGL) Plant Data Input (NGLPLANT) . . 4-226
4.4.13 Miscible Injectant (MI) Plant Data Input (MIPLANT) . . . . . . . . 4-229
4.4.14 Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) Plant Data Input
(LPGPLANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-232
4.4.15 Maximum Feed Rate to NGL Plant (NGLFED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
4.4.16 Maximum NGL Rate (NGLOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-235
4.4.17 Maximum Feed Rate to LPG Plant (LPGFED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
viii Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.18 Maximum LPG Rate (LPGOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237

4.5 Basic Gas Reinjection (GINJOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238
4.6 Injection Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
4.6.1 Define the Injection Region Option (RINJOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
4.6.2 Assign Name to Injection Region (INJRNM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
4.6.3 Maximum Source Water Injection Rate (IRSRCW) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
4.6.4 Assign Injection Wells to Injection Regions (INJRGR) . . . . . . . . 4-242
4.6.5 Distribution Percentage of Injection Rate to Injection Regions
(IRPCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
4.6.6 Assign Gridblocks to Injection Regions (INJREGN) . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
4.6.7 Specify How Distribution of Injection Fluid is to Occur
(IRDIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
4.6.8 Forced Gas Injection Into Injection Regions (IRGAS) . . . . . . . . . 4-247
4.6.9 Select Gas Project Prioritization Option (PRIOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250
4.6.10 Assign Name to Gas Project (PROJNM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250
4.6.11 Assign Gas Injection Wells to Projects (PROJWL) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
4.6.12 Prioritize Gas Projects (PRIIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
4.7 Voidage Injection by Guide Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-252
4.7.1 Maximum Injection Target for a Group (INJTAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-253
4.7.2 Injection Guide Rate for a Group (INJGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-254
4.8 Water Injection Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-255
4.8.1 Assign Injector Pump Characteristics Tables (IPUMP) . . . . . . . . 4-255
4.8.2 Water Injection Pump Discharge Pressure (PMPTAB) . . . . . . . . 4-256
4.8.3 Convergence Criteria (WTRPUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257
4.9 Gaslift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258
4.9.1 Gaslift Allocation (QLIFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258
4.9.2 Gaslift Gas Source (QLIFTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-260
4.9.3 Optimal GLR Tables for Gaslift (GLRTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262
4.9.4 Optimal GLR Table Pointer for Gaslift (GLRTBP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263
4.9.5 Maximum Well Gaslift Gas Rate (GLGMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264
4.9.6 Minimum Well Gaslift Gas Rate (GLGMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265
4.9.7 Additive Correction to GLR Tables (GLRADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266
4.9.8 Time Interval for Gaslift Gas Rate Calculations (TESTGL) . . . . 4-267
4.9.9 Minimum Gaslift Efficiency (GLEFMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267
4.9.10 Performance Curve Option Data (PFMCRV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-268
4.9.11 Gaslift Gas in Gas Handling Loop (GLGOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-270
4.9.12 Makeup Gaslift Gas Specification (QLIFTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-271
4.10 Multi-level Optimization of Gaslift Gas Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
4.10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
4.10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
4.10.3 Gaslift Optimization Outer Iteration Number (ITNGLG) . . . . 4-273
4.11 Automatic Well Workovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-273
4.11.1 Workover Rig Definition (RIGDEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-273
R2003.4 - Landmark ix
4.11.2 Relative Number of Workovers (WRKRTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274

4.11.3 Workover Calculation Frequency (WRKFRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-275
4.11.4 Elapsed Time Between Workovers (WRKDLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-276
4.11.5 Workover Failure Rate (WRKFAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
4.11.6 Well Limit for Automatic Shutoffs (WRKWLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
4.11.7 Workover Benefit Function Limits (WRKLIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-278
4.11.8 Group Numbers for "Group 1" (WRKGP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-281
4.11.9 Group Numbers for "Group 2" (WRKGP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-282
4.11.10 Group 1 Default Coefficients (WRKCF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-284
4.11.11 Group 2 Default Coefficients (WRKCF2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-285
4.11.12 Coefficients for Workover Benefit Functions (WRKCOEF) . . 4-286
4.11.13 Debug Output (WRKDBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-288
4.12 Fluid Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-289
4.12.1 Fluid Tracking Option (TRACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-289
4.12.2 Tracked Fluid Number (YINJT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-290
4.12.3 Activates Tracked Fluid Composition Output (OPRSYS) . . . . 4-290
4.13 Water Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-292
4.13.1 Tracked Water Mixing Parameter (FTWMIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-292
4.13.2 Tracked Water Type Number (WINJT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-292
Chapter 5
Predictive Well Management
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-293
5.2 Keywords Common to NEW PWM and MGOR PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-294
5.2.1 Predictive Well Management (PREDICT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-294
5.2.2 Number of Outer Iterations Each Timestep (WMITN) . . . . . . . . 5-294
5.2.3 Pressure Systems and Lift Methods Available (PWMGC) . . . . . 5-295
5.2.4 Tubinghead Pressure (THP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296
5.2.5 Production Target Data (PTARG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296
5.2.6 Frequency of PWM Calculations (PWMFRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
5.2.7 Bottomhole Pressure Tables (SYSTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
5.2.8 Define Pressure Systems for Wells During History (HISTSYS) . 5-301
5.2.9 Defining Pressure Systems (PRSYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-302
5.2.10 Artificial Lift Method Names (ARTLFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-303
5.2.11 Tolerance for Production Rates (PWMTLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-303
5.2.12 Oil Incremental Benefit with Gaslift (PWMOBN) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305
5.2.13 Maximum PWM Timestep Size (DTPWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-306
5.2.14 Write PWM Report to File (PWMFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-306
5.2.15 Debug Output (PWMDBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-307
5.3 Keywords for NEW PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309
5.3.1 Minimum Oil Rate for Producers (QOMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309
5.3.2 Minimum Gas Rate for Producers (QGMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-310
5.3.3 PWM Calculation Steps (PWMSTEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-312
5.3.4 Producing Area Number (PWMWPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318
x Landmark - R2003.4
5.3.5 Producing Mechanism (PWMWPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-319

5.3.6 Define Well Category (PWMCAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-320
5.3.7 MUSTFLOW Well Specification (MUSTFLOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-321
5.3.8 Minimum Oil Rate for Wells on Gaslift (QOMINL) . . . . . . . . . . 5-322
5.3.9 Execute Normal Targeting Procedure (PWMTRG) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-323
5.3.10 Frequency of Pressure System Switching (PRSDLT) . . . . . . . . . 5-324
5.3.11 Well Rate Control (PWMWCN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-324
5.4 Keywords for MGOR PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325
5.4.1 Separator Battery Numbers (SYSSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325
5.4.2 MGOR Option Data (PRMGOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325
5.4.3 Water-Cut Versus Efficiency Table (EFFTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-326
5.4.4 Specify Wells Included in Well Debug Report (WPWMDB) . . . 5-327
Chapter 6
Output Control
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-329
6.2 Print/Map Arrays and Parameters (OUTPUT, MAPOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-330
6.3 Array Print Windows (OUTWINDOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-340
6.4 Content and Frequency of Printed Output (PRINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-342
6.5 Buildup Pressure Output Control (BUILDUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-348
6.6 Write Files (WPLOT, WMAP, WMAPOLD, WREST, WFLUX, WFILE,
WCPLOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-349
6.7 Save Temporary Restarts (WLASTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-351
6.8 Write Fluid Tracking Data (WTRACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-351
6.9 Print/Map Mole Fractions (OUTX, OUTY, OUTZ, OUTXT, OUTYT,
OUTZT, MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ, MAPXT, MAPYT, MAPZT) . . . . . . . . . 6-353
6.10 Format of Mole Fraction Array Print (ALLCOMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-354
6.11 Tracked Water Type Fractions (OUTWT, MAPWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-354
6.12 Specify Which Separator Batteries to Process (OUTSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-355
6.13 Reservoir Region Separator Battery Assignment (REGSEP) . . . . . . . . . . 6-356
6.14 Compute Potentials for Plot File (PLOTPTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-357
6.15 Printout Processed Well Cards (PRINTOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-357
6.16 Logical Unit for Timestep Summary Output (IPRTSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-358
6.17 Specify Wells Included in Well RFT Report (OUTRFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-358
6.18 Spreadsheet Files (SSSUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-359
6.19 Well Average Pressure Calculation (OUTPAVG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-366
6.20 Print Well Indices (PRWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-367
R2003.4 - Landmark xi
6.21 Print Well Properties Summary (PRWSTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-368

6.22 Track File Format (TFORM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-369
6.23 Boundary Flux File Format (FXFORM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-370
6.24 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-370
6.25 Grouping Wells (WLGRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-371
6.26 Group Specification of Maximum Well Rates (QMAXGR) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-372
6.27 Plot File Well Specification (PLOTLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-372
6.28 Spreadsheet Well Specification (SPRLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-374
6.29 Results File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-375
6.29.1 Plot File Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-375
6.29.2 Compositional Plot File Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-379
6.29.3 Map File Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-382
6.29.4 Hydrocarbon Track File Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-385
Chapter 7
Simulator Control
7.1 Timestep Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-387
7.1.1 Timestep Controls (DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-388
7.1.2 Timestep Size After Rate Changes (DTQMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-390
7.1.3 Outer Iteration Controls (ITNLIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-391
7.1.4 Control Convergence Failures and Timestep Cuts (TCUT) . . . . 7-392
7.1.5 Control Treatment of IMPES Stability (IMPSTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-393
7.1.6 Maximum Variable Change Overshoot (MAXOVR) . . . . . . . . . . 7-394
7.1.7 Convergence Tolerance on Unknowns (TOLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-395
7.1.8 Convergence Tolerance on Residuals (TOLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-396
7.1.9 Saturation Convergence Tolerance for OPTMBL and VOLBAL
(TOLSCN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-398
7.1.10 Well Convergence Tolerance for OPTMBL and VOLBAL
(TOLWCN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-398
7.1.11 Maximum Allowable Material Balance Error (ABORT) . . . . . . 7-398
7.1.12 Minimum BHP Damping Factor (CBHPMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-399
7.1.13 Table Extrapolation Control (CHKTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-399
7.2 Matrix Solution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-401
7.2.1 Gaussian Elimination (GAUSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-402
7.2.2 Iterative Solver (EXCEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-402
7.2.3 Iterative Solver (BLITZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-403
7.2.4 Bad Solution Indicator (SLVCUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-406
7.3 Implicit Well Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-407
7.3.1 Implicit Well Calculations in IMPES Grids (IMPWEL) . . . . . . . . 7-407
7.4 Interactive Suspend Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-408
7.4.1 Interactive Card (INTERACTIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-409
xii Landmark - R2003.4

7.4.2 BATCH Card (BATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-410

7.5 Interactive Recurrent Data Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-411
Chapter 8
Miscellaneous Options
8.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-413
8.1.1 Invoking the Gibbs Algorithm (GIBBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-413
8.1.2 Turning Off the Gibbs Algorithm (GIBOFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-415
8.2 Successive Substitution Flash Data (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-415
8.2.1 Definition of Flash Calculation Method (FLASH) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-415
8.2.2 Control of Flash Calculations (KMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-416
8.3 Gas Percolation Algorithm (GASPERC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-418
8.4 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRMON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-418
8.5 Modified Lands Constant for Hysteresis (MODLAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-420
8.6 Modifying VIP-CORE Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-421
8.6.1 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-421
8.6.2 Override Modification, VIP-DUAL (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-422
8.6.3 Individual Value Override Modification (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-423
8.6.4 Individual Value Override Modification, VIP-DUAL
(VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-425
8.6.5 Modifying Fault Connection Transmissibilities (FTRANS) . . . . 8-425
8.6.6 Modifying Fault Connection Transmissibilities, VIP-DUAL
(FTRANF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-426
8.7 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL) . . . . . . . . . 8-428
8.8 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-428
8.9 Pressure Threshold for Limiting Grid Block to Grid Block Flow
(PTHLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-429
8.10 Phase Identification (PHASID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-431
Chapter 9
Polymer Option (VIP-POLYMER)
9.1 Polymer Physical Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-433
9.1.1 Change Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-433
9.1.2 Polymer Mode (POLYMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-434
9.1.3 Polymer Concentration/Salinity Table (POLYT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-434
9.1.4 Polymer Concentration/Salinity Functions (POLYF) . . . . . . . . . 9-436
9.1.5 Non-Newtonian Viscosity Cards (SHEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-437
9.1.6 Polymer Inaccessible Pore Volume Card (EPHIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-439
9.1.7 Cation Exchange Cards (IONEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-439
9.1.8 Effective Divalent Salinity Cards (CSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440
R2003.4 - Landmark xiii

9.1.9 Salinity Units Card (SUNITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440

9.2 Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-441
9.2.1 Polymer Concentration (CPINJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-441
9.2.2 Anion (Chloride) Concentration (CLINJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-441
9.2.3 Divalent Cation (Calcium) Concentration (CAINJ) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-442
9.2.4 Polymer Slug Definition (PSLUG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-442
9.2.5 Describe Well Perforations (FPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-443
9.3 Instantaneous Gel Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-443
9.3.1 Gel Data (GEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-443
9.3.2 Permeability Reduction Multiplier (RKMULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-444
9.4 Print/Map Arrays and Parameters (OUTPUT, MAPOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-444
9.5 Timestep Controls (DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-446
9.6 Modifying VIP-CORE Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-447
9.6.1 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-447
9.6.2 Individual Value Override Modification (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-447
Chapter 10
Surface Pipeline Network Option
10.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-449
10.2 Flow Modeling in Well Tubing Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-452
10.3 Application of Hydraulic Tables for Modeling Flow in Flow Devices 10-453
10.4 Application of Look-Up Tables for Pressure Gradient Determination
in Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-453
10.5 Profiles of Temperature, Inclination Angle, Valve Coefficient,
Choke Correlation, and PVT Tables (CURVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-454
10.5.1 Temperature Profile (CURVE TEMPPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-454
10.5.2 Temperature Gradient Profile (CURVE TMGRPR) . . . . . . . . . 10-455
10.5.3 Elevation Profile (CURVE ELEVPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-456
10.5.4 Valve Coefficient Profile (CURVE VCPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-457
10.5.5 Choke Correlation (CURVE IDPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-458
10.5.6 PVT Property Table Profile (CURVE IPVTPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-459
10.6 Pipe Data (PIPES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-460
10.7 Tubing Data (TUBING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-464
10.8 Valve Data (VALVES, VALSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-468
10.9 Link Data (LINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-472
10.10 Node Data (NODES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-475
10.10.1 Gas Partial Processing Optimization (PPOPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-479
10.11 Node Connection Data (NODCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-481
xiv Landmark - R2003.4

10.12 Lift Gas Composition (YINJA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-484

10.13 Well Connection Data (WELCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-485
10.14 Satellite Field Production Data (NODSOURCE and SOUCOM) . . . . 10-489
10.15 Pseudo Well Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-491
10.15.1 Inflow Performance Correlations (BHITAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-492
10.15.2 Correlation Assignments (PSEUTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-495
10.15.3 Reservoir Pressure (PSEUPRES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-496
10.15.4 Compositions (PSEUXY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-496
10.15.5 Well Status (PSEUWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-497
10.16 General Parameters of the Surface Pipeline Network System
(NETPAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-499
10.17 Output of Surface Pipeline Network Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-504
10.17.1 Node Report in Print File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-504
10.17.2 Node Spreadsheet File (SSSUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-505
10.17.3 Tubing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-507
10.17.4 Surface Pipeline Network Information in Plot File . . . . . . . . 10-508
10.17.5 Generation of Hydraulic Tables (HTOUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-508
10.18 Production Well Optimization Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-514
10.18.1 Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-514
10.18.2 Objective Coefficients (OBJCOEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-514
10.18.3 Lock Well Rates (LOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-515
10.18.4 Surface Network Optimization Control (NTOPTC) . . . . . . . 10-516
10.18.5 Node Data (NODES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-517
10.18.6 Well Connection Data (WELCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-518
10.18.7 Maximum Velocity Constraints (WLVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-519
10.18.8 Output Well and Node Connection Changes (PRTSWT) . . . 10-520
10.19 Integration of Surface Pipeline Network and Predictive
Well Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-521
10.19.1 Number of Outer Iterations Each Timestep (WMITN) . . . . . 10-521
10.20 Understanding Injection Network Allocations and Node
Pressures in VIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-523
10.20.1 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-524
10.1.0.1 Injection Network with No Group Targeting . . . . . . 10-525
10.1.0.2 Injection Network with Group Targeting Using
ITARG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-526
10.1.0.3 Injection Regions for Group Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-527
10.1.0.4 Injection Regions with Network Node Targets . . . . . 10-528
10.20.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-528
R2003.4 - Landmark xv
Chapter 11
Automatic Tuning Procedures
11.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-529
11.2 Well Index Adjustment Procedure (WIADJ) and Tubing String
Parameter Adjustment Procedure (TBADJ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-529
11.3 Dynamic TUNING Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-536
11.3.1 General Parameters (TUNING, ENDTUNING) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-541
11.3.2 Convergence Tolerances (MAXRER and MAXRNE) . . . . . . . 11-543
11.3.3 Parameter Ranges (TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING,
TWLFL, TSPN, MNPFCF, MNFLCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-544
11.3.4 Activation of Inactive Perforations (MINRER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-547
11.3.5 Field Measurements and Error Function Coefficients
(QMULT, TBHP, TTHP, TPRND, TERC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-549
11.3.6 Adjustment Factors (ADJWI, ADJFPERF, ADJ
TUBING, ADJWLFL, ADJSPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-551
11.3.7 Output of Automatic Tuning Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-553
Chapter 12
Gas Field Operations (GFO) Option
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
12.2 Gas Field Operations Data (GFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
12.3 Annual Scheduling File (ASF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Chapter 13
Local Grid Refinement
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-563
13.2 Formulation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-563
13.2.1 Formulation Specification by Grid (IMPGRID)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-563
13.2.2 Turn Off Pressure Interpolation (NOPINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-564
13.3 Activate/Deactivate Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-565
13.4 Timestep Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-566
13.4.1 Timestep Controls for IMPLICIT Grids (DTMPL)
13.4.2 Iteration Controls for IMPLICIT Grids (ITNMPL)
13.5 Matrix Solution Option (CBLITZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-569
13.5.1 CBLITZ Parameters by Grid (CBLGRID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-571
13.6 Well Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-573
13.6.1 Well Name and Location (WELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-573
xvi Landmark - R2003.4

13.6.2 Describe Well Perforations (FPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-574

13.7 Assign Gridblocks to Injection Regions (INJREGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-575
13.8 Options Restricted to Use with Single-Grid Systems Only . . . . . . . . . . 12-575
13.9 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-575
13.10 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-576
13.11 Value Override (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-576
Chapter 14
Tracer Option
14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-577
14.2 VIP Tracer Option Input Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-577
14.2.1 Change Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-578
14.2.2 Activate Front Tracking Option (FRONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-578
14.2.3 Define Parameters for Tracer Option (TRACER) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-579
14.2.4 Inject Tracer (TRACIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-582
14.2.5 Write Map Records to Database (WTRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-583
14.2.6 Write Plot Records to Database (WTRPLOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-583
14.2.7 Write Records to Tracer File (WTRDBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-584
14.2.8 Write Tracer Summary (PRINT TRACER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-585
Chapter 15
Parallel Computing
15.1 Parallel Grid Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-587
15.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-587
15.1.1 Processor Mapping File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-587
Appendix A
References
Keyword Index
Subject Index
R2003.4 - Landmark xvii

xviii Landmark - R2003.4

Preface
About This Manual
Introduction
VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-
THERM are the simulation modules of the VIP-EXECUTIVE Family of
simulators. The VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, and VIP-
POLYMER modules are all conveniently "packaged" within a single
program library which we call VIP-EXECUTIVE.
Purpose
The primary purpose of this Reference Manual is to document the input
options of the VIP-EXECUTIVE suite of reservoir simulation modules. It is
assumed that the reader is familiar with reservoir engineering concepts, in
general, and reservoir simulation terminology, specifically. This document
is not intended to be a cookbook for the novice simulation user.
The Modules
This manual is intended to be used in conjunction with the VIP-CORE
Reference Manual. VIP-CORE is the module within VIP-EXECUTIVE
which calculates the initial reservoir conditions to be used by one of the
simulation modules.
The VIP-EXECUTIVE reservoir simulator contains the following program

modules:
VIP-ENCORE Multi-Component Black-Oil Model
VIP-COMP Equation-of-State Compositional Model
VIP-DUAL Dual-Porosity Model
VIP-POLYMER Polymer Flooding Model
VIP-THERM Thermal Model
These program modules work together to provide total flexibility in

reservoir modeling. For example, VIP-ENCORE and VIP-DUAL could be
combined to provide simulation capability for a dual-porosity, black-oil
R2003.4 - Landmark xix

reservoir. If VIP-COMP were included in the same program, the user

could convert to a fully compositional version of the dual-porosity model
simply by substituting the compositional specific data for the black-oil
specific data.
The Chapters
The input data stream for the simulation modules consists of keywords
and data values which invoke the features of the simulator. Chapter 1 is an
overview of the data; it also describes data cards which are used
throughout the entire data stream. The subsequent chapters describe the
time-dependent data, which have some order dependencies. (Any
restrictions are described in the appropriate section.
Data Format
The keywords, or alpha labels, used in the data input stream are denoted
in this manual by upper case letters. The names of the variables that are
entered as numbers in the data stream are typed in lower case letters.
Data Options
In all of the data descriptions, parentheses are used to indicate optional
items of data. Parentheses are never included in the actual data stream,
unless specifically noted. Items of data that are aligned vertically in the
description of a single data card indicate a choice. The items are mutually
exclusive.
Compatibility
This documentation is compatible with Version 1998 of the VIP-
EXECUTIVE software. Along with additional enhancements, some of the
formats have been modified. In the case of changed formats, only our new
formats appear.
Units
Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input
and output can be in either customary units or the International System of
Units (SI) metric system or in laboratory units. Throughout this Reference
Manual, units are first listed as the customary units followed by the SI
units in parentheses. The user may choose metric pressure units of kg/
cm2 (bar) instead of the default kPa. In this case, whenever the
documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 (bar) will be expected. A table of data
types and the possible units is given in Section 1.7.
xx Landmark -R2003.4
Related Documentation
The following manuals provide more information related to the material
in this manual. For more information, please consult the appropriate
manual listed below.
VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference. A detailed discussion of the

mathematical theory behind the VIP simulators. [Available only in
hardcopy]
VIP-CORE Reference Manual. A complete summary of all keywords

and data formats needed to build an initial reservoir model.
R2003.4 - Landmark xxi

xxii Landmark -R2003.4

Chapter
1
00000Data Overview
1.1 Introduction
00 VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-
THERM are the simulation modules of the VIP-EXECUTIVE Family of
simulators. The VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER,
and VIP-THERM modules are all conveniently packaged within a single
program library which we call VIP-EXECUTIVE. When VIP-DUAL is
executed, it is used in conjunction with either VIP-COMP or VIP-
ENCORE. For example, VIP-CORE, VIP-ENCORE and VIP-DUAL may be
combined to provide a modeling capability for a fractured black-oil
reservoir. If VIP-COMP replaces VIP-ENCORE, the user could convert to a
fully compositional version of the fractured reservoir model simply by
substituting the compositional specific data for the black-oil specific data.
All of these modules contain one or more of our newest solution
algorithms: EXCEL and BLITZ.
00 Only the particular modules purchased are activated. These are listed on
the first page of computer output in the title box.
00 The documentation for VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-

POLYMER, and VIP-THERM are included in this Reference Manual. The
major features are applicable to all of the modules; therefore, the majority
of the data required for all four of these modules is identical. Where data
differs between VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, and VIP-THERM or additional
data is required for VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, or VIP-THERM, the
model to which the described data applies is enclosed in parentheses after
the section heading.
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

00 VIP-COMP is an n-component, equation-of-state, compositional
simulator. It can simulate the flow of oil, gas, and water through an
underground reservoir and predict the behavior of all associated
production/injection wells. The system takes into account the fact that
fluid properties and phase behavior can vary strongly with fluid
composition. Fluid properties and phase equilibrium are governed by
generalized cubic equation-of-state which includes the Peng-Robinson
(Reference 11) equation and various versions of the Redlich-Kwong
(Reference 12) equation. Both oil and gas are treated as mixtures
containing an arbitrary number of hydrocarbon and nonhydrocarbon
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-1

Data Overview VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
components. In addition, special techniques are implemented in VIP-

COMP to insure stability and efficiency of solution for near-critical oil and
gas fluid systems.
1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

00 VIP-ENCORE is a three-phase reservoir simulator which models the
immiscible flow of oil, gas, and water within the reservoir. VIP-ENCORE
is a special case of the generalized VIP-COMP simulator. Fluid properties
can be described according to the black-oil convention -- oil at reservoir
conditions is a mixture of stock tank oil and dissolved gas. The amount of
gas dissolved in the oil is determined by a bubble-point pressure
relationship. VIP-ENCORE is able to treat water-oil or gas-water two-
phase problems as special cases of the more generalized three-phase fluid
system. In addition, VIP-ENCORE can process multicomponent systems
whose PVT properties are adequately described by pressure-dependent K-
values. Thus, it can be used to model gas condensates and volatile oils
more rigorously than conventional black-oil simulators.
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview
NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.
00 The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

naturally fractured, heterogeneous, or highly stratified. The full dual-
porosity, dual-permeability formulation allows flow in both fractures and
rock matrix, thereby enabling correct and accurate modeling of reservoirs
which may be highly fractured in some regions while unfractured in
others. VIP-DUAL must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE
or VIP-COMP. Within VIP-DUAL, the exchange of fluids between the
fracture and matrix rock is based on the Warren & Root theory, and the
more recent work of Thomas, Dixon, and Pierson. Mass transfer between
matrix rock and fractures includes diffusion, convection, imbibition, and
gravity drainage. Imbibition and gravity drainage effects are modelled
with pseudo-capillary pressure functions that include hysteresis. These
functions are automatically and independently determined for the matrix
and fractures and account for the matrix block and gridblock sizes. Also
available is a dual-porosity/single-permeability option which assumes
that the fractures alone are a continuous media and the matrix rock exists
only as a source or sink for reservoir fluids.
1-2 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Data Overview
1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview
NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.
00 The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

reservoirs. The model takes into account the major physical properties
attributed to the flow of polymer solutions through porous media. These
include a non-Newtonian viscosity. The polymer is represented by a
separate component, present only in the aqueous phase and occupying no
volume. VIP-POLYMER must be used in conjunction with either VIP-
ENCORE or VIP-COMP.
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Option

VIP-THERM is an extension of the fully implicit formulation of VIP-
COMP to include an energy balance, an equilibrium constraint for the
water component, heat loss models, and temperature-dependency of all
important properties. Two phase behavior models are available: 1) the n-
component compositional equation of state model which VIP-THERM
shares with VIP-COMP or 2) the dead oil model in which oil is treated as a
single non-volatile component.
The VIP-THERM compositional model is a fully implicit, n-component,

equation-of-state, thermal simulator. The number of volatile components
may be specified as less than or equal to the total number of components.
Water and steam properties including density, enthalpy, and viscosity are
obtained from a tabular input file which is separate from the file
containing the data described in this manual.
The VIP-THERM dead oil model is a fully implict three-phase reservoir

simulator which models the flow of oil, water, and steam within the
reservoir. This version is a special case of the generalized compositional
version. Oil is represented as a single non-volatile component. Oil
properties are either calculated by interpolation from input tables or are
calculated from input values of oil compressibility, oil coefficient of
thermal expansion, oil heat capacity, and oil viscosity as a function of
temperature. Water and steam properties including density, enthalpy, and
viscosity are obtained from a tabular input file which is separate from the
file containing the data described in this manual.
VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE initialization data may easily be converted to

VIP-THERM format:
1. Specify THERMAL card in VIP-CORE utility data (VIP-CORE Section

2.2.19.1).
2. Specify NCV in the grid system data (VIP-CORE Sections 2.2.3.1 or

2.2.3.2).

3. Replace Physical Property Constants table with VIP-THERM format

(VIP-CORE Section 2.2.4.2).
4. Replace VIP-ENCORE PVT data with either EOS data (VIP -CORE
Section 4.4) or Dead Oil PVT data (VIP-CORE Section 4.7). If PCHOR
was specified in VIP-COMP EOS data, that column must be removed
before the data will be accepted by VIP-THERM.
5. Specify heat capacity arrays in VIP-CORE array data (VIP-CORE

Sections 5.38 and 5.39).
6. Specify heat loss data in VIP-CORE (VIP-CORE Chapter 12).
VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE recurrent data may easily be converted to

VIP-THERM format:
1. Specify TINJ and QUAL for all water injectors (Sections 3.4.2.1 and
3.4.2.2). Also specify PINJ ( Section 3.4.2.3) for all wells for which
steam quality is specified as zero.
2. Specify TINJ for all gas injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.1).
3. Modify DT cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.1), ITNLIM cards (VIP-

EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.3), and TOLD cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE 7.1.7)
to include values for maximum temperature change.
4. Modify TOLR cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.8) to include an

energy balance tolerance.
1.1.6 Shared Features

00 VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM
share all of the same major features. Wells are controlled by a variety of
options which allow both rate and pressure constraints. Wells also can be
shut in or recompleted automatically. Rates can be adjusted to meet
production and injection targets at any of the target levels. These target
levels include gathering center, flow station, area, and field.
00 Separator conditions are also taken into consideration for all of the
simulator modules. In VIP-COMP (or in the VIP-THERM compositional
model), a multi-component model, separators are required to determine
surface production rates. In VIP-ENCORE, separators allow for the
additional flexibility of treating flash separation conditions at the surface
versus the differential calculations which take place in the reservoir.
00 Both VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE allow fully implicit or IMPES

formulations to be selected for the integration of the flow equations. When
the DUAL or the THERMAL option is activated, only the fully implicit
formulation is accepted for the additional required stability.
00 Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input

and output can be in either customary units or the International System of

Units (SI) metric system or in laboratory units. Throughout this Reference
Manual, units are first listed as the customary units followed by the SI
units in parentheses. The user may choose metric pressure units of kg/
cm2 (bar) instead of the default kPa. In this case, whenever the
documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 (bar) will be expected. A table of data
types and the possible units is given in Section 1.7.

1.2 Typical Data Requirements
1.2.1 Well Data

00 The following well data are required:
Well completion and workover or stimulation reports indicating

treatments (i.e., acid, frac, etc.) and completion intervals.
Measured data (i.e., rates, pressure) from any productivity or

injectivity tests.
1.2.2 Production Histories

00 The following production histories are required:
Summary sheets for each well showing monthly volumes of all fluids
produced and the number of days or hours on production in the
month.
Plots of individual well performance (i.e., rate, GOR, WOR) versus

time.
1.2.3 Pressure History

00 The following pressure history is required:
Pressure survey reports for all pressure measurements detailing all

pertinent data (i.e., tool identification, tool calibration, tool range,
reference elevations, tool run depth, datum depth, all measured
pressures) and the results from any pressure analysis work performed
(i.e., Horner buildup, etc.).
Isobaric maps, if available, showing the distribution of pressure in the

reservoir at various times in the reservoirs history.
Plots showing all pressure data as a function of time or cumulative

production.

1.3 Data Deck Layout

00 Time-dependent, or recurrent, data include all data that can be defined or
altered subsequent to initialization. With clearly noted exceptions, any
item of time-dependent data can be changed any time during the
simulation. In addition to the operating characteristics of wells, these data
define simulator controls and the frequency and type of output.
00 Figure 1-1 displays the layout of the recurrent data. The first possible card
in the time-dependent data is the RUN card. It is no longer a required
card.
00 The first required data card is the RESTART card, although other optional
utility data may precede it. The data following the RESTART card are
divided into time groups, each of which is read and processed at a time
selected by the user. Each group is introduced by a card which specifies
when that group is to be processed. The first group is introduced by the
START card (either user-specified or automatically inserted) and is read
immediately. Each of the remaining groups is introduced either by a TIME
card or by a DATE card that tells when the data group should be read.
TIME and DATE cards are used interchangeably and may be mixed in the
same run.
00 All simulations are terminated by a STOP card, which may appear

anywhere in the time-dependent portion of the data deck. Whenever a
STOP card is encountered, no further data processing occurs. The run
stops at the time or date appearing on the preceding TIME or DATE card.
00 An END card must be the last card in the data stream; it acts as an end-of-
file.

00
Figure 1-1: Order of Recurrent Data
00 VIP-EXECUTIVE time-dependent data input allows the user to describe

well data, output control, and simulator control. The well data includes
the definition of all well and well management level parameters. VIP-
EXECUTIVE offers numerous options to define all of the time-dependent
data; however, only a minimum amount of recurrent data is actually
needed to run the simulator. Change need be specified by exception only.
00 The required time-dependent well data is displayed in Table 1-1 and

Table 1-2 . Table 1-1 lists the minimum data requirements for a production
well, while Table 1-2 displays the same information for an injection well.
These tables also show the minimum data requirements to implement
pressure constraints at the well level. VIP-EXECUTIVE offers several
types and levels of production/injection constraints. These are listed in
the Chapter 2 Table of Contents for Section 3.3.
00 A matrix solver option may be specified. At time = 0 either BLITZ or

CBLITZ will be defaulted, depending on the problem type. At time > 0 the
solver information will be retrieved from the restart file. We suggest the
user also enter data for print controls along with the well data that are
appropriate for the particular study.
00 Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 list the VIP-EXECUTIVE data cards that can be
used to control production and injection.

00 Table 1-5 and Table 1-6 list all of the required data cards for any given
option for both production and injection. Within the lists commas indicate
"and" meaning both are required. The "or" indicates any one of the
required cards is necessary, and the user chooses which is appropriate.

00
Table 1-1: Minimum Data Requirements for Production Wells

Rate constraint only:
WELL PROD FPERF QMAX
Bottomhole pressure constraint:
WI
WELL PROD FPERF QMAX PI BHP
RFLOW
Tubinghead pressure constraint:
WI
WELL PROD FPERF QMAX PI THP ITUBE BHPTAB
RFLW
Notes: 1. For the tubinghead pressure constraint, more than one well can refer to the
same BHPTAB.
2. If no productivity is defined by a WI, PI, or RFLOW card, well productivity will

be automatically adjusted to cause the well to flow at the rate specified on the
QMAX card; i.e., defaults to rate constraint. This can slow convergence when-
ever the gridblock pressure, adjusted to datum depth, approaches the bottom-
hole pressure.
1-10 Landmark - R2003.4

00
Table 1-2: Minimum Data Requirements for Injection Wells

Rate constraint only:
WELL INJ FPERF QMAX
Bottomhole pressure constraint only:
WI
WELL INJ FPERF QMAX PI BHP
RFLOW
Tubinghead pressure constraint:
WI
WELL INJ FPERF QMAX PI THP TUBE DIAM
RFLOW ITUBE BHITAB
Gas Injectors only:
YINJ
VIP-THERM only:
TINJ QUAL PINJ

(water/ (if
steam QUAL =
injectors) 0. or 1.)
Note: If no injectivity is defined by a WI, PI, or RFLOW card or by WIL or KHWI data on
the FPERF card, the injectivity will be automatically adjusted to cause the well to
flow at the rate specified on the QMAX card; i.e., defaults to rate constraint. This
can slow convergence whenever the gridblock pressure, adjusted to datum depth,
approaches the bottomhole pressure.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-11

00
Table 1-3: Data Cards Valid For Production

ALQ QLIFTM
AREA QMAX
BEGGS QMIN
BHP QMULT
BHPADD QSTMX (VIP-THERM)
BHPITN RCMPPERF
BHPTAB RCMPOR
DIAM RIGDEF
DPBHMX SEPARATOR
ECOLIM TEST
FLOSTA TESTGL
FPERF THP
FTWMIX THPGTB
GASPLANT TRACK
GASTHP TRGOPT
GATHER TRGORD
GLEFMN TRGQMN
GLGMAX TRGTOL
GLGOP TSFM
GLIMIT TSTPRF
GLRADD TUBE
GLRTAB WDNDG
GLRTBP WELL
GTHPWL WI, PI, RFLOW
IPRTRG WLIMIT
ITNSTP WLTYCH
ITNTHP WNDGDV
ITUBE WRKCF1
LSCALE WRKCF2
MBAWG WRKCOEF
NEWSEP WRKDBG
NOFRICTION WRKDLT
ONTIME WRKFAIL
PFMCRV WRKFRQ
PRDMIN WRKGP1
PRFLIM WRKGP2
PROD WRKLIM
PTARG WRKRTO
QLIFT WRKWLM
QLIFTA XFOFF
XFON
1-12 Landmark - R2003.4

00
Table 1-4: Data Cards Valid For Injection

AREA ONTIME
BEGGS PATNCI
BHITAB PATNPP
BHP PATTN
BHPITN PINJ (VIP-THERM)
DIAM PMPTAB
DPBHMX PRIIR
ECOLIM PRIOP
ETRGOP PROJNM
FLOSTA PROJWL
FPERF QMAX
FTWMIX QMIN
GASFUL QUAL (VIP-THERM)
GASMKP QSTMX (VIP-THERM)
GASSKG RECFAC
GASSLS RINJOP
GATHER SEPARATOR
GINJMOB TEST
GINJOP THP
INJ TINJ (VIP-THERM)
INJA TRACK
INJGR TRGTOL
INJMIN TSFM
INJRGR TUBE
INJREGN WELL
INJRNM WI, PI, RFLOW
INJTAR WINJT
IPRTRG WLTYCH
IPUMP WNDGDV
IRDIST WTRPUMP
IRPCTA WTRTHP
IRSRCW XFOFF
ITARG XFON
ITNSTQ YINJ
ITUBE YINJA
LSCALE YINJMK
MBAWG YINJT
NEWSEP YREINJ
NOFRICTION
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-13

00
Table 1-5: Production Data Card Cross-Reference

DATA CARD REQUIRED DATA CARDS
Required
WELL --
FPERF WELL QMAX
PROD WELL
QMAX PROD, FPERF
Optional
ALQ THP
AREA --
BEGGS FPERF (horizontal well data)
BHP WI or PI or RFLOW
BHPADD BHPTAB
BHPITN GTHPWL,THPGTB, TUBE, DIAM
BHPTAB ITUBE, THP
DIAM THP, GTHPWL, THPGTB, TUBE
DPBHMX WI or PI or RFLOW
ECOLIM --
FLOSTA --
GASTHP GTHPWL, THPGTB, TUBE, DIAM
GATHER --
GLEFMN QLIFT, QLIFTA
GLGMAX QLIFT, QLIFTA
GLIMIT --
GLRADD GLRTAB
GLRTAB QLIFT, QLIFTA
GLRTBP QLIFT, QLIFTA, GLRTAB
GTHPWL THP, THPGTB, TUBE, DIAM
IPRTRG PTARG
ITNTHP THP
ITUBE THP, BHPTAB
MBAWG --
LSCALE --
NEWSEP SEPARATOR
NOFRICTION FPERF (horizontal well data)
ONTIME --
PFMCRV QLIFT, QLIFTA
PI BHP or THP
1-14 Landmark - R2003.4

Table 1-5: Production Data Card Cross-Reference (Continued)

PRDMIN --
PRFLIM TSTPRF
PTARG --
QLIFT THP
QLIFTA QLIFT, GLRTAB
QMIN
QSTMX
RFLOW BHP or THP
SEPARATOR --
TEST --
TESTGL QLIFT, QLIFTA
THP ITUBE or TUBE, BHPTAB, WI or PI or RFLOW
THPGTB THP, GTHPWL, TUBE, DIAM
TRGTOL PTARG
TSTPRF PRFLIM
TUBE THP, GTHPWL, THPGTB, DIAM
WI BHP or THP
WLIMIT --
WLTYCH --
XFOFF --
XFON --
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-15

00
Table 1-6: Injection Data Card Cross-Reference

Required
WELL --
FPERF WELL, QMAX
INJ WELL
QMAX INJ, FPERF
TINJ WELL, INJ (VIP-THERM only)
QUAL WELL, INJ (VIP-THERM water/steam
injectors only)
PINJ WELL, INJ (VIP-THERM water/steam
injectors with QUAL = 0. or 1. only)
Optional
AREA --
BEGGS FPERF (horizontal well data)
BHITAB ITUBE, THP
BHP WI or PI or RFLOW
BHPITN THP
DIAM THP, TUBE
DPBHMX WI or PI or RFLOW
ECOLIM --
FLOSTA --
GASFUL INJ (reinjection)
GASMKP INJ (reinjection), YINJMK
GASSKG INJ (reinjection)
GASSLS INJ (reinjection)
GATHER --
GINJMOB --
GINJOP INJ (reinjection)
INJMIN --
INJREGN RINJOP (INJREG)
INJRGR RINJOP (INJREG)
INJRNM RINJOP (INJREG)
IPRTRG ITARG
IPUMP THP, PMPTAB
IRDIST RINJOP (INJREG)
IRPCTA RINJOP (INJREG)
IRSRCW RINJOP (INJREG)
ITARG --
ITNSTQ --
ITUBE THP, BHITAB
LSCALE --
MBAWG --
NEWSEP SEPARATOR
1-16 Landmark - R2003.4

Table 1-6: Injection Data Card Cross-Reference (Continued)

NOFRICTION FPERF (horizontal well data)
ONTIME --
PI BHP or THP
PMPTAB THP, IPUMP
QMIN ECOLIM
RECFAC INJ (reinjection)
RFLOW BHP or THP
RINJOP INJ (reinjection)
SEPARATOR --
TEST --
THP TUBE, DIAM, WI or PI or RFLOW
TRGTOL ITARG
TUBE THP, DIAM
WI BHP or THP
WLTYCH --
WTRPUMP IPUMP, PMPTAB
WTRTHP THP
XFOFF --
XFON --
YINJ INJ
YINJMK INJ (reinjection), GASMKP
YREINJ INJ (reinjection)
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-17

1.4 Input Data Template

00 The printout that follows lists the most frequently used simulator data
input options.
C
******************************************************************
C TIME DEPENDENT DATA CHAPTER 2
C
******************************************************************
C
DIM PARAMETERS SECTION 2.2.3
C
C NOTE:THE DIM CARD IS ONLY USED TO MODIFY THE DEFAULT PROGRAM
C DIMENSIONS.
C
IMPLICIT SECTION 2.3.1
C
C NOTE:IF THE IMPLICIT CARD IS NOT ENTERED IN AN ISOTHERMAL RUN
STARTING FROM INITIAL CONDITIONS, THE DEFAULT IS IMPES.
C
RESTART (STARTING T.S.) SECTION 2.5.1
C
C NOTE:THE RESTART CARD IS ALWAYS REQUIRED. THE DEFAULT TIMESTEP
C NUMBER IS ZERO.
C
TITLE1
VIP-EXECUTIVE BATCH DATA INPUT TEMPLATE
TITLE2
THIS LIST INCLUDES ONLY THE MOST FREQUENTLY USED OPTIONS
C
C NOTE: IF TITLE CARDS ARE NOT ENTERED, THE TITLE CONTAINED ON
C THE RESTART RECORD WILL BE RETAINED.
C
START
C
C NOTE:THE START CARD INDICATES THE BEGINNING OF THE DATA TO
C BE INCLUDED IN THIS RUN. IT MAY BE MOVED DOWN IN THE
C DATA DECK AS APPROPRIATE FOR STARTING NEW RESTART RUNS.
C
OUTPUT OPTION LIST SECTION 6.2
PRINT OPTION LIST I/O FREQ SECTION 6.3
C
C NOTE:THE PRECEDING TWO CARDS ARE REQUIRED TO GENERATE ARRAYS,
C ITERATION SUMMARIES, WELL AND WELL MANAGEMENT LEVEL
C SUMMARIES, REGION SUMMARIES, SEPARATOR SUMMARIES, AND
C SIMULATION STATISTICS; IF THEY ARE OMITTED ONLY TIMESTEP
C SUMMARIES AND END-OF-JOB SIMULATION STATISTICS WILL BE
C PRINTED.
C++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C MATRIX SOLUTION OPTIONS SECTION 7.2
C+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
[METHOD] (PARAMETERS) SECTION 7.2
C
C NOTE:THE MATRIX SOLUTION METHOD MAY BE DEFAULTED.
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C TIMESTEP CONTROL SECTION 7.1
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
DT DT DTMIN DTMAX (DTMPMX) DPMAX DSMAX DVMAX DZMAXSECTION 7.1.1
C
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C WELL DATA CHAPTER 3
C-----------------------------------------------------------------C
1-18 Landmark - R2003.4

SECTION 3.2.1
WELL N (NAME) I J (IGC) (IBAT)
WELL NO. NAME I LOC. J LOC. G.C.NO. BAT.NO.
C REPEAT THE DATA CARD AS NECESSARY
C
PROD FLUID (UNIT) WELL LIST SECTION 3.4.1
INJ FLUID (UNIT) (LEVEL) WELL LIST SECTION 3.4.2
C
C NOTE:PROD AND/OR INJ CARDS ARE REQUIRED FOR EACH WELL IN THE
C RESERVOIR MODEL
C
FPERF SECTION 3.2.2
WELL L KH
W1 L1 KH1
X L2 KH2
FPERF SECTION 3.2.2
WELL L KH SWMN SWRO
W2 L1 KH1 SWMN1 SWRO1
X L2 KH2 SWMN2 SWRO2
X L3 KH3 SWMN3 SWRO3
C
C NOTE:EACH WELL MUST BE INCLUDED IN A SET OF FPERF DATA
C
QMAX WELL LIST SECTION 3.5.1
C
BHP WELL LIST SECTION 3.6.4
BHP1 BHP2 . . . BHPN
WDAT1 WDAT2 . . . WDATN
THP WELL LIST SECTION 3.6.5
THP1 THP2 . . . THPN
C
C NOTE:A BHP OR THP VALUE MAY BE SPECIFIED FOR EACH WELL.
C
WI WELL LIST SECTION 3.6.1
WI1 WI2 . . . WIN
PI WELL LIST SECTION 3.6.2
GF1 GF2 . . . GFN
PI1 PI2 . . . PIN
RFLOW WELL LIST SECTION 3.6.3
RW1 RW2 . . . RWN
RB1 RB2 . . . RBN
SKIN1 SKIN2 . . . SKINN
C
C NOTE:A WI, PI, OR RFLOW VALUE IS REQUIRED IF THP OR BHP IS
C DEFINED.
C
TUBE WELL LIST SECTION 3.11.1
TL1 TL2 . . . TLN
DZW1 DZW2 . . . DZWN
DIAM WELL LIST SECTION 3.11.2
DIAM1 DIAM2 . . . DIAMN
EPS1 EPS2 . . . EPSN
C
C NOTE:TUBE AND DIAM VALUES ARE REQUIRED ONLY IF THP IS SPECIFIED
C FOR AN INJECTOR.
C
ITUBE WELL LIST SECTION 3.9.1
IBHP1 IBHP2 . . . IBHPN
DZW1 DZW2 . . . DZWN
BHPTAB - BHP TABLE SECTION 3.9.2
C
C NOTE:ITUBE AND BHPTAB DATA ARE REQUIRED ONLY IF THP IS
C SPECIFIED FOR A PRODUCER
C
C----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER PHYSICAL PROPERTY DATA SECTION 9.1.2
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
POLYMER
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER CONCENTRATION TABLE SECTION 9.1.3
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-19

C-----------------------------------------------------------------
POLYT
ESALT PERM POR
C THE ABOVE CARD IS FOLLOWED BY 1 DATA CARD
CP VP0 CPADS RK
POLYMER VISCOSITY AT POLYMER PERMEABILITY
CONCENTRATION ZERO SHEAR RATE ADSORPTION REDUCTION FACTOR
C THE PREVIOUS 2 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY AT LEAST 2 DATA CARDS
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER NON-NEWTONIAN VISCOSITY PARAMETERSSECTION 9.1.5
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
SHEAR NSH
GAMMAC GAMHF POWN
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER INACCESSIBLE PORE VOLUME SECTION 9.1.6
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
EPHIP NEP EPHIP
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C CATION EXCHANGE PARAMETERS SECTION 9.1.7
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
IONEX NEX
QV XKC
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C EFFECTIVE SALINITY PARAMETERS SECTION 9.1.8
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
CSEP
BETAP CSE1
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C SALINITY UNITS SECTION 9.1.9
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
SUNITS UNITS
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C INITIAL ION CONCENTRATIONS SECTION 9.5.1
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
OVER CLW
C OVER OR VOVER CARDS ARE USED TO INITIALIZE THE ANION
C CONCENTRATIONS
C
OVER CAW
C OVER OR VOVER CARDS ARE USED TO INITIALIZE THE CATION
C CONCENTRATIONS
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER PROPERTIES REGION NUMBER SECTION 9.5.1
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
OVER IPOLYT
C OVER OR VOVER CARDS ARE USED TO INITIALIZE THE IPOLYT ARRAY
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C POLYMER INJECTION CONCENTRATION SECTION 9.2.1
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
CPINJ WELL LIST
CPW1 CPW2 . . . CPWN
1-20 Landmark - R2003.4

C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C ANION INJECTION CONCENTRATION SECTION 9.2.2
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
CLINJ WELL LIST
CLW1 CLW2 . . . CLWN
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C DIVALENT CATION INJECTION CONCENTRATION SECTION 9.2.3
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C
CAINJ WELL LIST
CAW1 CAW2 . . . CAWN
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
C TIME CARDS SECTION 1.3.6 - 2.1.39
C-----------------------------------------------------------------
TIME (DATE)
STOP
END
C
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-21

1.5 Data Format

00 Nearly all data are input in "free field" format. This means it is not
necessary to enter numbers in specific columns. Each item of data, or
"word", must be separated by either one or more blank columns or by a
comma. Unless explicitly stated, all data need not appear on a single card -
the continuation character > is used to extend data onto the next card.
00 If more than one set of the same data type is read for the same well, the
last set of data encountered is used. For example, if two sets of FPERF
cards are read for Well 3, the second set of FPERF data will be used.
00 Data appearing on the card or cards following a well list have a one-to-one
correspondence with the wells in the list.
00 The data stream includes both numbers and alpha keywords; the latter are
used to identify subsequent numbers or select program options. Generally,
each new type of data is introduced by an alpha keyword. Secondary
keyword items in [ ] are required mutually exclusive while those in ( )
are optional. The brackets and parentheses should not be input with the
data (unless noted); they simple help describe data input options. In the
data descriptions that follow, keywords are shown in upper case letters
(they can be input in upper or lower case). The names of the variables that
are entered as numbers are shown in lower case letters. For example, one
of the data cards indicates the time in days when simulated operating
conditions are to be changed. In the data description, this is written as:
TIME time
00 This indicates that the data card must contain the alpha label TIME
followed by a number that indicates the time in days. An example of a
valid data card follows:
00 TIME 365
00 This information could be anywhere on the card so long as nothing else

appears in the columns being scanned and there is at least one blank
between TIME and 365.
00 Numbers can be represented in any of the conventional FORTRAN

formats. Note the following valid representations of the number 1000:
00 1000 1000. 1.E3 1E3 0.1E+4 10000E-01
00 None of the various forms may contain an imbedded blank, since the
simulator interprets them as two words rather than one. There is no
distinction between integer and floating point representations of numbers.
1-22 Landmark - R2003.4

(All numbers are decoded as if they were floating point, then are stored as
either integer or floating point variables, depending on use.)
00 Repeated values can be written in shorthand notation to reduce data

preparation effort. For example, consider two equivalent ways of
specifying the following data card:
00 Method 1: 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 15. 15. 16.5
00 Method 2: 10 3*12.5 2*15 16.5
00 The single "word" 3*12.5 is decoded as 12.5 12.5 12.5 and 2*15 becomes 15
15. On the other hand, 3* 12.5 could not be decoded properly because of
the blank between * and 12.5. In this case, the simulator issues an error
message. If an error occurs in the time-dependent data, the run stops
before the first timestep is taken.
00 The number of data values on a line is restricted to 20,000. This applies to

decoded repeated values, so that 1500*3 becomes 1,500 data values.
00 Any word beginning with a number (or a decimal point) must be a valid
numeric form, or it causes the run to terminate before the first timestep.
Any word beginning with a character other than a number (or a decimal
point) is treated as alpha data. A # sign before a number causes the
number to be interpreted as an alpha string.
00 Any word beginning with an exclamation point (!) indicates the beginning
of inline comments. All text after the exclamation point is ignored by the
simulator.
1.5.1 General Utility Data
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C)
C comment
00 Makes a comment of the field which follows. The alpha label C must be
the first word on the card and must be followed by a blank.
00 See also the use of the inline comment character !, which is discussed in
the introduction to this section.
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE)
INCLUDE file-name
Definition: 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-23

file-name The pathname to the file from which data should be

read.
00 When the INCLUDE card is encountered in the input file, the named file is
opened and it becomes the current input file. A fatal error occurs if the file
cannot be opened. Reading from the include file stops when either a
physical end-of-file is encountered or an ENDINC card is encountered.
Reading then continues from the previous input file. Include files can be
nested (i.e. contain other INCLUDE cards). However, the nesting level
cannot exceed nine.
1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File (ENDINC)
ENDINC
00 The ENDINC card indicates the end of data for the current include file.
When the ENDINC card is encountered on an INCLUDE file, the file is
closed and data continues to be read from the previous input file. If
INCLUDE files are nested then the nesting level is decreased by one. The
ENDINC card is optional in that a physical end-of-file also indicates end
of data. A warning message is given when an ENDINC card is
encountered on the primary input file.
Examples: ENDINC
1.5.1.4 Echo Print On (LIST)
LIST
00 LIST and NOLIST cards control printing of card images of the data read.
Until a NOLIST Card is entered, LIST is assumed.
Examples: LIST
1.5.1.5 Echo Print Off (NOLIST)
NOLIST
00 If NOLIST is read, printing of card images is suppressed until a LIST card

is read.
Examples: NOLIST
1-24 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.1.6 Skip Data On (SKIP)
SKIP
00 A SKIP card indicates that all subsequent data is ignored until a NOSKIP
card is encountered; i.e. it is as if all the cards were comment lines. The
card images are not printed.
Examples: SKIP
.
.
.
NOSKIP
1.5.1.7 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP)
NOSKIP
00 A NOSKIP card ends the skip data option.
1.5.1.8 Columns To Be Read (NCOL)
NCOL ncol
Definition: 00
ncol Number of columns to be scanned for data; value

must be between 30 and 1000, inclusive. Default is
1000.
00 Only the columns 1 to ncol will be processed. Items beyond column ncol
will be ignored (e.g. comments).
Examples: In order to limit processing to the first 45 columns:

NCOL 45
1.5.1.9 Data Line Continuation
Data required to be entered in a single record may be input on multiple

lines by entering a greater than (>) character at the end of each data line
to be continued.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-25

1.5.2 Well Lists

00 Several types of data apply to wells. When well data are defined, the alpha
label card identifying the type of data also includes a list of wells for
which data are being entered. A typical list of well numbers may appear
as a well list of:
00 1 2 3 7 10 25 15 16 17 18 19
00 Alternatively, this could be represented as:
00 1 -3 7 10 25 15 -19
00 In this example, 1 -3 means wells 1 through 3. It is mandatory that at least

one blank appear between 1 and -3. Furthermore, a blank may not appear
between - and 3. The well numbers in a well list do not have to appear in
sequential order.
00 Data appearing on the card or cards following a well list have a one-to-one
correspondence with the wells in the list. For example,
00 QMAX 1 -4 12 10
1250 1000 1725 2*800 950
00 is interpreted as follows:
Well QMAX
00 1 1250
2 1000
3 1725
4 800
12 800
10 950
1.5.3 Alternative Well Lists

00 Wells can also be referred to by their alphanumeric names. However, the
well names need to have been defined by the WELL CARD. A typical list
of well names may appear as a well list of:
00 A1 A2 AAA INJEC1 #12345678
00 Well names beginning with ., +, -, / or a numeral need to be preceded by

the # character so as to interpret the string as an alphanumeric. Only the
first eight (8) characters of any character string are used for well names.
00 A group of wells sharing the same root can be selected by use of an

identification of the form "root*". For this reason the character * cannot be
used as part of a well name.
1-26 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Data appearing on the card or cards following a well list have a one to one
correspondence with the wells or group of wells in the list. For example,
suppose wells A1, A2, AAA and INJEC1 are defined. Then:
00 QMAX A* INJEC1
1000. 2000.
00 is interpreted as follows:
00 Well QMAX
00 A1 1000.
A2 1000.
AAA 1000.
INJEC1 2000.
1.6 Files Used by VIP-EXECUTIVE

00 It is possible to write enough information onto disk to allow a subsequent
run to pick up where the first one left off. The information saved this way
is called a "restart record".
00 VIP-CORE automatically writes a restart record upon completion of the

initialization process. The simulation modules also have the ability to
write restart records. These subsequent restart records are written as the
user directs by means of WREST and/or WLASTR data cards (see Section
6.7). A subsequent run that continues a previous run is a "restart run".
00 To begin a simulation at time zero, the restart file generated by VIP-CORE

is attached. To simulate from a time greater than zero, a restart file created
by a previous simulation run is attached.
00 Along with the standard restart records, VIP-EXECUTIVE simulation

modules can write periodic summary records for subsequent processing
by ancillary programs. All of the records written can be generated at user-
specified time intervals as directed by means of specific data cards. The
currently available menu of these data cards, the summary records they
control, and the FORTRAN units on which the information is stored
include:
PRINT Printer Output (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 6.
WPLOT Production/Injection Data, summarized by well,

well management levels, region, and field (Chapter
6), FORTRAN Unit 11 or the vdb file.
WCPLOT Production/Injection Compositional Data,

summarized by well, well management levels,
region, and field (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 26 or
the vdb file.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-27

WMAP Grid Array Maps (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 27 or

the vdb file.
WMAPOLD Grid Array SIMOUT Maps (Chapter 6), FORTRAN

Unit 9.
WREST/ Restart Records (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 2.

WLASTR
WFLUX Boundary flux data (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 16.

FORTRAN Unit 61 is used instead if the model is
being executed as both a fine grid and a course grid.
WFILE Special well file (Chapter 6), FORTRAN Unit 71.
WTRACK Tracking option output (Chapter 6), FORTRAN

Unit 17.
00 To save any or all of these records for subsequent post-processing,

appropriate commands must be added to the job control stream for
permanent storage of the appropriate FORTRAN units.
1-28 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Simulator I/O is illustrated schematically in Figure 1-2 below along with

the appropriate FORTRAN (FT) Unit numbers.
00RESTART FILE: FT02
00PRINTER FILE: FT06
00SIMOUT MAP FILE: FT09
00PLOT DATA FILE: FT11
00WELL LAYER SUMMARY:
FT13
00TARGETING MESSAGE FILE:
INPUT
FT14
DECK:
FT05 00TIMESTEP INFORMATION
VIP-EXECUTIVE FILE: FT15
SIMULATION 00OUTPUT BOUNDARY FLUX
MODULE (IF NOT ALSO INPUT): FT16
RESTART
FILE: 00TRACKING OUTPUT: FT17
FT03
00RFT REPORT: FT18
00COMPOSITIONAL PLOT
DATA FILE: FT26
FINE GRID
BOUNDARY 00MAP FILE: FT27
FLUX
FT16 00BUILDUP PRESSURE DEBUG:
FT29
00STONE PSEUDOS FILE: FT31
SCRATCH FILES:
FT01 (Formatted) 00TRACK FILE: FT37
FT08 (Formatted)
FT04 (Unformatted) 00TRACER OUTPUT FILE: FT38
FT21, FT23 00WELL PROD/INJ HISTORY
FILE: FT40
00FLUX DEBUG: FT55
00FACILITY UTILIZATION
SUMMARY: FT57
00OUTPUT BOUNDARY FLUX
(IF ALSO INPUT USED): FT61
00EXPERT RUN STATISTICS
FILE: FT69
00WELL REPORT FILE: FT71
00SPREADSHEET SUMMARY
FILES: FT72 - FT77
00INPUT DATA INCLUDE
OPTION: FT91-FT99
00TIMESTEP SUMMARY FILE:
USER-CONTROLLED
Figure 1-2: Simulation I/O Files
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-29

1.7 Units Conventions

Three unit conventions are available in VIP-EXECUTIVE. The default unit
system is FIELD (also known as customary, or English units). The others
are METRIC and LAB, which can be selected by placing a METRIC or LAB
card in the UTILITY section of the VIP-CORE input file. The METRIC
option also can specify pressure as kPa (default), kg/cm2, or bar units.
All references to kPa in the METRIC column of the table below can be
replaced by kg/cm2 or bar depending on the pressure option selected.
Data Type Field Metric Lab
Angle degrees degrees degrees
Area acres m2 cm2
Compressibility 1/psi 1/kPa 1/psi
Density (water) gm/cc gm/cc gm/cc
Density (oil) gm/cc or gm/cc or gm/cc or

degree API degree API degree API
Formation volume rb/STB m3/STM3 cc/stcc

factor (oil)
Formation volume rb/MSCF m3/SM3 cc/scc or

factor (gas) or Z-factor or Z-factor z-factor
Gas gravity relative to air at relative to air at relative to air at

std. cond. std. cond. std. cond.
Gas-liquid ratio SCF/STB SM3/STM3 scc/stcc
Length feet meters cm
Moles lb-moles lb-moles gm-moles
Permeability md md md
Pressure psia kPa psia
Rates 1/day 1/day 1/day
Saturation fraction fraction fraction
Standard pressure 14.65 psia 101.325 kPa or 14.65 psia

(default) 1.03353 kg/cm2
Standard tempera- 60 F 15 C 15 C
ture (default)
Solution gas-oil ratio SCF/STB SM3/STM3 scc/stcc
1-30 Landmark - R2003.4

Data Type Field Metric Lab
Temperature degrees F degrees C degrees C
Time days days hours
Transmissibility rb-cp/day/psi m3-cp/day/kPa cc-cp/day/psi
Viscosity cp cp cp
Volume (surface liq- STB STM3 stcc

uid)
Volume (reservoir) rb m3 cc
Volume (surface gas) MSCF SM3 scc
Water-cut fraction fraction fraction
Thermal conductivity Btu/day/ft/ F W/M/ C Btu/day/ft/ F
Thermal trasmissibil- Btu/day/ F W/ C Btu/day/ F

ity
Enthalpy Btu/Lb mole kJ/kg mole Btu/Lb mole
Rock heat capacity Btu/ft3/ F kJ/m3/ C Btu/ft3/ F
Fluid heat capacity Btu/Lb/ F kJ/kg/ C Btu/Lb/ F
00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-31

1-32 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
2
000000Utility Data
2.1 Introduction
00 The following cards can be used to control the program. Of these, the
RESTART and END cards are required. The other cards should be used
when appropriate. The only order-dependencies involve the RUN,
STORAGE, and DIM cards. The other utility data cards may be in any
order, but must precede any recurrent data.
2.2 Control
2.2.1 Start of Time-Dependent Data (RUN)
RUN
00 The RUN card is an optional card signifying the beginning of the

simulation data deck. If entered it should be the first card. It should not be
entered along with a STORAGE card.
00 Example:
00 RUN
DIM NBHPMX NBHPQ NPRFMX NPRFTOT NWMAX
5 5 1 50 5
IMPLICIT
RESTART 0
TITLE2
L4VIPR.DAT RESULTS
START
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-33

Utility Data VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
2.2.2 Calculate Memory Requirement (STORAGE)

00 If entered the STORAGE card must be the first card in the deck.
STORAGE CORERST
00 The STORAGE card allows the user to calculate memory requirements for
various combinations of grid size, options, formulation and solver. Model
description is read from the initialization restart. Recurrent data which
affect memory requirements (such as solver and formulation) are obtained
from the data set.
2.2.3 Change Default Dimensions (DIM)

00 If entered the DIM card(s) must immediately follow the RUN/
STORAGE card, or be the first card(s) in the deck.
00 The DIM card allows the user to change the default dimensions on any
run starting from initial conditions (time zero) and to increase the
dimensions passed on a restart. Multiple sets of DIM cards may be
entered, one after the other, or the continuation character > may be used.
00 If a dimension is not changed on a restart run, the value used will be the
one read from the restart file. The defaults noted below only apply until
they are initially overwritten by a DIM card.
DIM param1 param2 . . . paramn (card 1)

size1 size2 . . . sizen (card 2)
00 Definitions:
param Alpha labels of those dimension parameters being

defined.
NAMAX Amount of workspace available for matrix solution

methods. Default is to use internally calculated
value.
NAREAX Maximum number of areas (well management

hierarchy) to be defined in this run. Default is 5.
NBATMX Maximum number of separator batteries to be

defined in this run. Default is 5.
NBHIMX Maximum number of bottomhole pressure tables

for injectors to be defined in this run. Default is 3.
2-34 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Utility Data
NBHIQ Maximum number of rate or tubinghead pressure

values in any of the bottomhole pressure tables for
injectors to be defined in this run. Default is 5.
NBHIV Maximum number of bottomhole pressure values

in any of the bottomhole pressure tables for
injectors to be defined in this run. Default is 50.
NBHPMX Maximum number of bottomhole pressure tables

for producers to be defined in this run. Default is 3.
NBHPQ Maximum number of rate, ratio, water-cut or

tubinghead pressure values in any of the
bottomhole pressure tables for producers to be
NBHPV Maximum number of bottomhole pressure values

in any of the bottomhole pressure tables for
producers to be defined in this run. Default is 300.
NCPLMX Maximum number of gasplant interpolation values

to be defined in this run. Default is 5.
NCYCTM Maximum cycle table number to be defined in this

run. Default is 10.
NCYCMX Maximum number of cycle entries in any cyclic

table (CYCLETABLE or CPERF). Default is 1. If it is
desired to vary constraints by cycle, this dimension
must be increased to the maximum number of cycle
specifications in all input CYCLETABLE and
CPERF data.
NDRMX Maximum number of automatic drilling regions to

be defined in this run. Default is 10.
NFSMAX Maximum number of flow stations to be defined in

this run. Default is 5.
NGCMAX Maximum number of gathering centers to be

NGLRMX Maximum number of optimal GLR tables (gas lift)

to be defined in this run. Default is 1.
NGLRQ Maximum number of rate or water-cut values in

any of the optimal GLR tables (gas lift) to be defined
in this run. Default is 5.
NGLRV Maximum number of gas-liquid (or gas-oil) ratio

values in any of the optimal GLR tables (gas lift) to
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-35

NIADD Amount of workspace to be added to the internally

calculated length of the integer work array for the
BLITZ matrix solution method. Default is 0.
NIRMX Maximum number of injection regions to be defined

NPMPMX Maximum number of water pump tubinghead

pressure tables to be defined in this run. Default is
0.
NPMPV Maximum number of rate/tubinghead pressure

values in any of the water pump tubinghead
pressure tables to be defined in this run. Default is
1.
NPRFMS Maximum number of real and pseudo perforated

intervals (implicit well option) contained in any
well to be defined in this run. (See Section 7.3.1.)
Default is 7 * NPRFMX.
NPRFSOL Maximum numbr of real and pseuso perforations

(implicit well option) for all wells to be defined in
this run. (See Section 7.3.1.) Default is 7 * NPRFTOT.
NPRFMX Maximum number of perforated intervals

contained in any well to be defined in this run.
Default is 5.
NPRFTOT Maximum number of perforations for all wells to be

NPRIMX Maximum number of priorities in the gas project

prioritization option to be defined in this run.
Default is 1.
NPROMX Maximum number of projects in the gas project

prioritization option to be defined in this run.
Default is 1.
NPRSYS Number of pressure systems to be defined in this

run. Default is 2. This parameter can be specified on
the DIM card for the predictive well management
calculations.
NPTNMX Maximum number of patterns for the pattern

balancing option to be defined in this run. Default is
0.
NPWMAL Number of artificial lift methods in any pressure

system to be defined in this run. Default is 1.
2-36 Landmark - R2003.4

Currently this number may not be larger than 1.

This parameter can be specified on the DIM card for
the predictive well management calculations.
NPWMPA Maximum number of producing areas to be defined

in this run. Default is 20. This parameter can be
specified on the DIM card for the predictive well
management calculations.
NPWMPM Maximum number of producing mechanisms to be

defined in the run. Default is 20. This parameter can
be specified on the DIM card for the predictive well
management calculations.
NPWMPS Maximum number of passes in any PWM step to be

defined in this run. Default is 10. This parameter
can be specified on the DIM card for the predictive
well management calculations.
NRCMUN Maximum number of recompletion units per well to

NRIGMX Maximum number of rigs at any well management

level to be defined in this run. Default is 10. This
parameter can be specified on the DIM card for the
automatic workover calculations.
NRIGTOT Maximum number of workover rigs to be defined

in this run. Default is 0. This parameter can be
specified on the DIM card for the automatic
workover calculations.
NSTGMX Maximum number of stages to be defined for any

separator battery in this run. Default is 5.
NTHGMX Maximum number of z-factor/viscosity tables for

gas producer tubinghead pressure option to be
NTHPGQ Maximum number of pressure or temperature

values in any of the gas producer THP tables to be
NTHPGV Maximum number of z-factor/viscosity values in

any of the gas producer THP tables to be defined in
this run. Default is 50.
NWIMMX Maximum number of well index multiplier tables to

R2003.4 - Landmark 2-37

NWIMV Maximum number of entries in any well index

multiplier table to be defined in this run. Default is
1.
NWMAX Maximum well number to be defined in this run.

Default is 10.
NWRKG1 Maximum number of groupings for group 1 to be

can be specified on the DIM card for the automatic
NWRKG2 Maximum number of groupings for group 2 to be

can be specified on the DIM card for the automatic
NXFWEL Maximum number of crossflow wells to be defined

size The value or size of the corresponding parameter.
00 Examples:
00 DIM NPRFTOT NWMAX NGCMAX NBHPMX

660 660 9 10
RESTART 0
2-38 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.4 Material Balance Option (OPTMBL) (Not available in VIP-THERM)
OPTMBL (STBCHK) (PJACO) (DAMP)
00 The OPTMBL option is derived from an updating procedure for solution

unknowns that satisfies the material balance for hydrocarbons and water
during each outer iteration. Also, the convergence of the outer iteration is
controlled by the residuals in the saturation constraint equation and the
well constraint equation. The convergence tolerances may be specified
through the TOLSCN and TOLWCN cards, respectively. The use of this
option will reduce the number of outer iterations and hence the CPU time.
This option is only applicable to the IMPES formulation. OPTMBL only
functions for the run in which it is specified, i.e., it is not passed on restarts
and must be reentered.
00 Definitions:
STBCHK Alpha label indicating that an OPTMBL stability

test is only to be performed for single-phase
gridblocks either with two-phase neighbors or that
contain wells. Otherwise, a stability test will be
performed for all single-phase gridblocks. For
certain compositional problems, this feature could
significantly reduce the CPU time. This keyword
can be used only for compositional problems.
PJACO Alpha label indicating that a partial Jacobian

update of the fugacity equations will be performed,
in conjunction with the OPTMBL option. Jacobian
coefficients will not be recalculated for gridblocks
that satisfy a preset convergence criteria. For certain
compositional problems, this feature could result in
up to a 20% reduction in CPU time. This keyword
can be used only for compositional problems.
DAMP Alpha label indicating that damping the outer

iteration solution is allowed.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-39

2.2.5 Volume Balance Option (VOLBAL) (Not available in VIP-THERM)
VOLBAL
00 The relaxed volume balance (VOLBAL) option is derived from an

updating procedure for solution unknowns that conserves material for
hydrocarbons and water during each outer iteration. The convergence of
the outer iteration is controlled by the residuals in the saturation
constraint equation and the well constraint equation. The convergence
tolerances may be specified through the TOLSCN and TOLWCN cards,
respectively. This option is only applicable to the IMPLICIT formulation.
2.3 Formulation Options (VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE)

00 Two formulation options are available: IMPES and IMPLICIT. The
formulation may be switched from one to another at the beginning of any
restart run by entering any one of the cards. If no formulation card is
entered in a run starting from initial conditions, the IMPES form of the
finite difference equations will be used. If no formulation card is entered
in a restart run, the formulation will be the same as used during the
previous run. The format of the restart file is independent of the
formulation option.
2.3.1 Implicit form of Finite Difference Equations (IMPLICIT)
IMPLICIT
00 Definition:
IMPLICIT This run will use the implicit form of the finite
difference equations. Pressures, saturations and
compositions will be solved for simultaneously. Not
required for VIP-THERM.
00 Example:
00 DIM NBHPMX NBHPQ NPRFMX NPRFTOT NWMAX

5 5 10 50 5
IMPLICIT
RESTART 0
TITLE 2
L4VIPR.DAT RESULTS
START
OUTPUT P SO SW
2-40 Landmark - R2003.4

2.3.2 Explicit form of Finite Difference Equations (IMPES) (Not available

in VIP-THERM)
IMPES
00 Definition:
IMPES This run will use the IMPES form of the finite
difference equations. Only pressure will be implicit.
2.4 Results File Control
2.4.1 Plot File Format and Data Selection (PLOT)
PLOT (FORM) (class1 . . .)
Possible Class Names 00
WELL WLLYR GATHER FLOSTA AREA REGION FIELD SURFACE ALL 00
Definitions: 00
FORM This parameter causes formatted records to be

written to the plot file. It is required for files that are
going to be processed on another computer by
PACKER, the Plot and Map Restructuring program.
If the FORM parameter is omitted, binary records
are written to the plot file. (Binary records are less
expensive to write and to store but do not have the
flexibility of being able to be used on all computer
systems).
This parameter is ignored if plot data is being

written to the vdb file.
WELL Well production and injection data.
WLLYR Well production and injection data detailed by layer

perforations.
GATHER Gathering center production and injection data.
FLOSTA Flow station production and injection data.
AREA Area production and injection data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-41

REGION Region production and injection data.
FIELD Field production and injection data.
SURFACE Surface network pressure and rate data at nodes.

This parameter is applicable only when plot data is
being written to the vdb file.
ALL Data for all classes.
NOTE: 1. The PLOT card is needed if summary records of production/

injection data are to be written during the simulation for
subsequent post-processing. There are three formats. If none of
the plot classes are specified, then all of the plot classes (except
WLLYR) are written to the plot file at WPLOT frequency (see
Chapter 6 - Output Control). If ALL is specified, all of the
plot classes (including WLLYR) are written to the plot file. If
one or more plot class names are specified, only those plot
classes (including WLLYR) are written to the plot file.
2. Plot data is either written to the vdb file or written to the plot
file. The default is to use the vdb file. This may be changed by
specifying NOVDB (Section 2.4.4).
3. For additional information, see the PLOT file format

description in the OUTPUT CONTROL section.
Examples: 00
C To get all classes:

PLOT FORM ALL 00
C To select formatted information for WELL, GATHER and FIELD:

PLOT FORM WELL GATHER FIELD 00
2.4.2 Compositional Plot File Format and Data Selection (CPLOT)
CPLOT (FORM) (CNDN) (CCNDN) (class1 ...)
Possible Class Names 00
WELL WLLYR GATHER FLOSTA AREA REGION FIELD ALL 00
Definitions: 00

written to the compositional plot file. It is required
for files that are going to be processed on another
computer by PACKER, the Plot and Map
2-42 Landmark - R2003.4

Restructuring program. If the FORM parameter is

omitted, binary records are written to the
compositional plot file. (Binary records are less
expensive to write and to store but do not have the
flexibility of being able to be used on all computer
systems).
This parameter is ignored if plot data is being

CNDN Condensate production rate and condensate

production yield for the specified classes will be
written to the compositional plot file.
CCNDN Cumulative condensate production volumes for the

specified classes except WLLYR will be written to
the compositional plot file.
WELL Well compositional production and injection data.
WLLYR Well compositional production and injection data

detailed by layer perforations.
GATHER Gathering center compositional production and

injection data.
FLOSTA Flow station compositional production and

injection data.
AREA Area compositional production and injection data.
REGION Region compositional production and injection

data.
FIELD Field compositional production and injection data.
ALL Data for all classes.
NOTE: The CPLOT card is needed if summary records of compositional

production/injection data are to be written during the simulation
for subsequent post-processing. There are three formats. If none of
the plot classes are specified, then all of the plot classes (except
WLLYR) are written to the compositional plot file at WCPLOT
frequency (see Chapter 6 - Output Control). If ALL is specified,
all of the plot classes (including WLLYR) are written to the
compositional plot file. If one or more plot class names are
specified, only those plot classes (including WLLYR) are written to
the compositional plot file.
Condensate production rate and yield are not written to the

compositional plot file if CNDN is not specified (default).
Cumulative condensate production volume is not written to the
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-43

compositional plot file if CCNDN is not specified (default). The

cumulative condensate production volume is not written to the
compositional plot file for WLLYR even when CCNDN is specified.
The format for CPLOT file is exactly the same as the format for
PLOT file. For additional information, see the PLOT file format
description in the OUTPUT CONTROL section.
Examples: 00
C To get all classes:

CPLOT FORM CNDN CCNDN ALL 00
C To select formatted information for WELL, GATHER and FIELD:

CPLOT FORM CNDN WELL GATHER FIELD 00
2-44 Landmark - R2003.4

2.4.3 Map File Format (MAP)

00 The MAP card may be entered only if a MAP card was specified in the
VIP-CORE dataset. The MAP card need only be entered in the Utility Data
of the simulation run if the file format is to be changed from that used in
the run after which this run is restarting; i.e., either VIP-CORE or a
previous simulation run. The MAP card is ignored if map data is being
00 By default, the map records will be written to the same type of file (vdb or
map file) as that used in the run after which this run is restarting. If the
user wishes to switch from vdb output to a map file, then a NOVDB card
(Section 2.4.4) should be entered. There is no way to turn vdb back on once
NOVDB has been selected.
00 The arrays to be written to the vdb file/map file may be specified on the
recurrent data cards MAPOUT, MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ, MAPXT, MAPYT,
MAPZT, MAPWT. Note that these cards and the MAP card do not apply
to the SIMOUT map file.

MAP BINARY

FORM
00 Definitions:
BINARY This parameter causes binary records to be written

to the map file (FORTRAN Unit 27). If neither
BINARY nor FORM are entered, the format of the
map file will not change.

written to the map file (FORTRAN Unit 27). It is
required for files that are going to be disposed to
another computer, when binary compatibility
cannot be guaranteed. If neither BINARY nor
FORM are entered, the format of the map file will
not change.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-45

2.4.4 File Type for PLOT/MAP Files (NOVDB)

00 The NOVDB card is used to specify that plot/cplot and/or map array data
are to be written to separate files instead of to the vdb file.
00 It is permissible for plot/cplot data to be written to the vdb file while map
array data is written to a map file (FORTRAN Unit 27), or vice versa (plot
to FORTRAN Unit 11, cplot to FORTRAN Unit 26).
NOVDB (PLOT) (MAP)
00 Definitions:
PLOT This parameter causes the plot/cplot data to be

written to FORTRAN files rather than the vdb file.
MAP This parameter causes the map array data to be

written to a FORTRAN file rather than the vdb file.
NOTE: If no NOVDB card is entered, plot/cplot data will be written to the

vdb file, while map data will be written to whatever file type was
used in VIP-CORE.
If a NOVDB card is entered with no additional parameters, the

effect is the same as entering both PLOT and MAP.
2.4.5 Flow Vectors (FLOWVEC) (Not accepted by VIP-THERM, see FLOWS

card in VIP-CORE manual)
FLOWVEC
00 The FLOWVEC card is used to indicate that, during this run or a

subsequent restart run, the printing and/or mapping of flow vector arrays
will be requested.
2-46 Landmark - R2003.4

2.5 Conductive (Leaky) Fault Solution Options (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
2.5.1 Segregated Flow Assumption (SEGREG)
SEGREG
00 Definitions:
SEGREG Alpha label indicating that the segregated flow

assumption in conductive faults is to be used. If the
SEGREG card is not entered, the fully-mixed
assumption is used.
2.5.2 Fully Coupled Calculation (LKCPLD)
ON
LKCPLD
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the fully coupled

calculation for inflow gridblocks is to be performed.
OFF Alpha label indicating that a portion (related to

outflow gridblocks rates) of the rate calculation for
inflow gridblocks (gridblocks receiving fluids from
faults) is to be iteratively lagged.
NOTE: If the LKCPLD card is omitted in a run starting from time=0, the
default is to use the fully coupled calculation. If the LKCPLD card
is omitted in a restart run, the default is to use whatever was the
case on the previous run.
The lagged option (LKCPLD OFF) in general could significantly

reduce the solver CPU time and hence will be more efficient for
simple models. However, it may increase the number of Newton
iterations and/or cause convergence problems for more complex
models (e.g., fine-grid models).
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-47

2.6 General
00 The AUTOCYCLE card is required for any run using automatic cycle
control (Section 3.17).
AUTOCYCLE
2.6.1 Restarting Runs (RESTART)

00 This card is required on every run, including runs that begin from initial
conditions.

istart

STEPNO istart

RESTART DATE date month year (NOOUT)
TIME time

LAST
00 Definitions:
istart The timestep number from which this run is to

begin. A value of zero indicates a run that will start
from initial conditions. Default is 0.
STEPNO Alpha label indicating that the restart record

written on a certain timestep should be used.
istrt The timestep number from which this run is to

begin. A value of zero indicates a run that will start
from initial conditions. No default.
DATE Alpha label indicating that the restart record

written on a certain date should be used.
d..m..y.. The day, month, and year from which this run is to
begin. No default.
TIME Alpha label indicating that the restart record

written at a certain time should be used.
time The time, in days, from which the run is to begin.

No default.
LAST Alpha label indicating that the last record found on

the restart file is to be used to start this run. This
2-48 Landmark - R2003.4

record must have been written at a time greater

than zero.
NOOUT Alpha label indicating that no output restart file

(FORTRAN Unit 2) is to be generated during this
run. This is useful for quick runs when it is known
that no subsequent runs will be restarted from this
one.
00 Example:
00 For a restart run starting from timestep number 11, whose

corresponding date is March 25, 1989, the following three lines
function identically.
00 RESTART 11
RESTART STEPNO 11
RESTART DATE 25 3 1989
If the output restart file is not needed, the input is
RESTART 11 NOOUT
2.6.2 Descriptive Run Information (TITLE1, TITLE2, TITLE3)

00 Title cards are not required. If none are read, then the titles contained on
the restart record will be retained. Any or all of the three title cards
contained on the restart record can be overwritten by entering new title
cards.
TITLE1
title1
TITLE2
title2
TITLE3
title3
00 Definitions:
TITLEn Alpha label indicating that titlen is to be replaced

by the information on the following card.
titlen The information on this card will replace that

contained on the restart record for title line n.
2.6.3 Beginning of Data (START)

00 All data appearing between the last recognized utility data and the START
card will be ignored. On subsequent restart runs the START card can be
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-49

moved down in the data deck to cause previously used data to be ignored.
00 The START card is not required to be input. If it is omitted the simulator

will effectively insert a START card at the appropriate position in the input
data based on the information on the RESTART card. For a run starting at
time = 0, the START card is placed immediately following all recognized
utility data. When starting from a time > 0, the placement depends on
whether a TIME/DATE card exists with the specified time equal to the
restart time. If so the START card is placed after the corresponding TIME/
DATE card. If not the START card is placed immediately before the next
TIME/DATE card after the restart time.
START
00 Definition:
START Alpha label indicating the beginning of the data to

be included in this run.
2.6.4 Time Specification for Reading Data (TIME)

00 TIME and DATE cards are used interchangeably to control timestep size
and output frequency, and may be mixed in the same run. One TIME or
DATE card is required.
TIME PLUS delt

time
00 Definitions:
PLUS Alpha label indicating that the following value is a

time increment.
delt Time increment, days. The following data group

will be read at the time equal to the current time
plus delt.
time Time in days at which the following data group is

read. This must be a positive value. Subsequent
time values always must increase.
00 Example:
00 TIME PLUS 1.0

TIME 360
.
2-50 Landmark - R2003.4

.
C RECURRENT DATA FOR THE PERIOD
C 360 TO 720 DAYS GOES HERE
.
.
TIME 720
2.6.5 Date Specification for Reading Data (DATE)

00 TIME and DATE cards are used interchangeably to control timestep size
and output frequency, and may be mixed in the same run. One TIME or
DATE card is required.
00 The date on this card determines the time at which the following data
group is read. The program does account for leap years.
DATE day mo yr
00 Definitions:
day Day of the month.
mo Month expressed as a number from 1 to 12.
yr Year. If yr is entered as a number smaller than 1000,

it is interpreted as 1900 + yr (e.g. 75 becomes 1975,
101 becomes 2001). Any value greater than or equal
to 1000 is not adjusted.
2.6.6 Run Termination (STOP)

00 The STOP card terminates the run at the time defined on the TIME or
DATE card preceding it. No further data processing will occur after a
STOP card is found. If the STOP card is omitted, the END card is used to
terminate the run.
STOP
00 Example:
00 C Data here is processed

STOP
C Data here is not processed
END
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-51

2.6.7 End-of-File Marker (END)

00 The END card must be the last card in the data stream; it acts as an end-of-
file marker. When the END card is read, error checking and data
processing begins.
END
2-52 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
3
Well Data
3.1 Introduction
00 The well data includes all data which describes wells; i.e., the definition of
all well and well management level parameters. The minimum required
well data is shown in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 . These tables also exhibit the
minimum data requirements for wells subject to pressure constraints at
the well level.
3.2 Well Location

00 VIP-EXECUTIVE model wells may be vertical or deviated. A well is
referred to as "vertical" if its perforations all have the same areal
coordinates; otherwise it is "deviated". Thus, a vertical VIP-EXECUTIVE
model well can incline from true vertical. More than one well may coexist
in a given gridblock. Also, a well may have more than one perforation in a
given reservoir layer.
00 Additionally an inclined and horizontal well flow correlation option is

available. It is activated through parameters on the FPERF card.
If a pattern element option was selected in VIP-CORE (see Section 2.2.3.4

of the VIP-CORE Reference Manual), then all extensive well input and
output data (minimum and maximum rates, KH values, production/
injection rates and cumulative, etc.) are defined as full well values. The
grid geometry is fixed for each pattern element option and is shown in
Figures 2-2 to 2-8 of the VIP-CORE Reference Manual. Conventional
injector/producer well locations are summarized in Table 3-1 for all the
pattern element types.
Table 3-1: Conventional Well Locations For Pattern Element Options
Grid
Pattern Type Well Description Well Location
Orientation
1/8 5- or 9-spot Parallel Injector 1, NY

Corner Producer NX, 1
Side Producer (9-spot) 1, 1
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-53

Well Data VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
Table 3-1: Conventional Well Locations For Pattern Element Options
Grid
Pattern Type Well Description Well Location
Orientation
1/8 5- or 9-spot Diagonal Inejctor 1, NY

Corner Producer NX, NY
Side Producer (9-spot) (NX-1)/2, 1
1/4 5- or 9-spot Parallel Injector 1, NY

Corner Producer NX, 1
Side Producer (9-spot) 1, 1
Side Producer (9-spot) NX, NY
1/4 5- or 9-spot Diagonal Injector (NX-1)/2, NY

Corner Producer (NX-1)/2, 1
Side Producer (9-spot) 1, (NY-1)/2
Side Producer (9-spot) NX, (NY-1)/2
1/12 7-spot -- Injector 1, NY

Producer NX, 1
1/6 7-spot -- Injector (NX-1)/2, 1

Producer 1, NY
Producer NX, NY
3.2.1 Well Name and Location (WELL)

00 Vertical Well
WELL N (NAME) IW JW (IGC) (IBAT)

nw (wname) iw jw (igc) (ibat)
(Repeat data card as necessary for subsequent wells.)
00 Deviated Well
WELL N (NAME) IW JW (IGC) (IBAT)

nw (wname) X X (igc) (ibat)
or
WELL N (NAME) (IGC) (IBAT)

nw (wname) (igc) (ibat)
(Repeat data card as necessary for subsequent wells.)
3-54 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Well Data
00 Definitions:
N Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a

well number. Required as the first data field
following WELL.
NAME Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a

well name.
IW Alpha label indicating that this field will contain the

x direction (r direction) index of the gridblock
containing the well.
JW Alpha label indicating that this field will contain the

y direction ( direction) index of the gridblock
IGC Alpha label indicating that this field will contain the
number of the gathering center to which the well is
attached.
IBAT Alpha label indicating that this field will contain the
number of the separator battery to which the well is
assigned.
nw Well number. Any value in the range of one to

NWMAX (maximum well number for which the
program is dimensioned) may be used. A value of
zero causes the program to automatically assign a
well number to the well, provided a well name is
used to define the well. In this case, the well
number assigned will be the minimum value
between one and NWMAX that has not already
been allocated by the user or chosen by the
program.
wname Well name of up to eight (8) characters. The first

character in the name must be alphabetic unless the
name is immediately preceded by the character #.
The well name must be unique. A repeated well
name will result in an error message and
termination of the run. Default is blanks.
iw X direction (r direction) index of the gridblock

jw Y direction ( direction) index of the gridblock

igc Number of the gathering center to which the well is

attached. Default is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-55

ibat Number of the separator battery to which the well

is assigned. Alternatives include the battery
number of a separator input in the separator data
(Surface Separator Data), a value of -npvt which
accesses a default separator, and a value of 0:
ibati = nbat (input battery)

= -npvt (default separator)
= 0
Default is 0 which will result in Separator 1 being

assigned if one has been defined or the default
separator for PVT region 1 if one has not been
defined.
00 The deviated well option can be used to model any non-vertical well,
including horizontal wells. The data format is identical to the format for
the vertical well option. However, to define a deviated well, the iw and jw
fields must contain the alphabetic character X, if the IW and JW fields
appear on the WELL card. If the IW and JW fields are absent from a WELL
card, this implies that the well is deviated.
00 The areal locations of the deviated well completions are entered by

perforation as described in the FPERF card.
NOTE: (for both Vertical and Deviated wells):
1. Data fields on the WELL card may be entered in any order.

However, the data following the WELL card must be in the
order specified by the heading labels.
2. Once a well has been defined with a WELL card, it cannot be

redefined. A second WELL card with the same well number
results in an error message and terminates the run.
3. A well must be defined by a WELL card before any references

can be made to the well on other data cards.
4. NWMAX, the maximum well number permitted, is a limit

established by program dimensions. This value is printed on
the first page of the program output and may be reset by using
the DIM card (see Section 2.2.3).
5. More than one well may be assigned the same (iw, jw)
location.
00 Examples:
00 VERTICAL:
00 C+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C WELLS 1 -364 SAD WELLS
3-56 Landmark - R2003.4

C 253 -266 NGI WELLS

C 324 -326 WGI WELLS
C PUT WELLS INTO THE APPROPRIATE GC/FS
C
C+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
00 WELL N NAME IW JW IGC

1 #01-01 18 26 4
00 DEVIATED:
00 WELL N NAME IW JW IGC IBAT

5 DEV1 X X 2 3
00 or
00 WELL N NAME IGC IBAT

5 DEV1 2 3
3.2.2 Describe Well Perforations (FPERF)

00 The FPERF card is used to describe well perforations. Three basic formats
are permitted, with optional data for specific situations. If necessary, one
or more continuation cards may be used by placing the character ">" as the
last string on a card and then continuing the data on the following card.
Except for the well number, the data may appear in any order; however,
the order on the cards for the perforations must match the order of the
headings.
If the water-oil hysteresis model is being used (VIP-CORE Section 4.3.4),

ISAT cannot be specified unless hysteresis for the perforation relative
permeabilities is deactivated by entering a NOHYSW card before the
FPERF card. By default, perforation relative permeabilities are set equal to
the hysteretic gridblock values.
NOHYSW
00 General Format:
FPERF (NOPWDEP) (card 1)

WELL (other headings) (card 2)
Perforation data cards (card 3)
(Card 3 is repeated as necessary to describe all the
perforations for each well being perforated.)
00 The three basic formats for the FPERF cards are:
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-57

00 Format A: (Any relative permeability option; each layer specified)
00 FPERF (card 1)
(K)
(H)
WELL L (IW JW) (KH) (Other headings) (card 2)
(K H)
00 (k)
(h)
nw l (iw jw) (kh) (Other data) (card 3)
(k h)
00 Format B: (Any permeability option; depth to perforations specified)
00 FPERF (card 1)
WELL (IW JW) DTOP DBOT (K) (Other headings) (card 2)
nw (iw jw) dtop dbot (k) (Other data) (card 3)
00 Format C: (Vertical equilibrium relative permeability; each layer specified)
00 FPERF (card 1)
(K)
WELL L (IW JW) HTOP HBOT (KH) (Other headings) (card 2)
(k)
nw l (iw jw) htop hbot (kh) (Other data) (card 3)
00 In the basic formats shown above, the "other headings" may identify 1)
data affecting relative permeability endpoints (SWL, SWMN, SWRO,
SWMX, SGL, SGMN, SGRO, SGMX, ISAT, ISATI); 2) weighting factors
used to interpolate between rock and vertical equilibrium relative
permeability (FVEW, FVEG); 3) perforation status (STAT); 4) perforation
unit number (UNIT) and/or recompletion unit number (RCMPUNT); 5)
well index values for each perforation or the data to calculate the values
(WIL, SKIN, RADB, RADW); 6) additional data required for the reduced
entry skin (Sr) calculation, to be used in conjunction with the calculation
of the well index for each perforation (RKHKV, DHTOP, HTOT); 7) rate
dependent skin factor for non-Darcy gas flow (WDL); and 8) inclined and
horizontal well data (LENGTH, PWDEP, DIAM, ROUGH, ANGLV,
ANGLA). In VIP-THERM, the other headings may also identify 1)
specified production well gradients (GRAD); and 2) a well index
permeability thickness product (KHWI).
00 For each column heading that appears on card 2, a single data value must
appear in the corresponding position on each card 3. An exception to this
rule is data for L, the layer number. A range of values may be entered.
Some of the data may only be used for certain types of models or in
conjunction with other data; such restrictions are noted below.
00 Inclusion of the UNIT heading invokes the perforation UNIT option in

which layers are grouped into perforation units before perforation
3-58 Landmark - R2003.4

production constraints are applied. The unit number has no effect on

injection wells.
00 A separate grouping algorithm is invoked using the RCMPUNT heading

and data. This option involves the automatic opening of a group of
perforations when another group violates constraints. This unit number
has no effect on injection wells.
00 Definitions:
NOPWDEP Alpha label indicating that, for horizontal/inclined

wells for which PWDEP data is not entered, the
depth to center of well segment will be set to the
depth of the gridblock containing the perforation.
WELL Column heading for nw, the well number or well

name. The well number or name must be entered
for each data card. For multiple completions in a
single well the alpha label X can be substituted for
the well number or well name on each data card
after the first.
L Column heading for l, the layer number for a

completed interval. Required unless dtop and dbot
are used. A single number or a range of values may
be entered. The format for the range of values is i1
-i2, where i1 i2, or i1 NZ. The last format results in
perforations in all layers between layer i1 and the
last layer in the appropriate grid, inclusive.
IW Column heading for iw, the x(r) direction gridblock

index of the block containing the perforation for a
deviated well.
JW Column heading for jw, the y() direction gridblock

index of the block containing the perforation for a
deviated well.
K Column heading for k, the average permeability

times the net-to-gross ratio of the perforated
interval, md (md). For an areal model, the default is
the product of the gridblock net-to-gross ratio and
K x K y ( or K r K ). For a cross-section model, the
default is the product of the gridblock net-to-gross
ratio and the appropriate permeability. Not
permitted with kh.
H Column heading for h, the thickness of the

perforated interval, ft (m). Default is gridblock
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-59

gross thickness. Not permitted with kh, dtop, dbot,

htop, or hbot.
KH Column heading for kh, the average permeability-

thickness of the perforated interval, md-ft (md-m)
or a permeability-thickness multiplier. Default is
the product of the gridblocks areal permeability
and net thickness.
To input a permeability thickness-multiplier, enter a

* followed by the value. The permeability-
thickness of the perforation will be the default
calculation times the multiplier.
UNIT Column heading for unit, the perforation unit

number. Values must lie between 1 and nprfmx.
RCMPUNT Column heading for rcmpunt, the recompletion

unit number. Values must lie between 1 and
nrcmun. Permitted only if the dimension nrcmun is
greater than zero.
DTOP Column heading for dtop, the subsea depth to the

top of a perforated interval, ft (m). May not be used
with l, kh, h, htop, or hbot. Must appear with dbot.
Required unless l is used. When used with the VE
option with corner point geometry, the layer
number l must also be specified. Also for this
special case, if dtop is entered as -1.0, it will be reset
to the gridblock center top depth.
DBOT Column heading for dbot, the subsea depth to the

bottom of a perforated interval, ft (m). May not be
used with l, kh, h, htop, or hbot. Must appear with
dtop. Required unless l is used. When used with the
VE option with corner point geometry, the layer
number l must also be specified. Also for this
special case, if dbot is entered as -1.0, it will be reset
to the gridblock center bottom depth.
HTOP Column heading for htop, the distance from the top
of the gridblock to the top of the perforation,
expressed as a fraction of the gross thickness of the
gridblock. Default is 0. Permitted only in Format C
when using the vertical equilibrium option. The
value of htop can be less than 0 in the VE corner-
point option.
HBOT Column heading for hbot, the distance from the top
of the gridblock to the bottom of the perforation,
expressed as a fraction of the gross thickness of the
3-60 Landmark - R2003.4

gridblock. Default is 1. Permitted only in Format C

when using the vertical equilibrium option. The
value of hbot can be greater than 1 in the VE corner-
point option.
DHTOP Column heading for dhtop, the distance between

the top of the block where the wellbore penetrated
the block, and the top of the perforated interval,
ft(m). Default is 0., except when DTOP and DBOT
are also specified, in which case dhtop is calculated
as dtop * gross thickness. The value of dhtop can be
less than 0 in the VE corner-point option.
HTOT Column heading for htot, the maximum sand

thickness which could be perforated along the
wellbore within the gridblock, ft(m); i.e., not
necessarily the true vertical net sand thickness.
Default is the gross thickness of the block. For the
special case of the VE option with corner point
geometry, the default is the deepest corner point
base depth minus the shallowest corner point top
depth.
SWL Column heading for swl, the connate water

saturation to be used in denormalizing water
relative permeabilities for this perforation. Default
is the gridblocks value. SWMN and SWRO must
also be specified.
SWMN Column heading for swmn, the residual water

is the gridblocks value. SWRO must also be
specified.
SWRO Column heading for swro, the water saturation at

residual oil to water, to be used in denormalizing
water relative permeabilities for this perforation.
Default is the gridblocks value. SWMN must also
be specified.
SWMX Column heading for swmx, the maximum water

is 1. SWMN and SWRO must also be specified.
SGL Column heading for sgl, the connate gas saturation

to be used in denormalizing gas relative
permeabilities for this perforation. Default is the
gridblocks value. SGMN and SGRO must also be
specified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-61

SGMN Column heading for sgmn, the residual gas

saturation to be used in denormalizing gas relative
gridblocks value. SGRO must also be specified.
SGRO Column heading for sgro, the gas saturation at

residual oil to gas, to be used in denormalizing gas
is the gridblocks value. SGMN must also be
specified.
SGMX Column heading for sgmx, the maximum gas

permeabilities for this perforation. Default is 1-swl.
SGMN and SGRO must also be specified.
ISAT Column heading for isat, the saturation table to be

used in calculating relative permeabilities. Default
is the gridblocks rock type.
ISATI Column heading for isati, the imbibition saturation

table to be used in calculating relative
permeabilities. Default is the gridblocks rock type.
FVEW Column heading for fvew, the weighting factor

used to interpolate between rock and vertical
equilibrium relative permeabilities in the matrix for
water-oil systems. A value of 1.0 is full vertical
equilibrium. Default is the gridblocks value.
FVEG Column heading for fveg, the weighting factor used

to interpolate between rock and vertical
equilibrium relative permeabilities in the matrix for
gas-oil systems. A value of 1.0 is full vertical
equilibrium. Default is the gridblocks value.
STAT Column heading for stat, the perforation status

indicator. Value is ON or OFF. Default is ON.
WDL Column heading for wdl, the rate dependent skin

factor for non-Darcy gas flow.
WIL Column heading for wil, the well index, by

perforation. Dimensionless.
If WIL is not specified as a data item, and if any one

or more of the data items SKIN, RADB, RADW,
RKHKV, DHTOP, or HTOT is specified, then wil
will be calculated as follows:
3-62 Landmark - R2003.4


wil = ---------------------------------------------------------------
l n --------------
radb
- + skin + Sr
radw
where = 2 for rectangular grids and varies with

ntheta for radial grids. For rectangular grids, can
be changed by the FLOANG card. Sr is zero unless
any one or more of the data items RKHKV, DHTOP,
or HTOT is specified, in which case Sr will be
calculated as follows:
0.825
Sr = 1.35 ---------- 1
htot
{ ln ( htot rkhkv + 7 ) [ 0.49 + 0.1 ln ( htot rkhkv ) ]ln r wc 1.95 }
h
where rwc = radw e0.2126(Zm/htot +2.753)
and Zm = dhtop + h(hbot - htop)/2
SKIN Column heading for skin, the skin factor for this
perforation. Dimensionless. Default is 0.
RADB Column heading for radb, the equivalent radius of

the gridblock containing the well, ft (m). Default is
the value computed in VIP-CORE based on
Peacemans recommendation (Reference 2):
12 12
------
kx
- y + ------- x
2 ky 2
ky kx
radb = 0.28 ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
kx 1 4 ky 1 4
------- + -------
ky kx
RADW Column heading for radw, the wellbore radius, ft

(m). Default is 0.25.
RKHKV Column heading for rkhkv, the ratio of horizontal

to vertical permeability within this productive
interval. Default is 1.
00 The following only apply to inclined and horizontal wells
LENGTH Column heading for length, the length of well

segment in a well gridblock, ft (m).
PWDEP Column heading for pwdep, the depth to center of

well segment, ft (m). If not specified, the depth will
be computed from LENGTH and ANGLV.
DIAM Column heading for diam, the diameter of the well

segment, ft (m). RADW may be used instead.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-63

ROUGH Column heading for rough, the absolute roughness

of the well segment, ft (m).
ANGLV Column heading for anglv, the angle of the source

end of the segment to the downward vertical
direction, degrees.
ANGLA Column heading for angla, the angle of the segment

with respect to the x axis in the areal plane, degrees.
Default is 0.
00 The following only apply to VIP-THERM:
GRAD Column heading indicating the position of grad on

the following data cards.
grad Wellbore gradient for the perforated interval, psi/ft

(kPa/m). Ignored for injection wells.
KHWI Column heading indicating the position of khwi on

the following data cards.
khwi For producers (see Equation 3-6, Section 3.6), khwi

= 0.001127 WI KH, rBcp/D psia (rcm cp/D kPa).
For water/steam injectors (see Equation 3-1 and 3-5

in Section 3.4.2.4), khwi = 0.001127 WI KH , rB/
D psia (rcm/D kPa).
Do not use for gas injectors.
NOTE: 1.All unread data is given default values prior to calculating

perforation properties.
002. In Format B, the simulator automatically generates as many

perforations as required by the dtop and dbot data. In this
case, iw and jw are held constant over the perforated
thickness.
003. In Format C, if k is read, the htop and hbot data are used to
determine thickness and position of the perforation. If kh is
read, then htop and hbot determine position only.
004. If h is read in Format A when using vertical equilibrium

relative permeabilities, htop and hbot are set so as to center
the perforation vertically in the gridblock.
005. All perforations for each well being perforated must be defined
on consecutive cards.
006. If an interval is specified more than once, the result is multiple

perforations; i.e., the KH will be cumulative. The previously
3-64 Landmark - R2003.4

specified interval is not replaced.
007. Except for one condition, respecifying the FPERF data for a
well replaces the entire set of perforations with the new data.
The exception is when the new data immediately follows the
old data on the same FPERF card. In this case the new data is
assumed to be a continuation of the old data.
008. When rate dependent skin factor for each perforation (WDL) is
specified, the well index cannot be zero. Well index set to zero
is a special case which means adjusting the well index to honor
both the rate and bottomhole pressure constraints. In such case,
rate dependent skin factor does not have effective meanings.
An error message will print in the output and the simulation
run will be terminated.
009. The inclined and horizontal well flow correlation option is

activated by the presence of the LENGTH, PWDEP, DIAM,
ROUGH, ANGLV, and ANGLA keywords on the FPERF card.
These data cause the well index and permeability thickness to
be computed automatically. Optional keywords to alter the
flow correlation and friction factors are given in Section 3.2.6
and Section 3.2.7. If the data for a multilateral well is being
input, set the values of ROUGH, the absolute roughness, to -1.
This disables the friction loss computation which is currently
inaccurate for this type of well. Wellbore gradients will be
calculated by the simulator using the volume balance method
(Section 3.7.2) which cannot be overridden.
0010. If KHWI is input, then a productivity index (specified by WIL

data or by a PI, WI, or RFLOW card, Section 3.6) is not
required and will be ignored if input.
00 Example 1:
00 FPERF
WELL L
1 3
X 4
X 6
2 1
X 2
00 Example 2:
00 FPERF
WELL L KH
1 2 3000
X 3 4200
X 4 1700
2 1 5780
X 2 3620
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-65

00 In this example perforated intervals are defined for Wells 1 and 2. Well 1 is
perforated in layers 2, 3, and 4 with permeability-thickness values of 3000,
4200, and 1700 md-ft, respectively. Well 2 is perforated in layers 1 and 2
with permeability-thickness values of 5780 and 3620 md-ft, respectively.
00 Example 3:
00 FPERF
WELL L IW JW KH
1 7 1 1 1550
X 7 1 2 3100
X 7 1 3 1550
X 8 1 1 120
X 8 1 2 240
X 8 1 3 120
00 In this example perforations are defined for a three-dimensional coning

problem. The well is completed in layers 7 and 8 in the first radial annulus
(I=1). All of the angular increments are completed (J=1,3).
00 Example 4:
00 FPERF
WELL L WIL
22 3 .85
X 4 1.02
X 5 1.24
00 In this example, Well 22 is perforated in layers 3, 4, and 5, and each of the

layers has exhibited a different response to the stimulation treatment.
00 Example 5:
00 FPERF
WELL L RADB RADW SKIN
27 1 450. .25 -1.5
X 2 450. .25 2.2
00 In this example, Well 27 is perforated in layers 1 and 2, and each of the

layers has exhibited a different response to the stimulation treatment.
00 Example 6:
00 FPERF
WELL L H RADB RADW SKIN RKHKV DHTOP HTOT
35 1 20 450. .25 -1.5 2.0 10. 30
X 2 15 450. .25 2.2 5.0 0 25
00 In this example, Well 35 is perforated in layers 1 and 2, and each of the

layers has exhibited a different response to the stimulation treatment. In
addition, layer 1 is perforated in the lower 20 feet of layer 1, ten feet below
3-66 Landmark - R2003.4

the top of the layer, and layer 2 is perforated in the top 15 feet. Layer 1 is
fairly clean, with a kh to kv ratio of 2. Layer 2 has more shaly streaks, with
a kh to kv ratio of 5. The wil values will be calculated for each layer, after
first calculating a reduced entry skin factor for each layer. The
permeability-thickness values stored for each layer will be the layer
permeability times htot, since the reduced entry skin factor will
compensate for the partial penetration.
00 Example 7:
00 FPERF
WELL L DTOP DBOT SKIN RKHKV HTOT
42 3 7528 -1 .4 4.5 45
X 4 -1 7588 -.8 2.5 52
00 This combination of both L and DTOP/DBOT can only be used with the
special case of using the VE option with corner point geometry. In this
example, the reduced entry skin factor will be calculated for each layer
based on its perforated interval relative to the geometry of the gridblock.
The wil values for each layer will then be calculated, and the
permeability-thickness stored for the layers will be the layer permeability
times its htot.
00 The following example illustrates the definition of an inclined well,

perforated in layers 1-4 and with a horizontal section in layer 4.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-67

00 Example 8:
00 FPERF
WELL L IW JW LENGTH PWDEP DIAM ROUGH ANGLV ANGLA SKIN
00 2 1 3 1 118 4450 0.25 0.00001 5 40. 5

X 2 3 1 120 4490 0.25 0.00001 7 40. 5
X 3 3 1 50 4560 0.25 0.00001 10 40 2
X 4 3 1 45 4577 0.15 0.00001 20 40 3
X 4 4 1 90 4600 0.15 0.00001 20 40 4
X 4 5 1 70 4635 0.15 0.00001 90 40 2
X 4 6 1 150 4635 0.15 0.00001 90 40 5
X 4 7 1 100 4635 0.15 0.00001 90 40 6
X 4 8 1 100 4635 0.15 0.00001 90 40 10
00 The following example illustrates the simulation of a multilateral well.
00 Example 9:
00 FPERF
WELL IW JW L LENGTH DIAM ROUGH ANGLV ANGLA
00 1 11 11 5 50 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.

X 12 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
X 13 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
X 14 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
X 15 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
X 16 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
X 17 11 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 0.
C
X 11 11 5 70.7 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
X 12 12 5 141.4 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
X 13 13 5 141.4 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
X 14 14 5 141.4 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
X 15 15 5 141.4 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
X 16 16 5 13.7 0.375 -1.0 90. 45.
C
X 11 11 5 50 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 12 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 13 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 14 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 15 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 16 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
X 11 17 5 100 0.375 -1.0 90. 90.
00 The following example illustrates the use of the range of layers option.
Example 10:
FPERF
WELL L
1 1 -6
2 4 -5
3-68 Landmark - R2003.4

3 2
X 3
X 5
4 1 NZ
5 3 NZ
6 2
00 The following example illustrates the use of the permeability-thickness

multiplier.
Example 11:
FPERF
WELL L KH
1 2 *2.
X 3 1000.
X 4 *0.5
3.2.3 Describe Well Perforations, VIP-DUAL (FPERF)

00 The DUAL option allows additional data on the FPERF card. The three
basic formats still apply. In the basic formats, the additional "other
headings" which apply to DUAL may identify data affecting relative
permeability endpoints (SWLF, SWMNF, SWROF, SWMXF, SGLF,
SGMNF, SGROF, SGMXF, ISATF, ISATIF), weighting factors used to
interpolate between rock and vertical equilibrium relative permeability
(FVEWF, FVEGF), a fraction used to allocate the total permeability or
permeability-thickness between the matrix and fracture (FM), and a rate
dependent skin factor for non-Darcy gas flow (WDLF). Each perforation
defined by the user will generate two perforations, one for the matrix and
one for the fracture, depending on the value of FM. (see note)
00 These data can be used in conjunction with any of the other FPERF data.
Any restrictions are noted within the definitions.
00 Definitions:
SWLF Column heading for swlf, the connate water

saturation to be used in denormalizing fracture
Default is the gridblocks value. SWMNF and
SWROF must also be specified.
SWMNF Column heading for swmnf, the residual water

Default is the gridblocks value. SWROF must also
be specified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-69

SWROF Column heading for swrof, the water saturation at

residual oil to water, to be used in denormalizing
fracture water relative permeabilities for this
perforation. Default is the gridblocks value.
SWMNF must also be specified.
SWMXF Column heading for swmxf, the maximum water

Default is 1. SWMNF and SWROF must also be
specified.
SGLF Column heading for sglf, the connate gas saturation

to be used in denormalizing fracture gas relative
gridblocks value. SGMNF and SGROF must also be
specified.
SGMNF Column heading for sgmnf, the residual gas

saturation to be used in denormalizing fracture gas
is the gridblocks value. SGROF must also be
specified.
SGROF Column heading for sgrof, the gas saturation at

residual oil to gas, to be used in denormalizing
fracture gas relative permeabilities for this
perforation. Default is the gridblocks value.
SGMNF must also be specified.
SGMXF Column heading for sgmxf, the maximum gas

permeabilities for this perforation. Default is 1-swlf.
SGMNF and SGROF must also be specified.
ISATF Column heading for isatf, the saturation table to be

used in calculating fracture relative permeabilities.
Default is the gridblocks rock type.
ISATIF Column heading for isatif, the imbibition saturation

table to be used in calculating fracture relative
permeabilities. Default is the gridblocks rock type.
FVEWF Column heading for fvewf, the weighting factor

equilibrium relative permeabilities in the fracture
network for water-oil systems. A value of 1.0 is full
vertical equilibrium. Default is the gridblocks
value.
3-70 Landmark - R2003.4

FVEGF Column heading for fvegf, the weighting factor

equilibrium relative permeabilities in the fracture
network for gas-oil systems. A value of 1.0 is full
vertical equilibrium. Default is the gridblocks
value.
FM Column heading for fm, the fraction of the total k or

kh contributed by the matrix. This data is entered
only in conjunction with the dual-porosity option.
Default value is calculated as the ratio KX/
(KX+KXF), where KX is the matrix x direction
permeability and KXF is the fracture x direction
permeability for the block being perforated.
WDLF Column heading for wdlf, the rate dependent skin

factor for non-Darcy gas flow in the fracture
network.
NOTE: Single permeability option will remove perforations from the

matrix, and only perforate the fractures.
00 Example 1:
00 FPERF
WELL L H K FM
17 4 12 1750 .02
X 5 7 1200 0
00 In this example the perforated intervals are defined for Well 17. It is
completed in layers 4 and 5 of a fractured reservoir (FM option is used).
The lengths of the perforated intervals are 12 and 7 feet, respectively, and
the average permeabilities of the intervals are 1750 and 1200 md,
respectively. In Layer 4, 98% of the production comes from the fracture
system and 2% comes from the matrix. In Layer 5, all of the production
comes from the fracture system. (Only three perforations would be
generated from this data.)
3.2.4 Set Status of Well Perforations (PRFSTAT)

00 The PRFSTAT card is used to set the status of (previously defined)
perforations of wells. The user may define subsets of perforations or all
the perforations in a well.
PRFSTAT
WELL STAT (L IW JW GRID UNIT)
Perforation data cards
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-71

00 Definitions:
WELL Column heading for nw, the well number or well

name. The well number or name must be entered
for each data card and must be the first parameter.
For multiple completions in a single well, the alpha
label X can be substituted for the well number or
well name on each data card after the first.
STAT Column heading for stat, the perforation status

indicator. Value is ON or OFF. This parameter must
be entered.
L Column heading for l, the layer number to which

this status change is restricted. A single number or
range of values may be entered. The format for the
range of values is i1 -i2, where i1i2, or i1 NZ. The
last format results in perforations in all layers
between layer i1, and the last layer in the
appropriate grid, inclusive.
IW Column heading for iw, the x(r) direction gridblock

index to which this status change is restricted.
JW Column heading for jw, the y( ) direction

gridblock index to which this status change is
restricted.
GRID Column heading for the grid name to which this

status change is restricted.
UNIT Column heading for unit, the perforation unit

number to which this status change is restricted.
NOTE: The WELL parameter must be first. The remaining parameters may
be in any order. The parameter STAT is required.
For all parameters except WELL and STAT, the character * may be
entered to denote that the status change should not be restricted by
this parameter.
For parameters L, IW, and JW, if a grid name is not entered under
the parameter GRID, the data will be presumed to apply to the
grid of the first perforation of the well. If a grid name is entered, the
data will apply to that grid.
3-72 Landmark - R2003.4

3.2.5 Well Perforation Tolerances (PERFPT)
PERFPT khmin (rkhmin pvmin rpvmin)
Definitions:
khmin Minimum KH value in well perforations, md-ft (md-

m). The perforation status is set to OFF if the KH
value in the perforation is less than khmin. Default is
0.
rkhmin Minimum relative KH value in well perforations,
fraction. The status of a perforation in a well is set to
OFF if the ratio of the KH value in this perforation to
the maximum KH value in well active perforations is
less than rkhmin. Default is 0.
pvmin Minimum pore volume in gridblocks with well
perforations, ft**3 (m**3). The perforation status is
set to OFF if the pore volume of the perforation
gridblock is less than pvmin. Default is 0.
rpvmin Minimum relative pore volume value in gridblocks
with well perforations, fraction. The status of a
perforation in a well is set to OFF if the ratio of the
gridblock pore volume in this perforation to the
maximum grid block pore volume in well active
perforations is less than rpvmin. Default is 0.
Example:
PERFPT 20 0.01 0 0.001
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-73

3.2.6 Inclined and Horizontal Well Flow Correlation (BEGGS)

00 The BEGGS card is used to specify the correlation to be used for inclined
producers.
ON surf
BEGGS
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON The Beggs and Brill correlation will be used for

inclined producers. Haalands correlation will be
used for inclined injectors.
OFF Haalands single phase equation will be used for

producers. This is the default.
surf Liquid surface tension, dynes/cm.
NOTE: If the BEGGS keyword is not input, Haalands correlation will be

used for all wells.
00 Example:
00 BEGGS ON 0.121
3.2.7 Wellbore Friction Pressure Loss (NOFRICTION)
NOFRICTION
00 Definition:
NOFRICTION Alpha label indicating that the friction kinematic

pressure loss will be neglected from the horizontal
well pressure loss computation.
NOTE: This option is applicable only to the Horizontal and Inclined well
option. When the keyword NOFRICTION is absent, the horizontal
and inclined well option computes frictional pressures losses
(kinematic and hydrostatic). Note that the hydrostatic pressure loss
is always computed.
3-74 Landmark - R2003.4

3.3 Surface Separation Data

00 This section does not apply to the VIP-THERM Dead Oil Model.
00 The surface separation data includes the definition of the set of pressure
and temperature conditions through which a produced fluid will be
passed. Also defined are the destinations of the product from each stage of
the separation process.
3.3.1 Compositional Separator Battery, VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM

(SEPARATOR)
00 Each separator battery may contain an arbitrary number of stages. Each
stage contains one feed stream and two output streams: vapor and liquid.
Each of the two output streams can itself be split into two streams, each of
which may be fed to (1) any downstream separator stage, (2) the gas sales
line or (3) the oil sales line.
SEPARATOR ibat
(PVTTABLE ipvt)
(1) STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n tn pn vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X X X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Type 2 and 3 Data Cards are repeated as necessary to define all
the stages of separation.)
00 Definitions:
ibat List of separator battery numbers.
ipvt EOS table number used for separator calculations

(VIP-COMP only). If the particular EOS table has
EOSSEP data, the EOSSEP parameters will be used
for the calculations. If the PVTTABLE number is not
input, EOS table 1 will be assumed.
n Separator stage number. Values range from 1 to the

total number of stages.
tn Operating temperature of separator stage n, F (C).
pn Operating pressure of separator stage n, psia (kPa).
vfn1 Fraction of the vapor stream leaving separator stage

n to be sent to the destination indicated by vdn1.
Values must lie in the range 0-1. If vfn1 is less than
1.0, then one type 2 data card must be provided for
this stage so that vfn1 and vfn2 sum to 1.0.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-75

vdn1 Destination of the first vapor stream leaving stage

n. Alternatives include a downstream separator
stage, the gas sales line, and vent.
m ( m is a stage number )

vd n1 = GAS ( alpha label )

VENT ( alpha label )
lfn1 Fraction of the liquid stream leaving separator stage

n to be sent to the destination indicated by ldn1.
Values must lie in the range 0-1. If lfn1 is less than
this stage so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.
ldn1 Destination of the first liquid stream leaving stage

stage and the oil sales line.
ld n1 =
OIL ( alpha label )
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first three

locations on the type 2 data card.

The values of vfn1 and vfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
vdn2 Destination of the second vapor stream leaving

stage n. Alternatives include a downstream
separator stage and the gas sales line.

n to be sent to the destination indicated by ldn2. The
values of lfn1 and lfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
ldn2 Destination of the second liquid stream leaving

separator stage and the oil sales line.
NOTE: 1. Stock tank conditions should be entered as the last stage of

separation in order to obtain the stock tank liquid volume.
00 2. The user may optionally enter surface separator equation of

state parameters. Because a and b parameters, binary
coefficients, and volume shift factors at reservoir conditions are
sometimes not adequate for describing fluid behavior during
surface separations, an option to change these parameters is
provided. If entered, these data must immediately follow the
3-76 Landmark - R2003.4

data for the last stage of the separator battery to which they
apply. The user may override the data for any or all stages for a
battery.
00 3. Surface separator equation-of-state parameters cannot be

entered without entering all of the separator data, and default
values are calculated from reservoir values considering
temperature dependency (see Coats, SPE 10512).
00 4. The default separator is single stage at standard temperature

and pressure. A vapor fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination
GAS (gas sales line) and a liquid fraction of 1.0 is assigned the
destination OIL (oil sales line).
00 5. Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for
surface volume calculations by means of the REGSEP card.
OMEGAS istg
ai . . . anc
OMEGBS istg
bi . . . bnc
(DJKSEP cmpj istg
cmpk djk
. .
. .)
ENDSEP
(VSHFTS istg
vshftsi ... vshftsnc)
00 Definitions:
OMEGAS Alpha label indicating that surface separator a

values will be entered.
OMEGBS Alpha label indicating that surface separator b

values will be entered.
istg Separator stage in the current battery to which the

equation-of-state parameters apply.
ai Values of a for each hydrocarbon component.
bi Values of b for each hydrocarbon component.
DJKSEP Alpha label indicating that optional surface

separator binary interaction coefficients will be
entered.
cmpj Component name of the first component in a binary

mixture.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-77

cmpk Component name of the second component in a

binary mixture.
djk The binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

component j and component k.
VSHFTS Alpha label indicating that optional surface

separator volume shift factors will be entered.
vshftsi Surface separator volume shift factor for

component i at stage istg.
00 Example:
00 C=======================================
C COMPOSITIONAL SEPARATOR BATTERY
C=======================================
00 SEPARATOR 1
STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 100.0 665.0 1. GAS 1. 2
2 132.0 100.0 1. GAS 1. 3
3 126.0 40.0 1. GAS 1. 4
4 149.0 15.0 1. GAS 1. 5
5 60.0 14.7 1. GAS 1. OIL
3.3.2 Black-Oil Separator Battery, VIP-ENCORE (SEPARATOR)

00 The default separator is described in Section 4.7.1 of the VIP-CORE
Reference Manual.
00 Separator data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

modules. Separator batteries in addition to those defined in VIP-CORE
may be input, and those defined in VIP-CORE may be redefined. This last
statement is not true when the PVT interpolation option is in use;
separator data may not be input in the simulation modules.
00 When "black oil" type problems are run in VIP-ENCORE, the PVT data is
converted into a multicomponent format, including the use of K-values
and z-factors to calculate the phase behavior and volumetric behavior of
both oil and gas. This treatment makes it possible for separator conditions
to be exactly modeled, while using differential expansion data to describe
fluid behavior in the reservoir. This eliminates the conflict between
differential and flash volumetrics that creates difficulty for conventional
black-oil simulators.
00 Some of the options for separator data input given in Section 4.7.1 in the
reference manual for VIP-CORE are not yet available in the simulation
modules. If data for one of these options is available, the option should be
used in VIP-CORE.
3-78 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Separator input data include the following:
1. Definition of the separator configuration. This includes the number of

stages, the destinations of the two outflow streams leaving each stage,
and the fraction of each outflow stream that flows to each destination.
2. The density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last separator
stage.
3. The molecular weight of the stock tank oil. Since the separator data
should correspond to a fluid described in one of the PVT tables, a
liquid molecular weight should not be input. Molecular weight can
and will be calculated from the input K-values and the differential
liberation data.
4. The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for each
stage of separation. The use of K-values derived from the last step in
the differential liberation experiment can lead to large errors in surface
volume calculations (for reasons discussed below). This option should
only be used when accurate separator K-values and liquid density are
known.
00 One must take great care to insure that the input K-values are consistent
with the internally defined component molecular weights, which are
printed out in the Default Separator Properties Table in VIP-CORE.
SEPARATOR ibat
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST (label card)
n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1 (type 1 data card)
X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2 (type 2 data card)
(Type 1 and 2 data cards are repeated as necessary to
define all of the stages of separation.)
DLIQ MWL (label card)
dliq mwl (type 3 data card)
KVALUES (label card)
COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2. . .STAGE n) (label card)
comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln) (type 4 data card)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid system.)
00 Definitions:


R2003.4 - Landmark 3-79



00 vd n1 = GAS ( alpha label )


n will be sent to the destination indicated by ldn1.
this stage, so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.

00 ld n1 =
OIL ( alpha label )
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first location

on the type 2 data card.



values of lfn1 and lfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.

dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving

the last separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component name (or number).
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
3-80 Landmark - R2003.4

3.3.3 K-Value Separation Data, VIP-ENCORE (SEPARATOR)
SEPARATOR ibat
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST (label card)
n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1 (type 1 data card)
X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2 (type 2 data card)
(Type 1 and 2 data cards are repeated as necessary to
define all of the stages of separation.)
DLIQ MWL (label card)
dliq mwl (type 3 data card)
KVALUES (label card)
COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2. . .STAGE n) (label card)
comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln) (type 4 data card)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid system.)
00 Definitions:




vd n1 = GAS ( alpha label )


n to be sent to the destination indicated by ldn1.
this stage so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.

ld n1 =
OIL ( alpha label )
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-81

X Alpha label that must be entered in the first

location on the type 2 data card.



values of lfnl and lfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.

dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving

the last separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component number.
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
NOTE: Each separator battery may contain any number of stages. Each
stage contains one feed stream and two output streams: vapor and
liquid. Each of the two output streams can itself be split into two
streams, each of which may be fed to; any downstream separator
stage, the gas sales line (GAS) or the oil sales line (OIL).
Separator data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

modules. Separator batteries in addition to those defined in VIP-
CORE may be input, and those defined in VIP-CORE may be
redefined. This last statement is not true when the PVT
interpolation option is in use; separator data may not be input in
the simulation modules.
The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for

each stage of separation. The use of K-values derived from the last
step in the differential liberation experiment can lead to large errors
in surface volume calculations (for reasons discussed below). This
option should only be used when accurate separator K-values and
liquid density are known. When using this option, one must take
great care to insure that the input K-values are consistent with the
internally defined component molecular weights, which are
printed out in the default separator properties table.
DEFAULT SEPARATOR
3-82 Landmark - R2003.4

The default separator is single stage at standard temperature and

pressure. A vapor fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination GAS
(gas sales line) and a liquid fraction of 1.0 is assigned the
destination OIL (oil sales line).
Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for
surface volume calculations by means of the REGSEP Card.
Default separator K-values are derived in one of two ways

depending on whether or not saturated oil mole fractions at the
initial saturation pressure are input in the K-value PVT tabular
data. If these mole fractions are not input, default K-values are
equal to those in the last entry of the KVTAB table (at standard
pressure). This may cause large errors in surface volumes if the
default separator is used for separation, since these K-values
correspond to the last step in the laboratory differential liberation
experiment in which a relatively large fraction of the heavy
components is vaporized. If saturated oil mole fractions at the
initial saturation pressure are input, this fluid is flashed stepwise
through the KVTAB data (corresponding to the differential
liberation test) to standard pressure using the input K-values in the
table. Default separator K-values are then calculated based on the
composition of the total gas liberated between the initial saturation
pressure and standard pressure, and the composition of the oil at
standard pressure.
The default separator oil z-factor is determined by one of several

methods which depends on whether or not residual oil z-factor,
density, or API gravity is input in the K-value PVT tabular data. If
none of these residual oil properties is input, the default separator
oil z-factor is given by the oil z-factor in the last entry of the table
(at standard pressure) corrected for temperature. Since this neglects
oil density variation between reservoir and standard temperature,
error in oil surface volume will result. If a residual oil z-factor is
input, this is the default separator value. If residual oil density or
API gravity is input, in which case oil composition at the initial
saturation pressure must also be input, the residual oil composition
obtained for the stepwise flash to derive default separator K-values
(as described above) is used to calculate a residual oil molecular
weight. The default separator oil z-factor is then calculated from
this molecular weight and the input residual oil density or API
gravity.
00 Examples:
00 C=============================================
C BLACK-OIL AND K-VALUE SINGLE STAGE SEPARATOR
C =============================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 1. GAS 1. OIL
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-83

DLIQ MWL
0.8966 200
C
KVALUES
COMP STAGE 1
00 1 89.4
2 0.0056
3.3.4 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT) (Not available in VIP-THERM)
GASPLANT
NKEY ikey ibat
KEYCMP
vkcmp1 vkcmp2 ... vkcmpj ... vkcmpNI
(enter number of KEY component plus composition values for
interpolation. j=1 to number of interpolation points, NI)
PLNTRY
pr1,1 pr1,2 ... pr1,j ... pr1,NI
pr2,1 pr2,2 ... pr2,j ... pr2,NI
. . . .
. . . .
pri,1 pri,2 ... pri,j ... pri,NI
. . .
prNC,1 prNC,2 ... prNC,j ... prNC,NI
(enter the plant liquid molar recovery fractions for each
interpolation point, j=1 to number of interpolation values, NI and
repeat for all components, i=1 to the number of components, NC)
00 Definitions:
NKEY Alpha label indicating that the key component plus

fraction number and battery are to be read. The
cards KEYCMP and PLNTRY defined below should
follow the NKEY card, as all values correspond to
ibat, the battery defined on this card.
ikey The number of the key component plus fraction to

be used in the liquid recovery fraction table look up.
The sum of the well stream over all mole fraction
from the key component plus all the following
components are used in the table look up of
component liquid recovery values.
ibat The battery number of the Gas Plant.
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating the key component plus over

all mole fractions are to be entered. These are the
sum of key component plus mole fractions that are
to be used in the liquid recovery fraction table look
3-84 Landmark - R2003.4

up. The key component plus fraction is used for

ibat, the battery defined on the NKEY card.
vkcmp The value of the sum of key component plus

fraction to be used as an interpolation value. There
are NI number of interpolation point values to be
read. They should be on one card and should cover
the range of sums that are to be expected in the run.
The range of values on this card should be between
0. and 1. NI is determined by the number of values
read on the card.
PLNTRY Alpha label indicating that the separate liquid

recovery fractions will be entered. The liquid
recovery fraction is the molar fraction of the
component that will be separated to the liquid
stream. The plant recovery values are for ibat, the
battery that was defined on the NKEY card.
pr The fraction of the component that will be

separated to the liquid stream in the Gas Plant. The
liquid recovery fractions are entered for each
component as a function of the key component plus
mole fraction and one value must be entered for NI
points and for each component. The data must be
ordered so that the liquid recovery fractions should
be entered for component 1 for all values of key
component plus fraction interpolation points (NI).
The next card is for component 2 recovery fractions
at NI points. This continues until all component
values have been read. In all there should be (NI *
NC) values read. The values must be between 0.
and 1.
NOTE: Input to a gas plant is the total well stream, while output is
determined by the molar liquid recovery fractions. There are no
surface flash calculations as are carried out with a normal surface
separator.
A gasplant can be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

modules. Surface batteries in addition to those defined in VIP-
CORE may be input, and those defined in VIP-CORE can be
redefined in the simulation modules.
The user may optionally enter the surface separator equation-of-

state parameters. These parameters will be used for the stock tank
density calculations to obtain the surface rates. The new equation-
of-state parameters must follow the last stage of the battery to
which they apply. The values of the separator equation-of-state
parameters will default to the reservoir values if not given.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-85

00 Examples:
00 C=========================================
C GAS PLANT SURFACE SEPARATOR
C =========================================
GASPLANT
NKEY 6 1
KEYCMP
C DEFINE KEY COMPONENT PLUS FRACTIONS (NC = 6 TO 8)
C NUMBER OF INTERPOLATION POINTS (NI= 11)
.9999 .108 .104 .098 .075 .065 .047 .028 .018 .010 .000
PLNTRY
C DEFINE COMPONENT LIQUID RECOVERIES (NI = 11, NC =8)
.0240 .0240 .0240 .0220 .0170 .0140 .0100 .0050 .0030 .0020 .0020
.0070 .0070 .0070 .0060 .0050 .0040 .0030 .0010 .0010 .0000 .0000
.0610 .0610 .0590 .0560 .0430 .0370 .0270 .0140 .0090 .0060 .0060
.1790 .1790 .1750 .1690 .1370 .1220 .0920 .0550 .0400 .0290 .0290
.4680 .4680 .4640 .4530 .4000 .3710 .3050 .2200 .1770 .1480 .1480
.9960 .9960 .9960 .9960 .9940 .9930 .9890 .9790 .9690 .9590 .9590
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
3.3.5 Separator Switching (NEWSEP)

00 The NEWSEP card allows the user to assign separator batteries to a well as
a function of either the flowing bottomhole pressure of the well or the
tubinghead pressure of the well.
NEWSEP BHP wl
THP
l1 l2 . . . ln
h1 h2 . . . hn
p1 p2 . . . pn
00 Definitions:
BHP Alpha label indicating that the assigning of

separator batteries is based on the flowing
bottomhole pressure of the well. This is the default.
THP Alpha label indicating that the assigning of

separator batteries is based on the tubinghead
pressure of the well.
wl List of well numbers for which l, h, and p values are

being entered (see Section 1.5.2).
l Separator battery number for low pressure.
3-86 Landmark - R2003.4

h Separator battery number for high pressure.
p Bottomhole/tubinghead pressure, psia (kPa).
NOTE: 1. If flowing bottomhole pressure/tubinghead pressure is less

than pi for welli, separator battery li will be used. If flowing
bottomhole pressure/tubinghead pressure is greater than or
equal to pi, separator battery hi will be used.
2. If it is desired to use one of the default separators defined by

VIP-CORE, then l or h should be set to -npvt, where npvt is a
PVT table number (VIP-ENCORE) or 1 (VIP-COMP).
3. The THP option on the NEWSEP card may not be used for a
well unless a tubinghead pressure constraint (THP card) is
specified for that well.
3.3.6 Surface Facility Model Input (TSFM)

00
gas
gas rate
gas
plant
gas
separator
battery gas
oil
oil
stabilizer
H/C/well stream
oil
stock
oil rate tank
00 Hydrocarbon component recovery factors are specified for the oil

stabilizer and gas plant units (moles of component i recovered as oil/mole
component i in feed). The component molar rates from the gas plant are
converted to surface volumetric rates using specified component molar
densities (LB mole/ft3).
00 The well gas rate is defined at the gas inlet to the gas plant. The default
well oil rate is at the oil outlet of the oil stabilizer. However, if the keyword
ADDNGL is specified on the TSFM card, the well oil rate is redefined as
the sum of the oil from the oil stabilizer plus the natural gas liquids (oil)
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-87

from the gas plant. All well and group constraints apply at these points,
unless the keyword DRYTRG is specified on the TSFM card. If so, the gas
group constraints apply to the gas leaving the gas plant (after liquids have
been stripped).
00 Gas reinjection options apply to gas produced from the gas plant.
00 Stream rates, cumulatives, and compositions are reported in the TSFM

Surface Facility Model Report. Output is controlled by the PRINT WELLS
card.
00 Information on streams leaving the separator battery or on separator stage

streams is obtained from the SEPARATOR report.
TSFM (ADDNGL)(DRYTRG)
rfs1 rfs2 ... rfsnc
rfp1 rfp2 ... rfpnc
denp1 denp2 ... denpnc
00 Definitions:
TSFM Alpha label which turns on the Surface Facility

Model.
ADDNGL Alpha label which redefines the well oil rate as the
sum of the oil from the oil stabilizer plus the natural
gas liquids (oil) from the gas plant. The default
well oil rate is only the oil from the oil stabilizer.
This will affect all well group constraints with
respect to oil rate.
DRYTRG Alpha label indicating that gas targets apply to gas

leaving the gas plant (after liquids have been
stripped). The default is for the gas targets to apply
to gas entering the gas plant (before liquids have
been stripped).
rfsi Hydrocarbon component recovery factors for the oil

stabilizer, moles of i produced as oil/mole of i in
feed.
rfpi Hydrocarbon component recovery factors for the

gas plant, moles of i produced as oil/mole of i in
feed.
denpi Hydrocarbon component molar densities used to

convert gas plant oil product stream rate to surface
volumetric rate, LB moles/ft3.
3-88 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: Usage of the TSFM option will change the oil in place calculations
for the REGION summary report, based on the possibility that the
separators defined do not yield proper stock tank volumes without
the inclusion of the oil stabilizer. (i.e., the separators defined are
only the high pressure or low pressure separators, and by
themselves do not yield correct stock tank volumes.)
3.4 Well Type

00 Each well must be identified as either a production well or an injection
well. The PROD, INJ, and WAG cards are used for this purpose. These
cards also allow the user to identify the primary fluid being produced/
injected at a rate specified on either the QMAX card or the QMULT card.
For producers, other fluids may be produced in conjunction with the
primary fluid based upon mobility.
00 If a minimum rate constraint is imposed on a well by means of a QMIN

card, the fluid phase used in determining that constraint is defined by the
ECOLIM card.
00 In VIP-EXECUTIVE, the fluid production (injection) of a well may be

constrained at five levels: the individual well level, the gathering center
level, the flow station level, the area level, and the field level. Multiple
constraints may be imposed at each level. For example, at the well level,
oil production may be limited by minimum and maximum rates, water
cut, GOR, and bottomhole pressure. All of these constraints may be
imposed simultaneously. At the gathering center level, production targets
can be allocated back to individual wells. At the highest level, field-wide
targets can be imposed. The well constraint hierarchy is described in detail
in Section 3.4, 3.5, and 3.6.
3.4.1 Production Well Definition (PROD)

00 A PROD card must precede a QMAX or QMULT card for producers.
00 A PROD card is required for production wells to define the production

phase and units being used for data on the QMAX (maximum well rate)
card or the QMULT (multiple rate) card.
W STD
PROD wl
O RES
G MOLES
ALL
LIQUID
MULTRT
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-89

00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the type of maximum production rate specified

on the QMAX card or the QMULT card. Valid labels for fluid
production rate are:
W Water.
O Oil.
G Gas.
ALL All fluid components combined.
LIQUID Total liquid (oil plus water).
MULTRT Alpha label indicating the rate defined by the

QMULT card is specified separately for each fluid
phase. Rates are specified in STB/D (STCM/D) for
water and oil, and MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas. The
separate rates are converted internally to reservoir
barrel equivalents and summed to obtain a total
reservoir barrel rate for all fluid phases combined.
This conversion occurs at the start of each timestep.
Rates for this type of well must be specified with a
QMULT card.
Alpha label indicating units type:
STD Standard conditions. STB/D (STCM/D) for water,

oil, or liquid. MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas. Not
permitted for ALL.
RES Reservoir conditions, rb/D (cm/D).
MOLES Lb-moles/D (lb-moles/D). Only permitted for ALL.
wl List of all production wells with rates specified in

this manner (see Section 1.5.2).
NOTE: 1. One and only one of the labels W, O, G, ALL, LIQUID or

MULTRT must be specified. There is no default. Timestep
convergence may be slowed by use of the ALL or MULTRT
options.
2. If no units type is specified, the default is STD except for ALL.

The default for ALL is RES.
3. When an injection well is converted to a production well, and if

the injectors bhp value is the default value 10,000 psia, then
the bhp value will be changed to 0 psia. Otherwise, previously
input BHP or THP data will be maintained.
3-90 Landmark - R2003.4

4. Specifying a PROD card for a shut-in well will cause the well to
be "turned back on".
5. The QMULT card may be used to input rates for the well types,
W, O, G, or LIQUID. The appropriate rate(s) are taken from
QMULT data, ignoring the remaining rates. For example, for a
LIQUID producer the oil and water rates will be summed to get
the maximum well rate. The gas rate will not be used.
00 Example:
00 C
PROD ALL 1 -364 390 -428 438 -507 514 -538
C
00 or
00 C***************************************************
C DEFINE WELL CHARACTERISTICS
C***************************************************
PROD LIQUID STD 2 -14 18 22 24 -37 41
3.4.2 Injection Well Definition (INJ)

00 An INJ card must precede a QMAX card for injectors.
00 An INJ card is required for injection wells to define the injected phase and
units being used for data on the QMAX (maximum well rate) card.
STD GATHER

INJ W RES FLOSTA KEYCMP wl
FSTD MI
G AREA
FRES FIELD
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the maximum injection rate specified on the

QMAX card is based on:
W Water (Water and steam in VIP-THERM).
G Gas.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-91

STD Standard conditions, STB/D (STCM/D) for water

injectors, MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas injectors. This
is the default.
FSTD A fraction of the total surface production rate of the

injected phase within a specified level of the well
management hierarchy (see below). Note that some
options (for example, the UNIFORM gas injection
option ) change the definition of FSTD.
FRES A fraction of the total fluid withdrawal (at reservoir

conditions) within a specified level of the well
management hierarchy (see below). Note that some
options (for example, the injection region option)
change the definition of FRES.
When FSTD or FRES is specified, the level in the well management

hierarchy upon which replacement is based may be specified. The well
management level may also be specified for MI injectors with STD or
RES specification to identify the level upon which the MI composition
determined from the MI plant in the major gas sales option is to be
used for the injection composition. In this case, YINJ cards for MI
injectors should be omitted and the MI plant calculation for the
selected well management level must be invoked (see PLANT card in
Section 4.4). The well management levels are:
GATHER Gathering Center. This is the default for FSTD or

FRES specification.
FLOSTA Flow station.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field. This is the default for STD or RES

specification with MI plant in the major gas sales
option.
If a gas conditioning plant in the major gas sales option is present, and
keyword DIST is specified in the GASCOND card, a portion of the
FSTD gas injectors may be assigned to receive the key component
(component icomp in the GASCOND card) removed from the sales
gas stream using the following keyword:
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating that the key component

stream removed from the sales gas in the gas
conditioning plant will be injected into the gas
injectors specified in this INJ card. These gas
injectors must be specified as FSTD injectors and a
3-92 Landmark - R2003.4

GASCOND card with keyword DIST must also be

specified.
Alternatively, in the four-component miscible (Todd and Longstaff)

option the wells being specified on this card may be identified as MI
injectors through input of alpha label MI. In this case, the wells must
be specified as FSTD injectors and an MI recovery factor must be
specified using a RECFAC card (see Section 4.4.9).
MI Alpha label indicating that the wells being defined

are MI injectors in a four-component miscible
model. These injectors must be specified as FSTD
injectors and an MI recovery factor must be
specified using a RECFAC card.
wl List of all injection wells with rates specified in this

manner (see Section 1.5.2).
NOTE: 1. Either W or G must be specified. There is no default.
2. Optionally, exactly one of the labels STD, RES, FSTD, and FRES
may be specified. If none is specified, STD is the default.
3. Optionally, if either FSTD or FRES is specified, exactly one of

the labels GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, and FIELD may be
specified. If none is specified, GATHER is the default.
4. Optionally, if either STD or RES is specified and the major gas

sales option (with MI plants) for a well management level is
invoked, the well management level (label GATHER, FLOSTA,
AREA, or FIELD) may be specified to identify the level upon
which the calculated MI composition from the MI plant is to be
used as the injection composition. In this case, the injection
composition (YINJ card) may be omitted (the input of YINJ
card will cause the calculated MI composition to be ignored). If
none is specified, FIELD is the default.
5. When a production well is converted to an injection well, any

previously input WLIMIT, GLIMIT, or QMIN data will be
ignored, and the ECOLIM unit will be set to the injection phase.
Also, if the producers bhp value is the default value 0 psia,
then the bhp value will be changed to 10,000 psia. Otherwise,
previously input BHP or THP data will be maintained.
6. Anytime a gas injection well is specified or respecified as either

STD or RES, and the wells are not to be identified as MI wells
(with MI plant in the major gas sales option), the composition
of the injected gas must be defined using the YINJ card.
7. Optionally, if an FSTD gas well is specified and a GASCOND

card with keyword DIST is also present, keyword KEYCMP
may be specified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-93

8. Optionally, if FSTD gas wells are specified and the four-

component miscible option is invoked, keyword MI may be
specified to identify the MI injectors.
9. Specifying an INJ card for a shut-in well will cause the well to
be turned back on.
00 Example:
00 C
INJ G STD 253 -266 324 -326 365 -381
YINJ 253 -266 324 -326 365 -381
0.9944 0.0056
C
INJ G STD GATHER 1 -10
C
INJ G FSTD FIELD KEYCMP 11 -20
3.4.2.1 Temperature Specification (VIP-THERM)
A TINJ card must be specified for all injection wells in VIP-THERM.
TINJ wl
tinj1 tinj2 . . . tinjn
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which the data is being specified

(see Section 1.5.2).
tinj Injection temperature, F (C).
3.4.2.2 Steam Quality Specification (VIP-THERM)
QUAL cards must be specified for water/steam injection wells in VIP-

THERM.
QUAL wl
qual1 qual2 . . . qualn
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which the data is being defined (see

Section 1.5.2).
qual Steam quality, mass fraction vapor.
3-94 Landmark - R2003.4

3.4.2.3 Pressure Specification (VIP-THERM)
If a quality of 0.0 or 1.0 is specified for a water/steam injector, then a

PINJ card must be specified for the well.
PINJ wl
pinj1 pinj2 ... pinjn
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which the data are being defined

pinj Injection pressure, psia (kPa).
3.4.2.4 Treatment of Water/Steam Injectors (VIP-THERM)
The equation describing the mass rate of water/steam injection is:
[ kh ] [ P
o
q = 0.001127 WI l bl P bh ( D l D o ) ] (3-1)
l=1
where
q = H20 injection rate.

o
P bh = Datum flowing bottomhole pressure.
WI = Well index.
khl = Permeability thickness product for perforation l.
l = Mobility for perforation l.
l = Average density for perforation l.
Pbl = Pressure of gridblock containing perforation l.
= Average fluid density over perforated interval of

the well.
Dl = Subsea depth of perforation l.
Do = Datum depth.
The rate of energy injection is given by
E=qH
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-95

where H is the enthalpy of the injected steam/water mixture which is

assumed constant over the perforated interval and with time. H is
calculated from the user specified values of TINJ, QUAL, and PINJ (if
QUAL = 0 or 1).
The average density term l is Equation 3-1 is calculated from phase

densities wl, sl and quality Ql:
wl sl
l = --------------------------------------------
- (3-2)
sl + Q l ( wl gl )
The perforation quality Ql is calculated from enthalpy H and pressure Pl.

If Ql is 0 or 1, then the perforation temperature Tl is calculated. Otherwise,
Tl is the water saturation temperature at Pl. Ideally, Pl should be set to
o
P bh ( D l D o ) , which is the pressure in the wellbore opposite
perforation l. However, this poses problems for a fully implicit model,
especially since is a function of l. Hence, we use Pl = Pbl (pressure of
griblock containing perforation l. Phase densities wl and sl are evaluated
at Pl, Tl.
There are three options for treatment of the mobility term in Equation 3-
1. Conventionally, is taken as the total mobility of the gridblock
containing the perforation:
kro krg krw

= -------- + -------- + ---------- (3-3)
o g w
where the relative permeabilities are evaluated at gridblock conditions

using the perforation relative permeability functions and the viscosities
are gridblock values. There are two disadvantages to this method in
thermal simulation:
1. Extreme nonlinearities are introduced into Equation 3-1, mainly

through temperature dependence of the viscosities. Stable timestep
size will be significantly reduced relative to other methods, especially
near the initiation of injection (at low temperatures).
2. If the gridblock is large relative to the drainage radius of the well, the
mobility should be evaluated at near-wellbore conditions rather than
at average gridblock conditions.
The total mobility method is available as an option. In the endpoint

method (default), it is assumed that the formation in the vicinity of the
wellbore which controls injectivity is quickly reduced to some irreducible
oil saturation which depends on Ql. The effect of the saturation changes
occurring during this period on mobility are neglected. Perforation
mobilities are given by the volumetric average of the water mobility at
residual oil to water and the steam mobility at residual oil to gas:
3-96 Landmark - R2003.4

1 Q l krwrol Q l krgrol
--------------- ----------------- + ------ ----------------
wl wl sl sl
l = ------------------------------------------------------------------
- (3-4)
1 Ql Ql
--------------- + ------
wl sl
where relative permeabiliites and phase densities and viscosities are

evaluated at Pl, Tl. The third option is that the perforation mobilities may
be (in effect) user-specified as constant values using the KHWI option on
the FPERF card (Section 3.2.2). For injectors, KHWI is defined as:
KHWI l = 0.001127 WI kh l l (3-5)
The WINJMOB card allows the user to select between the first two
options.
ENDPOINT
WINJMOB
TOTAL
Definitions:
ENDPOINT Alpha label which activates endpoint mobility,

Equation 3-4 (default).
TOTAL Alpha label which activates total mobilty option,

Equation 3-3.
Previous to version 1.8R, the endpoint method was used with the
following differences:
1. Ql in Equation 3-2 and 3-4 was set to the user specified value of QUAL.
2. Phase densities and viscosities in Equation 3-2 and 3-4 were evaluated
at the user-specified value of TINJ and the corresponding water
saturation pressure.
Simulation results using this method can be reproduced by specification of

the keyword OLDINJ.
OLDINJ
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-97

3.4.3 Define Additional Injection Rate for FSTD or FRES Wells (INJA)
00 The INJA card is used to specify an additional injection rate for either
FRES or FSTD wells.
INJA qa wl
00 Definitions:
qa Additional injection rate for FSTD or FRES wells.
wl List of injection wells for which qa are being

specified (see Section 1.5.2)
NOTE: The unit is determined by the INJ card. If the well specified on the
INJ card is an FRES well, then qa is reservoir rate. If it is an FSTD
well, then qa is surface rate.
The INJA card should be specified after the INJ card.
This option can be used for both the standard reinjection or general
injection option.
If the well is a gas injection well using the standard reinjection

option, the YINJA card can be used to specify the gas composition
for the additional rate.
3.4.4 Computation of Mobility for Gas Injectors (GINJMOB)

00 The GINJMOB card is used to specify the method to use for computing the
mobility for gas injection wells.
ENDPOINT
GINJMOB
TOTAL
00 Definitions:
ENDPOINT Alpha label indicating that endpoint mobilities will

be used for gas injectors. This is the default.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating that total gridblock

mobilities will be used for gas injectors.
3-98 Landmark - R2003.4

3.4.5 Computation of Mobility for Water Injectors (WINJMOB)

00 The WINJMOB card is used to specify the method to use for computing
the mobility for water injection wells.
ENDPOINT
WINJMOB
TOTAL
00 Definitions:
ENDPOINT Alpha label indicating that endpoint mobilities will

be used for water injectors. This is the default.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating that total gridblock

mobilities will be used for water injectors.
3.4.6 Production Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNSTP)

00 The ITNSTP card allows the user to specify the outer iteration number
after which production rates will not be recomputed for the remainder of
the timestep. The maximum drawdown constraint option (DPBHMX
card) makes use of this iteration number to fix the bottomhole pressure of
a constrained producer for the remainder of the timestep.
ITNSTP itnstp
00 Definition:
itnstp Outer iteration number after which production

rates will not be recomputed for the timestep.
Default is 99999, meaning the rates will be
computed every outer iteration.
3.4.7 Water Injection Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNSTQ)

00 The ITNSTQ card allows the user to specify the outer iteration number
after which water injection rates will not be recomputed for the remainder
of the timestep. The maximum drawdown constraint option (DPBHMX
card) makes use of this iteration number to fix the bottomhole pressure of
a constrained injector for the remainder of the timestep.
ITNSTQ itnstq
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-99

00 Definition:
itnstq Outer iteration number after which water injection

Default is 99999, meaning the rates will be
computed for every outer iteration.
3.4.8 Gas Reinjection Rates Outer Iteration Number (ITNGRE)

00 The ITNGRE card allows the user to specify the outer iteration number
after which gas reinjection rates will not be recomputed for the remainder
of the timestep.
ITNGRE itngre
00 Definition:
itngre Outer iteration number after which gas reinjection

Default is -1, meaning an internal algorithm is used
to determine the number of iterations.
NOTE: 1. The gas reinjection rates are used for FSTD gas injectors and in
the general injection region option (RINJOP INJREG).
2. The default algorithm for computing the value of itngre is
itngre = max(min(itnmax - 3, 3), 1),
where itnmax is the maximum number of outer iterations per

timestep from the ITNLIM card.
3-100 Landmark - R2003.4

3.4.9 Change Well Type Class (WLTYCH)

00 The WLTYCH card is used to immediately change the well type of one
class of wells to another type.
WLTYCH
FROM *
TO *
00 W
O (STD)
where * =PROD G (RES)
ALL (MOLES)
LIQUID
MULTRT
or
(STD) (GATHER)
INJ W (RES) (FLOSTA)
G (FSTD) (AREA)
(FRES) (FIELD)
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the type of maximum production rate specified

on the QMAX card or the QMULT card. Valid labels for fluid
production rate are:
W Water.
O Oil.
G Gas.
ALL All fluid components combined.
LIQUID Total liquid (oil plus water).
MULTRT Rate for each fluid phase. See PROD card for more
detailed discussion.
STD Standard conditions. STB/D (STCM/D) for water,

oil, or liquid. MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas. Not
permitted for ALL.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-101

MOLES Lb-moles/D (lb-moles/D). Only permitted for ALL.
Alpha label indicating the maximum injection rate specified on the

QMAX card is based on:
W Water.
G Gas.
STD Standard conditions, STB/D (STCM/D) for water

injectors, MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas injectors. This
is the default.
FSTD A fraction of the total surface production rate of the

injected phase within a specified level of the well
management hierarchy (see below).
FRES A fraction of the total fluid withdrawal (at reservoir

conditions) within a specified level of the well
management hierarchy (see below).
When FSTD or FRES is specified, the level in the well management

hierarchy upon which replacement is based may be specified. These
are:
GATHER Gathering Center. This is the default.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
NOTE: 1. At the exact moment in the program that this card is read, all
wells of the type designated by the FROM data will be
converted to wells of the type designated by the TO data.
2. It is up to the user to make sure all well data are consistent with
this switch.
3-102 Landmark - R2003.4

3.5 Well Constraints

00 Each well produces/injects at the maximum rate defined by a QMAX card
or a QMULT card, subject to reduction to honor other applicable
constraints.
3.5.1 Maximum Rate (QMAX)

00 Must be preceded by aPROD or INJ card (Section 3.4.1 and 3.4.2).
00 The QMAX card defines the maximum rate a well is allowed to produce/
inject. A QMAX card, or a QMULT card, is required for the well to flow.
QMAX wl
qmax1 qmax2 . . . qmaxn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which qmax values are being

specified (see Section 1.5.2).
qmax Maximum rate at which the well is allowed to

produce/inject. Units are determined by the PROD
or INJ card. Default is zero.
NOTE: 1. The well produces/injects at a rate of qmax unless this causes

a violation of one of the other constraints defined by the user.
In this event, the constraint is observed, which causes a rate
reduction.
2. The number of qmax values must equal the number of wells in

the well list.
3. For the FSTD injection option, qmax is the fraction of the total
surface production rate of the injected phase within the
appropriate level. For the FRES injection option, qmax is the
fraction of the total reservoir volume production rate within
the appropriate level. Note that certain options (UNIFORM gas
injection, injection region) change the definitions of FSTD and
FRES.
00 Example:
00 C
INJ W STD 382 -389 429 -437 508 -513
00 QMAX 382 -389 429 -437 508 -513

8*10000 9*0 6*10000
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-103

3.5.2 Water Limit - Water Cut, Rate or Liquid-Gas Ratio Constraint

(WLIMIT)
00 This card can be used in conjunction with a TEST card (Section 3.5.13).
00 The WLIMIT card allows the user to define a maximum water cut, water
rate, or liquid-gas ratio for a production well.
PLUG
WLIMIT SHUTIN (LGR) wl
LIMIT
wmax1 wmax2 . . . wmaxn
(wcut1 wcut2 . . . wcutn)
00 Definitions:
PLUG Alpha label indicating that the well is automatically

recompleted whenever water cut exceeds wmax.
When the well has just one active perforation, the
check is against wcut instead of wmax.
Recompletion consists of plugging the perforation
with the highest water cut. If there is only one
perforation, the well is permanently shut in. Once a
perforation has been plugged, it never produces/
injects again, unless the well is reperforated by an
FPERF card.
SHUTIN Alpha label indicating that the well is automatically

shut in whenever water cut exceeds wmax. It
periodically is tested according to data on the TEST
card. If water cut is found to be less than wmax
during a test, the well is returned to production.
LIMIT Alpha label indicating that the water production

rate is not allowed to exceed wmax, STB/D
(STCM/D). The specified production rate is
reduced, if necessary. The water production limit is
rechecked every timestep.
LGR Alpha label indicating that the PLUG and SHUTIN

options apply to liquid-gas ratio instead of water
cut. The LIMIT option is unaffected.
wl List of wells to which these restrictions apply (see

Section 1.5.2).
wmax Limiting water cut or water production rate, or

liquid-gas ratio, depending on the option selected.
3-104 Landmark - R2003.4

wcut Limiting water cut or liquid-gas ratio for wells with

only one active perforation. Available only for the
PLUG option. This entire card may be omitted, in
which case the default is wcuti = wmaxi.
NOTE: 1. One and only one of the PLUG, SHUTIN, or LIMIT labels must
be specified.
2. The number of wmax and wcut values must equal the number
of wells in the well list. None of these restrictions is applied to
wells not named on a WLIMIT card.
3. Only the SHUTIN option is affected by the TEST card.
4. WLIMIT data may not be specified for injection wells.
5. Liquid-gas ratios are specified in units of STB/MMSCF

(STCM/MSCM).
6. Specifying a WLIMIT card for a shut-in well will cause the well
to be "turned back on".
00 Example:
00 TIME 5
C
WLIMIT SHUTIN
1 -252 267 -323 327 -364 390 -428 252*.99 57*.99 38*.99 39*.99
C
3.5.3 Gas Limit - GOR or Rate Constraint (GLIMIT)

00 The GLIMIT card allows the user to define a maximum gas-oil ratio or gas
rate for a production well.
00 GOR or Rate Constraint
PLUG
GLIMIT SHUTIN wl
LIMIT
gmax1 gmax2 . . . gmaxn
(gorm1 gorm2 . . . gormn)
00 Definitions:

recompleted whenever the producing gas-oil ratio
exceeds gmax, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). When the
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-105

well has just one active perforation, the check is

against gorm instead of gmax. Recompletion
consists of plugging the perforation with the
highest gas-oil ratio. If there is only one perforation,
the well is permanently shut-in. Once a perforation
has been plugged, it never produces/injects again
unless the well is reperforated by an FPERF card.

shut in whenever the producing gas-oil ratio
exceeds gmax, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). It is tested
periodically according to data on the TEST card. If
the gas-oil ratio is found to be less than gmax
LIMIT Alpha label indicating that the gas production rate

is not allowed to exceed gmax, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
The specified production rate is reduced, if
necessary. The gas production limit is rechecked
every timestep.

Section 1.5.2).
gmax Limiting gas-oil ratio or gas production rate,

depending on the option selected.
gorm Limiting gas-oil ratio for wells with only one active
perforation. Available only for the PLUG option.
This entire card may be omitted, in which case the
default is gormi = gmaxi.
NOTE: 1. One and only one of the PLUG, SHUTIN, or LIMIT labels must
be specified.
2. The number of gmax and gorm values must equal the number
of wells in the well list. None of these restrictions is applied to
wells not named on a GLIMIT card.
4. GLIMIT data may not be specified for injection wells.
5. Specifying a GLIMIT card for a shut-in well will cause the well
3-106 Landmark - R2003.4

3.5.4 Steam Limit - Steam Rate or Steam-Oil Ratio Constraint (SLIMIT)

(VIP-THERM)
00 The SLIMIT card allows the user to define a maximum steam rate or
steam-oil ratio for a production well.
PLUG
SLIMIT SHUTIN (SOR) wl
smax1 smax2 . . . smaxn

(smaxl1 smaxl2 . . . smaxln)
00 Definitions:

recompleted whenever steam rate exceeds smax.
When the well has just one active perforation, the
check is against smaxl instead of smax.
Recompletion consists of plugging the perforation
with the highest steam rate. If there is only one
perforation, the well is permanently shut in. Once a
perforation has been plugged, it never produces/
injects again, unless the well is reperforated by an
FPERF card.

shut in whenever the steam rate exceeds smax. It
periodically is tested according to data on the TEST
card. If steam rate is found to be less than smax
SOR Alpha label indicating that the PLUG and SHUTIN

options apply to steam-oil ratio instead of steam
rate.

Section 1.5.2).
smax Limiting steam production rate, STB(CWE)/D

(STCM(CWE)/D),or steam-oil ratio, STB(CWE)/
STB (STCM(CWE)/STCM), depending on the
option selected.
smaxl Limiting steam rate or steam-oil ratio for wells with

only one active perforation. Available only for the
PLUG option. This entire card may be omitted, in
which case the default is smaxli = smaxi.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-107

NOTE: 1. One and only one of the PLUG or SMAXL SHUTIN labels must
be specified.
2. The number of smax and smaxl values must equal the

number of wells in the well list. None of these restrictions is
applied to wells not named on a WLIMIT card.
4. SLIMIT data may not be specified for injection wells.
5. Steam-oil ratios are specified in units of STB(CWE)/STB

(STCM [CWE]/STCM). (CWE = cold water equivalent.)
6. Specifying a SLIMIT card for a shut-in well will cause the well
00 Example:
00 TIME 5
C
SLIMIT SHUTIN SOR
1 -252 267 -323 327 -364 390 -428 252*.99 57*.99 38*.99 39*.99
C
3.5.5 Ecomonic Limit (ECOLIM)

00 An ECOLIM card is required to define the units being used for data on the
QMIN (minimum well rate) card.
W
ECOLIM O wl
G
LIQUID
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the minimum production/injection specified on

the QMIN card is based on:
W Water, STB/D (STCM/D).
O Oil, STB/D (STCM/D).
G Gas, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
LIQUID Liquid, STB/D (STCM/D).
wl List of all wells with minimum rates specified in

3-108 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: 1. The ECOLIM card is used for both producers and injectors.
One and only one of the W, O, G, or LIQUID labels must be
specified. There is no default.
2. Specifying an ECOLIM card for a shut-in well will cause the

well to be "turned back on".
3.5.6 Perforation Test Schedule (TSTPRF)

00 The TSTPRF card is used to specify the time interval between perforation
tests. It is used in conjunction with the PRFLIM card.
TSTPRF tstpnc
00 Definition:
tstpnc Time interval between tests for violations of water

cut or GOR by perforations, days. Default is 99,999
days.
NOTE: 1. Perforation tests are scheduled for the time at which the
TSTPRF card is read plus tstpnc days. Until the simulation
reaches that time, the perforation water cuts and GORs are
unrestricted. Timesteps are not adjusted to hit the test time
exactly. Once a set of tests is performed, new tests are
scheduled for a time that is tstpnc days farther into the
simulation. A tstpnc value of zero causes the program to test
during every timestep.
2. Flashes to surface conditions are required for each perforation

during these tests. This could cause a significant increase in
computer time if frequently performed.
3. Both the TSTPRF and PRFLIM cards are needed to activate the
option to check each active perforation for violations of water
cut or GOR limits.
4. The TSTPRF card is also used to activate the recompletion unit

option.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-109

3.5.7 Perforation Water Cut, GOR, and/or SOR Limits (PRFLIM)

00 The PRFLIM card is used to assign water cut, GOR, and/or SOR (steam oil
ratio, VIP-THERM only) limits to be applied to each well perforation.
Perforations will be shut in if they exceed the limits and a TSTPRF card is
active. Note that the last perforation open is subject to the well constraints
(WLIMIT/GLIMIT/SLIMIT) not the layer constraints.
PRFLIM wl
GOR gorlim1 gorlim2 . . . gorlimn
WCUT wctlim1 wctlim2 . . . wctlimn
SOR sorlim1 sorlim2 . . . sorlimn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which limiting water

cut and/or GOR values are being specified (see
Section 1.5.2).
GOR Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are the limiting GOR values for each well in the
well list.
gorlim GOR limit to be applied to each perforation in this

well, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is -1.0,
meaning the wells perforations will not be checked.
WCUT Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are the limiting water cut values for each well in the
well list.
wctlim Water cut limit to be applied to each perforation in

this well. Default is -1.0, meaning the wells
perforations will not be checked.
SOR Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are the limiting steam-oil ratios for each well in the
well list.
sorlim Steam-oil ratio limit to be applied to each

perforation in this well. Default is -1.0, meaning the
wells perforations will not be checked.
NOTE: 1. The number of gorlim/wctlim and/or sorlim values must

each equal the number of wells in the well list.
2. Any combination of GOR, WCUT, and SOR cards may be

specified.
3-110 Landmark - R2003.4

3. Flashes to surface conditions are required for each perforation

during these tests. This could cause a significant increase in
computer time if frequently performed.
4. Specifying a PRFLIM card for a shut-in well will cause the well
5. The units of steam-oil ratio are STB(CWE)/STB (STCM(CWE)/

STCM). (CWE = cold water equivalent.)
3.5.8 Minimum Rate (QMIN)

00 The QMIN card must be preceded by an ECOLIM card (Section ).
00 A QMIN card is used to define the minimum rate a well is allowed to

produce/inject. When the rate falls below this qmin value, the well is shut
in. The rate will only be checked to see if qmin is exceeded, thereby
returning the well to production/injection, based on TEST card data.
QMIN wl
qmin1 qmin2 . . . qminn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which qmin values are being

qmin Minimum rate at which the well is allowed to

produce/inject. Units are determined by the
ECOLIM card. Default is zero.
NOTE: 1. The number of qmin values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
2. Specifying a QMIN card for a shut-in well will cause the well to
be "turned back on".
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-111

3.5.9 Multiple Rate (QMULT)

00 Must be preceded by a PROD card (Section 3.4.1)
00 A QMULT card is required for a well to flow if the MULTRT option was
specified on the PROD card. The QMULT card defines the maximum
surface rates of all three phases for each well, from which a total reservoir
volume rate will be computed and used as the maximum rate constraint.
00 A QMULT card may also be used to specify maximum surface rates for
producer well types W, O, G, or LIQUID. The appropriate phase rate(s)
will be used depending on the well type.
QMULT wl
omax1 omax2 ... omaxn
gmax1 gmax2 ... gmaxn
wmax1 wmax2 ... wmaxn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which maximum rates

are being specified (see Section 1.5.2).
omax Specified oil rate for the well. Units are STB/D
(STCM/D).
gmax Specified gas rate for the well. Units are MSCF/D
(SCM/D).
wmax Specified water rate for the well. Units are STB/D
(STCM/D).
NOTE: 1. For a MULTRT well, the specified surface rates will be

converted internally to reservoir barrel rates and summed to
obtain a maximum reservoir barrel rate for total fluid at
reservoir conditions. The well will produce at this maximum
rate unless this causes a violation of one of the constraints
(pressure, water cut, or gas-oil ratio constraints, but not rate
constraints) defined by the user. In this event, the constraint is
observed, causing a rate reduction. The conversion to a
reservoir barrel rate is calculated at the start of each timestep.
2. The number of omax, gmax, and wmax values must each

equal the number of wells in the well list.
3-112 Landmark - R2003.4

3.5.10 Injection Gas Composition (YINJ)

00 The YINJ card is used to specify the composition of the injected gas for
injection wells using the STD or RES options and the wells are not
identified as MI wells (with MI plant in the major gas sales option).
YINJ wl
yinj1 yinj2 . . . yinjnc
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which yinj values are being

yinjk The mole fraction of component k in the gas

injection stream. A value must be specified for each
of the n components, and the values must sum
exactly to 1.0.
n The number of hydrocarbon components in the gas

phase. Equal to ncv for VIP-THERM, equal to nc
otherwise.
NOTE: 1. A YINJ card must be entered to define the injected gas

composition for all injection wells that are using the STD or
RES options, except for those wells identified as MI wells in the
major gas sales option (see Section 4.4).
2. The specified gas composition applies to all the wells in the

well list.
3. As many data cards as necessary may be used to specify a yinj

value for each component.
00 Example:
00 C
INJ G STD 253 -266 324 -326 365 -381
YINJ 253 -266 324 -326 365 -381
0.9944 0.0056
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-113

3.5.11 Define Additional Injection Gas Composition (YINJA)

00 The YINJA card is used to specify gas composition for injection wells
using the INJA card.
YINJA wl
yinja1 yinja2 . .. yinjanc
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which yinja values are being

yinjak The mole fraction of component k in the additional

gas injection stream. A value must be specified for
each of the n components and the values must sum
exactly to 1.0.
n The number of hydrocarbon components in the gas

phase. Equal to ncv for VIP-THERM, equal to nc
otherwise.
NOTE: If the INJA card is specified for a gas injection well, but the YINJA
card is not specified for that well, the production composition from
the specified well management hierachy, or the composition
specified by the YREINJ card, is used for the well. If the YINJA
composition is specified, the rate weighted composition is used.
The YINJA card cannot be used for the FRES gas injection well
using the general injection option.
3.5.12 Injection Water Salinity (WSAL)

00 The WSAL card is used to specify the water salinity of injection wells.
WSAL wl
wsal1 wsal2 . .. wsaln
00 Definitions:
wl List of injectin wells for which wsal values are being

wsal Water salinity, user-specified units. Default is 0.
NOTE: 1. The number of wsal values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
3-114 Landmark - R2003.4

2. The surface pipeline network option does

take into acount any salinity values.
3.5.13 Time Interval Between Tests

00 All wells that have been automatically shut in (pressure limit violation,
lack of mobility, rate limit violation) are tested periodically to determine
whether they can be returned to production/injection. The TEST (or
WTEST) card is used to specify the time interval between tests for each
type of shut-in well. The previous format for the TEST card is still
accepted. See Note 1 below.
3.5.13.1 Global Specification (TEST)
00 When the TEST card is input, two methods are available to determine the
time at which wells are tested:
1. all wells of the appropriate shut-in type tested at the same time and
2. each well is tested at the time interval after it was shut-in.
00 The first method is the default; the second method is invoked if any of the
three values tincp, tincm, or tincr is negative.
TEST PRESSURE MOBILITY RATE

tincp tincm tincr
00 Definitions:
PRESSURE Alpha label indicating that the corresponding value

on the next card is the test increment for pressure
shut-ins.
MOBILITY Alpha label indicating that the corresponding value

on the next card is the test increment for mobility
shut-ins.
RATE Alpha label indicating that the corresponding value

on the next card is the test increment for rate shut-
ins.
tincp Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

a pressure limit violation, days. If the test card is not
entered, the default is 0 days.
tincm Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

lack of mobility, days. If the test card is not entered,
the default is 0 days.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-115

tincr Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

a rate limit violation, days. If the test card is not
entered, the default is 99,999 days.
NOTE: 1. When the prior input format of TEST tinc is used, the tincp,
tincm, and tincr values are all set equal to tinc.
2. A zero value for a time increment causes testing every

timestep.
3. For the default method (positive values of tincp, tincm, and

tincr), well tests are scheduled for the time at which the TEST
card is read plus the appropriate shut-in type increment. Until
the simulation reaches that time, shut-in wells will remain shut
in. Timesteps are not adjusted to hit the test time exactly. Once
the wells are tested, new tests are scheduled for a time that is
the appropriate increment farther into the simulation.
4. For the second method (negative value of any of the three

variables), each shut-in well is tested after the appropriate time
interval (absolute value) has elapsed since it was shut-in.
Timesteps are not adjusted to hit any test time exactly. If a well
does not return to production/injection when tested, it will be
retested at a time that is the appropriate increment farther into
the simulation.
5. The TEST card data applies to all wells; i.e., it replaces any
previously specified WTEST data.
3.5.13.2 Specification by Well (WTEST)
00 The WTEST card is used to specify the time interval between tests for
individual wells. When this option is used, each well is tested at the time
interval after it was shut-in.
WTEST wl
(PRESSURE tincp1 tincp2 ... tincpn)

(MOBILITY tincm1 tincm2 ... tincmn)
(RATE tincr1 tincr2 ... tincrn)
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which time interval values are

being specified (see Section 1.5.2).
PRESSURE Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are test increments for pressure shut-ins.
3-116 Landmark - R2003.4

MOBILITY Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are test increments for mobility shut-ins.
RATE Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are test increments for rate shut-ins.
tincp Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

a pressure limit violation, days.
tincm Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

a mobility limit violation, days.
tincr Time interval between tests for shut-in wells due to

a rate limit violation, days.
NOTE: 1. The number of tincp, tincm, and tincr values must equal the
number of wells in the well list.
2. A zero value for a time increment causes testing every

timestep.
3. Each shut-in well is tested after the appropriate time interval

has elapsed since it was shut-in. Timesteps are not adjusted to
hit any test time exactly. If a well does not return to
production/injection when tested, it will be retested at a time
that is the appropriate increment further into the simulation.
3.5.14 Fraction of Time That Well is on Stream (ONTIME)

00 Ontime factors do not apply to injection wells using either of the FSTD or
FRES reinjection options.
00 The ONTIME card is used to specify the fraction of the time that a well is
actually producing/injecting. The fraction is applied to the well rate after
the rate has been determined by QMAX or pressure constraints and after
the well minimum rate (QMIN), water cut (WLIMIT) and GOR (GLIMIT)
checks.
00 Ontime factors may be input at the well level or at any other level of well
management. The effective ontime factor for a well will be the one
specified at the lowest level of the well hierarchy; that is, the first user-
specified factor found in this order:
1. the well,
2. the appropriate gathering center,
3. the appropriate flow station,
4. the appropriate area,
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-117

5. the field.
ONTIME WELL wl
ontime1 ontime2 . . . ontimen
00 Definitions:
WELL Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to wells. See Section 4.2.2 for ontime factor
input at other levels of well management.
wl List of wells for which ontime factors are being

ontime Fraction of time that the well is actually producing/

injecting. Default is 1.0.
NOTE: The number of ontime values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
3-118 Landmark - R2003.4

3.5.15 Maximum Steam Rate for Producers (QSTMX) (VIP-THERM)

The QSTMX card must be preceded by a PROD card (Section 3.4.1).
The QSTMX card defines the maximum steam rate a well is allowed to
produce. This rate constraint is optional and is applied in addition to any
other maximum rate constraints which may be defined.
QSTMX wl
qstmx1 qstmx2 . . . qstmxn
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which qstmx values are being

qstmx Maximum steam production rate at reservoir

conditions in cold water equivalent surface units,
STB(CWE)/D (STCM(CWE)/D).
3.5.16 GOR Penalty (GORPEN)

00 The GOR penalty data is used to set limits on oil production rates of
individual wells, based on their previous months average GOR.
00 The oil production rate limits for the specified wells will be
Base GOR Maximum Rate Limit

00 Oil Rate Limit = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
Average GOR for the previous month
00 but not larger than the maximum rate limit. The Base GOR is a parameter
entered with the GORPEN card. The Maximum Rate Limit is specified
with the QMAX, QMULT or other oil rate limiting option.
00 While any well has a Base GOR greater than zero, the time steps are
automatically restricted to coincide with the end of each calendar month.
The last day of each month is represented by 00:00:01 AM on 1/??/?? in
DAY/MONTH/YEAR format. At the end of each month, the average
GOR over the month is determined for each well and used thereafter
when required.
GORPEN wl
bgor1 bgor2 . . . . . . bgorn
(agor1 agor2 . . . . . . agorn)
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-119

00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for each gorpen values are being

specified.
bgor Base GOR for the well, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). A

zero or negative value will turn the GOR penalty off
for the well. Default is -1.0.
agor Initial average GOR for the previous month, SCF/

STB (SCM/STCM). This value if entered will be
used until the end of the current month. This entire
card may be omitted, in which case the default is as
follows:
If the GOR penalty for any well is in use, then the

previous months average GOR for the wells will
already have been calculated. This value will be
used.
If this is the first GOR penalty data for any well,

then the average GOR over the previous month will
not be available. If the well has an oil rate the value
will be set to the wells GOR at the previous time
step, otherwise agori = bgori.
NOTE: The GOR penalty data should normally be first introduced at the
beginning of the month. If it is first entered in the middle of a
month the average GOR calculated at the end of the month will be
based on the production since the data was entered.
3.5.17 Well Permeability-Thickness Multiplier (WKHMULT)

00 The WKHMULT card is used to specify a multiplier to be applied to the
perforation permeability-thicknesses of a well. The multiplication occurs
immediately upon reading the data.
WKHMULT wl
wkhm1 wkhm2...wkhmn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which wkhm values are being

00 wkhm Permeability-thickness multiplier.
NOTE: The number of wkhm values must equal the number of wells in
3-120 Landmark - R2003.4

the well list.
3.6 Pressure Constraints and Productivity Indices

00 VIP-EXECUTIVE calculates a flowing bottomhole pressure consistent
with the well index and well rate. This bottomhole pressure is checked
against any user-defined pressure constraints. If the flow rate is in
violation of a pressure constraint, it is altered accordingly and a new
corresponding well rate is calculated. This bottomhole pressure is then
used to allocate production/injection to individual gridblocks.
00 Bottomhole pressure constraints are defined by BHP cards. Alternatively,

tubinghead pressure constraints can be imposed to control well flow.
These are established by entering both THP cards and BHPTAB data.
Hydraulics tables (BHPTAB data) are used for three-phase producers to
relate tubinghead pressure to bottomhole pressure, flow rate, water cut,
and gas-liquid ratio. VIP-EXECUTIVE searches for the largest intersection
of the Inflow and Outflow Performance Curves (Figure 3-1). The
bottomhole pressure corresponding to this intersection is used to calculate
well phase rates.
00 Tubinghead pressure constraints can also be imposed on gas producers

and on gas and water injectors. For these cases the default algorithm is
based on the "average pressure and temperature method" as described by
Beggs (Reference 1). For gas and water injectors hydraulics tables
(BHITAB data) may alternatively be entered.
00 Bottomhole pressure can also be constrained by the DPBHMX card, which

defines a maximum drawdown (for producers) or buildup (for injectors)
in each well. The drawdown/buildup is computed as the difference
between a wells average gridblock pressure at datum and the wells
bottomhole pressure. This option is applicable whether a well is on a BHP
or THP constraint. If necessary, the bottomhole pressure of the well is reset
so that the drawdown, or buildup, does not exceed DPBHMX. A new
corresponding well rate is then calculated. To help alleviate convergence
problems, after ITNSTP iterations (producers) or ITNSTQ iterations
(injectors) the bottomhole pressure of DPBHMX constrained wells is fixed
for the remainder of the timestep.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-121

00
Hydraulics For A Given

Tubinghead Pressure
Figure 3-1: Tubinghead Pressure
00 Whenever BHP or THP constraints are imposed, VIP-EXECUTIVE must

calculate a flowing bottomhole pressure, fbhp. Productivity/injectivity
indices are used to relate well flow rates to fbhp. In the VIP-EXECUTIVE
family of simulators this is accomplished through a well index, WI. The
well index is defined by its use within the following oil production
equation:
L
kh k ro

o
q o = 0.001127WI ----------------- [ P bl P bh ( D l D o ) ]. (3-6)
Bo o I
I=1
00 where
qo Oil phase production rate.

o
P bh Datum flowing bottomhole pressure.
WI Well index.
khl Permeability-thickness as defined by the FPERF

card opposite the l-th perforation of the well. This
need not be the gridblock value.
krol Relative permeability to oil at the gridblock

saturation.
Bol Oil formation volume factor at Pbl.
ol Oil viscosity at Pbl.
3-122 Landmark - R2003.4

Pbl Gridblock pressure of the cell containing the l-th

perforation.
Average fluid density over the perforated interval

of the well, based on production or injection fluids.
Dl Subsea depth of the l-th perforation.
Do Datum depth.
00 Since qo is known (the value defined by the QMAX card), Equation 3-6
can be solved for flowing bottomhole pressure at datum, P obh .
00 Therefore, the flowing bottomhole pressure at the reference depth is given

by:
L
kh k ro
o
WI ----------------- [ P bl ( D l D o ) ] q o 0.001127
Bo o I
I=1
P bh = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L
- (3-7)
khk ro
WI ---------------
Bo o I
I=1
00 This value of P obh is then compared to the user-specified bhp value. If P obh
is greater than bhp, the pressure constraint is honored and P obh is set equal
to bhp. A new qo is then calculated using Equation 3-7. (Similar
expressions are used for gas and water.)
00 The data cards described in this section provide alternate ways to

introduce the well index into the recurrent data stream. If no THP or BHP
limits are to be established for a well, then no WI, PI, or RFLOW cards
should be entered for that well. If previous limits are to be removed, wi
should be set to zero by a WI card.
00 In VIP-THERM, if KHWI is entered in the FPERF data (Section 3.2.2), then

no WI, PI, or RFLOW data should be entered since the well index is
included in KHWI.
00 If no productivity/injectivity index (PI, WI, RFLOW, KHWI (VIP-

THERM)) is specified, the well index defaults to zero. In this case, the
simulator produces/injects the specified maximum production/injection
rate without regard to pressure limitations. Allocation to different
perforations is made on the basis of fluid mobility. This is reasonable only
if Pbl - Pbhl is approximately constant for all layers; however, it may cause
convergence difficulties in many cases. It is strongly recommended that a
productivity/injectivity index be specified for each well.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-123

3.6.1 Well Index (WI)(Skip if PI or FLOW orWIL or KHWI is used)

00 The WI card is used to specify well indices for wells. Data specified on a
WI card will replace any previous WI, PI, or RFLOW data for the same
well. WIL values computed for a well by a previous FPERF card will be
replaced by WI data for the same well.
WI wl
wi1 wi2 . . . win
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which wi values are being entered

wi Well index, dimensionless.
2
wi = ------------------------------------ , (3-8)
r
ln ------ + skin
b
r w
00 where
rb Equivalent radius (Peaceman) of

the gridblock containing the well
(see RFLOW Card) in ft (m).
rw Wellbore radius.
skin Skin factor.
NOTE: The number of wi values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
00 Example:
00 WI 4 -541
538*0.52
3-124 Landmark - R2003.4

3.6.2 Productivity/Injectivity Index (PI) (Skip if WI or RFLOW or WIL or

KHWI is used)
00 The PI card is used to specify productivity/injectivity data for wells. Data
specified on a PI card will replace any previous WI, PI, or RFLOW data for
the same well. WIL values computed for a well by a previous FPERF card
will be replaced by PI data for the same well.
PI wl
gf1 gf2 . . . gfn
pi1 pi2 . . . pin
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which gf and pi values are being

entered (see Section 1.5.2).
gf Geometry factor. Converts the productivity/

injectivity index from a drainage radius basis to a
gridblock basis. Dimensionless.
For laminar, radial flow,
ln ( r e r w )
gf = -------------------------
ln ( r b r w )
where
re Drainage radius.
rb Equivalent radius (Peaceman) of

the gridblock containing the well
(see RFLOW Card) in ft (m).
rw Wellbore radius.
pi Productivity/injectivity index. Units are

determined by the units of production or injection
rates defined by the PROD or INJ cards:
STB/D-psia (STCM/D-kPa) - Water, oil, or liquid

STD producer, or a water injector with the STD or
FSTD option.
MSCF/D-psia (SCM/D-kPa) - Gas STD producer or

a gas injector with the STD or FSTD option.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-125

rb/D-psia (cm/D-kPa) - Producer with the ALL or

RES option or an injector with the RES or FRES
option.
NOTE: 1. The number of gf and pi values must equal the number of

wells in the well list.
2. PI data replace WI or RFLOW data. If none of these is read for

any well, it produces/injects at the rate given on the QMAX
card.
3. The pi is converted to wi (for internal program use) when the

well is first put on production/injection. For an oil producer:
pi gf
wi = ------------------------------------------------------
L
khk ro
0.001127 ---------------
o Bo I
I=1
3.6.3 Radial Flow Equation Data (RFLOW) (Skip if WI or PI or WIL or

KHWI is used)
00 The RFLOW card is used to specify radial flow equation data for wells.
Data specified on an RFLOW card will replace any previous WI, PI, or
RFLOW data for the same well. WIL values computed for a well by a
previous FPERF card will be replaced by RFLOW data for the same well.
RFLOW wl
rw1 rw2 . . . rwn
rb1 rb2 . . . rbn
skin1 skin2 . . . skinn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which rw, rb, and skin values are
rw Wellbore radius, ft (m).
rb Equivalent radius (Peaceman) of the gridblock

containing the well, ft (m). If this value is set to zero
rb is defaulted (see note 3).
skin Skin factor. Dimensionless.
3-126 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: 1. The number of rw, rb, and skin values must equal the number
of wells in the well list. These values are used to calculate the
well index and must result in a positive well index. The
program calculates wi from the data as follows:

wi = ------------------------------------
r
ln ------ + skin
b
r w
The term is calculated from the data entered on the

FLOANG card. If not entered, = 2 .
2. The RFLOW data replace PI or WI data. If none of these is read

for any well, it produces/injects at the rate given on the QMAX
card.
3. When rb is entered as zero, its value is defaulted to that

recommended by Peaceman (Reference 2), for wells located in
the center of rectangular gridblocks with isotropic
permeabilities:
2 2 12
r b = 0.14 ( x + y )
For other configurations, e.g., wells in cross-sections, wells at

gridblock corners, the correct value of rb, must be entered
explicitly.
rb can only be defaulted for vertical wells in non-radial

systems; i.e. the WELL keyword must contain IW and JW data.
To obtain a defaulted value of rb for non-vertical wells or wells
in a radial systems, the FPERF keyword must be used. Also
wells with anisotropic permeablilities or other conditions that
require the rb to vary by layer should make use of the FPERF
keywork to define or default the values of rb.
3.6.4 Well Angle Open to Flow (FLOANG)

00 The FLOANG card is used to define the angle open to flow for wells.
FLOANG wl
wang1 wang2...wangn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which wang values are being

R2003.4 - Landmark 3-127

wang Well angle open to flow, degrees. Values allowed are

0o to 360o, inclusive. Default is 360o.
NOTE: The number of wang values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
3.6.5 Well Datum Depth (WLWDAT)

00 The WLWDAT card is used to assign the depth to which the flowing and
limiting bottomhole pressures are referenced.
WLWDAT wl
wdat1 wdat2 ... wdatn
00 Definitions:
w1 List of wells for which wdat values are being

entered (See Section 1.5.2).
wdat Well datum depth, (ft)m. Bottomhole pressure is

referenced to this depth. If not entered, datum
depth defaults to the DEPTH from the first IEQUIL
card. A value of zero causes wdat to be set to the
depth to the center of the gridblock containing the
first perforation.
NOTE: The number of wdat values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
00
3-128 Landmark - R2003.4

3.6.6 Bottomhole Pressure (BHP)

00 To invoke BHP constraints, the user must define a productivity/injectivity
index (Section 3.6). The BHP card allows the user to define a limiting
bottomhole pressure.
BHP wl
bhp1 bhp2 . . . bhpn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which bhp values are being entered

bhp Limiting bottomhole pressure, psia (kPa); i.e.,

minimum allowed pressure for a producer or
maximum allowed pressure for an injector. Default
is 0 psia for producers and 10,000 psia for injectors.
NOTE: 1. The number of bhp values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
2. If both BHP and THP constraints have been entered for a well,
both will be honored.
3. The bottomhole pressure printed in well reports is referenced

to a depth of wdat (see WLWDAT card, Section 3.6.5) which
must be measured from the same reference point as is used for
gridblock depths.
4. If no THP or BHP limits are to be established, then no WI, PI, or

RFLOW cards should be entered for the affected wells. If
previous limits are to be removed, pi should be set to zero by a
PI card. Note that inputting a wi value of zero on the WI card
will shut in the well because of no mobility.
00 Example:
C set the BHP to a minimum of 500 psi at 8800 feet
BHP 1 -150
150*500.
WLWDAT 1 -150
150*8800
3.6.7 Tubinghead Pressure (THP)

00 To invoke THP constraints with wellbore hydraulics tables for multiphase
producers, the user must define a productivity index (Section 3.6),
BHPTAB data, and ITUBE data. To invoke THP constraints with wellbore
hydraulics tables for injectors, the user must define an injectivity index
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-129

(Section 3.6), BHITAB data, and ITUBE data. To invoke single-phase THP
constraints for injectors, the user must define an injectivity index, DIAM
data, and TUBE data. To invoke THP constraints for gas producers, the
user must define a productivity index (Section 3.6), DIAM data, GTHPWL
data, and THPGTB data. The THP card allows the user to define a limiting
tubinghead pressure.
THP wl
thp1 thp2 . . . thpn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which thp values are being entered

thp Tubinghead pressure limit, psia (kPa); i.e.,

minimum pressure for producers or maximum
pressure for injectors.
NOTE: 1. The number of thp values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
2. If both BHP and THP constraints have been entered for a well,
both will be honored.
3. If no THP or BHP limits are to be established for a well, then no

WI, PI, or RFLOW cards should be entered for that well. If
previous limits are to be removed, wi should be set to zero.
4. For predictive well management, tubinghead pressure values

for production wells should be input for each eligible pressure
system.
00 The following statements are true when implicit tubinghead pressure

equations are not used. For both three-phase and gas producers, the
tubinghead pressure algorithm is only performed during the first "few"
outer iterations of the timestep (ITNTHP card). During the rest of the
timestep the well is treated as a bottomhole pressure constrained well,
with bhp equalling the calculated value from the tubinghead pressure
algorithm.
3.6.8 Implicit Tubinghead Pressure Equations (IMPTHP)

00 The IMPTHP card is used to specify whether implicit tubinghead pressure
equations are to be set up when a well is constrained by a tubinghead
pressure limit (THP).
3-130 Landmark - R2003.4

ON
IMPTHP
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha Label indicating that implicit tubinghead

pressure equations are to be set up.
OFF Alpha label indicating that implicit tubinghead

pressure equations are not to be set up. This is the
default.
NOTE: The tubinghead pressure iteration control variable, ITNTHP, is

ignored when implicit tubinghead pressure is on.
3.6.9 Tubinghead Pressure Iteration Control (ITNTHP)

00 The ITNTHP card allows the user to specify the number of outer iterations
of each timestep during which the tubinghead pressure algorithm will be
performed. After this number the wells are treated as bottomhole pressure
controlled, with bhp equalling the calculated value from the itnthp
iteration.
ITNTHP itnthp
00 Definition:
itnthp Number of outer iterations of each timestep during

which the tubinghead pressure algorithm for
producers will be performed. Default is 2.
NOTE: This value is ignored when implicit tubinghead pressure equations

are in use (IMPTHP ON).
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-131

3.6.10 Maximum Drawdown Constraint (DPBHMX)

00 The DPBHMX card allows the user to define a limiting drawdown or
buildup pressure.
DPBHMX wl
dpbhmx1 dpbhmx2 . . . dpbhmxn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which dpbhmx values are being

dpbhmx Limiting drawdown (producers) or buildup

pressure (injectors), psia (kPa); i.e., maximum
allowed difference between a wells average
gridblock pressure at datum and the wells
bottomhole pressure. Default is 10,000 psia.
NOTE: The number of dpbhmx values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
The wells average gridblock pressure is calculated over all the

flowing perforations.
To help alleviate convergence problems, after ITNSTP iterations

(producers) or ITNSTQ iterations (injectors) the bottomhole
pressure of DPBHMX constrained wells is fixed for the remainder
of the timestep.
3-132 Landmark - R2003.4

3.7 Wellbore Crossflow Model
3.7.1 Crossflow Option (XFON/XFOFF) (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 Wellbore crossflow is computed using the method of Modine, Coats, and
Wells (Reference 9).
00 The XFON and XFOFF cards are used to select crossflow computations by
well. The computations can be enabled or disabled at any time. Crossflow
is off by default.
XFON (QMX) wl
XFOFF wl
00 Definitions:
XFON Keyword indicating that wellbore crossflow

computations are to be performed for the following
list of wells.
XFOFF Keyword indicating that wellbore crossflow

computations are not to be performed for the
following list of wells.
QMX Keyword indicating that the wellbore crossflow

computations for each of the wells in the following
list will not occur until the well has a QMAX > 0.
wl Well list (see Section 1.5.2).
NOTE: 1. Print control for the wellbore crossflow summary is equivalent

to that for the Well Perforation Summary (WLLYR). When the
Well Perforation Summary is printed, the Wellbore Crossflow
Summary is printed which shows crossflow rates by phase and
perforation in units of rb/D (rcm/D) for all wells which are
currently crossflowing. Crossflow rates are not included in the
Well Perforation Summary.
2. If XFON is specified for one or more wells the simulator will

compute the wellbore gradient using the volume balance
method (MBAWG = OFF).
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-133

3.7.2 Wellbore Gradient Calculation (MBAWG)

00 Two methods are available for calculating wellbore gradients. In the first
method (default, except as indicated below), an average value of the
wellbore gradient over the perforated intervals is calculated by "mobility
allocation" as
L Np
k rj j

( WI*KH ) I -----------
j = 1 j I
I=1
00 GRAD = ---------------------------------------------------------------
L Np
-
k rj

( WI*KH ) I

------
j
I=1 j=1 I
00 where L is the number of layers, Np is the number of phases, WI and KH

are the well index and permeability-thickness products by layer, and krj,
j, and j are phase relative permeabilities, densities, and viscosities.
00 In the second method, a value for the wellbore gradient opposite each
perforated interval is calculated by a wellbore volume balance. These
calculations include the effects of crossflowing layers but ignore
interphase mass transfer effects and fluid expansion in the wellbore. This
method is the default, and cannot be overridden, if either the crossflow
option is invoked or the horizontal/inclined wellbore flow correlation (see
note 9 in Section 3.2.2) is invoked.
00 The MBAWG card is used to control the wellbore gradient calculations.
ON
MBAWG
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Use mobility allocation method for the average

wellbore gradient. This is the default.
OFF Use the volume balance method for the wellbore

gradient.
3-134 Landmark - R2003.4

3.7.3 Wellbore Gradient Calculation (VIP-THERM)

00 In VIP-THERM, three methods of calculating wellbore gradients are
available. For production wells, a fourth option is specification of gradient
by perforation in the FPERF data (Section 3.2.2). Two of the calculational
options, MOBAVG and VOLBAL, are described in the previous section,
the data for which is also accepted in VIP-THERM. The default (except as
indicated below) in VIP-THERM is similar to the MOBAVG option except
that a gradient for each perforation is computed which is a mobility
average gradient of the fluids produced at and below it:
L Np
k rj j

( WI*KH ) I

-----------
j
I
00 GRAD k = I---------------------------------------------------------------
=k
L
j=1
Np
-
k rj

( WI*KH ) I

------
j
I=k j=1 I
MOBAVG
WBGRAD MOBAVB
VOLBAL
00 Definitions:
MOBAVG Use single mobility average gradient.
MOBAVB Use mobility average for each perforation based on

all perforations below and including it. Default,
except as indicated below.
VOLBAL Use volume balance method. This is the default if

either the crossflow option or the inclined/
horizontal wellbore flow correlation (see note 9 in
Section 3.2.2) is invoked.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-135

3.8 Wellbore Flash Controls

00 The wellbore flash procedure is designed to calculate stock tank oil, water,
and gas flow rates for each production well when a surface rate or a
pressure constraint is specified by the user. An iterative procedure is
applied to find a bottomhole pressure that honors the well boundary
condition. The procedure is executed in each outer iteration of a timestep,
and separator flash subroutines are called several times in each iteration of
the procedure. These calculations require a significant amount of
computer time in compositional models with many wells.
00 In order to minimize the work involved in these calculations, methods

have been developed to improve the efficiency of calculations. The
wellbore equations and the separator flash equations are now solved
simultaneously. The initial bottomhole pressure is calculated from the
wellbore equation with a separator coefficient defined in the previous
outer iteration and values are only recalculated if necessary. The user can
control iteration tolerances and decide whether simplified separator
calculations will be performed.
00 The user may optionally choose to take into account pressure gradient
variations with depth in production wells in the wellbore flash
calculations.
3.8.1 THP Convergence Control (BHPITN)

00 The BHPITN card is used in conjunction with the THP, ITUBE, BHPTAB,
and BHPADD cards. A BHPITN card with the first three parameters
specified will apply to injection wells only. A card with the two additional
parameters is used to set iteration and convergence parameters for
tubinghead pressure and simplified separator computations in production
wells.
BHPITN ibhpmx bhptlp bhptlq (P bhptlz)
00 Definitions:
ibhpmx Maximum number of tubinghead pressure

iterations. Default is 100.
bhptlp Relative tolerance used to determine convergence

of the bottomhole pressure calculation during THP
iterations. Default is 0.0001.
bhptlq Relative tolerance used to determine convergence

of the rate calculation during THP iterations.
Default is 0.001 for producers and 0.0001 for
injectors.
3-136 Landmark - R2003.4

P Alpha label indicating that iteration and

convergence parameters for tubinghead pressure
and simplified separator computations for
production wells are set.
bhptlz Tolerance of composition changes. This parameter

is used in the simplified composition calculations. If
the maximum change of the mole fractions of the
hydrocarbon components in an input stream of a
separator battery is less than the tolerance bhptlz,
the K-values in each stage of the battery are not
recalculated. If this tolerance is set to zero, the K-
values are recalculated in each outer iteration of
each timestep. Default is 0.0005.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-137

3.9 Wellbore Hydraulics Tables
3.9.1 Wellbore Hydraulics Table Assignment (ITUBE)

00 ITUBE data must be defined along with BHPTAB data if a THP card is
entered for a multi-phase producer. This input is optional for single-phase
(water and gas) injectors and gas producers, for which simple wellbore
hydraulics treatments are available.
00 The ITUBE data are used with the wellbore hydraulics table data
(BHPTAB and/or BHITAB) to relate tubinghead pressure to bottomhole
pressure.
ITUBE wl
ibhp1 ibhp2 . . . ibhpn
dzw1 dzw2 . . . dzwn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which ibhp and dzw values are

ibhp Number of the bottomhole pressure table

(BHPTAB/BHITAB card) that defines tubing
pressure losses for this well. A zero here will turn
off tubing calculations.
dzw Vertical distance from the wellhead to the first set of

perforations, ft (m).
NOTE: 1. The number of ibhp and dzw values must equal the number
of wells in the well list.
2. If dzw differs from the dzw value used to construct the

bottomhole pressure table, a gravity head calculation is used to
adjust from the perforations to the reference depth of the table.

to a depth of wdat (see WLWDAT card, Section 3.6.5), which
gridblock depths.
3-138 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 ITUBE 2 -14 18 22 24 -37 41

30*1
30*8800
WLWDAT 2 -14 18 22 24 -37 41
30*8800
THP 2 -14 18 22 24 -37 41
30*1815.
C
3.9.2 Wellbore Hydraulics Table (BHPTAB)

00 Must be defined if THP data is entered for a multi-phase producer.
00 BHPTAB data are used to relate tubinghead pressure to bottomhole

pressure and the three phase flow rates. Each table can be defined
independently, and more than one well can refer to the same BHPTAB.
BHPTAB nbhp dzw
QLIQ
QO q1 q2 . . . qk
QGAS
QEWS
GLR
GOR g1 (g2 . . . gl)
OGR
WCUT w1 (w2 . . . wm)

WGR
(ALQ (GASRATE) alq1(alq2 . . .alqj))
THP thp1 (thp2 . . . thpn)
IGLR IQLIQ
IWCUT (IALQ) BHP(ITHP)
IGOR IQO
IOGR IWGR IQGAS

IQEWS
ig1 iw1 iq1 (ialq1) bhp(ithp1) (bhp(ithp2). . .bhp(ithpn))
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
igl iwm iqk (ialqj) bhp(ithp1) (bhp(ithp2). . .bhp(ithpn))
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-139

00 Definitions:
nbhp Number of the bottomhole pressure table being

read.
dzw Vertical distance from the wellhead to the reference

point for bottomhole pressures as tabulated, ft (m).
QLIQ Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

liquid rates (oil plus water). This must be used with
GLR/GOR and WCUT.
QO Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

oil rates. This must be used with GLR/GOR and
WCUT.
QGAS Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

gas rates. This must be used with OGR and WGR.
QEWS Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

equivalent total wellstream rates (total hydrocarbon
rate converted to gas rate at standard conditions).
This must be used with OGR and WGR.
q Liquid or oil rates, STB/D (STCM/D), or gas rates,

MSCF/D (SCM/D). Values can be unequally
spaced.
GLR Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

gas-liquid ratios. This must be used with either
QLIQ or QO.
GOR Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

gas-oil ratios. This must be used with either QO or
QLIQ.
OGR Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

oil-gas ratios. This must be used with either QGAS
or QEWS.
g Gas-liquid or gas-oil ratios, SCF/STB (SCM/

STCM), or oil-gas ratios, STB/MMSCF (STCM/
MSCM). Values can be unequally spaced.
WCUT Alpha label indicating that water-cut values are

read on this card. This must be used with either
QLIQ or QO.
WGR Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

water-gas ratios. This must be used with either
QGAS or QEWS.
3-140 Landmark - R2003.4

w Water-cut values, fraction, or water-gas ratios, STB/

MMSCF (STCM/MSCM). Values can be unequally
spaced.
ALQ Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

either gaslift gas rates or user-defined artificial lift
quantity values.
GASRATE Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

are gaslift gas rates. If this keyword is specified,
then ALQ well data (Section 3.9.6) will be ignored
and the gaslift gas rate for the well will be used
instead. This also means that ratios on the GLR/
GOR card consist of produced gas only, not total
gas.
alq Gaslift gas rates, MSCF/D (SCM/D) or artificial lift

quantity values, as defined by the user. Values can
be unequally spaced.
THP Alpha label indicating that tubinghead pressures

are read on this card.
thp Tubinghead pressure values, psia (kPa). Values can

IGLR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are gas-liquid ratio
indices. This must be used with GLR.
IGOR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are gas-oil ratio indices.
This must be used with GOR.
IOGR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are oil-gas ratio indices.
This must be used with OGR.
IWCUT Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are water-cut indices.
This must be used with WCUT.
IWGR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are water-gas ratio
indices. This must be used with WGR.
IQLIQ Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are liquid rate indices.
This must be used with QLIQ.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-141

IQO Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are oil rate indices. This
must be used with QO.
IQGAS Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are gas rate indices. This
must be used with QGAS.
IQEWS Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are equivalent total
wellstream rate indices. This must be used with
QEWS.
IALQ Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are artificial lift quantity
indices. This must be used with ALQ.
BHP(ITHP) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

columns under this heading are bottomhole
pressure values for each tubinghead pressure input.
Parentheses must appear in this alpha label.
igl Index referring to the l-th ratio value read.
iwm Index referring to the m-th water-cut value read.
iqk Index referring to the k-th rate value read.
ialqj Index referring to the j-th gaslift rate or artificial lift

quantity value read.
bhp(ithp) The bottomhole pressure value, psia (kPa),

corresponding to the indicated ratio, water-cut, and
rate values. The corresponding tubinghead pressure
is the thp value that would correspond to ithp. The
number of bottomhole pressure values on this card
must equal the number of thp values on the THP
card.
NOTE: An ITUBE value must be specified for each well which is to use
one of the BHPTAB tables.
00 Example
00 C TUBING SIZE = 3.500 OD = 2.992 ID
C SEPARATOR PRESSURES: 215. 315. 665. 665. 665.
C FLOW LINE LENGTHS: 0. 0. 4000. 10000. 18000.
C HALF WELL RATES TO REFLECT HALF WELLS
BHPTAB 1 8800.
QLIQ 50. 250. 500. 1000. 2000. 5000.
3-142 Landmark - R2003.4

GLR 300. 750. 1500. 5000. 20000.

WCUT 0.000 0.500
THP 215. 315. 815. 1315. 1815.
C REMAINDER OF TABLE
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-143

3.9.3 Wellbore Hydraulics Table Switching (NEWBHPTAB)

00 The NEWBHPTAB card allows the user to set an alternate bottomhole
pressure table for a well when its rate becomes too low at the existing THP
limit.
NEWBHPTAB wl
ibhp1 ibhp2 ... ibhpn
q1 q2 ... qn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which ibhp and q values are being

ibhp Bottomhole pressure table number to which the

well will be assigned when its production rate falls
below the corresponding q value.
q Threshhold production rate such that when the

wells production rate falls below this value, the
bottomhole pressure table number will be changed.
The unit of q is the same as that specified in the
corresponding bottomhole pressure table
(BHPTAB).
NOTE: 1. The number of ibhp and q values must be equal the number of
2. The bottomhole pressure table switch will occur at most once.

That is, once a switch is made the well will not switch back to
the original table if the rate rises back above the specified
threshhold value.
3-144 Landmark - R2003.4

3.9.4 Wellbore Hydraulics Table for Injectors (BHITAB)

00 Must be defined if ITUBE data is entered for an injection well for which
THP data is also entered.
00 BHITAB data are used to relate tubinghead discharge pressure to

bottomhole injection pressure and injection rate. Each table can be defined
independently, and more than one well can refer to the same BHITAB. The
phase being injected need only be specified if metric units are being used,
in which case a units conversion must be performed.
W
BHITAB nbhi dzw
G
QI qi1 qi2 ... qik
THP thp1 (thp2 ... thpn)
IQI BHP ( ITHP )

ITHP BHP ( IQI )
iqi 1 bhp ( ithp 1 ) (bhp ( ithp 2 ) bhp ( ithp n ) )
ithp 1 bhp ( iqi 1 ) bhp ( iqi 2 ) bhp ( iqi k )
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
iqi k bhp ( ithp 1 ) (bhp ( ithp 2 ) bhp ( ithp n ) )
ithp n bhp ( iqi 1 ) bhp ( iqi 2 ) bhp ( iqi k )
00 Definitions:
nbhi Number of the bottomhole injection pressure table

being read.
dzw Vertical distance from the wellhead to the reference

point for bottomhole injection pressures as
tabulated, ft (m).
W Alpha label, for metric units input only, indicating

that the rates are water injection rates, for
appropriate units conversion.
G Alpha label, for metric units input only, indicating

that the rates are gas injection rates, for appropriate
units conversion.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-145

QI Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

injection rates.
qi Injection rates, water, STB/D (STCM/D), or gas,

MSCF/D (SCM/D). Values can be unequally
spaced.
THP Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

tubinghead injection pressures.
thp Tubinghead injection pressure values, psia (kPa).

Values can be unequally spaced.
IQI Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are injection rate
indices.
BHP(ITHP) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

injection pressure values for each tubinghead
injection pressure input. Parentheses must appear
in this alpha label.
ITHP Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are tubinghead injection
pressure indices.
BHP(IQI) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

injection pressure values for each injection rate
input. Parentheses must appear in this alpha label.
iqik Index referring to the k-th injection rate value read.
bhp(ithp) The bottomhole injection pressure value, psia (kPa),

corresponding to the indicated rate and tubinghead
pressure values. The number of bottomhole
pressure values on this card must equal the number
of thp values on the THP card.
ithpn index referring to the n-th tubinghead injection

pressure value read.
bhp(iqi) The bottomhole injection pressure value, psia (kPa),

corresponding to the indicated rate and tubinghead
pressure values. The corresponding injection rate is
the qi value that would correspond to iqi. The
number of bottomhole pressure values on this card
must equal the number of qi values on the QI card.
3-146 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Examples:
00 BHITAB 1 9400.
QI 1 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
THP 15. 200 500 1000
ITHP BHP(IQI)
1 4304 4297 4276 4219 4134 4017 3854 3681 3471 3219
2 4489 4482 4467 4404 4319 4202 4039 3866 3656 3404
3 4789 4776 4759 4706 4624 4504 4349 4166 3956 3704
4 5289 5272 5249 5186 5106 5004 4859 4679 4456 4204
3.9.5 Additive Correction to BHP Tables (BHPADD)

00 This card is used in conjunction with the THP, ITUBE, and BHPTAB cards.
00 The BHPADD card is used to provide an additive correction term to the

value of bottomhole pressure obtained from the BHP tables.
BHPADD wl
bhpadd1 bhpadd2 . . . bhpaddn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which bhpadd values

bhpadd Additive correction to apply to the value of

bottomhole pressure obtained from the BHP tables
for the well, psi (kPa). Value may be positive or
negative. Default is 0.0 psia.
NOTE: The number of bhpadd values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-147

3.9.6 Artificial Lift Quantity (ALQ)

00 The ALQ card is used to specify an artificial lift quantity, which can be
used as an additional parameter in the interpolation of the BHPTAB
tables. If the ALQ parameter in the BHPTAB is table for a well is
specifically identified as gaslift GASRATE, then the ALQ data for that well
is not required and will not be used if entered.
ALQ wl
alq1 alq2 ... alqn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which alq values are

alq Artificial lift quantity value for the well. Units are
defined by the user. Default is 0.0.
NOTE: The number of alq values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
3.10 Gas Producers

00 The algorithm for gas producers described below is activated for a well by
assigning a gas producer THP table to the well (GTHPWL card). If this
table is not assigned, the algorithm described in the Wellbore Hydraulics
section (Section 3.9) is used.
00 The algorithm implemented in VIP-EXECUTIVE for handling tubinghead

pressure constraints for gas producers is based on the "average pressure
and temperature method" as described on pp. 103-104 of Gas Production
Operations by H. Dale Beggs (Reference 1). (Note that the algorithm for
tubinghead pressure constraints for gas and water injectors also is based
on this method.) Generally speaking, the rate and corresponding
bottomhole pressure of a constrained well occurs at the intersection of the
inflow and outflow performance curves for the well. To calculate the
flowing bottomhole pressure for the outflow performance curve:
1. divide the wellbore into equal-length intervals,
2. starting at the wellhead, determine the bottomhole pressure of the first

interval using the input tubinghead pressure constraint and other
properties,
3-148 Landmark - R2003.4

3. use the bottomhole pressure of the first interval as the tubinghead

pressure of the second interval to calculate the bottomhole pressure of
the second interval,
4. continue this process until the bottomhole pressure of the last interval
is calculated; this is the flowing bottomhole pressure of the well for the
outflow curve.
00 Properties needed by the "average pressure and temperature method",

and their source in VIP-EXECUTIVE, are as follows:
1. Gas flow rate - constant over entire wellbore.
2. Average temperature - linear interpolation between surface

temperature on GASTHP card and reservoir
temperature TRES.
3. Average z-factor and average viscosity - table lookup in THPGTB

table at interval tubinghead
pressure and temperature.
4. Inside diameter of tubing and tubing roughness factor -DIAM card
5. Effective tubing length and vertical distance from wellhead to first set
of perforations - TUBE card
NC
6. Gas gravity - ( mol. wt. ) * ( production composition ) 28.96

j j
j=1
00 The TUBE and DIAM cards (Section 3.11.1 and 3.11.2) as described for
injectors must be specified for gas producers that will use tubinghead
pressure constraints.
00 The BHPITN card (Section 3.8.1) may optionally be specified.
3.10.1 Assignment of Gas Producer THP Tables (GTHPWL)
GTHPWL wl
ithgtb1 ithgtb2 . . . ithgtbn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which tables are being assigned (see

Section 1.5.2).
ithgtb Number of the gas producer THP table (THPGTB

card) that defines the z-factors and viscosities in the
wellbore for this well.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-149

NOTE: The number of ithgtb values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
3.10.2 Gas Well THP Calculation Data (GASTHP)
INTERVALS
GASTHP (SURFTEMP) (LGRMAX)
LENGTH
intthg
(stmthg) (lgrmax)
length
00 Definitions:
intthg Number of intervals into which the wellbore length

will be divided. Default is 5.
length Approximate length of each interval in the

wellbore, ft (m).
stmthg Surface temperature in the wellbore at the

wellhead, F (C). Default is TRES.
lgrmax Maximum allowed liquid-gas ratio for a gas

producer using tubinghead pressure, STB/MMSCF
(STCM/MSCM). Default is 10 STB/MMSCF.
3.10.3 Z-factor/Viscosity Tables for Gas Producer THP (THPGTB)
THPGTB itab
PRESSURE pres1 pres2 . . . presk
(TEMP temp1 (temp2 . . . tempm))
IPRES (ITEMP) Z VISC
ip1 (it1) z1 visc1
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
ipk (itm) zkm visckm
00 Definitions:
itab Number of the gas producer THP table being read.
PRESSURE Alpha label indicating that pressure values are read

on this card.
3-150 Landmark - R2003.4

pres Pressure values, psia (kPa). Values can be unequally

spaced.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that temperature values are

read on this card. This card is optional.
temp Temperature values, F (C). Values can be

unequally spaced.
IPRES Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are pressure indices.
ITEMP Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are temperature indices.
This label can be included only if a TEMP card was
input.
Z Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are z-factors.
VISC Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are viscosities.
ipk Index referring to the k-th pressure value read.
itm Index referring to the m-th temperature value read.

This index can be included only if a TEMP card was
input.
zkm The z-factor value corresponding to the indicated

pressure (and temperature) value(s).
visckm The viscosity value corresponding to the indicated

pressure (and temperature) value(s), cp (cp).
NOTE: If the pressure or temperature values cannot fit on one card, then
continuation cards can be used; that is,
PRESSURE pres1 pres2. . .

... presk
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-151

3.11 Single Phase Injectors

00 The algorithm for single phase injectors described below is automatically
used for such a well unless ITUBE data has been input for the well.
00 The algorithm implemented in VIP-EXECUTIVE for handling tubinghead

pressure constraints for single phase injectors is based on the average
pressure and temperature method as described on pp. 103-104 of Gas
Production Operations by H. Dale Beggs (Reference 1).
3.11.1 Tubing Length Assignment (TUBE)

00 Must be defined if THP data are entered for an injector.
00 The TUBE data are used in conjunction with the DIAM data to relate
tubinghead pressure to bottomhole pressure.
TUBE wl
tl1 tl2 . . . tln
dzw1 dzw2 . . . dzwn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which tl and dzw values are being

tl Effective tubing length, ft (m). Includes the

equivalent tubing length of any downhole
equipment.
dzw Vertical distance from the wellhead to the first set of

perforations, ft (m).
NOTE: 1. The number of tl and dzw values must equal the number of

to a depth of wdat (see WLWDAT card, Section 3.6.5), which
gridblock depths.
3-152 Landmark - R2003.4

3.11.2 Tubing Diameter/Friction Factor (DIAM)

00 Must be defined if THP data are entered for an injector.
00 The DIAM data are used in conjunction with the TUBE data to relate
tubinghead pressure to bottomhole pressure.
DIAM wl
diam1 diam2 . . . diamn
eps1 eps2 . . . epsn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which diam and eps values are

diam Inside diameter of the tubing, inches (centimeters).
eps Tubing roughness factor, inches (centimeters).
NOTE: 1. The number of diam and eps values must equal the number of
2. Friction factors are calculated by the Jain equation (Reference

3).
3.11.3 Specify Density and Viscosity Values (WTRTHP)

00 The WTRTHP card applies to water injectors on tubinghead pressure
control.
00 The WTRTHP card is used to specify the density and viscosity values that
are input to the "average pressure and temperature method" for water
injectors on tubinghead pressure control. Internally calculated values are
used if this data is not entered.
WTRTHP wl
DENSITY dens1 dens2 . . . densn
VISCOSITY visc1 visc2 . . . viscn
00 Definitions:
wl List of water injection wells for which dens and visc

values may be specified (see Section 1.5.2).
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-153

DENSITY Alpha label indicating that the following values are

water densities, gm/cc (gm/cc). Default is to
compute a value internally.
VISCOSITY Alpha label indicating that the following values are

water viscosities, cp (cp). Default is to use the vw
input on the constants card in VIP-CORE (Section
2.2.4).
NOTE: 1. The number of dens and visc values, if specified, must equal
the number of wells in the well list.
2. Both the DENSITY and VISCOSITY cards need not be

specified. The program will accept either one or both.
3.12 Pattern Balancing (Not available in VIP-THERM)
3.12.1 Pattern Balancing Option (PATTN)

00 The PATTN card is used to specify whether the pattern balancing option is
to be used.
ON
PATTN ATWAG
OFF
00 Defintions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the pattern balancing

option is to be used.
ATWAG Alpha label indicating that the pattern balancing

option with automatic WAG option is to be used.
This option is currently compatible only with the
miscible option.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the pattern balancing

option will not be used. This is the default.
NOTE: The pattern balancing option is not compatible with the following
options: the water voidage replacement option, the gas voidage
replacement option, and the general injection region option.
The PATNCI and PATNPP cards are required to define a pattern.

The NPTNMX parameter on the DIM card is used to define the
3-154 Landmark - R2003.4

maximum number of patterns.
Currently, the ATWAG option is only available with the miscible

option. If the option is chosen, the ATWGVA, ATWGCL, and
ATWGCT cards must also be entered.
00 Example:
00 PATTN ON
3.12.2 Assign Central Injection Wells to a Pattern or Turn Off Pattern

Balancing (PATNCI )
00 The PATNCI card is used to assign appropriate central injection wells to a
pattern. Each central injection well can only be assigned to one pattern.
WAG ratio
PATNCI npn voidf wl
ATWAG tcycle
00 or
WAG ratio
PATNCI npn voidf
ATWAG tcycle
nw lyrl
(data card may be repeated as necessary)
00 or
PATNCI npn OFF
00 Definitions:
npn Pattern number to which the injection wells are

assigned.
WAG Alpha label indicating that the injectors in a pattern

are a pair of WAG injectors (one water injector and
one gas injector).
ratio WAG ratio at reservoir conditions.
ATWAG Alpha label indicating that the injector in a pattern

is an automatic WAG (explicit) injector.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-155

tcycle Automatic WAG cycle period, months.
voidf Voidage factor for a pattern. Voidage times voidage

factor is the voidage injection target.
wl List of injection wells for a pattern (see Section

1.5.2). Production from all layers will be used in the
voidage calculation.
nw Injection well number or well name.
lyrl List of layers to be used in the voidage calculation.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the pattern balancing

option for the pattern will be turned off.
NOTE: If the WAG option is selected, two wells, one water injector and one
gas injector, must be specified. Both wells must have the same
layers for the voidage calculation. The calculated voidage target
will be distributed to the WAG injectors according to the WAG
ratio.
If the WAG option is not selected and multiple injection wells are
assigned to a pattern, the voidage calculation layers specified for
each injector may not overlap.
The parameter ratio may be set to zero, implying a gas injector

only. But two wells must still be defined.
00 Example:
00 PATNCI 1 1.0 2
PATNCI 2 0.8
3 1 -3
4 4 -6
PATNCI 3 OFF
PATNCI 4 WAG 2.0 0.9 1 5
3-156 Landmark - R2003.4

3.12.3 Assign a Peripheral Production Well and Production Fractions to

Multiple Patterns (PATNPP)
00 The PATNPP card is used to assign a peripheral production well to
multiple patterns.
PATNPP nw EDGE ALL

INNER LIQUID
pnl
(prodf1 prodf2 ... prodfn)
00 Definitions:
nw Peripheral production well number or name.
EDGE Alpha label indicating that the producer is a

boundary producer. The summation of the
production fractions over all patterns for each
boundary producer must be less than one.
INNER Alpha label indicating that the producer is an

interior producer. This is the default. The
production fractions for each interior producer
must sum up to one over all patterns.
ALL Alpha label indicating that the patterns voidage is

calculated using all three phases. This is the default.
LIQUID Alpha label indicating that the patterns voidage is

calculated using liquid only.
pnl List of patterns to which a peripheral productor is

being assigned (see Section 1.5.2).
prodf Production fractions for the production well being

used in patterns voidage calculation. For an
interior producer, default is the inverse of the
number of patterns to which the well is assigned.
For a boundary producer, production fractions
must be specified.
NOTE: If specified, the number of prodf values must equal the number of
patterns in the pattern list.
The production fractions must be specified when the EDGE option

is used.
If the INNER option is selected and the production fractions for a
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-157

production well are not specified, the default fraction for each
pattern is the inverse of the number of patterns to which the well is
assigned.
00 Example:
00 PATNPP 1 EDGE
1
0.25
PATNPP 2 EDGE LIQUID
1 2
2*0.25
PATNPP 3 INNER
1 2 3 4
1 3
0.4 0.6
3.12.4 Same Perforations in Pattern Gas and Water Injectors (WAGPERF)

00 The WAGPERF card is used to insure that gas and water injectors in a
pattern have the same perforations. If the perforations in only one injector
are defined, the other injector will have the same perforations with the
same properties. If the perforations in both wells do not match, the
perforation data in one well (by default, the water well) is honored. The
keyword GASWELL stipulates that the gas well perforations are to be
honored instead.
OFF
WAGPERF

ON ( GASWELL )
00 Definitions:
OFF Alpha label indicating that the same perforation

option is OFF. This is the default if the card is not
entered.
ON Alpha label indicating that the same perforation

option is ON, with the water injector being the
honored one. This is the default when WAGPERF
with no other parameters is entered.
GASWELL Alpha label indicating that the gas injector

perforation data is honored, instead of the water
injector.
3-158 Landmark - R2003.4

3.12.5 Voidage Calculation Based on GOR (PTNGOR)

00 The PTNGOR card is used to activate the option that voidage is to be
computed using liquid phases only if the producer gas-oil ratio is greater
than the user-specified value.
PTNGOR ptngor
00 Definition:
ptngor Gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). If the

producer gas-oil ratio is greater than ptngor, liquid
voidage is to be used instead of total voidage.
Default is to use total voidage.
3.12.6 Hydrocarbon Volumes and Angles (ATWGVA)

00 The ATWGVA card is used to assign the hydrocarbon pore volumes and
angles for the wedges between a peripheral producer and pattern
injectors. This card must be input if the automatic WAG option is invoked.
ATWGVA nw
pnl
PIVOL pivol1 pivol2 ... pivoln
PIAGL piagl1 piagl2 ... piagln
00 Definitions:
nw Peripheral production well number or well name.
pnl List of patterns to which a peripheral producer is

being assigned.
pivol Hydrocarbon volume for the wedge between the

producer and the injector of each pattern on the
specified pattern list, MSCF (SCM).
piagl Wedge angle open to flow at the injector of each

pattern on the specified pattern list, radians.
NOTE: The number of pivol and piagl values must equal the number of
patterns in the pattern list.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-159

00 Example:
00 ATWGVA 8
1 2
PIVOL 3388000. 6776000.
PIAGL 1.5708 1.5708
3.12.7 MI Injection Target and Allocation Parameters (ATWGCL)

00 The ATWGCL card is used to specify the total MI injection target for the
automatic WAG option and some user-controlled category allocation
control parameters.
ATWGCL
MITAG mitarg
(PCTFQ pctfq)
(PCTMI nctmi)
(PCTMN nctmn)
00 Definitions:
mitarg Total MI injection target for all automatic WAG

patterns, MCSF/month (SCM/month).
pctfq Interval at which the allocation of pattern status

will be recalculated, months. Minimum is 4 months.
nctmi Minimum number of allocation intervals a new

pattern should be kept at Very Favorable status.
nctmn Minimum number of allocation intervals a pattern

should be kept at the current status following a
status change.
00 Example:
00 ATWCGL
MITAG 96000.
PCTFQ 12.
PCTMI 3
PCTMN 2
3-160 Landmark - R2003.4

3.12.8 Category Definitions and Injection Fractions (ATWGCT)

00 The ATWGCT card is used to specify fractions of the total throughput for
each category and fraction of the total MI injection target allocated for
each category.
ATWGCT
pcttpf1 pcttpf2 pcttpf3
pctmif1 pctmif2 pctmif3
00 Definitions:
pcttpfi Fractions of the total throughput for the Very

Favorable, Normal, and Less Favorable categories,
respectively. Sum of the three must not exceed 1.0.
pctmifi Fractions of the MI target allocated to the Very

Favorable, Normal, and Less Favorable categories,
respectively. Must sum up to 1.0.
00 Example:
00 ATWGCT
0.2 0.5 0.2
0.4 0.5 0.1
NOTE: Each of the automatic WAG patterns is assigned as a Very

Favorable (VF), Normal (N), Less Favorable (LF), or Suspended (S)
category based on the patterns returned MI ratio. The VF group is
defined as the best patterns (with lowest returned MI) whose
combined throughput rates (reservoir liquid + gas) total pcttpf1 of
the total throughput. This group is allocated pctmif1 of the
targeted MI. A suspended pattern will not receive any MI
allocation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-161

3.13 Non-Darcy Gas Flow (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 Two features modelling non-Darcy gas flow near wells are included in the
well model: (1) pressure dependent density and viscosity, and (2) rate
dependent well skin. These two features can be invoked separately.
00 A pressure dependent gas density and viscosity is specified by the

WNDGDV card.
00 A rate dependent skin factor can be specified for a well using the WDNDG
card or, for each perforation, using the FPERF card. When the rate
dependent skin factor option is specified, the well index cannot be zero. A
well index equal to zero is a special case which means adjusting the well
index to honor both the rate and bottomhole pressure constraints. In such
case, rate dependent skin factor does not have effective meanings. Thus, as
error message will print in the output and the simulation run will be
terminated.
3.13.1 Non-Darcy Gas Density and Viscosity Option (WNDGDV)

00 The WNDGDV card is used to specify the method for the calculation of
pressure dependent gas density and viscosity for the well model.
PP
WNDGDV RG (relerr ndim)
STD
00 Definitions:
PP Pseudo pressure option.
RG Russel Goodrich option.
STD Standard option. This is the default.
relerr Maximum relative error to be used in the

integration of density to viscosity ratio for pseudo
pressure option. Default maximum relative error is
0.01.
ndim Maximum number of intervals to be used in the

integration is 2(ndim-1). The default ndim is 7; thus
the default maximum number of intervals is 64.
NOTE: The pseudo pressure method uses an integration average between

the gridblock pressure and the wellbore pressure adjusted to the
gridblock depth to calculate density to viscosity ratio. The
3-162 Landmark - R2003.4

trapezoidal rule with Rombergs extrapolation method is used for

the integration.
The Russell Goodrich method uses an average of the gridblock

pressure and the wellbore pressure adjusted to the gridblock depth
to calculate the injection and production gas density and viscosity.
STD option uses the gridblock pressure to calculate the wellbore

viscosity and density. The bottomhole pressure is not included in
the calculation.
Relerr and ndim are used only when the PP option is selected.
00 Example:
00 WNDGDV PP 0.005 8
3.13.2 Specify Rate-Dependent Skin Factors for Non-Darcy Gas Flow

(WDNDG)
00 The WDNDG card is used to specify well rate dependent skin factors for
non-Darcy gas flow.
INVK

WDNDG INVKH wl

CON
wd1 wd2 ... wdn
00 Definitions:
INVK Inverse thickness option is used to allocate the well

skin factor to its perforations. This is the default.
INVKH Inverse thickness-permeability option is used to

allocate the well skin factor to its perforations.
CON Each perforation has the same rate dependent skin

factor (the input wd value).
wl List of wells for which wd values are being entered

wd Rate dependent skin factor, D/MSCF (D/SCM).
NOTE: The number of wd values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-163

The perforation skin factors are calculated from the input well skin
factor. When new perforation information is specified in the FPERF
card, the program recalculates the skin factor for each perforation.
00 Example:
00 WDNDG 1 -5
5*0.001
3.14 Automatic Recompletion Units
3.14.1 Recompletion Unit Status and Limit Data (RCMPPERF)

00 The RCMPPERF card is used to define the automatic recompletion units
for wells. A TSTPRF card must be active for this option to be operational.
RCMPPERF
WELL RCMPUNT (other headings)
nw unit (other data)
(Data cards are repeated as necessary to describe all the
units for each applicable well.)
00 Definitions:
WELL Column heading for nw - the well number which

must be entered for each data card. For multiple
units in the single well the alpha label X can be
substituted for the well number on each data card
after the first.
RCMPUNT Column heading for unit - a recompletion unit for

this well. Values must lie between 1 and the largest
unit number specified for this well on the FPERF
card.
STATUS Column heading for status - the producing status of

the performations in this unit. The possible values
are:
OPEN Perforations are open to production

(i.e., perforation status remains
unchanged). This is the default.
AUTO Perforations are currently closed.

The unit is eligible to be opened
when an open unit is shut for limit
violations.
3-164 Landmark - R2003.4

SHUT Perforations are closed. They can be

opened only by subsequent
RCMPPERF data.
OILMIN Column heading for oilmin - minimum total oil

rate for a unit, STB/D (STCM/D). A violation
causes the perforations in the unit to be closed and
another unit (if available) to be opened. Default is 0.
GASMIN Column heading for gasmin - minimum total gas

rate for a unit, MSCF/D (SCM/D). A violation
another unit (if available) to be opened. Default is 0.
GASMAX Column heading for gasmax - maximum total gas

rate for a unit, MSCF/D (SCM/D). A violation
another unit (if available) to be opened. Default is
1.E20.
WTRMAX Column heading for wtrmax - maximum total

water rate for a unit, STB/D (STCM/D). A violation
another unit (if available) to be opened. Default is
1.E20.
GORMAX Column heading for gormax - maximum total gas-

oil ratio for a unit, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). A
violation causes the perforations in the unit to be
closed and another unit (if available) to be opened.
Default is 1.E20.
GLRMAX Column heading for glrmax - maximum total gas-

liquid ratio for a unit, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). A
violation causes the perforations in the unit to be
closed and another unit (if available) to be opened.
Default is 1.E20.
LGRMAX Column heading for lgrmax - maximum total

liquid-gas ratio for a unit, STB/MMSCF (STCM/
MSCM). A violation causes the perforations in the
unit to be closed and another unit (if available) to be
opened. Default is 1.E20.
WCTMAX Column heading for wctmax - maximum total

water-cut for a unit, fraction. A violation causes the
perforations in the unit to be closed and another
unit (if available) to be opened. Default is 1.
STMMAX Column heading, in VIP-THERM only, for stmmax-

maximum total steam rate for a unit, STB/D
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-165

(STCM/D). A violation causes the perforations in

the unit to be closed and another unit, if available,
to be opened. Default is I.E.20.
SORMAX Column heading, in VIP-THERM only, for

SORMAX-maximum total steam-oil ratio for a unit,
STB(CWE)/STB (STCM(CWE)/STCM). A violation
another unit, if available, to be opened. Default is
I.E.20.
NOTE: This data may only be specified if the dimension nrcmun is greater
than zero.
At least one of the other headings must appear on the title card
along with the WELL and RCMPUNT headings.
Any number of the other headings may be specified, up to and

including all of them. For any unspecified status or limit, the
previously input value or the default value will be used.
The recompletion unit number must be less than or equal to the

maximum unit number specified for the well on the FPERF card.
00 Example:
00 RCMPPERF
WELL RCMPUNT WCTMAX STATUS OILMIN
1 1 0.95 OPEN 100.0
X 2 0.90 AUTO 100.0
X 3 0.95 AUTO 100.0
X 4 0.95 AUTO 100.0
X 5 0.99 AUTO 100.0
2 1 0.85 OPEN 100.0
X 2 0.85 AUTO 100.0
X 3 0.85 AUTO 100.0
X 4 0.85 AUTO 100.0
3.14.2 Order for Opening Recompletion Units (RCMPOR)

00 The RCMPOR card is used to define the order in which recompletion units
should be considered for opening.
RCMPOR wl
iu1 iu2 ... iuk
3-166 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
wl List of wells to which this unit order list applies (see

see Section 1.5.2).
iu Order in which the recompletion units should be

considered for opening when a currently open unit
is closed for a limit violation.
NOTE: This data may only be specified if the dimension nrcmun is greater
than zero.
A unit number may not be specified more than once in the list.
The unit number must be less than or equal to the maximum unit
number specified for the well on the FPERF card.
An order list must be specified for a well if any units with status
AUTO are to be opened.
00 Example:
00 RCMPOR 1 5
1 2 3 4 5
3.15 WAG (Water-Alternating-Gas) Wells
3.15.1 WAG Injection Well Definition (WAG)

00 A WAG card must precede a QMAXWG card for WAG injectors.
STD GATHER

WAG
RES FLOSTA
(KEYCMP) cwinj cginj ncycle(GFIRST)
( GLAST ) wl
( SHUTIN )
FSTD
AREA

FRES FIELD
00 Definitions:
STD Standard conditions, STB/D (STCM/D) for

water injectors, MSCF/D (SCM/D) for gas injec-
tors. This is the default.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-167

FSTD A fraction of the total surface production rate of

the injected phase within a specified level of the
well management hierarchy (see below).
FRES A fraction of the total fluid withdrawal (at reser-
voir conditions) within a specified level of the
well management hierarchy (see below).
00 When FSTD or FRES is specified, the level in the well management

hierarchy upon which replacement is based may be specified. The well
management level may also be specified for MI injectors with STD or RES
specification to identify the level upon which the MI composition
determined from the MI plant in the major gas sales option is to be used
for the injection composition. In this case, YINJ cards for MI injectors
should be omitted and the MI plant calculation for the selected well
management level must be invoked (see PLANT card in Section 4.4). The
well management levels are:
GATHER Gathering Center. This is the default for FSTD or

FRES specification.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field. This is the default for STD and RES specifi-
cation with MI plant in the major gas sales
option.
00 If a gas conditioning plant in the major gas sales option is present, and
keyword DIST is specified in the GASCOND card, a portion of the FSTD
gas injectors may be assigned to receive the key component (component
icomp in the GASCOND card) removed from the sales gas stream using
the following keywords:
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating that the key component

stream removed from the sales gas in the gas con-
ditioning plant will be injected into the gas injec-
tors specified in this WAG card. These gas
injectors must be specified as FSTD injectors and
a GASCOND card with keyword DIST must also
be specified.
cwinj Cumulative water injection volume per cycle, in
standard units, STB (STCM), if either STD or
FSTD is specified; in reservoir units, rb, if either
RES or FRES is specified. There is no default
value.
3-168 Landmark - R2003.4

cginj Cumulative gas injection volume per cycle, in

standard units, MSCF (SCM), if either STD or
FSTD is specified; in reservoir units, rb, if either
RES or FRES is specified. There is no default
value.
ncycle Total number of WAG cycles to be simulated.
There is no default value.
GFIRST Alpha label indicating that the WAG cycling
starts with gas injection. Default is water to be
injected first.
GLAST Alpha label indicating that after the WAG
cycling, injectors defined on this card will be
switched to a gas injector. Default is the wells will
be switched to a water injector.
SHUTIN Alpha label indicating that after the WAG
cycling, injectors defined on this card will be
shut-in. Default is the wells will be switched to a
water injector.
wl List of all injection wells with rates specified in
NOTE: 1. Optionally, exactly one of the labels STD, RES, FSTD, and FRES
may be specified. If none is specified, STD is the default.
2. Optionally, if either FSTD or FRES is specified, exactly one of

the labels GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, and FIELD may be
specified. If none is specified, GATHER is the default.
3. Optionally, if either STD or RES is specified and the major gas

sales option (with MI plants) for a well management level is
invoked, the well management level (label GATHER, FLOSTA,
AREA, or FIELD) may be specified to identify the level upon
which the calculated MI composition from the MI plant is to be
used as the injection composition. In this case, the injection
composition (YINJ card) may be omitted (the input of YINJ card
will cause the calculated MI composition to be ignored). If none
is specified, FIELD is the default.
4. When a production well is converted to an injection well, any

previously input WLIMIT, GLIMIT, or QMIN data will be
ignored, and the ECOLIM unit will be set to the injection phase.
Also, if the producers bhp value is the default value 0 psia,
then the bhp value will be changed to 10,000 psia. Otherwise,
previously input BHP or THP data will be maintained.
5. Anytime a WAG injection well is specified or respecified as

either STD or RES, and the wells are not to be identified as MI
wells (with MI plant in the major gas sales option), the
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-169

composition of the injected gas must be defined using the YINJ

card.
6. Optionally, if an FSTD WAG injection well is specified and a

GASCOND card with keyword DIST is also present, keyword
KEYCMP may be specified.
7. Specifying a WAG card for a shut-in well will cause the well to
be turned back on.
8. For WAG injectors, values of cwinj, cginj, and ncycle must be

specified. The simulator will automatically switch the wells
between water injection and gas injection based on the user
specified cumulative injection volumes per cycle (cwinj &
cginj). The WAG cycling may either start with water injection
(default) or gas injection (if GFIRST is specified). After ncycle
cycles, the wells will be switched to regular water injectors
(default), or regular gas injectors (if GLAST is specified), or
shut-in wells (if SHUTIN is specified). For WAG injectors,
QMAXWG cards must be used to specify both the maximum
water injection rate and the gas injection rate (i.e., QMAX cards
are omitted and replaced by QMAXWG cards). Optionally, a
WAG well may have the same bhp and wdat values (using a
standard BHP card) or different bhp and wdat values (using a
BHPWAG card) or water and gas injection. The user may also
specify the first timestep size after each changeover through a
DTWAG card.
00 Example:
WAG FSTD FIELD 300000. 450000. 30 GFIRST SHUTIN 21 -30
3.15.2 Maximum Rates for WAG Injectors (QMAXWG)

00 Must be preceded by a WAG card.
00 The QMAXWG card defines the maximum water and gas injection rates a
WAG injector is allowed to inject.
QMAXWG wl
qmaxw1 qmaxw2 ... qmaxwn
qmaxg1 qmaxg2 ... qmaxgn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which qmaxw and qmaxg values

3-170 Landmark - R2003.4

qmaxw Maximum water injection rate at which the WAG

injector is allowed to inject. Units are determined
by the WAG card. There is no default.
qmaxg Maximum gas injection rate at which the WAG
injector is allowed to inject. Units are determined
by the WAG card. There is no default.
NOTE: 1. During water injection, the WAG well injects at a rate of

qmaxw unless this causes a violation of one of the other
constraints defined by the user. Similarly, the WAG well injects
at a rate of qmaxg during gas injection unless this causes a
violation of one of the other constraints defined by the user. In
these events, the constraint is observed, which causes a rate
reduction.
2. The number of qmaxw and qmaxg values must equal the

3. For the FSTD injection option, qmaxw or qmaxg is the

fraction of the total surface production rate of the injected
phase within the appropriate level. For the FRES injection
option, qmaxw or qmaxg is the fraction of the total reservoir
volume production rate within the appropriate level.
4. For WAG injectors (WAG card), the QMAXWG card must be

used and the QMAX card must be omitted.
00 Example:
C
WAG STD 300000. 450000. 30 21 -30
QMAXWG 21 -30
5*5000. 5*7000.
5*12000. 5*15000.
3.15.3 Bottomhole Pressure for WAG Injectors (BHPWAG)

00 To invoke BHPWAG constraints, the user must define a productivity/
injectivity index (Section 3.6).
00 The BHPWAG card allows the user to define separate limiting bottomhole
pressures during water and gas injection for WAG injectors.
BHPWAG wl
bhpw1 bhpw2 ... bhpwn
wdatw1 wdatw2 ... wdatwn
bhpg1 bhpg2 ... bhpgn
wdatg1 wdatg2 ... wdatgn
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-171

00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which bhpw, wdatw, bhpg, and

wdatg values are being entered (see Section
1.5.2).
bhpw Limiting bottomhole pressure for a WAG injector
during water injection, psia (kPa); i.e., maximum
allowed pressure for a WAG injector during
water injection. Default is 10,000 psia.
wdatw Depth to which the limiting bottomhole pressure,
bhpw, is referenced, ft (m).
bhpg Limiting bottomhole pressure for a WAG injector
during gas injection, psia (kPa); i.e., maximum
allowed pressure for a WAG injector during gas
injection. Default is 10,000 psia.
wdatg Depth to which the limiting bottomhole pressure,
bhpg, is referenced, ft (m).
NOTE: 1. The number of bhpw, wdatw, bhpg, and wdatg values must
equal the number of wells in the well list.
2. For WAG injectors, BHP and/or WLWDAT cards may be

entered instead of BHPWAG cards. If a BHP card is
entered, the same bhp values will be used for water and
gas injection. If a WLWDAT card is entered, the same
wdat values will be used for water and gas injection.
00 Example:
C Specify bhp for WAG Injectors

BHPWAG 1 -150
150*5000.
150*8800.
150*4500.
150*8800.
3-172 Landmark - R2003.4

3.15.4 Injection Temperature for WAG injectors (TINJWAG, VIP-THERM

Only)
00 The TINJWAG card allows the user to define separate injection
temperatures during water and gas injection for WAG injectors in VIP-
THERM. Steam quality and injection pressure for water injection are
specified with the QUAL and PINJ cards as for standard injectors.
TINJWAG wl
tinjw1 tinjw2...tinjwn
tinjg1 tinjg2...tinjgn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which tinjw and tinjg are being

tinjw Injection temperature for water injection,
degrees F (degrees C).
tinjg Injection temperature for gas injection, degrees F
(degrees C).
3.15.5 Timestep Controls for WAG Injectors (DTWAG)

00 The DTWAG card defines the maximum first timestep sizes following
each changeover for WAG injectors specified in the WAG card.
DTWAG dtwtr dtgas
00 Definitions:
dtwtr The maximum first timestep size (days) follow-

ing the changeover from gas injection to water
injection for WAG injectors, days.
dtgas The maximum first timestep size (days) follow-
ing the changeover from water injection to gas
injection for WAG injectors, days.
00 Example:
DTWAG 1.5 1.0
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-173

3.16 WBSIM (Gridded Wellbore) Well Definition (Not

Available in VIP-THERM)
Horizontal flow into the wellbore (first vertical column of gridblocks) is
calculated through normal Darcy radial flow equations, with the addition
of an optional skin factor to adjust the transmissivity from gridblock 2 to
gridblock 1 in the perforated layer. The keyword, COMPERF, is used to
define the "perforations", which will then actually replace the reservoir
transport terms for flow between gridblock 2 (reservoir) and gridblock 1
(wellbore) for the specified layers. The initial setup is to have no
perforations at time zero. Perforations can be changed at any time in the
simulator through the use of this keyword input. It is important to note
that each set of COMPERF data are modifications to the perforations, and
are not complete replacements. They may be entered any number of times
throughout the simulator time.
3.16.1 WBSIM Well Perforations (COMPERF)
COMPERF correl (rough) (diam) (vcmult) (rdamp) (card 1)

[K]
[H]
L [KH] (SKIN) (LEN) (ROUGH) (DIAM) (card 2)
[K H]
[k]
[h]
l [kh] (skin) (len) (rough) (diam) (card 3)
[k h]
[Repeat data card as necessary for subsequent perforations.]
Although the last four variables are optional, they are position dependent,
such that if a variable is to be introduced, all of the variables before it must
also be introduced.
3-174 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
correl Name of the two-phase wellbore flow correlation to

be used. This must always be specified. The options
are:
NOSLIP No phase slippage considered.
HAGEDO Hagedorn and Brown
DUNROS Dunns and Ross
BEGGS Beggs and Brill
AZIZ Aziz, Govier, Fogarasi
ORKISZ Orkiszewski
GRIFFI Griffith, Lau, Hon, Pearson
rough Optional wellbore roughness, ft(m). If entered as -1.,

it will not be used. Otherwise, every interval [layer]
in the wellbore will be set to this value.
diam Optional wellbore diameter, ft(m). If entered as -1.,

it will not be used. Otherwise, every interval [layer]
in the wellbore will be set to this value.
vcmult Optional scale factor for the Turner minimum gas

flow velocity necessary to lift liquid drops. Default
value is 1.0.
rdamp Optional damping factor for phase migration at

velocities below the minimum lift velocity. Default
is 1.0. At upward flow velocities less than the
minimum lift velocity, the mixture density gradient
is replaced by the following damped liquid and
vapor phase gradients in the respective phase
potentials.
vc v
ml = m + ( l m ) -------------------------------------------------
v c + ( rdamp 1 ) v
vc v
mg = m + ( g m ) -------------------------------------------------
v c + ( rdamp 1 ) v
Immediately following the COMPERF data entry line there must be

another line of keywords defining the types of data that will be entered
next in redefining the wellbore perforations.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-175

Definitions:
L Column heading for l, the layer number for which

this perforation data applies.
K Column heading for k, the permeability of this

perforation, md.
H Column heading for h, the thickness of this

perforation, ft(m).
KH Column heading for kh, the permeability-thickness

product of this perforation, md-ft(md-m).
SKIN Column heading for skin, the skin factor for this
perforation.
LEN Column heading for len, the actual wellbore length

within this layer, ft(m).
ROUGH Column heading for rough, the wellbore roughness,

ft(m).
DIAM Column heading for diam, the wellbore diameter

within this layer, ft(m).
3-176 Landmark - R2003.4

3.16.2 Dynamic Vertical Flow Transport Parameters Calculation

All vertical flow transport parameters for the first column of gridblocks
(wellbore) are calculated dynamically for each timestep, with special
treatment for the phase mobilities. These calculations are as follows :
Phase mobilities for flow in the wellbore are based on the mixture
viscosity, instead of the phase viscosity.
If the gas flow velocity is greater than the minimum gas lift velocity,
the gravity gradients in the wellbore are based on the mixture density,
instead of the individual phase densities. If the gas flow velocity is less
than the minimum gas lift velocity, the damped phase gradients are
used instead of the individual phase gradients.
The pressure drop in the wellbore can be described as the sum of the
pressure drops due to friction, gravity, and kinetic energy. The kinetic
energy pressure loss is usually quite small and is neglected. At the
start of each timestep, the gas and liquid superficial velocities are
calculated based on the converged conditions at the end of the
previous timestep. From this, the Reynolds number and friction factor
are calculated for each segment from the specified correlation, after
which the average mixture velocity and then the equivalent Darcy
velocity are calculated. The effective wellbore vertical permeability
(Kwe) is then calculated, and held constant over the timestep.
Phase "relative permeabilities" in the wellbore are set equal to the

phase saturations, with the exception that krg = * Sg, where is
slippage factor greater than or equal to 1.0, which allows the gas phase
to flow at an equal or greater velocity than the liquid phase. The
slippage is obtained from the specified correlation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-177

3.17 Automatic Cycle Control (VIP-THERM)
NOTE: Note: An AUTOCYCLE card must be entered in the utility

data to use this option.
00 This option is designed to dramatically reduce the user effort required to

make predictive runs for cyclic steam operations,when the schedules of
the well cycles are controlled by measurable conditions. However,it is
implemented in general such that any process involving wells alternating
between injection and production can be automatically controlled.
Wells are automatically switched between injection and production based

on a user-selected set of available constraints. Each cycle consists of an
injection, a soak, and a production phase. The order of the cycle phases
may be specified, i.e. cycles may be defined as injection/soak/production
or as production/injection/soak. The latter allows automatic control of
the length of a primary production period, since all switching and well
constraints may be specified by cycle.
A VIP-EXEC Autocycle report is automatically written to the output file

on each status change (start, stop, phase switching, abort,etc.) for each
cyclic well, which gives well status, action taken, and the reason for the
action taken. For output purposes, the time at the end of any cyclic wells'
injection or production phase (tcpe, which is computed as described in the
following sections) is treated as if a TIME/DATE card were entered at
tcpe. For example, a PRINT WELLS TIME card will result in well
summaries printed to the output file at the end of each injection or
production phase for any cyclic well. A PRINT WELLS TNEXT card will
apply only at the first subsequent time at which a cyclic wells' injection or
production phase ends, or at the next input TIME/DATE card, whichever
occurs first.
Required data (CYCLETABLE, CYCLIC and CSTART) and optional data

(CSTOP and CPERF) are described in the following sections.
3.17.1 Cycle Tables (CYCLETABLE)

Each cycle table is assigned a cycle table number. Wells are defined as
cyclic and assigned to cycle table numbers with the CYCLIC card as
defined in the next section.
The cycle table specifies the well types of the injector (CINJ card and
producer (CPROD card), the constraints to be used for switching from
injection to (soak/) production (ITOP card), the constraints to be used for
switching from production to injection (PTOI card), and the values of the
3-178 Landmark - R2003.4

switching constraints and well constraints (CYCLE data). Optionally,

constraints for aborting cyclic injection/production may be entered
(ABORT card), which if violated result in shutting the well in.
CYCLETABLE (PFIRST) ict

CINJ W STD GATHER
G RES FLOSTA
FSTD AREA
FRES FIELD
CPROD W STD
O RES
G MOLES
ALL
LIQUID
ITOP A IPLABEL1 A IPLABEL2 ... A IPLABELnip
0 O O
PTOI A PILABEL1 A PILABEL2 ... A PILABELnip
O O O
(ABORT ALABEL1 ALABEL2 ... ALABELna)
CYCLE DTSOAK QMAXI BHPI DEPI (TINJ) (QUAL) (PINJ) QMAXP BHPP DEPP SLABELS
1 dtsoak qmaxi bhpi depi (tinj) (qual) (pinj) qmaxp bhpp depp sl(ns)
( 2 dtsoak qmaxi bhpi depi (tinj) (qual) (pinj) qmaxp bhpp depp sl(ns) )
( . . . . . . . . . . . . )
( . . . . . . . . . . . . )
(ncyc dtsoak qmaxi bhpi depi (tinj) (qual) (pinj) qmaxp bhpp depp sl(ns) )
00 Definitions: (the constraint values in the CYCLE data, shown in lower

case, are defined along with their corresponding alpha labels)
PFIRST Alpha label indicating that the cycle phase order is

injection/soak. The default order is injection/soak/
production.
ict Cycle table number.
CINJ card Alpha labels specifying the injector well type for the
cyclic well(s) assigned to this table. See Section 3.4.2
(INJ card) for label definitions.
CPROD card Alpha labels specifying the producer well type for
the cyclic well(s) assigned to this table. See Section
3.4.1 (PROD card) for label definitions.
ITOP Alpha label indicating that the following alpha labels

define the constraints to be used for switching from
injection to (soak/)production. The subscripts
shown in the format do not appear in the data deck.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-179

A, O Each switching constraint label on the ITOP card

must be preceded by an A or an O. A indicates
'and', and O indicates 'or'. Switching will occur if all
of the 'and' constraints are violated or if any of the
'or' constraints are violated.
nip The number of ITOP constraints specified. May be

any number greater than zero and less than or equal
to 4.
IPLABELn Any of the following alpha labels, for n equals 1 to

nip, defining constraints to be used for switching
from injection to (soak/)production;
Switch if (and/or):
QMINI Injection rate is less than or equal to qmini, STB/D

(STCM/D) for water injectors or MSCF/D (SCM D)
for gas injectors.
CMAX Cumulative injection is greater than or equal to

cmax, MSTB (MSTCM) for water injectors or
MMSCF (MSCM) for gas injectors.
DTMINI Injection phase length is greater than or equal to

dtmini, Days.
DTMAXI Injection phase length is equal to dtmaxi, Days.
PTOI Alpha label indicating that the following alpha

labels define the constraints to be used for
switching from production to injection. The
subscripts shown in the format do not appear in the
data deck.
A, O Each switching constraint label on the PTOI card

must be preceded by an A or an O. A indicates
'and', and O indicates 'or'. Switching will occur if all
of the 'and' constraints are violated or if any of the
'or' constraints are violated.
npi The number of PTOI constraints specified. May be

any number greater than zero and less than or equal
to 8.
PILABELn Any of the following alpha labels, for n equals 1 to

npi, defining constraints to be used for switching
from production to injection;
Switch if (and/or):
QOMIN Oil production rate is less than or equal to qomin,

STB/D (STCM/D).
3-180 Landmark - R2003.4

QGMIN Gas production rate is less than or equal to qgmin,

MSCF/D (SCM/D).
WCMAX Water cut is greater than or equal to wcmax,

fraction. Note that the water cut includes all
produced steam in VIP-THERM.
OIRMAX Ratio of cumulative produced oil in production

phase to cumulative injection in previous injection
phase is greater than or equal to oirmax, (MSTCM/
MSTCM CWE) for CINJ W or MSTB/MMSCF
(MSTCM/MSCM) for CINJ G.
GIRMAX Ratio of cumulative produced gas in production

phase to cumulative injection in previous injection
phase is greater than or equal to girmax, MMSCF/
MSTB CWE (MSCM/MSTCM CWE) for CINJ W or
MMSCF/MMSCF (MSCM/MSCM) for CINJ G.
TMIN Average wellblock temperature is less than or equal

to tmin, degrees F (degrees C). Allowed in VIP-
THERM only
DTMINP Production phase length is greater than or equal to

dtmini, Days.
DTMAXP Production phase length is equal to dtmaxi, Days.
na Number of abort constraint labels specified on the

ABORT card.
ABORT Alpha label indicating that the na alpha labels

which follow define the constraints to be used for
aborting the cycles, shutting the well in. All abort
constraints except for DTMXPA are checked at the
end of each each production phase.
ALABELn Any of the following alpha labels, for n equals 1 to

na:
DTMXPA Abort if production phase length is greater than or

equal to dtmxpa.
QOAPMN Abort if average oil production rate over the last set
of injection/soak/production phases is less than or
equal to qoapmn, STB/D (STCM/D).
QGAPMN Abort if average gas production rate over the last

set of injection/soak/production phases is less than
or equal to qgapmn, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
WCAVMX Abort if average water cut in the production phase
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-181

(cumulative water produced / cumulative water

produced + cumulative oil produced) is greater
than or equal to wcavmx, STB/STB (STCM/STCM).
OIRMIN Abort if ratio of cumulative oil produced in

production phase to cumulative injection in
previous injection phase is less than or equal to
oirmin, STB/STB (STCM/STCM) for CINJ W or
STB/MSCF (STCM/SCM) for CINJ G. This is
referred to as the oil-steam ratio (OSR) in cyclic
steam operations.
GIRMIN Abort if ratio of cumulative gas produced in

production phase to cumulative injection in
previous injection phase is less than or equal to
girmin, MMSCF/MSTB (MSCM/MSTCM) for CINJ
W or STB/MSCF (MSCM/MSCM) for CINJ G.
ns The total number of constraint labels specified on

ITOP, PTOI, and ABORT cards, ns = nip + npi + na.
CYCLE First alpha label on column header card containing

alpha labels for all required well constraints and
containing the set of all ns alpha labels for
constraints specified on ITOP, PTOI, and ABORT
cards (SLABELS).
DTSOAK Column header for length of soak phase dtsoak,

Days.
Required.
QMAXI Column header for maximum injection rate qmaxi.

Units are determined by the CINJ card.
Required.
BHPI Column header for maximum bottomhole pressure

during injection bhpi, psia (kPa).
Required.
DEPI Column header for reference depth corresponding

to bhpi, depi, ft (m).
Required.
TINJ Column header for injection temperature tinj,

degrees F (degrees C). Required in VIP-THERM, not
allowed otherwise.
QUAL Column header for injected steam quality qual,

mass fraction steam. Required in VIP-THERM with
CINJ W, not allowed otherwise.
3-182 Landmark - R2003.4

PINJ Column header for injected steam pressure pinj,

psia (kPa). Required in VIP-THERM with CINJ W
when any cycle value for qual is equal to zero or
one, not allowed otherwise.
QMAXP Column header for maximum production rate.

Units are determined by the CPROD card.
Required.
BHPP Column header for maximum bottomhole pressure

during production bhpp, psia (kPa).
Required.
DEPP Column header for reference depth corresponding

to bhpp, depp, ft (m).
Required.
ncyc The number of cycles for which data are specified. If

equal to one, then the data are constant for all
cycles. If greater than one, then NCYCMX must be
specified on the DIM card.
sl(ns) The values of the ns switching constraints, defined

above with their corresponding alpha labels.
NOTE: 1. Any number (greater than zero) of ITOP, PTOI, and ABORT
constraint labels may be entered in any order. Columns may be
defined on the CYCLE card in any order.
2. The program is dimensioned for a maximum of 10 cycle tables

and for a maximum of 1 cycle entry per cyclic table (ncyc = 1).
These dimensions may be changed through specification of
NCYCTM and NCYCMX on the DIM card.
3. Timestep size will be modified in order to exactly satisfy the

DTSOAK, O DTMINI, O DTMAXI, O DTMINP, and O DTMAXP
switching constraints. It is also modified to exactly satisfy the 'A'
DT constraints if all of the other 'A' constraints are satisfied at the
time the timestep size is computed. Timestep size is not altered to
attempt to satisfy any of the other switching constraints exactly;
they are simply checked for violation at the beginning of each
timestep. Therefore, the maximum timestep size should not be
greater than the maximum allowable error in the predicted lengths
of the cycle phases, unless the phase lengths are controlled only by
time constraints.
4. Other well constraints not included in the cycle table and

described in Section 3.5, for example WLIMIT, GLIMIT, PRFLIM,
YINJ, QSTMX, and GORPEN, may also be entered as desired or
required (YINJ is required for cyclic gas injectors), and they apply
to the appropriate cycle phase.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-183

5. Options for treatment of production and injection wells

described in Section 3.4, such as WINJMOB, GINJMOB, ITNSTP,
ITNSTQ, and ITNGRE may be entered as desired and apply to the
appropriate cycle phase.
6. Cycling of any well will be automatically aborted for any well in

which the cumulative injection in an injection phase, or the
cumulative oil and gas production in a production phase, is zero.
7. If all defined wells are cyclic, then the run will be automatically
terminated after the cycling of all wells have either finished
(completed the specified maximum number of cycles in the
CYCLIC data), been aborted, or been stopped (CSTOP card).
3.17.2 Cyclic Well Definition (CYCLIC)

Cyclic wells are defined with the CYCLIC card analogously to definitions
of other well types with the PROD, INJ, or WAG cards. Their locations
and perforations are defined as for all wells by WELL and FPERF cards.
Subsets of the total number of perforations defined on the FPERF card
may be defined as open to injection or open to production using the
CPERF card as described in the next section.
Wells specified on the CYCLE card are assigned to cycle tables and are
assigned a maximum number of cycles to complete.
CYCLIC wl
ict1 ict2 ... ictn
ncyc1 ncyc2 ... ncycn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which values are being specified

ict Cycle table number.
ncyc Maximum number of cycles to perform.
NOTE: 1. QMAX, QMIN, ECOLIM, BHP, TINJ, QUAL, and PINJ cards
should be omitted for cyclic wells. These constraints are
represented in the cycle table.
2. Wells completing the specified maximum number of cycles are

shut in.
3. The cycle table must be defined before a well is assigned to it.
3-184 Landmark - R2003.4

3.17.3 Cycle Phase Perforation Status (CPERF)
NOTE: FPERF and CYCLIC data must precede CPERF data.
00 All perforations open to either injection or production are specified on the

FPERF card. The CPERF card may optionally be used to define the subset
of total perforations open to injection and to production, either statically
or by cycle number. If the number of cycles for which data is specified,
ncyc, is equal to one, then the data are constant for all cycles. All wells in
the well list on a single CPERF card must contain the same number of
perforations. A single set of perforation status values are specified which
apply to all wells in the well list.
CPERF wl
1 i1 i2 ... inp
X p1 p2 ... pnp
( 2 i1 i2 ... inp )
( X p1 p2 ... pnp )
( . )
( . )
( ncyc i1 i2 ... inp )
( X p1 p2 ... pnp )
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which values are being specified

np The number of perforations per well.
ncyc The number of cycles for which dataare specified. If

equal to 1, then the data are constant for all cycles. If
greater than one, then NCYCMX must be specified
on the DIM card.
X Alpha label indicating productionperforation status

values follow for the cycle number defined on the
previous card.
i1 i2 .. inp Status for each of the np perforationsfor the cycle

injection phase in order of their definition on the
FPERF card. A value of 0 indicates closed, a value of
1 indicates open.
p1 p2 .. pnp Status for each of the np perforations for the

cycle production phase in order of their definition
on the FPERF card. A value of 0 indicates closed, a
value of 1 indicates open.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-185

NOTE: 1. The program is dimensioned by default for a maximum value of

ncyc of 1. This value may be changed with the NCYCMX
parameter on the DIM card.
2. If it is desired to change any of the FPERF data by cycle phase for

perforations which are open to both injection and production, then
two perforations should be defined in the same location in the
FPERF data, with injection properties assigned to one and
production properties assigned to the other. The CPERF card can
then be used to inject with injection perforation values and to
produce with production perforation values.
3. If a well using the CPERF option is reperforated with an FPERF

card, the status values are all reset to open. CPERF data may be re-
entered after the FPERF data.
3.17.4 Start Cycle (CSTART)

00 The CSTART card must follow all CYCLETABLE and CYCLIC data and
initiates the cycles by well or for all cyclic wells in the specified well
management levels. Optionally, cycling in the wells or well management
levels may be specified as starting after completion of all cycling in
another well or well management level.
CSTART WELL inum

GATHER
FLOSTA
AREA
FIELD
(AFTER inuma)
Definitions:
inum List of well or well management level names or

numbers to start cycling. The rules for inum are the
same as for well lists (see Section 1.5.2).
AFTER, inuma Optional alpha label indicating that the start

of cycling for each well or for each well in the well
management level in the inum list follows
completion of all cycling in the corresponding well
or well management level in the inuma list.
NOTE: 1. AFTER cannot be used with CSTART FIELD.
2. The inum value is arbitrary for CSTART FIELD; it may be

omitted.
3. A wells' cycling is completed when it has performed the
3-186 Landmark - R2003.4

maximum specified number of cycles, when is has been aborted, or

when it has been stopped (CSTOP).
4. Specification of multiple CSTART cards which apply to the same

well will result in a warning message being written to the output
file, unless they are separated by a new CYCLIC specification for
the well (see note 5 below). The first input CSTART card (after the
CYCLIC card) which applies to a given well will be honored.
5. Any cyclic well may be restarted, beginning with cycle number

1, by re-entering CYCLIC and CSTART cards for the well. Any pre-
existing CPERF data for the well will be retained.
3.17.5 Stop Cycle (CSTOP)

00 The CSTOP card may appear anywhere in the recurrent data after the
corresponding CSTART card and terminates the cycle(s) for the specified
well(s) or for all wells in the specified well management level.
CSTOP WELL inum

GATHER
FLOSTA
AREA
FIELD
Definitions:
inum List of well or well management level names or

numbers to stop cycling. The rules for inum are the
same as for well lists (see Section 1.5.2)
NOTE: 1. The first CSTOP card input which applies to a given well is
honored. Subsequent CSTOP cards applying to that well are
ignored.
2. Specifying a CSTOP card for a well which has not been started
by a CSTART card, or which has not started to cycle due to AFTER
constraints, will override the CSTART/AFTER cards, and will
result in a warning message being written to the output file.
3. A cyclic well that is stopped by a CSTOP card can be restarted by

subsequent input of CYCLIC and CSTART cards for the well. The
cycle number is reset to 1 in this case.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-187

3.18 Condensate Banking

00 In gas condensate reservoirs, a liquid phase appears near the wellbore
when the pressure in this region drops below the dewpoint. Initially, the
liquid is immobile. Gas relative permeability is also decreased. The
degree of decrease depends on the saturation of the liquid phase and the
shape of the gas relative permeability curve. In a normal coarse grid
system, the decline in gas productivity is underestimated because the gas
saturation used for well productivity calculations is that of the entire
gridblock. Condensate banking more closely approximates the loss of gas
productivity by integrating mobility from the bottomhole flowing
pressure to the gridblock pressure. Gas saturation can be related to the
pressure by certain simple assumptions.
00 To use condensate banking, both the CNDBNK and CNDBWL keywords

must be specified.
When velocity dependency is applied to wells, the condensate banking

option is automatically activated for every production well. The
parameters on the condensate banking control cards are ignored, except
for the number of intervals to be used for the numerical integration. By
default, four intervals are used in each phase region. Condensate banking
can be used with or without velocity effects. 00
3.18.1 Condensate Banking Calculation Parameters (CNDBNK)

00 The CNDBNK card is used to turn on the condensate banking option and
to adjust the numerical integration parameters. Usually, it is sufficient to
just use the CNDBNK keyword without any additional parameters, which
indicates that a trapezoid rule with four intervals will be used for the
integration.
TRAP nint
CNDBNK
ROM ndim ( eps )
Definitions:
TRAP Numerical integration is performed using the

trapezoidal integration method. If the CNDBNK
keyword is entered with no other parameters, this is
the default method used.
nint Number of integration intervals used for the

trapezoidal method. The default number of
intervals is 4.
3-188 Landmark - R2003.4

ROM Numerical integration is performed using the

Romberg method, which sets the number of
integration intervals depending on the maximum
relative error specified by eps.
ndim The maximum number of integration intervals used

by the Romberg method is calculated as 2**(ndim-
1). The actual number of intervals used may be less
than this number, but it cannot exceed it. By
default, ndim is set to 7, which in turn sets the
maximum number of intervals to 64.
eps The maximum relative error used to determine the

number of integration intervals appropriate for
Romberg integration. By default, eps is set to 0.01.
The ndim parameter must precede eps.
00 Example:
00 C Use default condensate banking integration parameters

CNDBNK
3.18.2 Selective Application of Condensate Banking (CNDBWL)

Condensate banking may be selectively turned on for a list of wells. It
may also be applied to all wells within a gathering center, a flow station,
an area, or the field. Condensate banking will not be automatically used
for any well by use of just the CNDBNK keyword.
To selectively apply condensate banking to particular wells, the CNDBWL

keyword is used in the following form:
ON
CNDBWL WELL wl
OFF
Definitions:
WELL Indicates that condensate banking will be

selectively turned on or off for the wells in the
following list.
ON Indicates condensate banking will be applied.
OFF Indicates condensate banking will not be applied.
wl List of wells for which the condensate banking data

applies (see Section 1.5.2).
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-189

00 To selectively apply condensate banking to all the wells in a particular

well group hierarchy, the CNDBWL keyword is used in the following
form:
GATHER
FLOSTA ON
CNDBWL inum
AREA OFF
FIELD
00
Definitions:
GATHER Turn condensate banking on or off for the specified

gathering center.
FLOSTA Turn condensate banking on or off for the specified

flow station.
AREA Turn condensate banking on or off for the specified

area.
FIELD Turn condensate banking on or off for the field.
inum Number of the member in the specified well

management level.
ON Turn condensate banking on for the specified well

group.
OFF Turn condensate banking off for the specified well

group.
3-190 Landmark - R2003.4

3.19 Well Index Multipliers

00 The well index multiplier option allows the user to simulate the effect of
phenomena such as water scaling on the well index of producing wells.
The computed multiplier is determined from a table of multipliers as a
function of historical maximum water cut; i.e., the WI damage is
irreversible.
3.19.1 Assignment of WI Multiplier Tables (WIMUWL)
WIMUWL wl
itab1 itab2...itabn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which tables are being assigned (see

Section 1.5.2).
itab Number of the WI multiplier table for this well.

Default is 0.
NOTE: The number of itab values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
A value of 0 for itab denotes that the multiplier option is disabled

for the well.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-191

3.19.2 WI Multiplier Tables (WIMULTAB)
WIMULTAB itab
WCUT WIMULT
wcut1 wimult1
. .
. .
. .
wcutn wimultn
00 Definitions:
00 itab Number of the WI multiplier table being read.
WCUT Alpha label indicating that this column contains

water-cut data. The order of the WCUT and
WIMULT columns may be reversed.
WIMULT Alpha label indicating that this column contains WI

multipliers. The order of the WCUT and WIMULT
columns may be reversed.
wcut Historical maximum water cut, fraction. Values

must increase monotonically and may be unequally
spaced.
wimult WI multipliers.
3.19.3 Outer Iteration Number (ITNWIMULT)

00 The ITNWIMULT card is used to set the outer iteration number after
which the WI multiplier will not be updated.
ITNWIMULT itnwim
00 Definition:
itnwim Outer iteration number. Default is 1 and the

maximum value is 3.
NOTE: In order to insure good material balance, if itnwim is greater than

1, the itnmin value on the ITNLIM card must be greater than
itnwim.
3-192 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 DIM NWIMMX NWIMV

2 6
WIMULTAB 1
WCUT WIMULT
0.0 1.0
0.2 0.8
0.5 0.5
0.8 0.3
1.0 0.1
WIMULTAB 2
WCUT WIMULT
0.0 1.0
0.1 0.8
0.3 0.5
0.6 0.3
0.7 0.2
1.0 0.01
WIMUWL A-01 A-02
2 1
ITNWIMULT 1
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-193

3-194 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
4
00000Well Management Level Data
4.1 Introduction
00 Reporting of production/injection results and various production/
injection constraints may be given at the gathering center, flow station,
area, and/or field levels. (Only one field exists in the model. All areas are
attached to the field.) The following data cards set up the hierarchy among
the levels.
4.2 Well Management Levels
4.2.1 Well Management Level Definition (GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA)
GATHER igc (gcname) fsnum (card 1)

FLOSTA ifs (fsname) areanm (card 2)
AREA iar arname (card 3)
00 Definitions:
GATHER Alpha label indicating a gathering center is being

defined.
igc Gathering center number.
gcname Gathering center name. The first character in the

name must be alphabetic unless the name is
immediately preceded by the character #. Only the
first six (6) characters of the name are retained.
Default is blanks.
fsnum Flow station number to which this gathering center

belongs. Default is 1.
FLOSTA Alpha label indicating a flow station is being

defined.
ifs Flow station number.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-195

Well Management Level Data VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
fsname Flow station name. The first character in the name

must be alphabetic unless the name is immediately
preceded by the character #. Only the first six (6)
characters of the name are retained. Default is
blanks.
areanm Area number to which this flow station belongs.

Default is 1.
AREA Alpha label indicating an area is being defined.
iar Area number.
arname Area name. The first character in the name must be

alphabetic unless the name is immediately
blanks.
4.2.2 Fraction of Time Management Level is Onstream (ONTIME)

00 Ontime factors do not apply to injection wells using either of the FSTD or
FRES reinjection options.
00 The ONTIME card is used to specify the fraction of the time that a well is
actually producing/injecting. The fraction is applied to the well rate after
the rate has been determined by QMAX or pressure constraints and after
the well minimum rate (QMIN), water cut (WLIMIT), and GOR (GLIMIT)
checks.
00 Ontime factors may be input at the well level or at any other level of well
management. The effective ontime factor for a well will be the one
specified at the lowest level of the well hierachy; that is, the first user-
specified factor found in this order:
1. the well,
2. the appropriate gathering center,
3. the appropriate flow station,
4. the appropriate area,
5. the field.
4-196 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Well Management Level Data
GATHER
ALL
ONTIME
FLOSTA
inum ontime MULT
PROD ALLWELLS
AREA
FIELD
INJ
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierarchy to

which the specified ontime factor applies:
GATHER Gathering center.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
Alpha label indicating that the ontime value applies to:
ALL All the wells. This is the default.
PROD Producing wells only.
INJ Injecting wells only.
ontime Fraction of the time that each well is actually

producing/injecting. Default is 1.0.
MULT Alpha label indicating that the ontime factor

specified on this card will be a multiplier to any
previously specified ontime factor at the AREA
level or below. The value on this card will apply if
no ontime factors have previously been specified.
This may only be input if FIELD was entered.
ALLWELLS Alpha label indicating that the ontime factor

applies to all wells of the appropriate type (ALL,
PROD, or INJ) in the field, superceding any
previously entered factor. This may only be input if
FIELD was entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-197

NOTE: 1. One and only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD
labels must be specified. There is no default. When FIELD is
specified the inum entry may be omitted or the value 1 may be
input; no other value will be accepted.
2. One and only one of the ALL, PROD, or INJ labels may be
specified. If none is specified, ALL is assumed.
4-198 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3 Production and Injection Targeting
4.3.1 Production Target (PTARG)

00 A PTARG card is used to define a maximum production rate for a
gathering center, a flow station, an area, or the field.
GATHER O
FLOSTA W LFTGAS
PTARG
AREA
inum
G
qtarg
NOLFTGAS
L
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum production rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
Alpha label indicating the maximum rate is based on:
O Oil production, STB/D (STCM/D).
W Water production, STB/D (STCM/D).
G Gas production, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
L Liquid production, STB/D (STCM/D).
qtarg Maximum production rate.
LFTGAS Alpha label indicating that the gas production

target qtarg also includes the amount of gaslift gas
used in the specified level of well management.
This option applies only when the label G is
specified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-199

NOLFTGAS Alpha label indicating that the gas production

target qtarg does not include gaslift gas. This is the
default. This option applies only when the label G is
specified.
00 Notes:
1. For predictive well management, a different format of PTARG card

should be used. Refer to Chapter 5 of this manual.
2. One and only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels
must be specified. There is no default. When FIELD is specified the
inum entry may be omitted, or the value 1 may be input; no other
value will be accepted.
3. One and only one of the O, W, G or L labels must be specified. There is

no default. Separate maxima can be established for oil, water, gas, and
liquid by reading multiple PTARG cards.
4. The oil, water, gas and liquid maxima may be exceeded by the
tolerance factors specified on the TRGTOL card before violations
occur.
5. The maximum rate criteria are satisfied first at the gathering center
level, then the flow station level, then the area level, and finally at the
field level. The order in which phase targets are checked at any well
management level is determined by the data specified using the
TRGORD card. If the TRGORD card is not specified, the default order
is: oil, gas, liquid, water.
6. The method used to satisfy the maxima may be specified on the

TRGOPT card.
7. The LSCALE card may be used to specify how well rates should be
recomputed when reductions are necessary. The choices are linear
scaling or rigorous recomputation.
8. Wells whose rates have been reduced due to targeting are designated
by TARG in the production well summary.
9. Well rates will never be reduced below trgqmn, except possibly by the
AVG method.
10. The labels LFTGAS and NOLFTGAS apply only when the label G is
specified.
00 Example:
00 PTARG FIELD 1 O 150000

PTARG GATHER 2 L 50000
PTARG AREA 1 G 10000 LFTGAS
4-200 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.2 Production Target History Option (PTARGH)

00 A PTARGH card is used to activate the option that production targets are
honored, even if well production rates must be increased above their
specified maxima.
ON
PTARGH
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the production target

history option is to be used.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the production target

history option is not to be used. This is the default.
NOTE: 1. When the PTARGH option is on and a production rate in a

member of a well management level falls below its user-
specified production target (PTARG), a scaling algorithm is
used to increase the rates in appropriate wells. An appropriate
well is a well in the affected member of well management
whose production rate is at the specified well maximum
(QMAX).
2. Only one pass through the appropriate wells is undertaken. If a

well cannot produce at its new increased rate, it will produce
what it can and the target will not be reached.
3. When the PTARGH option is on, the LSCALE option must be

off; i.e., the perforation rates will be recalculated, not scaled.
OFF is the default value for LSCALE.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-201

4.3.3 Production Target Frequency (PTGFRQ)

00 The PTGFRQ card is used to control the frequency with which the ordered
lists of wells (i.e., GOR, WCUT) used in production targeting are created.
MONTHS
PTGFRQ freq DAYS
TSTEPS
00 Definitions:
freq Frequency with which the ordered lists of wells

used in the production targeting calculations will be
created. Default is every timestep.
MONTHS Alpha label that sets the unit for freq to months.
DAYS Alpha label that sets the unit for freq to days.
TSTEPS Alpha label that sets the unit for freq to timesteps.
NOTE: 1. When the TEST card frequency for attempting to reopen one or
more shut-in wells causes the test to occur when the targeting
is being delayed by the PTGFRQ data, the test will be deferred
until the next time the full targeting algorithm is performed.
2. Within the simulator the date on a DATE card is considered to

be the beginning of that day. For example, if output is desired
at the end of March 1988, the date card should contain 1/4/88
and not 31/3/88. Thus the MONTHS option on the frequency
card will force a timestep to start at the date 1/month/year.
4.3.4 Options for Reduction of Rates to Meet Target (TRGOPT)

00 A TRGOPT card is used in conjunction with the PTARG card to define the
method of reducing the phase rate of wells to meet the specified phase
targets.
4-202 Landmark - R2003.4

SCALE
AVG
O
GOR
G
TRGOPT WCUT
W
L WRATE
GRATE
AVGGOR
00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the option is specified for:
O Oil phase.
W Water phase.
G Gas phase.
L Liquid phase.
00 Alpha label indicating the action to be taken when the sum of the oil
deliverabilities of producing wells exceeds the specified phase targets:
SCALE Scale the rates of all wells to exactly hit the target.
This is the default if the TRGOPT card is omitted for
oil and liquid targets. This option can be selected for
any phase target.
AVG Reset the rates of appropriate wells to an average

rate. That is, if a wells oil rate is designated as
*
WPO i , then the reset rates will be
*
WPO i = min (WPOi , AVG),
where AVG has been computed to satisfy
WPOi
*
Oil Target =
i
This option can be selected for any phase target.
GOR Reduce the production rate of the highest GOR

wells to a user-specified minimum rate (TRGQMN
card) until the phase target is reached. This is the
default if the TRGOPT card is omitted for gas target.
WCUT Reduce the production rate of the highest water-cut

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-203

card) until the phase target is reached. This is the

default if the TRGOPT card is omitted for water
target.
WRATE Reduce the production rate of the highest water rate

card) until the phase target is reached.
GRATE Reduce the production rate of the highest gas rate

card) until the phase target is reached.
AVGGOR Reset the rates of appropriate wells to an average

rate based on GOR. The set of wells to be reduced
will be those whose GOR is above a calculated
target. This option can only be selected for gas
target.
NOTE: One and only one of the O, W, G, or L labels must be specified.

There is no default. Separate options can be specified for oil, water,
gas, and liquid by reading multiple TRGOPT cards.
One and only one of the SCALE, AVG, GOR, WCUT, WRATE,
GRATE, or AVGGOR labels must be specified.
A wells rate is never reduced below trgqmn by the SCALE, GOR,

WCUT, WRATE, and GRATE methods. The AVG and AVGGOR
methods can drop a well below trgqmn, although it is highly
unlikely this would ever occur.
The options specified on a TRGOPT card for gas and water phase
targets are ignored when GASWAT has been chosen on the
TRGORD card. In this case the rate at the highest GOR well is
reduced to TRGQMN, then the rate of the highest water-cut well is
reduced to TRGQMN, then the next highest GOR well, then the
next highest water-cut well, etc., until the target(s) is (are) met.
4-204 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.5 Order for Checking Phase Targets (TRGORD)

00 The TRGORD card is used in conjunction with the PTARG and TRGOPT
cards to define the order for reducing the various phase rates of wells to
meet specified phase production targets.
OIL GAS LIQUID WATER

TRGORD
OIL LIQUID GASWAT
00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the option is specified for checking targets for:
OIL Oil phase.
GAS Gas phase.
LIQUID Liquid phase.
WATER Water phase.
GASWAT Gas and water simultaneously. This method

involves decreasing rates of wells to TRGQMN
until the target(s) is (are) met in the following order:
highest GOR, highest water-cut, next highest GOR,
etc.
NOTE: The default ordering is: OIL GAS LIQUID WATER
The TRGORD card can only be used in one of the formats described
above; i.e., either the four OIL, WATER, GAS, and LIQUID labels
must be specified or the OIL, LIQUID, and GASWAT labels must be
specified - each set of labels can be in any order. The order in which
phases are specified determines the order in which various phase
targets are checked at each level of well management, starting from
the gathering center.
4.3.6 Minimum Rate for Use in Targeting Calculations (TRGQMN)

00 A TRGQMN card is used to define the minimum rate to which the well
rate is cut back when a phase target is being satisfied at any well
management level.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-205

O
G
TRGQMN wl
W
LIQUID
trgqmn1 trgqmn2 ... trgqmnn
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the minimum production rates are being

specified for:
O Oil phase, STB/D (STCM/D).
G Gas phase, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
W Water phase, STB/D (STCM/D).
LIQUID Liquid phase, STB/D (STCM/D).
wl List of wells for which trgqmn values are being

trgqmn Minimum rate to which the wells rate is cut back

when meeting a phase target. Default is 0.
NOTE: The number of trgqmn values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
00 Examples:
00 TRGQMN O 2 -14 18 22 24 -37 41

30*0.0
4.3.7 Well Rate Maximum Tolerances (TRGTOL)

00 The TRGTOL card is used to specify the factor by which each of the oil,
gas water, and liquid maxima may be exceeded before violations occur.
TRGTOL opttol gpttol wpttol (lpttol)
00 Definitions:
opttol Factor by which oil maxima may be exceeded

before a violation occurs. Default is 0.05.
4-206 Landmark - R2003.4

gpttol Factor by which gas maxima may be exceeded

wpttol Factor by which water maxima may be exceeded

lpttol Factor by which liquid maxima may be exceeded

4.3.8 Injection Target (ITARG)

00 An ITARG card is used to define a maximum injection rate for a gathering
center, a flow station, an area, the field, or an injection region.
GATHER
FLOSTA
W
ITARG AREA inum qtarg
G
FIELD
INJREG
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum injection rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
INJREG Injection region.

management level.
W Water injection, STB/D (STCM/D).
G Gas injection, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
qtarg Maximum injection rate.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-207

NOTE: 1. One and only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, FIELD, or
INJREG labels must be specified. There is no default. When
FIELD is specified the inum entry may be omitted, or the value
1 may be input; no other value will be accepted.
2. One and only one of the W or G labels must be specified. There

is no default. Separate maxima can be established for water and
gas by reading multiple ITARG cards.
3. The maximum rate criteria are satisfied first at the gathering

center level, then the flow station level, then the area level, and
finally at the field level.
4. All wells in the tested level are cut by the same factor if there is
an excess of injectivity (unless the UNIFORM option is used).
5. Wells whose rates have been reduced due to targeting are

designated by WTAR (or GTAR) in the injection well summary.
6. Well rates will never be reduced below qmin.
7. When the injection region option is used, the ITARG cards for
the other well management levels (gathering center, flow
station, area) are ignored.
00 Example:
00 ITARG INJREG 1 W 50000

ITARG INJREG 2 W 50000
ITARG INJREG 1 G 70000
ITARG INJREG 2 G 70000
4.3.9 Well Rate Scaleback Options with Targeting (LSCALE)

00 An LSCALE card is used to change the procedure that is used to
recalculate the layer rates for multi-perforation wells whose rates are
being reduced to meet specified targets. The keyword LSCALE is derived
from linear scaling, and will determine whether the perforation rates are
scaled back linearly, or whether they are rigorously recalculated.
ON
LSCALE
OFF
4-208 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the procedure to be used:
ON Use linear scaling of each of the perforation rates of

each well by its respective rate reduction factor.
OFF Recalculate the perforation rates for each well based

on its reduced total well rate, maintaining an
equilibrium bottomhole flowing pressure profile.
This is the default procedure.
NOTE: The specified procedure is used for both production targets and
injection targets.
4.3.10 Minimum Production Rates (PRDMIN)

00 A PRDMIN card is used to define a minimum production rate for a
gathering center, a flow station, an area, or the field. When this value is
violated in a member of one of these levels, this member is "shut-in". This
means that all of the producers, or all of the wells, attached to that
member of the well management hierarchy are shut-in.
GATHER
O
FLOSTA ALL
PRDMIN
AREA
inum W prdmin
ONLY
G
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified minimum production rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-209

Alpha label indicating the minimum rate is based on:
prdmin Minimum production rate.
ALL Alpha label indicating all wells in member inum are

shut in if the minimum rate is not met. This is the
default.
ONLY Alpha label indicating only the production wells in

member inum are shut in if the minimum rate is not
met.
2. One and only one of the O, W, or G labels must be specified.

There is no default. Separate minima can be established for oil,
water, and gas by reading multiple PRDMIN cards.
3. The minimum rate criteria are satisfied first at the gathering

center level, then the flow station level, and then the area level.
4. The minimum rate criteria at the field level is checked after the
successful completion of each timestep. If any field minimum
constraint is violated, a restart record is written and the run is
terminated. This restart record contains the data from the
beginning of this timestep. This will happen regardless of
whether ALL or ONLY is specified.
5. When starting from the restart record described in the previous

note, remember that the specified minima will still be in effect.
Unless the minima are decreased or more production brought
online, the field will immediately shut in.
4-210 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.11 Minimum Injection Rates (INJMIN)

00 An INJMIN card is used to define a minimum injection rate for a gathering
center, a flow station, an area, or the field. When this value is violated in a
member of one of these levels, this member is "shut-in". This means that
all of the injectors, or all of the wells, attached to that member of the well
management hierarchy are shut-in.
GATHER
FLOSTA W ALL
INJMIN
AREA
inum
G
injmin
ONLY
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified minimum injection rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
Alpha label indicating the minimum rate is based on:
W Water injection, STB/D (STCM/D).
G Gas injection, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
injmin Minimum injection rate.
ALL Alpha label indicating all wells in member inum are

shut in if the minimum rate is not met. This is the
default.
ONLY Alpha label indicating only the water (or gas)

injection wells in member inum are shut in if the
minimum rate is not met.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-211

2. One and only one of the W or G labels must be specified. There

is no default. Separate minima can be established for water and
gas by reading multiple INJMIN cards.
3. The minimum rate criteria are satisfied first at the gathering

center level, then the flow station level, and then the area level.
4. The minimum rate criteria at the field level is checked after the
successful completion of each timestep. If any field minimum
constraint is violated, a restart record is written and the run is
terminated. This restart record contains the data from the
beginning of the timestep. This will happen regardless of
whether ALL or ONLY is specified.
5. When starting from the restart record described in the previous

note, remember that the specified minima will still be in effect.
Unless the minima are decreased or more injection brought
online, the field will immediately shut in.
4-212 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4 Gas Cycling (Not available in VIP-THERM)
4.4.1 Shrinkage Gas Specification (GASSKG)

00 The GASSKG card is used to specify the shrinkage gas rate to be removed
from the total surface production rate of gas for use with gas injectors on
the FSTD reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
GASSKG inum [QRATE q] [FPROD f]
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified shrinkage gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Shrinkage gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Fixed rate.
FPROD Fraction of the total surface production rate to be

used as the shrinkage gas rate.
f Fraction of production rate.
NOTE: One and only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD
levels must be specified. There is no default. When FIELD is
specified the inum entry may be omitted, or the value 1 may be
Data specified at the lower level of well management will be added

to that at the higher level of well management.
If both the QRATE and FPROD labels are specified, the shrinkage
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-213

gas rate is the specified rate plus the fraction of the surface
production rate. (q + f * the surface production rate).
00 Examples:
00 C ***** SHRINKAGE GAS RATE

C
GASSKG GATHER 1 QRATE 100. FPROD 0.1
4.4.2 Fuel Gas Specification (GASFUL)

00 The GASFUL card is used to specify the fuel gas rate to be removed from
the total surface production rate of gas for use with gas injectors on the
FSTD reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
GASFUL inum [QRATE q] [FPROD f] (PLANT)
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified fuel gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Fuel gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Fixed rate. If a GASCOND card is input and the

number of the member in the well management
level specified on this GASFUL card is also
specified on a PLANT card, q will be the amount
excluding component icomp identified or the
GASCOND card.

used as the fuel gas rate.
4-214 Landmark - R2003.4

f Fraction of production rate. If a GASCOND card is

input and the number of the member in the well
management level specified on this GASFUL card is
also specified on a PLANT card, the production rate
to which the fraction applies will be the amount
excluding component icomp identified or the
GASCOND card.
PLANT Alpha label indicating that the fuel gas specified on

this card will be removed from the outlet gas stream
of the MI plant. If this label is omitted, the fuel gas
will be removed from the production gas stream
(prior to any plant calculation).

If both the QRATE and FPROD labels are specified, the fuel gas rate
is the specified rate plus the fraction of the surface production rate.
(q + f * the surface production rate).
Up to two GASFUL cards may be input for any member of a well

management level: one with and the other without the alpha label
PLANT. In this case, two fuel gas streams will be removed: one
from the produced gas stream and the other from the outlet gas
stream of the MI plant.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** FUEL GAS RATE

C
GASFUL GATHER 1 QRATE 200. FPROD 0.1
GASFUL GATHER 1 QRATE 300. PLANT
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-215

4.4.3 Sales Gas Specification (GASSLS)

00 The GASSLS card is used to specify the sales gas rate to be removed from
the total surface production rate of gas for use with gas injectors on the
FSTD reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
GASSLS inum [QSALES q][FPROD f] [FPO gor] (PLANT)
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified sales gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QSALES Sales gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Fixed rate.

used as the sales gas rate.
FPO Fraction of the total surface oil production rate to be

used as the sales gas rate.
gor Fraction of oil production rate in GOR units,

MSCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
PLANT Alpha label indicating that a gas conditioning plant

will be included to process the sales gas where
component icomp on the PLANT card will be
removed from the sales gas stream. In this case, the
value q on this GASSLS card and the production
rate to which the fraction f applies represent the
4-216 Landmark - R2003.4

component icomp-free amount. The removed

component icomp amount will be recombined with
the reinjected gas stream.

The sales gas rate is the specified rate plus the fraction of the
surface gas production rate plus the fraction of the surface oil
production rate. (q + f * the surface gas production rate + gor * the
surface oil production rate). The default values for q, f, and gor are
zero.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** SALES GAS RATE

C
GASSLS GATHER 1 QSALES 500. FPROD 0.7
GASSLS GATHER 2 FPO 0.5
4.4.4 Makeup Gas Specification (GASMKP)

00 The GASMKP card is used to specify the maximum makeup gas rate to be
added to the pool of gas available for reinjection (produced minus sales
minus shrinkage minus fuel) for use with gas injectors on the FSTD
reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA QMAKE q FPROD f
GASMKP inum
AREA QPOOL q FSALES f
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified makeup gas rate applies:
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-217

AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QMAKE Maximum makeup gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
QPOOL Total injected gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D). The

maximum makeup gas rate would be: (pool rate +
sales rate + shrinkage rate + fuel rate - production
rate).
q Gas rate.

used as the makeup gas rate.
FSALES Fraction of the sales gas rate to be used as the

makeup gas rate.

Only one of the FPROD or FSALES labels can be specified.
If both the QMAKE and FPROD labels are specified, the makeup
gas rate is the specified rate plus the fraction of the production rate.
(q + f * the surface production rate).
If both the QMAKE and FSALES labels are specified, the makeup
gas rate is the specified rate plus the fraction of the sales gas rate. (q
+ f * the sales gas rate).
Neither the FPROD nor the FSALES labels can be specified with the
QPOOL label.
When the QPOOL option is specified, the makeup gas rate will not
be allowed to be negative. That is, the pool rate is not allowed to be
less than the production rate minus the sales rate minus the
shrinkage rate minus the fuel gas rate.
Either a YINJMK card or a YREINJ card must be specified for the

same member of the well management level input on the GASMKP
4-218 Landmark - R2003.4

card. The required volume of makeup gas at this composition will

be added to the produced gas available for reinjection to compute
the overall composition of the injected gas.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** MAKEUP GAS RATE

C
GASMKP GATHER 1 QMAKE 100. FPROD 0.2
GASMKP GATHER 2 QPOOL 300.
4.4.5 Makeup MI Specification (MIMKP)

00 For the four-component miscible option, the MIMKP card is used to
specify the makeup MI rate to be added to the pool of MI available for
reinjection for use with MI injectors on the FSTD reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
MIMKP inum QMAKE q
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified makeup MI rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QMAKE Makeup MI rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D)
q MI rate.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-219

2. Data specified at the lower level of well management will be

added to that at the higher level of well management.
3. This card may be input only if the four-component miscible

option is invoked.
00 Example:
00 C*****MAKEUP MI RATE
C
MIMKP FIELD QMAKE 500.
4.4.6 Effective Gas Injection Target (ETRGOP)

00 The ETRGOP card is used to select the method of checking the total gas
injection rate for each level of well management. The effective target is
defined as the minimum of the gas available for reinjection and the user-
specified injection target.
ALL
ETRGOP FIELD
NONE
00 Definitions:
ALL Effective target is checked for all levels of well

management.
FIELD Effective target is checked for the field level only.
NONE Effective target is not used. This is the default.
NOTE: When the ALL option is selected, the effective target instead of the
specified target will be checked at all levels of well management.
When the FIELD option is selected, the specified injection target
will be checked at each gathering center, flow station, and area. The
effective target will be checked at the field level. When the NONE
option is selected, the specified injection target will be checked at
each level of well management.
When the general injection region option is used, the ETRGOP card
will be neglected. The specified injection target will be checked in
each injection region. Then, the effective target will be checked at
the field level.
00 Examples:
4-220 Landmark - R2003.4

00 C *****EFFECTIVE TARGET
ETRGOP FIELD
4.4.7 Makeup Gas Composition (YINJMK)

00 The YINJMK card is used to specify the composition of the makeup gas for
use with gas injectors on the FSTD reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
YINJMK inum (PROD) (card 1)
AREA
FIELD
yinjmk1 yinjmk2 . . . yinjmknc (card 2)
00 Definitions:

which the specified gas composition applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
PROD Alpha label indicating that the composition of the

produced gas should be used as the composition of
the makeup gas. If a composition is input on the
following card, it will be ignored.
yinjmkk Mole fraction of component k in the gas. A value

must be specified for each of the components, and
the values must sum exactly to 1.0. This data need
not be input if PROD was specified.
specified the inum entry may be omitted, or the value 1 may
be input; no other value will be accepted.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-221

2. A YINJMK card or a YREINJ card for the appropriate level of

the well management hierarchy must be entered when the
GASMKP card is input.
3. As many data cards (card 2) as necessary may be used to

specify a yinjmk value for each component.
4.4.8 Reinjected Gas Composition (YREINJ)

00 The YREINJ card is used to specify the composition of the reinjected gas
for use with gas injectors on either the FSTD or FRES reinjection option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
YREINJ inum (PROD)
AREA
FIELD
yreinj1 yreinj2 ... yreinjnc
00 Definitions:

which the specified gas composition applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
PROD Alpha label indicating that the composition of the

produced gas should be used as the composition of
the reinjected gas. If a composition is input on the
following card, it will be ignored.
yreinjk Mole fraction of component k in the gas. A value

must be specified for each of the components, and
the values must sum exactly to 1.0. This data need
not be input if PROD was specified.
4-222 Landmark - R2003.4

2. The data on the YREINJ card overrides the composition of the

reinjected gas calculated internally.
3. A YINJMK card or a YREINJ card for the appropriate level of

the well management hierarchy must be entered when the
GASMKP card is input.
4. As many data cards as necessary may be used to specify a

yreinj value for each component.
4.4.9 Liquid Recovery Factors (RECFAC)

00 The RECFAC card is used to specify the fraction of each component in the
gas stream that can be recovered as a liquid at the gas plant for use with
gas injectors on the FSTD reinjection option. Alternatively, if the four-
component miscible option is invoked, the input recovery factor for
component 3 will be treated as the MI recovery factor and the recovered
MI (plus makeup MI, if applicable) will be used for MI injectors (see INJ
card, Section 3.4.2).
RECFAC
recfac1 recfac2 . . . recfacnc
00 Definition:
recfack Fraction of component k in the gas stream that can

be recovered as a liquid at the gas plant. A value
must be specified for each of the components. For
the four-component miscible option, recfac will be
treated as the MI recovery factor for MI reinjection.
NOTE: 1. If the RECFAC card is not entered, the fractions are assumed to
be 0.0.
2. As many data cards (card 2) as necessary may be used to

specify a recfac value for each component.
4.4.10 Invoke Major Gas Sales Option (PLANT)

00 The PLANT card is used to invoke the major gas sales option and to
specify the member of the well management hierarchy for which the
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-223

major gas sales algorithm applies.
GATHER
ON FLOSTA
PLANT iwmll
OFF AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the major gas sales option (NGLPLANT,

MIPLANT, or GASCOND card) is to be applied to the numbers of the
members in the well management level specified on this card:
ON The major gas sales calculation is to be performed

for the well management level specified on this
card.
OFF The major gas sales calculation will not be

performed for the well management level specified
on this card. This is the default.
Alpha label indicating well management level:
GATHER Gathering Center.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
iwmll List of numbers of the members in the specified

well management level. If FIELD is the specified
well management level, iwmll must be omitted.
NOTE: The major gas sales calculation will be performed only for those
members of the well management hierachy explicitly appearing on
a PLANT card.
00 Examples:
00 PLANT ON GATHER 1 3 -6
PLANT ON FIELD
4-224 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.11 Gas Conditioning for Sales Gas and Fuel Gas (GASCOND)
GASCOND icomp (VENT)

(DIST idist)
00 Definition:
icomp Hydrocarbon component number to be removed

from the sales gas stream in the gas conditioning
plant, if the keyword PLANT is specified on the
GASSLS card. Also, all input (GASFUL card) and
output fuel gas amounts will exclude amounts of
component icomp (i.e., component icomp-free
amounts).
VENT Alpha label indicating that component icomp

removed from the sales gas stream will not be
combined with the reinjected gas stream and will be
vented.
DIST Alpha label indicating that component icomp

removed from the sales gas stream will not be
combined with the reinjected gas stream and will be
uniformly distributed into a user-specified number
of FSTD gas injectors (Type A injectors identified by
keyword KEYCMP in the INJ card) using Method
idist. Keyword DIST may be specified only if a
GINJOP UNIFORM card is also specified.
idist Integer 1 through 3 indicating method number for

the distribution of the reinjected gas stream and
component icomp stream into FSTD gas injectors.
In all three methods, component icomp stream will
be uniformly distributed into all above mentioned
Type A injectors. In Method 1, the reinjected gas
stream will be uniformly distributed into all FSTD
gas injectors not identified as Type A injectors (i.e.,
Type B injectors). In Method 2, the reinjected gas
stream will be distributed into all FSTD gas
injectors (i.e., all Type A and Type B injectors) with
the constraint that all injectors have the same total
gas (component icomp and/or reinjected gas)
injection rate. In Method 3, the reinjected gas stream
will be uniformly distributed into all FSTD gas
injectors (i.e., all Type A and Type B injectors). If the
component icomp and/or the reinjected gas rate
exceeds the total injectivity and cutback of the
injection rate is necessary, the component icomp
stream will be vented first.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-225

NOTE: In the major gas sales option, the GASCOND card is used to
remove one component (e.g., CO2) from a sales gas stream. The
removed component amount will then either be recombined with
the reinjected gas (i.e., the outlet gas stream of the MI plant and any
available makeup gas), vented (through keyword VENT), or
uniformly distributed into Type A gas injectors (through keyword
DIST). The DIST option may be specified only if the UNIFORM
method in the gas reinjection option (GINJOP card) is chosen. If
both VENT and DIST are not specified, the component icomp
stream will be recombined with the reinjected gas stream for
reinjection. Furthermore, the input fuel gas amount on the
GASFUL card and the output fuel gas amount in the gas handling
report are component icomp-free amount.
00 Examples:
00 GASCOND 2 DIST 2
4.4.12 Natural Gas Liquid (NGL) Plant Data Input (NGLPLANT)

00 The NGLPLANT card is used in the major gas sales option to allow the
produced gas stream (minus fuel and shrinkage gas) in any well
management level to be processed in an NGL plant to remove NGL from
the stream.
NGLPLANT
NKEY ikey (PLUS)
KEYCMP
PLNTRY
pr1,1 pr1,2 ... pr1,j ... pr1,NI
pr2,1 pr2,2 ... pr2,j ... pr2,NI
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
00 Definitions:
NKEY Alpha label indicating that the key component

number or the key component plus fraction number
is to be read. The cards KEYCMP and PLNTRY
defined below should follow the NKEY card.
4-226 Landmark - R2003.4

ikey The number of the key component or the key

component plus fraction to be used in the liquid
recovery fraction table look up. In the key
component case, the mole fraction of the key
component is used for the table look up of
component liquid recovery values, whereas in the
key component plus fraction case, the sum of the
well stream over all mole fraction from the key
component plus all the following components are
used in the table look up.
PLUS Alpha label indicating the key component plus

fraction is to be used in the table look up.
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating the key component mole

fractions or the key component plus over all mole
fractions are to be entered. These are the key
component mole fractions or the sum of key
component plus mole fractions that are to be used
in the liquid recovery fraction table look up.
vkcmp The value of the key component mole fraction or

the sum of the key component plus fraction to be
used as an interpolation value. There are NI
number of interpolation point values to be read.
They should be on one card and should cover the
range of values that are to be expected in the run.
read on the card. The vkcmp values on this card
must be in descending order.

stream.

separated to the liquid stream in the NGL Plant.
The liquid recovery fractions are entered for each
component as a function of the key component
mole fraction or the key component plus mole
fraction and one value must be entered for NI
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-227


and 1.
NOTE: In the major gas sales option, the produced gas stream in any well
management level may be processed in an NGL plant and/or a MI
plant to remove NGL and/or MI. Sales gas is then removed from
the output gas stream, and the remaining gas is combined with the
makeup gas to form the reinjected gas stream.
The feed composition of an NGL plant (or an MI plant if no NGL

plant included) is the composition of the total stock tank gas stream
for any well management level, while output NGL and gas streams
are determined by the molar liquid recovery fractions. If a
MIPLANT tables is also input, the output gas stream from the
NGLPLANT will be fed into the MIPLANT. The outlet MI
composition from the MI plant for well management level will be
used as the injection composition for MI injectors attached to the
level (see the INJ card).
A PLANT card must be entered to invoke the NGL calculation for

any well management level.
The feed, outlet liquid (NGL and gas rates and compositions can be
printed as part of the separator report using the keyword SEP on
the PRINT card.
00 Examples:
00 C=========================================
C NGL PLANT
C =========================================
NGLPLANT
NKEY 6 PLUS
KEYCMP
.9999 .108 .104 .098 .075 .065 .047 .028 .018 .010 .000
PLNTRY
.0240 .0240 .0240 .0220 .0170 .0140 .0100 .0050 .0030 .0020 .0020
.0070 .0070 .0070 .0060 .0050 .0040 .0030 .0010 .0010 .0000 .0000
.0610 .0610 .0590 .0560 .0430 .0370 .0270 .0140 .0090 .0060 .0060
.1790 .1790 .1750 .1690 .1370 .1220 .0920 .0550 .0400 .0290 .0290
.4680 .4680 .4640 .4530 .4000 .3710 .3050 .2200 .1770 .1480 .1480
.9960 .9960 .9960 .9960 .9940 .9930 .9890 .9790 .9690 .9590 .9590
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
4-228 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.13 Miscible Injectant (MI) Plant Data Input (MIPLANT)

00 The MIPLANT card is used in the major gas sales option to allow the
produced gas stream (minus fuel and shrinkage gas) in any well
management level to be processed in an MI plant to remove MI from the
stream.
MIPLANT
NKEY ikey (PLUS)
KEYCMP
PLNTRY
pr1,1 pr1,2 ... pr1,j ... pr1,NI
pr2,1 pr2,2 ... pr2,j ... pr2,NI
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
00 Definitions:



fraction is to be used in the table loop up.

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-229




stream.

separated to the liquid stream in the MI Plant. The
and 1.
NOTE: In the major gas sales option, the produced gas stream in any well
management level may be processed in an NGL plant and/or a MI
plant to remove NGL and/or MI. Sales gas is then removed from
the output gas stream, and the remaining gas is combined with the
makeup gas to form the reinjected gas stream.
The feed composition of an NGL plant (or an MI plant if no NGL

plant included) is the composition of the total stock tank gas stream
for any well management level, while output NGL and gas streams
are determined by the molar liquid recovery fractions. If a
MIPLANT tables is also input, the output gas stream from the
NGLPLANT will be fed into the MIPLANT. The outlet MI
composition from the MI plant for well management level will be
used as the injection composition for MI injectors attached to the
level (see the INJ card).
4-230 Landmark - R2003.4

A PLANT card must be entered to invoke the MI calculation for

any well management level.
The feed, outlet liquid (MI and gas rates and compositions can be
printed as part of the separator report using the keyword SEP on
the PRINT card. The MI plant summary table also contains the
reinjected lean gas composition.
00 Examples:
00 C=========================================
C MI PLANT
C =========================================
MIPLANT
NKEY 6 PLUS
KEYCMP
.9999 .108 .104 .098 .075 .065 .047 .028 .018 .010 .000
PLNTRY
.0240 .0240 .0240 .0220 .0170 .0140 .0100 .0050 .0030 .0020 .0020
.0070 .0070 .0070 .0060 .0050 .0040 .0030 .0010 .0010 .0000 .0000
.0610 .0610 .0590 .0560 .0430 .0370 .0270 .0140 .0090 .0060 .0060
.1790 .1790 .1750 .1690 .1370 .1220 .0920 .0550 .0400 .0290 .0290
.4680 .4680 .4640 .4530 .4000 .3710 .3050 .2200 .1770 .1480 .1480
.9960 .9960 .9960 .9960 .9940 .9930 .9890 .9790 .9690 .9590 .9590
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-231

4.4.14 Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) Plant Data Input (LPGPLANT)

00 The LPGPLANT card is used in the major gas sales option to allow the
produced gas stream (minus fuel and shrinkage gas) or the outlet gas from
the NGLPLANT (if an NGLPLANT is specified) in any well management
level to be processed in an LPG plant to remove LPG from the stream.
LPGPLANT
NKEY ikey (PLUS)
KEYCMP
vkcmp1 vkcmp2 .... vkcmpj .... vkcmpNI
(enter number of key component or key component plus composition
values for interpolation. j=1 to number of interpolation points,
NI)
PLNTRY
pr1,1 pr1,2 .... pr1,j .... pr1,NI
pr2,1 pr2,2 .... pr2,j .... pr2,NI
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
pri,1 pri,2 .... pri,j .... pri,NI
. . . . . .
prNC,1 prNC,2 .... prNC,j .... prNC,NI
interpolation point, j=1 to number of interpolation values, NI.
Repeat for all components, i=1 to the number of components, NC)
00 Definitions:



fraction is to be used in the table loop up.

4-232 Landmark - R2003.4




stream.

separated to the liquid stream in the LPG Plant. The
and 1.
NOTE: In the Major Gas Sales Option, the outlet gas stream of the NGL
plant (if specified) is processed in the LPG plant. If a MIPLANT
table is also input, the outlet gas stream from the LPG plant will be
fed into the MI plant. The feed, outlet liquid (LPG) and gas rates
and compositions can be printed as part of the separator report
using keyword SEP on the PRINT card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-233

4.4.15 Maximum Feed Rate to NGL Plant (NGLFED)

00 The NGLFED card specifies the maximum feed rate to the NGL plant for
use with the NGLPLANT on the Major Gas Sales Option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
NGLFED inum QRATE q
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum NGL feed rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Maximum NGL feed rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Maximum rate.

00 Examples:
C***** Maximum NGL Feed Rate

C
NGLFED FIELD QRATE 100000.
4-234 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.16 Maximum NGL Rate (NGLOUT)

00 The NGLOUT card specifies the maximum NGL rate from the NGL plant
for use with the NGLPLANT on the Major Gas Sales Option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
NGLOUT inum QRATE q
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum NGL rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Maximum NGL rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Maximum rate.

00 Examples:
C***** Maximum NGL Rate

C
NGLOUT AREA 1 QRATE 10000.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-235

4.4.17 Maximum Feed Rate to LPG Plant (LPGFED)

00 The LPGFED card specifies the maximum feed rate to the LPG plant for
use with the LPGPLANT on the Major Gas Sales Option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
LPGFED inum QRATE q
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum LPG feed rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Maximum LPG feed rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Maximum rate.

00 Examples:
C***** Maximum LPG Feed Rate

C
LPGFED FIELD QRATE 100000.
4-236 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.18 Maximum LPG Rate (LPGOUT)

00 The LPGOUT card specifies the maximum LPG rate from the LPG plant
for use with the LPGPLANT on the Major Gas Sales Option.
GATHER
FLOSTA
LPGOUT inum QRATE q
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified maximum LPG rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
QRATE Maximum LPG rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
q Maximum rate.

00 Examples:
C***** Maximum LPG Rate

C
LPGOUT AREA 1 QRATE 10000.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-237

4.5 Basic Gas Reinjection (GINJOP) (Not Available in VIP-

THERM)
00 A gas reinjection option other than the standard option of a well injecting
a fraction of the production in a member in a well management level exists
in VIP-EXECUTIVE. Under the new option, maximum rates are specified
for the wells. If the sum of well injectivities exceeds the available
reinjection gas, the rates are decreased by resetting the gas injection rates
of appropriate wells to an average rate. That is, if a wells rate is
designated as WIGi, then the reset rates will be
*
00 WIG i = min (WIGi, AVG),
00 where AVG has been computed to satisfy
WIGi
*
00 Gas Target =
i
00 If the sum of well injectivities falls below the available reinjection gas, the
gas injection rates of appropriate wells are scaled-up.
00 The GINJOP card is used to define the gas reinjection option to be used.
GINJOP STD
UNIFORM
STD Alpha label indicating that the standard gas

reinjection option is to be used. This is the default.
UNIFORM Alpha label indicating the gas reinjection option

with uniform distribution of rate to wells to match
the available reinjection gas rate will be used.
NOTE: 1. The GINJOP UNIFORM card must be entered before any

QMAX cards.
2. For the UNIFORM option gas injection wells must be specified

as either FSTD or FRES (INJ card), then assigned to the
appropriate level of well management.
3. Also for the UNIFORM option the definition of qmax on the

QMAX cards is the maximum gas injection rate, even though
the well type is FSTD or FRES.
4-238 Landmark - R2003.4

4.6 Injection Regions (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 Water and gas reinjection may be controlled through the use of injection
regions. These are separate and independent of the other levels of well
management to which water and gas injectors are assigned. Voidage
replacement, pressure maintenance and gas project prioritization are
allowed in the injection regions.
00 An injection region is defined by three dimensional grids. An injector can

be assigned to one region only. An injector which does not physically exist
within a region can still be assigned to it. If the user assigns gridblocks to
injection regions but not the injection wells, the program assigns the
injection region for the injector according to the location of the top
perforation. A producer may be completed in more than one region. The
program automatically matches the completion zones for a producer to
the corresponding regions.
00 The maximum water injection to the field is the minimum of the field
injection target, and the sum of the field production and the specified
water source (the IRSRCW card). The maximum gas injection to the field is
the minimum of the specified field injection target and the field available
gas. The field available gas is the field production plus gaslift gas (from
the previous timestep) plus makeup gas specified by the GASMKP card
plus makeup gaslift gas minus the shrinkage gas minus the fuel gas minus
the gaslift gas (at present timestep) minus the sales gas. If gaslift gas is not
part of the gas handling loop, the gaslift gas and makeup gaslift gas are
not included in the calculation.
4.6.1 Define the Injection Region Option (RINJOP)

00 The RINJOP card is used to define the injection region option to be used.
STD NODIST UNIFORM

RINJOP
INJREG REDIST PROPTN
00 Definitions:
STD Alpha label indicating that the standard reinjection

option (with well management levels instead of
injection regions) is to be used. This is the default.
INJREG Alpha label indicating that injection regions will be

used for water and gas injection.
NODIST Alpha label indicating that the redistribution option

will not be used for injection regions. This is default.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-239

REDIST Alpha label indicating that the redistribution option

will be used for injection regions.
UNIFORM Alpha label indicating that equal amount of fluid

will be distributed to each voidage controlled
(FRES) well under the same region. This is default.
PROPTN Alpha label indicating that the amount of fluid

distributed to each voidage controlled well in a
region will be proportional to the well injectivity.
NOTE: The RINJOP INJREG card must be entered before any QMAX
cards.
For the INJREG option, injection wells under net voidage control
and/or pressure maintenance must be specified as FRES (INJ card),
but the well management level is ignored.
For the INJREG option, the definition of qmax on the QMAX card
is the maximum injection rate at reservoir condition when the well
type is FRES.
The NODIST, REDIST, UNIFORM, PROPTN options can be

selected only when the INJREG option is chosen.
For the REDIST option, the injection fluid available to each region is
the maximum field injection rate times the percentage for the
region specified in the IRPCTA card. If no percentages are input,
then each injection region will be assigned the fraction, 1/(number
of regions with defined voidage controlled wells). If the amount of
fluid injected in a region is less than the available amount for the
region, this extra amount of fluid will be redistributed to other
regions according to the regions injectivities.
For the PROPTN option, the amount of fluid calculated from the
voidage and pressure maintenance control is distributed to the
voidage controlled wells according to the injectivities.
For the UNIFORM option, the amount of fluid calculated from the
voidage and pressure maintenance control is equally distributed to
the voidage controlled wells.
When the PERCENT option in the IRDIST card is selected, the

amount of fluid calculated from the voidage and/or pressure
maintenance control is neglected. Therefore, neither PROPTN nor
UNIFORM option is used.
4-240 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example 1:
00 C ***** INJECTION REGION OPTION

C
RINJOP INJREG
00 Example 2:
00 ***** INJECTION REGION WITH PROPTN OPTION

C
RINJOP INJREG PROPTN
4.6.2 Assign Name to Injection Region (INJRNM)

00 The INJRNM card is used to assign a name to an injection region.
INJRNM nir injrnm
00 Definitions:
nir Injection region number.
injrnm Injection region name. The first character in the

name must be alphabetic unless the name is
immediately preceded by the character #. Only the
first six (6) characters of the name are retained.
Default is blanks.
00 Examples:
00 INJRNM 1 lNJRO1
INJRNM 2 lNJRO2
INJRNM 3 lNJRO3
INJRNM 4 lNJRO4
INJRNM 5 lNJRO5
4.6.3 Maximum Source Water Injection Rate (IRSRCW)

00 The IRSRCW card is used to specify the maximum source water injection
rate available to the field, in conjunction with the injection region option.
IRSRCW irsrcw
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-241

00 Definition:
irsrcw Maximum source water injection rate available to

the field when using the injection region option,
STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** SOURCE WATER

C
IRSRCW 1000000
4.6.4 Assign Injection Wells to Injection Regions (INJRGR)

00 The INJRGR card is used to assign appropriate injection wells to injection
regions.
INJRGR wl
nir1 nir2 . . . nirn
00 Definitions:
wl List of injection wells for which injection region

numbers are being assigned (see Section 1.5.2).
nir Injection region number to which the well is

assigned.
NOTE: The number of nir values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
The INJRGR card may be omitted if the INJREGN card has been
used to assign gridblocks to injection regions. In this case, wells
will be assigned to the appropriate injection region based on the
location of the first completion zone.
If FIELD distribution data are specified on the IRDIST card, both

the INJRGR and INJREGN cards maybe omitted. In this case all
appropriate injection wells will be assigned to injection region
number one.
If any INJRGR card has been entered, the program assumes that all
injectors have been explicitly assigned to regions. Thus, no injectors
will be assigned automatically based on the perforation locations.
4-242 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Examples:
00 INJRGR 15
1
INJRGR 16 38
2*2
4.6.5 Distribution Percentage of Injection Rate to Injection Regions

(IRPCTA)
00 The IRPCTA card is used to assign injection rate distribution percentages
to injection regions.
IRPCTA nir
pct1 pct2 . . . pctm
00 Definitions:
nir List of injection regions to which the following

percentages apply. (The list nir has the same format
as the well list wl.) (see Section 1.5.2)
pct Percentage to be used for appropriate distribution

of injection rate to the injection regions.
NOTE: The number of pct values must equal the number of regions in the
injection region list.
If the percentage for a region will be required, then it should be

input. If no percentages are input, then each injection region will be
assigned the fraction 1/(number of areas with defined wells). The
percentage for a region is required when the PERCENT option is
used in the IRDIST card or when the REDIST option is selected in
the RINJOP card.
The sum of the percentages of all injection regions must be no

greater than 100.
4.6.6 Assign Gridblocks to Injection Regions (INJREGN)

00 The INJREGN card is used to assign gridblocks to injection regions.
INJREGN nir
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-243

00 Definitions:
nir Injection region number to which gridblocks are

being assigned.
i1, i2 Gridblock range in the x direction.
j1, j2 Gridblock range in the y direction.
k1, k2 Gridblock range in the z direction.
NOTE: If FIELD distribution data are specified on the IRDIST card, the
INJREGN card may be used to restrict which gridblocks will be
used for pressure and voidage calculations (using nir = 1). In this
case only injection region number one is used.
INJREGN data must be input for INJREG distribution using ALL or

LIQUID voidage (IRDIST card).
00 Examples:
00 C ***** INJECTION REGION

INJREGN 1
68 78 1 1 5 10
4.6.7 Specify How Distribution of Injection Fluid is to Occur (IRDIST)

00 The IRDIST card is used to specify how distribution of fluid is to occur in
the injection regions.
(TYPVDG)(PRMEXP)
FIELD TRGPRS RFRPRS
IRDIST (TYPPRS)(VDGFCT)(INFLUX)
INJREG PGRAD DELTAP
[inum] (typvdg) (prmexp)

trgprs rfrprs (typprs)(vdgfct)(influx)
pgrad deltap
00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the corresponding datum on the following card(s)

is:
FIELD Field number (must be 1). This label must follow

the IRDIST keyword.
INJREG Number of the injection region to which the

remaining data apply. This label must follow the
IRDIST keyword.
4-244 Landmark - R2003.4

TYPVDG Type of distribution of injection rate to the injection

region or the field.
PRMEXP Exponent on the pressure maintenance term.
TRGPRS Target pressure for pressure maintenance.
RFRPRS Reference pressure for pressure maintenance.
PGRAD Targeted rate of pressure decline or increase for

pressure maintenance.
DELTAP Difference between reference pressure and target

pressure for pressure maintenance.
TYPPRS Type of average pressure for pressure maintenance.
VDGFCT Multiplying factor to be applied to the voidage.
INFLUX Indicates that aquifer influx is to be subtracted from

the voidage.
inum Field number (must be 1) or region number to

which the following data apply.
typvdg Type of distribution of injection rate to the injection

regions. There is no default.
ALL Voidage calculation using all three

phases.
LIQUID Voidage calculation using liquid

only.
PERCENT Use specified percentage(s).

(IRPCTA card.)
prmexp Exponent of the pressure term. Stored value will be

integer. Specify the value 0 if pressure maintenance
option is not to be used. The alpha label X may be
specified to maintain current value. Default is 0.
trgprs Target pressure to use for the pressure maintenance

option, psia (kPa). The alpha label X may be
specified to maintain current value. There is no
default.
rfrprs Reference pressure to use for the pressure

maintenance option, psia (kPa). The alpha label X
may be specified to maintain current value. There is
no default.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-245

pgrad Targeted rate of pressure increase/decline to use for

the pressure maintenance option, psi/day (kPa/
day). The alpha label X may be specified to
maintain current value. There is no default.
deltap Difference between reference pressure and target

pressure to use for the pressure maintenance
option, psi (kPa). The alpha label X may be specified
to maintain current value. There is no default.
typprs Type of average pressure to use with pressure

maintenance. The alpha label X may be specified to
maintain current value. There is no default.
PVWEIGHT Pore volume-weighted average.
HCWEIGHT Hydrocarbon pore volume-weighted

average.
vdgfct Multiplying factor to be applied to the voidage. The

alpha label X may be specified to maintain current
value. Default is 1.0.
influx Indicates whether aquifer influx is to be subtracted

from voidage. The alpha label X may be specified to
maintain current value.
NO Do not subtract aquifer influx from

voidage value. This is the default.
YES Subtract aquifer influx from voidage

value.
NOTE: IRDIST FIELD data will be used only if no IRDIST INJREG data
have been read.
Producers to be used for voidage calculations are determined by

their completion locations relative to the injection region gridblock
assignments. If a producer is completed in more than one region,
the actual production from the completions in each region will be
used to determine voidage for each region.
If FIELD distribution is input, but no INJREGN cards have been

input, then the entire field is treated as the injection region. If
INJRGR cards have also been omitted, all appropriate injection
wells are assigned to injection region one.
For the injection rate distribution type typvdg:
ALL or LIQUID must be specified for pressure maintenance.
When ALL or LIQUID are used with FIELD, the field injection
4-246 Landmark - R2003.4

rate at reservoir conditions is then allocated to the injection

regions using percentages.
When PERCENT is used with FIELD, the field injection rate at

surface conditions (the minimum of the field production rate plus
the injection source and the specified field injection target) is then
allocated to the injection regions using percentages.
The reference pressure rfrprs must exceed both the target pressure
trgprs and the computed average pressure.
The pairs of data rfrprs/trgprs and pgrad/deltap may not occur

on the same IRDIST card. These options are mutually exclusive.
00 Examples:
00 C
IRDIST INJREG TYPVDG VDGFCT INFLUX
1 ALL 1.0 NO
4.6.8 Forced Gas Injection Into Injection Regions (IRGAS)

00 The IRGAS card is used to activate the forced gas injection option, in
conjunction with the injection region option, and to define the and
parameters for the forced gas regions.
OFF
IRGAS nir or IRGAS
ON
alpha1 alpha2 ... alpham
beta1 beta2 ... betam
00 Definitions:
nir List of injection regions to which the following

and parameters apply. (The list nir has the same
format as the well list wl.) (see Section 1.5.2)
OFF Alpha label indicating that the forced gas injection

option is now inactive. The alpha and beta
parameters will be retained in case the option is
ever reactivated.
ON Alpha label indicating that the forced gas injection

option is to be reactivated.
alpha parameter for a forced gas region. See Notes for

an explanation of its usage.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-247

beta parameter for a forced gas region. See Notes for

an explanation of its usage.
NOTE: The number of alpha and beta values must equal the number of
regions in the injection region list.
The values of alpha and beta must lie between 0. and 1., inclusive.
The sum of the beta values over all forced gas regions must be 1.
Wells defined as forced gas injectors inject gas even if pressure

maintenance criteria are violated. Such an option is useful when the
flaring of excess produced gas is not allowed.
Under the forced gas option (IRGAS card specified), the forced gas
injectors are those gas injectors for which FRES is specified on the
INJ card. FRES gas injectors may only exist in forced gas regions;
i.e., those for which s and s are specified. No FRES gas injector
may exist in a non-forced gas region.
The injection gas rate is distributed to the injection regions as

follows:
Define:
R entire reservoir
F forced gas regions
parameter for each forced gas region
parameter for each forced gas region
qGI well gas injection rate for non-FRES wells
QGI non-FRES injection rate in each region, =qGI
QGI total gas injection rate in each region
QGP total gas production rate from each region

net
Q GPF net field gas production rate
QGP ( i ) ( sales + fuel + shrinkage ) + makeup

i R
QRINJ gas production rate minus non-FRES gas

injection rate
QGI ( i )
net
Q GPF
i R
For each non-forced gas injection region k,
4-248 Landmark - R2003.4

Q GI ( k ) = Q GI ( k )
For each forced gas injection region i,

( i )Q GP ( i )
Q GI ( i ) = -------------------------------------- min ( j )Q GP ( j ), Q RINJ
( j )QGP ( j ) jF

j F

+ ( i ) Q RINJ min ( j )Q GP ( j ), Q RINJ
jF
+ Q GI ( i )
Note that in all cases
QGI ( i )
net
= Q GPF
i R
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-249

4.6.9 Select Gas Project Prioritization Option (PRIOP)

00 The PRIOP card is used to activate the gas prioritization option within the
general injection region option. The INJREG label must have been input
on the RINJOP card to use this option.
ON
PRIOP
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the gas prioritization

option will be used.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the gas prioritization

option is not used. This is the default.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** GAS PRIORITIZATION OPTION

C
PRIOP ON
4.6.10 Assign Name to Gas Project (PROJNM)

00 The PROJNM card is used to assign a name to a gas project.
PROJNM nproj projnm
00 Definitions:
nproj Project number.
projnm Project name. The first character in the name must

be alphabetic unless the name is immediately
blanks.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** NAME OF THE GAS PROJECT
00 C
PROJNM 1 MGI
PROJNM 2 IMGI
PROJNM 3 GS
4-250 Landmark - R2003.4

4.6.11 Assign Gas Injection Wells to Projects (PROJWL)

00 The PROJWL card is used to assign the appropriate gas injection wells to
the projects.
PROJWL wl
nproj1 nproj2 . . . nprojn
00 Definitions:
wl List of gas injection wells for which projects are

being assigned (see Section 1.5.2).
nproj Project number to which the well is assigned.
NOTE: The number of nproj values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
Only a gas injection well can be assigned to a project. The FRES

well type in the injection region option is a net voidage injection
well. Since water injection follows gas injection in the prioritization
option, the user cannot specify FRES gas injection wells in the
option.
00 Examples:
00 C ASSIGN GAS INJECTORS TO PROJECTS

PROJWL 1 -4
1212
4.6.12 Prioritize Gas Projects (PRIIR)

00 The PRIIR card is used to prioritize gas projects in injection regions. If a
priority is to be skipped in an injection region, the user should specify
project 0 for that priority.
INJREG
PRIIR irl
FIELD
nproj1 nproj2 ... nprojn
00 Definitions:
FIELD Field option is used to prioritize the projects.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-251

INJREG Injection region option is used to prioritize the

projects.
irl List of injection regions to which prioritization is

being assigned (the injection region list irl has the
same format as the well list wl). (see Section 1.5.2)
nprojn Assign a project number to priority n.
00 Examples:
00 C ***** PRIORITIZE PROJECTS

C
PRIIR INJREG 1 -3
1 3 4 2 5
PRIIR INJREG 4
1 0 3 4 5
4.7 Voidage Injection by Guide Rate (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
00 A guide rate voidage injection scheme has been implemented in VIP-
EXECUTIVE. The INJ and the QMAX cards are modified when the new
scheme is used. The FRES and FSTD options define the wells under new
voidage replacement control. The GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, and FIELD
option on the INJ card indicates the well management level upon which
the gas injection composition is based. The QMAX card specifies the
maximum injection rate even though the well type is FRES or FSTD.
00 Two input option cards, INJTAR and INJGR, are added. The INJTAR card
specifies the injection target and the INJGR card specifies the guide rate.
4-252 Landmark - R2003.4

4.7.1 Maximum Injection Target for a Group (INJTAR)

00 The INJTAR card is used to specify the maximum injection target for a
group.
RSTD
GATHER
RRES
FLOSTA W
INJTAR inum FSTD qtarg
AREA G
FRES
FIELD
FRESN
00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierarchy to

which the maximum injection rate applies:
FLOSTA Flow Station.
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
W Water injection.
G Gas injection.
RSTD Rate specified is at surface condition, STB/D

(STM3/D) for water and MSCF/D (SM3/D) for gas.
RRES Rate specified is at reservoir condition, RB/D (M3/

D).
FSTD Rate specified is a fraction of the phase production

rate.
FRES Rate specified is a fraction of total voidage.
FRESN Rate specified is a fraction of net voidage.
qtarg The maximum injection rate if either the RSTD or

RRES option is used. The fraction of the production
rate if either the FSTD, FRES, or FRESN option is
used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-253

NOTE: If the RSTD or FSTD option is used, then the well should be defined
with the FSTD option on the INJ card. If the RRES, FRES, or FRESN
option is used, then the well should be defined with the FRES
option on the INJ card.
One and only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD

One and only one of the W or G labels must be specified. There is

no default.
One and only one of the RSTD, RRES, FSTD, FRES, or FRESN
labels must be specified. There is no default.
4.7.2 Injection Guide Rate for a Group (INJGR)

00 The INJGR card is used to specify the injection guide rate for a group.
WELL GURTS grate

GATHER W GURTR grate
INJGR inum
FLOSTA G VOID
AREA VOIN
00 Definitions:

which the injection guide rate applies:
WELL Well.
AREA Area.

management level.
W Water injection.
G Gas injection
GURTS Guide rate in surface units will be input, STB/D or

MSCF/D (STCM/D or SCM/D).
4-254 Landmark - R2003.4

GURTR Guide rate in reservoir units will be input, rb/D

(rcm/D).
VOID Guide rate is set to voidage.
VOIN Guide rate is set to net voidage.
grate Guide rate for GURTS and GURTR options.
NOTE: If the VOID or VOIN option is used, then the guide rate need not be
specified and will be ignored if it is input.
For WELL, only the GURTS or GURTR option can be chosen.
One and only one of the WELL, GATHER, FLOSTA, or AREA

One and only one of the W or G labels must be specified. There is

no default.
One and only one of the GURTS, GURTR, VOID, or VOIN

4.8 Water Injection Pumps (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 Groups of water injectors are commonly controlled by the same pump
system, especially in offshore situations, where a large number of injectors
are often driven from one pump system on an offshore platform. The
discharge pressures of these pump systems vary (usually decreasing) with
flow rate delivered, so it is inappropriate to assume that water injectors
coupled to such a pump system operate at a constant tubinghead pressure
independent of the total flow rate delivered by the pump system.
00 Water injectors connected to a common injection pump system can be

modeled accurately in VIP-EXECUTIVE by using the water injector pump
system option. Injectors connected to a common pump system must be
defined within the same gathering center. This gathering center is then
assigned to a table of pump discharge pressure (thp) versus flow rate
using the IPUMP card. Finally the pump characteristics may be defined
using the PMPTAB card. The user may define multiple pump tables and
assign more than one gathering center to the same pump table in much the
same way that bottomhole pressure tables are now used.
4.8.1 Assign Injector Pump Characteristics Tables (IPUMP)

00 IPUMP data must be defined along with PMPTAB data if gathering center
water injectors are to be controlled by pump characteristics tables.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-255

00 The IPUMP card allows the user to assign a table of water injector pump
characteristics to the water injectors in a gathering center.
IPUMP gl
ipmp1 ipmp2 . . . ipmpn
00 Definitions:
gl List of gathering centers for which the ipmp values

are being entered. (The gathering center list gl has
the same format as well lists wl). (see Section 1.5.2)
ipmp Number of the pump table (PMPTAB card) that

defines the pump characteristics for this gathering
center.
NOTE: The number of ipmp values must equal the number of gathering
centers in the gathering center list.
4.8.2 Water Injection Pump Discharge Pressure (PMPTAB)

00 A PMPTAB card must be defined if an IPUMP card is entered for a
gathering center.
00 PMPTAB data are used to relate a water injection pump discharge

pressure (tubinghead pressure) to the flow rate delivered by the pump.
PMPTAB npmp
QPMP THP
q1 thp1
. .
. .
. .
qn thpn
00 Definitions:
npmp Number of the pump table being read.
QPMP Alpha label indicating that this column contains

pump flow rates.
THP Alpha label indicating that this column contains

pump discharge pressures.
q Pump flow rates, STB/D (STCM/D).
thp Pump discharge pressures, psia (kPa).
4-256 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: 1. The number of pump flow rates and pump discharge pressure
values must be less than or equal to NPMPV (see DIM data).
2. The total number of pump tables must be less than or equal to

NPMPMX (see DIM data).
4.8.3 Convergence Criteria (WTRPUMP)

00 The WTRPUMP card allows the user to set the convergence criteria for the
water injection pump algorithm.
WTRPUMP itnpmp pmptol
00 Definitions:
itnpmp Maximum number of pump pressure iterations.

Default is 10.
pmptol Rate tolerance for convergence of the pump

pressure iterations, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 10
STB/D.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-257

4.9 Gaslift
00 To invoke gaslift, THP data must also be defined.
4.9.1 Gaslift Allocation (QLIFT)

00 A QLIFT card is used to explicitly place a well on gaslift, to take a well off
gaslift, or to explicitly allocate the amount of lift gas going to the well.
QLIFT wl
qlift1 qlift2 . . . qliftn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which qlift values are

qlift The rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D), at which lift gas is

injected into a production well:
A positive value causes a constant allocation of lift

gas to the well.
A zero value takes the well off gas lift.
A negative value causes invocation of an automatic

allocation procedure for the well. (See QLIFTA card)
NOTE: 1. The number of qlift values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
2. If a well is on gaslift, one of the following indicators appears in

the GAS LIFT STATUS column of the production well
summary:
SPEC Specified, a positive qlift value has been

supplied.
GLRTAB Optimal GLR table used to allocate lift

gas rate; a negative qlift value has been
supplied.
PFMCRV Performance curve algorithm used to

allocate lift gas rate; a negative qlift
value has been supplied.
*VLE Gaslift removed from well due to

violation of minimum gaslift efficiency
constraint GLEFMN.
4-258 Landmark - R2003.4

*GLE Gaslift removed from well based on lift

efficiency when a gaslift gas shortage
occurs; a negative qlift value has been
supplied.
*WCT Gaslift removed from well based on

water-cut when a gaslift gas shortage
occurs; rate originally calculated using
optimum LGR table.
*SCL Gaslift gas rate scaled back due to a

gaslift gas shortage; a negative qlift
value has been supplied.
*HIT Gaslift gas removed from well that was

designated on the PFMCRV option hit
list.
GLRMIN Gaslift gas rate reduced to honor the

specified glr minimum; rate originally
calculated using the PFMCRV
algorithm.
GLRMAX Gaslift gas rate reduced to honor the

specified glr maximum; rate originally
calculated using the PFMCRV
algorithm.
3. The gaslift rate is used by the program only to determine the

flowing bottomhole pressure which corresponds to the user-
specified tubinghead pressure limit. Gaslift is otherwise
transparent to the user; i.e., the gaslift rate is NOT included in
daily gas production. Gaslift can be used only on wells for
which a THP card is entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-259

4.9.2 Gaslift Gas Source (QLIFTA)

00 To invoke automatic gaslift for a well, a QLIFT card with a negative
value must be defined.
00 A QLIFTA card is used to specify the amount of available gaslift gas for
automatic allocation, the allocation method and the fraction of produced
gas also available as gaslift gas. The source of available gaslift gas is not
00 specified, merely its volume. The data are order dependent. If an item is
left off it is set to its default value, overriding any previously input value.

GATHER OPTTAB
TABGLE
FLOSTA ALLWLS

QLIFTA inum qlifta TABWC (gasfct)
AREA
LFTWLS
TABSCL
FIELD
PFMCRV
00 Definitions:

which the specified gaslift gas data apply:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
qlifta Amount of gaslift gas per day available for injection

into all of the production wells which are on
automatic allocation of gaslift gas, MSCF/D (SCM/
D).
OPTTAB Alpha label indicating that optimal GLR tables are

to be used to compute the gaslift gas injection rate
for each well on automatic allocation of gaslift gas.
(See GLRTAB card)
TABGLE Alpha label indicating that wells will be shut in

based on gaslift efficiency when a gaslift shortage
4-260 Landmark - R2003.4

exists. The gaslift gas injection rates are computed

using the optimal GLR tables.
TABWC Alpha label indicating that wells will be shut in

based on water cut when a gaslift shortage exists.
The gaslift gas injection rates are computed using
the optimal GLR tables.
TABSCL Alpha label indicating that gaslift gas injection rates

will be scaled back when a gaslift shortage exists.
The gaslift gas injection rates are computed using
the optimal GLR tables.
PFMCRV Alpha label indicating that the performance curve

option is to be used to calculate gaslift gas rates.
ALLWLS Alpha label causing a fraction of the gas produced

from this member of the well management
hierarchy during one timestep to be used as
additional gaslift gas during the next timestep. This
is the default.
LFTWLS Alpha label causing a fraction of the gas produced

from only those wells in this member of the well
management hierarchy on gaslift during one
timestep to be used as additional gaslift gas during
the next timestep.
gasfct Fraction of the produced gas to be used as gaslift

gas. Default is zero.
2. Gaslift gas is automatically allocated among those wells for

which a negative qlift value was entered on a QLIFT card.
3. The gaslift gas calculation using the optimal GLR tables is done
during the first outer iteration of each timestep. The calculated
gaslift gas rate is used for subsequent iterations.
4. For each well on automatic allocation, the gaslift gas rate is

checked against the allowable maximum defined on the
GLGMAX card. If a violation occurs the rate is reset to the
maximum.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-261

4.9.3 Optimal GLR Tables for Gaslift (GLRTAB)

00 GLRTAB data are used to relate gas-liquid (or gas-oil) ratio to flow rate
and water cut (and possibly pressure) for the computation of gaslift gas
rates. More than one well can refer to the same GLRTAB.
GLRTAB nglr
QLIQ
q1 q2 . . . qk
QO
WCUT wcut1 (wcut2 . . . wcutl)
(PRESSURE pres1 (pres2 . . . presm))
IQLIQ GLR
IWCUT (IPRES)
IQO GOR
iwcut1 iq1 (ip1) glr1

. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
iwcutl iqk (ipm) glrlkm
00 Definitions:
nglr Number of the optimal GLR table being read.
QLIQ Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

liquid rates (oil plus water). This must be used with
GLR.
QO Alpha label indicating that values on this card are

oil rates. This must be used with GOR.
q Liquid or oil rates, STB/D (STCM/D). Values can

WCUT Alpha label indicating that water-cut values are

read on this card.
wcut Water-cut values, fraction. Values can be unequally

spaced.
PRESSURE Alpha label indicating that pressure values are read

on this card. This card is optional.
pres Pressure values, psia (kPa). Values can be unequally

spaced.
4-262 Landmark - R2003.4

IWCUT Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are water-cut indices.
IQLIQ Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are liquid rate indices.
IQO Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are oil rate indices. This

column under this heading are pressure indices.
This label can be included only if a PRESSURE card
was input.
GLR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are gas-liquid ratios.
GOR Alpha label indicating that the values read in the

column under this heading are gas-oil ratios. This
iwcutl Index referring to the l-th water-cut value read.
ipm Index referring to the m-th pressure value read.

This index can be included only if a PRESSURE card
was input.
iqk Index referring to the k-th rate value read.
glrlkm The gas-liquid (gas-oil) ratio value corresponding to

the indicated water-cut, rate, and pressure values,
SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
4.9.4 Optimal GLR Table Pointer for Gaslift (GLRTBP)

00 This card is used in conjunction with the GLRTAB card.
00 A GLRTBP card is used to specify the optimal GLR table to which a well
on automatic allocation of gaslift gas points.
GLRTBP wl
iglrtb1 iglrtb2 . . . iglrtbn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which iglrtb values are

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-263

iglrtb The number of the optimal GLR table (GLRTAB

card) that defines the gas-liquid ratio, including lift
gas, for this well.
NOTE: 1. The number of iglrtb values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
2. If an iglrtb value has not been specified for a well, the GLR
table pointer value used will be the same as the BHP table
pointer input on the ITUBE card.
4.9.5 Maximum Well Gaslift Gas Rate (GLGMAX)

00 A GLGMAX card is used to limit the gaslift gas rate for a well whose lift
rate is allocated automatically.
00 GLGMAX Card for WELLS
GLGMAX WELL wl
glgmax1 glgmax2 . . . glgmaxn
00 GLGMAX card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
GLGMAX inum glgmax
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions for wells:
wl List of wells for which maximum gaslift gas rates

glgmax Maximum gaslift gas rate for the well MSCF/D

(SCM/D).
00 Definitions for well management levels:

which the specified maximum gaslift gas rate applies:
4-264 Landmark - R2003.4

AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
glgmax Maximum gaslift gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).

Default is 0.
NOTE: 1. If GLGMAX is specified at the well level, the number of glgmax

values must equal the number of wells in the well list.
2. If GLGMAX is specified by well management level, one and

only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels
must be specified. There is no default. When FIELD is specified
the inum entry may be omitted, or the value 1 may be input;
no other value will be accepted.
3. Only wells on automatic allocation of lift gas are checked

against the maximum.
4.9.6 Minimum Well Gaslift Gas Rate (GLGMIN)

00 A GLGMIN card is used to limit the gaslift gas rate for a well whose lift
rate is allocated automatically.
00 GLGMIN Card for WELLS
GLGMIN WELL wl
glgmin1 glgmin2 . . . glgminn
00 GLGMIN card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
GLGMIN inum glgmin
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions for wells:
wl List of wells for which minimum gaslift gas rates

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-265

glgmin Minimum gaslift gas rate for the well MSCF/D

(SCM/D).
00 Definitions for well management levels:

which the specified minimum gaslift gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
glgmax Maximum gaslift gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).

Default is 0.
NOTE: 1. If GLGMIN is specified at the well level, the number of glgmin

2. If GLGMIN is specified by well management level, one and

only one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels
must be specified. There is no default. When FIELD is specified
the inum entry may be omitted, or the value 1 may be input;
no other value will be accepted.
3. Only wells on automatic allocation of lift gas are checked

against the minimum.
4.9.7 Additive Correction to GLR Tables (GLRADD)

00 This card is used in conjunction with the GLRTAB card.
00 The GLRADD card is used to provide an additive correction term to the

value of gas-liquid (or gas-oil) ratio obtained from the optimal GLR tables.
GLRADD wl
glradd1 glradd2. . . glraddn
00 Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which glradd values are

4-266 Landmark - R2003.4

glradd Additive correction to apply to the value of gas-

liquid (or gas-oil) ratio obtained from the optimal
GLR tables for the well, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
Value may be positive or negative. Default is 0.0
SCF/STB.
NOTE: The number of glradd values must equal the number of wells in
the well list.
4.9.8 Time Interval for Gaslift Gas Rate Calculations (TESTGL)

00 The TESTGL card is used to specify the time interval between gaslift gas
rate calculations for automatic allocation of gaslift gas.
TESTGL tincg
00 Definition:
tincg Time interval between gaslift gas rate calculations

for automatic allocation of gaslift gas, days. Default
is 0 days, causing calculations every timestep.
NOTE: The calculations are scheduled for the time at which the TESTGL
card is read plus tincg days. Until the simulation reaches that time,
no calculations will be performed. Timesteps are not adjusted to hit
the time exactly. Once the calculations are done, the new scheduled
time will be tincg days farther into the simulation.
4.9.9 Minimum Gaslift Efficiency (GLEFMN)

00 The GLEFMN card is used to specify a minimum gaslift efficiency to test
against each well on gaslift.
GLEFMN glefmn
00 Definition:
glefmn Minimum gaslift efficiency, STB/MMSCF (STCM/

MSCM); if the gaslift efficiency of a well, calculated
as oil production rate/gaslift gas rate, drops below
glefmn, the well will be taken off gaslift.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-267

4.9.10 Performance Curve Option Data (PFMCRV)

00 The PFMCRV option enables the user to calculate gaslift gas rates based
on the lift efficiencies of the wells, where lift efficiency is defined as the
incremental oil produced (STB/D) per increment of gaslift gas (MMSCF/
D).
PFMCRV
(GLRMIN glrmin)
(GLRMAX glrmax)
(LIFTEFF eff)
(MAXSCALE scale)

EFFSCL ON

OFF

TOTGAS ON

OFF
(HITLIST wl)
WGLRMIN w

wglr 1 wglr 2 wglr n

OUTFILE (freq)
TIME
TNEXT
OFF
00
00 Definitions:
glrmin Minimum gas-liquid ratio with which to compare

the gas-liquid ratio at the performance curve
operating points, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). The
wells gaslift gas rate will be reset to honor this
minimum. Default is 0.
glrmax Maximum gas-liquid ratio with which to compare

the gas-liquid ratio at the performance curve
operating points, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). The
wells gaslift gas rate will be reset to honor this
maximum. Default is 1.E10.
eff Desired lift efficiency of the allocated gaslift gas rate

(i.e., the slope of the performance curve at the
optimal operating point), BOPD/MMSCF (STCM/
MSCM). Default is 10 BOPD/MMSCF.
4-268 Landmark - R2003.4

scale Maximum scaleback factor to use in the algorithm

for reducing gaslift gas rates to meet target, fraction.
EFFSCL Alpha label indicating whether the uniform lift

efficiency scaleup option is to be used.
ON Keyword indicating the option is on.
OFF Keyword indicating the option is off.

This is the default.
TOTGAS Alpha label indicating how lift efficiency is to be

calculated.
ON Keyword indicating lift efficiency is

to be calculated as a function of total
gas (produced gas plus gaslift gas).
OFF Keyword indicating lift efficiency is

to be calculated as a function of
gaslift gas. This is the default.
HITLIST Alpha label indicating that the specified wells on

this card are to have their gaslift gas rates removed
when the total allocated lift rate exceeds the
available lift gas.
wl List of wells on the hit list - each well

must be named, ranges of wells will
not be accepted.
WGLRMIN Alpha label indicating that the following data are

minimum gas-liquid ratios below which the wells
are not to be reduced during the scale-back step of
reducing gaslift gas rates.
wl List of wells for which gas-liquid

ratio values are being specified (see
Section 1.5.2).
wglr Minimum gas-liquid ratios, SCF/

STB (SCM/ STCM). Default is 0.
OUTFILE Alpha label indicating that for the gaslift gas

optimization option (Section 4.10) performance
curve data for each well is to be written to the file
named <casename>_pfmcrv.out.
TIME Alpha label that causes the file to be

written each time the DATE or TIME
card is encountered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-269

TNEXT Alpha label that causes the file to be

written only the next time a DATE or
TIME card is encountered.
OFF Alpha label that causes the file not to

be written. This is the default.
freq A number that causes the file to be

written after every freq timestep
(each timestep cut counts as a
timestep).
NOTE: Usage of this option requires that the BHPTAB wellbore hydraulics
tables have been input with a sufficient range to cover all of the oil,
water, and total gas (produced reservoir gas plus gaslift gas) rates
that may be encountered with the gaslift calculations. It should be
noted that the wellbore hydraulics algorithm will extrapolate
outside of the table range, if necessary. Warning messages are
printed for table extrapolations. This feature provides the user with
a mechanism for determining gaslift gas allocation without having
to generate optional gas-liquid/gas-oil ratio tables. An internal
table is generated and user-supplied data determines the point at
which the gaslift gas rate is found.
The data related to the HITLIST, MAXSCALE and WGLRMIN

keywords is ignored when the EFFSCL option is turned on.
When WGLRMIN data is entered, the number of gas-liquid ratio

4.9.11 Gaslift Gas in Gas Handling Loop (GLGOP)

00 The GLGOP card is used to assign the gaslift gas as part of the gas
handling loop.
OPEN
GLGOP
CLOSE
00 Definitions:
OPEN Gaslift gas in part of the gas handling loop.
CLOSE Gaslift gas is not included in the gas handling loop.

00 Reinjection volumes are calculated based on the sum of produced and

gaslift gas. At any given time, the amount of gas in the loop will be:
4-270 Landmark - R2003.4

00 [produced + makeup - shrinkage - fuel + previous gas lift +

makeup gas lift = sales + injection + current gas lift]
00 Examples:
00 C ***** GASLIFT GAS IS PART OF THE GAS HANDLING LOOP

C
GLGOP OPEN
4.9.12 Makeup Gaslift Gas Specification (QLIFTM)

00 The QLIFTM card is used to specify the makeup gaslift gas rate, when
gaslift gas is part of the gas handling loop (GLGOP OPEN).
GATHER
FLOSTA
QLIFTM inum qrate (frate)
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions:
00 Alpha label indicating the level of well management hierarchy to

which the makeup gaslift gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
qrate Makeup gaslift gas rate, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
frate Fraction of the surface production rate.
NOTE: If both qrate and frate are specified, the makeup gaslift gas rate is
the specified rate plus the fraction of the surface production rate.
(qrate + frate * the surface production rate).
00 Examples:
00 C ***** MAKEUP GASLIFT GAS RATE
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-271

QLIFTM GATHER 1 100. 0.1

QLIFTM GATHER 2 50.
4.10 Multi-level Optimization of Gaslift Gas Utilization
4.10.1 Introduction
00 The primary function of this algorithm is to optimize (i.e., minimize) the
gaslift gas required to meet the specified oil targets at any specified group
level. It can only be used for oil phase targets. The optimization is
performed by finding the maximum common gaslift gas operating
efficiency at which the target rate can be met.
4.10.2 Specifications
00 There are several specifications required to invoke the optimization.
These are:
QLIFTA (Section 4.9.2) data specifying PFMCRV for each level at

which the optimization is requested.
PTARG (Section 4.3.1) data specifying an O (oil) target for the level.
PFMCRV (Section 4.9.10) data introduced, including the optional

OUTFILE label.
EFFSCL (Section 4.9.10) efficiency scaling specified.
One or more wells on automatic gaslift gas allocation, (see QLIFT,

Section 4.9.1).
00 For each well on automatic gaslift gas allocation using the performance
curve option, a performance curve is constructed at the start of each
specified Newton iteration, describing the relationship of oil production
rate versus gaslift gas utilized. These curves will be used in the
optimization algorithm to determine the maximum common operating
efficiency (minimum total gaslift gas requirement) required to meet the oil
target. No gaslift gas will be used if the target can be met without any
gaslift gas.
00 In order to have smooth and continuous relationships for the gaslift

performance for the wells, a multi-segmented second-order curve fit is
employed for the function of oil rate versus the log of gaslift gas rate. The
derivative of this function is then used to determine the current operating
efficiency at any gaslift gas rate within the interval.
4-272 Landmark - R2003.4

4.10.3 Gaslift Optimization Outer Iteration Number (ITNGLG)
ITNGLG nitglg
nitglg Maximum number of iterations per timestep at

which to perform the gaslift gas optimization
algorithm. Default is 1.
4.11 Automatic Well Workovers

00 This section describes an automatic well workover package.
00 The parameter NRIGTOT must be greater than zero on the DIM card to
activate the automatic workover module.
00 Required data for this option to be functional are: RIGDEF, WRKRTO,

WRKFRQ, and WRKCOEF.
00 The user should refer to the DIM card for additional dimensioned
variables used for workovers. The workover report can be obtained by
using the keyword WRKRPT on the OUTPUT card.
00 When using the GLIMIT or WLIMIT card, the PLUG option can not be
used with the new workover module.
00 The PRFLIM option cannot be used with the automatic workover module.
4.11.1 Workover Rig Definition (RIGDEF)

00 The RIGDEF card is used to define the workover rigs available at any well
management level and all levels below it. Rigs can be added or removed at
any time.
GATHER
ADD
FLOSTA irigs
RIGDEF inum REPLACE wktim mvtim
AREA ALL
SUBTRACT
FIELD
00 Definitions:

which the specified rig is available:
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-273

AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
ADD Alpha label indicating irigs rigs should be added to

the number of rigs available.
REPLACE Alpha label indicating the rigs specified should

replace any previously specified rigs for this
member of well management.
SUBTRACT Alpha label indicating irigs rigs should be

subtracted.
irigs Number of rigs.
ALL Alpha label indicating all rigs currently assigned

are to be subtracted.
wktim Time required to complete a workover, days.
mvtim Time required to move a rig, days.
NOTE: ALL can be used only with SUBTRACT. If irigs is used to subtract
rigs, they are subtracted from the bottom of the list.
The data wktim and mvtim are required for ADD and REPLACE.

4.11.2 Relative Number of Workovers (WRKRTO)

00 The WRKRTO card defines the relative number of each type of workover
to perform.
WRKRTO opnrto gclrto wclrto
00 Definitions:
opnrto Number of opening workovers. Default is 0.
4-274 Landmark - R2003.4

gclrto Number of gas closing workovers. Default is 0.
wclrto Number of water closing workovers. Default is 0.
NOTE: First opnrto opening workovers will be performed, followed by

gclrto gas closing workovers, followed by wclrto water closing
workovers, followed by opnrto opening workovers, etc. A value of
zero implies no workovers of that type are to be performed.
If this card is omitted no workovers will be performed.
4.11.3 Workover Calculation Frequency (WRKFRQ)

00 The WRKFRQ card is used to specify the frequency with which the
workover calculations are performed when predictive well management
(PWM) is not used. The workover calculations are automatically
performed whenever PWM calculations are done.
MONTHS
WRKFRQ freq DAYS
TSTEPS
00 Definitions:
freq Frequency with which the workover calculations

will be performed. Default is 99999 timesteps.
NOTE: Within the simulator the date on a DATE card is considered to be

the beginning of that day. For example, if output is desired at the
end of March 1988, the date card should contain 1/4/88 and not
31/3/88. Thus the MONTHS option on the frequency card will
force a timestep to start at the date 1/month/year.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-275

4.11.4 Elapsed Time Between Workovers (WRKDLT)

00 The WRKDLT card is used to define the elapsed time between the end of a
workover and the beginning of the next.
00 WRKDLT Card for WELLS
WRKDLT WELL wl
delt1 delt2. . .deltn
00 WRKDLT Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
WRKDLT inum delt
AREA
FIELD
00 Definitions: for wells
wl List of wells for which elapsed times are being

delt Elapsed time that must occur between the end of a

workover and the beginning of the next workover
on a well, days. Default is 0.
00 The number of delt values must equal the number of wells in the well list.
00 Definitions: for well management levels

which the specified elapsed time applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
delt Elapsed time that must occur between the end of a

workover and the beginning of the next workover
4-276 Landmark - R2003.4

on a well under the specified well management

level, days. Default is 0.
NOTE: Elapsed times can be input at the well level or at any other level of
well management. The effective elapsed time for a well will be the
one specified at the lowest level of the well hierarchy: i.e., the first
user-specified number found in the order: well, the appropriate
gathering center, the appropriate flow station, the appropriate area,
and the field.
If WRKDLT is specified by well management level one and only

one of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels must be
specified. There is no default. When FIELD is specified the inum
entry may be omitted or the value 1 may be input; no other value
will be accepted.
4.11.5 Workover Failure Rate (WRKFAIL)

00 The WRKFAlL card defines the failure rate of workovers.
WRKFAIL ifail
00 Definition:
ifail Frequency of workover failure. Default is 0.
00 Every ifail-th workover will fail, if ifail is positive. A non-positive value

implies that workovers never fail.
4.11.6 Well Limit for Automatic Shutoffs (WRKWLM)

00 The WRKWLM card defines global gas-oil ratio and water-cut limits
below which a well will not be considered a candidate for automatic
shutoffs for gas and water, respectively.
WRKWLM gorwlm wctwlm
00 Definitions:
gorwlm Well gas-oil ratio limit below which a well will not
be considered a candidate for automatic gas shutoff,
SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is wells are always
eligible.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-277

wctwlm Well water-cut limit below which a well will not be

considered a candidate for automatic water shutoff,
fraction. Default is wells are always eligible.
4.11.7 Workover Benefit Function Limits (WRKLIM)

00 The WRKLIM card is used to define workover benefit function limits.
00 WRKLIM Card for WELLS
WRKLIM WELL wl
(OPMIN opmin1 opmin2 ... opminn)
(GPMIN gpmin1 gpmin2 ... gpminn)
(WPMIN wpmin1 wpmin2 ... wpminn)
(MINQO minqo1 minqo2 ... minqon)
(MINQG minqg1 minqg2 ... minqgn)
(MINQW minqw1 minqw2 ... minqwn)
(MAXWCUT mxwc1 mxwc2 ... mxwcn)
(MAXGOR mxgor1 mxgor2 ... mxgorn)
(MINWCUT mnwc1 mnwc2 ... mnwcn)
(MINGOR mngor1 mngor2 ... mngorn)
(WSMIN wsmin1 wsmin2 ... wsminn)
(GSMIN gsmin1 gsmin2 ... gsminn)
00 WRKLIM Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
WRKLIM inum
AREA
FIELD
(OPMIN opmin)
(GPMIN gpmin)
(WPMIN wpmin)
(MINQO minqo)
(MINQG minqg)
(MINQW minqw)
(MAXWCUT mxwc)
(MAXGOR mxgor)
(MINWCUT mnwc)
(MINGOR mngor)
(WSMIN wsmin)
(GSMIN gsmin)
wl List of wells for which workover limit data is being

4-278 Landmark - R2003.4

opmin Minimum workover benefit value for oil

perforations, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
gpmin Minimum workover benefit value for gas

perforations, MSCF/D (SCM/D). Default is 0.
wpmin Minimum workover benefit value for water

minqo Minimum oil rate in an openable (oil) perforation,

minqg Minimum gas rate in an openable (gas) perforation,

MSCF/D (SCM/D). Default is 0.
minqw Minimum water rate in an openable (water)

perforation, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
mxwc Maximum water cut in an openable (oil or gas)

perforation, fraction. Default is 1.
mxgor Maximum gas-oil ratio in an openable (oil)

perforation, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is
1.E20.
mnwc Minimum water cut in a shutable (water)

mngor Minimum gas-oil ratio in a shutable (gas)

perforation, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is 0.
wsmin Minimum workover benefit value for water

shutoffs, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
gsmin Minimum workover benefit value for gas shutoffs,

00 The number of opmin, gpmin, wpmin, minqo, minqg, minqw, mxwc,

mxgor, mnwc, mngor, wsmin, and gsmin values must equal the number

which the specified data applies:
AREA Area.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-279

FIELD Field.

management level.
opmin Minimum workover benefit value for oil

gpmin Minimum workover benefit value for gas

perforations, MSCF/D (SCM/D). Default is 0.
wpmin Minimum workover benefit value for water

minqo Minimum oil rate in an openable (oil) perforation,

minqg Minimum gas rate in an openable (gas) perforation,

minqw Minimum water rate in an openable (water)

perforation, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
mxwc Maximum water cut in an openable (oil or gas)

mxgor Maximum gas-oil ratio in an openable (oil)

perforation, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is
1.E20.
mnwc Minimum water cut in a shutable (water)

mngor Minimum gas-oil ratio in a shutable (gas)

perforation, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is 0.
wsmin Minimum workover benefit value for water

shutoffs, STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 0.
gsmin Minimum workover benefit value for gas shutoffs,

NOTE: Workover limit values can be input at the well level or at any other
level of well management. The effective values for a well will be the
one specified at the lowest level of the well hierarchy; i.e., the first
user-specified number found in the order: well, the appropriate
gathering center, the appropriate flow station, the appropriate area,
and the field.
If WRKLIM is specified by well management level, one and only

4-280 Landmark - R2003.4


will be accepted.
4.11.8 Group Numbers for "Group 1" (WRKGP1)

00 The WRKGP1 card is used to define the "Group 1" group number in which
a well lies. This allows more flexibility in the use of the benefit functions.
00 WRKGP1 Card for WELLS
WRKGP1 WELL wl
igp11 igp12 . . . igp1n
00 WRKGP1 Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
WRKGP1 inum igp1
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which group numbers are being

igp1 "Group 1" group number for the well. Default is

NWRKG1+1.
00 The number of igp1 values must equal the number of wells in the well list.

which the specified "Group 1" group number applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-281

igp1 "Group 1" group number for each well under the
specified well management level. Default is
NWRKG1+1.
NOTE: "Group 1" group numbers can be input at the well level or at any
other level of well management. The effective "Group 1" group
number for a well will be the one specified at the lowest level of the
well hierarchy; i.e., the first user-specified number found in the
order: well, the appropriate gathering center, the appropriate flow
station, the appropriate area, and the field.
If WRKGP1 is specified by well management level, one and only

will be accepted.
4.11.9 Group Numbers for "Group 2" (WRKGP2)

00 The WRKGP2 card is used to define the "Group 2" group number in which
a well lies. This allows more flexibility in the use of the benefit functions.
00 WRKGP2 Card for WELLS
WRKGP2 WELL wl
igp21 igp22 . . . igp2n
00 WRKGP2 Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
WRKGP2 inum igp2
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which group numbers are being

igp2 "Group 2" group number for the well. Default is

NWRKG2+1.
00 The number of igp2 values must equal the number of wells in the well list.
4-282 Landmark - R2003.4


which the specified "Group 2" group number applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
igp2 "Group 2" group number for each well under the
NWRKG2+1.
NOTE: "Group 2" group numbers can be input at the well level or at any
other level of well management. The effective "Group 2" group
If WRKGP2 is specified by well management level one and only

will be accepted.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-283

4.11.10 Group 1 Default Coefficients (WRKCF1)

00 WRKCF1 card for GROUPS
WRKCF1 GROUP gl
coef11 coef12 . . . coef1n
00 WRKCF1 card for WELLS
WRKCF1 WELL wl
00 Definitions: for groups
gl List of groups for which "Group 1" coefficients are

coef1 "Group 1" coefficients for each well in the group.

Default is 1.
00 The number of coef1 values must equal the number of groups in the group
list.
wl List of wells for which "Group 1" coefficients are

coef1 "Group 1" coefficient to use for the well. Default is 1.
00 The number of coef1 values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.
NOTE: The default values for "Group 1" coefficients for each well in the
group can be specified by using the first form of the card.
Subsequently, the defaults can be changed for specific wells by
specifying coefficients by well.
4-284 Landmark - R2003.4

4.11.11 Group 2 Default Coefficients (WRKCF2)

00 WRKCF2 card for GROUPS
WRKCF2 GROUP gl
00 WRKCF2 card for WELLS
WRKCF2 WELL wl
00 Definitions: for groups
gl List of groups for which "Group 2" coefficients are

coef2 "Group 2" coefficients for each well in the group.

Default is 1.
00 The number of coef2 values must equal the number of groups in the group
list.
wl List of wells for which "Group 2" coefficients are

coef2 "Group 2" coefficient to use for the well. Default is 1.
00 The number of coef2 values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.
NOTE: The default values for "Group 2" coefficients for each well in the
group can be specified by using the first form of the card.
Subsequently, the defaults can be changed for specific wells by
specifying coefficients by well.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-285

4.11.12 Coefficients for Workover Benefit Functions (WRKCOEF)

00 WRKCOEF Card for WELLS
WRKCOEF WELL wl
A a1 a2 . . . an
B b1 b2 . . . bn
C c1 c2 . . . cn
D d1 d2 . . . dn
E e1 e2 . . . en
00 WRKCOEF Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
WRKCOEF inum a b c d e
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which benefit function coefficients

A Alpha label indicating coefficients for oil

perforations.
B Alpha label indicating coefficients for gas

perforations.
C Alpha label indicating coefficients for water

perforations.
D Alpha label indicating coefficients for gas shutoff.
E Alpha label indicating coefficients for water shutoff.
a Oil perforation coefficients for wells. Default is 0.
b Gas perforation coefficients for wells. Default is 0.
c Water perforation coefficients for wells. Default is 0.
d Gas shutoff coefficients for wells. Default is 0.
e Water shutoff coefficients for wells. Default is 0.
4-286 Landmark - R2003.4

00 The number of a, b, c, d and e values must equal the number of wells in

the well list.

which the specified workover benefit function coefficients apply:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
a Oil perforation coefficient for each well under the

specified well management level. Default is 0.
b Gas perforation coefficient for each well under the

c Water perforation coefficient for each well under

the specified well management level. Default is 0.
d Gas shutoff coefficient for each well under the

e Water shutoff coefficient for each well under the

00 Note:
00 The benefit functions for workovers are defined as:
00 BFop =GP1i * GP2j * ( a * Op+ b * Gp+c * Wp)

BFgs =GP1i * GP2j * ( d * Gs )
BFws =GP1i * GP2j * ( e * Ws )
00 where:
BFop opening benefit function,
BFgs gas shutoff benefit function,
BFws water shutoff benefit function,
GP1i i-th Group 1 coefficient (WRKCF1),
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-287

GP2j j-th Group 2 coefficient (WRKCF2),
Op workover benefit for oil perforations, defined as the

sum of oil rates in openable perforations,
Gp workover benefit for gas perforations, defined as

the sum of gas rates in openable perforations,
Wp workover benefit for water perforations, defined as

the sum of water rates in openable perforations,
Gs workover benefit for gas shutoffs, defined as the

sum of gas rates in shutable perforations,
Ws workover benefit for water shutoffs, defined as the

sum of water rates in shutable perforations.
00 Only one of the coefficients a, b and c can be nonzero.
00 The coefficients b and d cannot both be nonzero.
00 The coefficients c and e cannot both be nonzero.
00 Benefit function coefficients can be input at the well level or at any other
level of well management. The effective coefficient values for a well will
be the one specified at the lowest level of the well hierarchy; i,e., the first
user-specified number found in the order: well, the appropriate gathering
center, the appropriate flow station, the appropriate area, and the field.
00 If WRKCOEF is specified by well management level, one and only one of

the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels must be specified. There is
no default. When FIELD is specified the inum entry may be omitted or the
value 1 may be input; no other value will be accepted.
4.11.13 Debug Output (WRKDBG)

00 The WRKDBG card is used to obtain debug output during the workover
calculations.
WRKDBG kwrkdb
00 Definition:
kwrkdb Level of debug output:
3 Well and workover reports are

printed after completion of
4-288 Landmark - R2003.4

workovers, If set to -3, the rig

distribution table is also printed.
2 Workover report is printed after

completion of workovers, If set to -2,
the rig distribution table is also
printed.
1 Rig distribution table is printed at

the end of input.
0 No debug output. This is the default.
4.12 Fluid Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
4.12.1 Fluid Tracking Option (TRACK)

00 The TRACK card is required to use the fluid tracking option.
00 The TRACK card is used to define data relating to the fluid tracking
option.
TRACK
(WTC wtc1 wtc2 ... wtcnfl)
(WTV wtv1 wtv2 ... wtvnfl)
(CONDENSATE retrog cgas)
(TRKTOL trktlo trktlg)
(NOWELL)
(TRCKOF)
00 Definitions:
wtc Weighting factor for each tracked fluid used in the

calculation of the mass transfer terms for
condensation. Default is 1.0.
wtv Weighting factor for each tracked fluid used in the

calculation of the mass transfer terms for
vaporization. Default is 1.0.
retrog Number of the retrograde tracked fluid.
cgas Number of the tracked fluid which forms

retrograde.
trktlo Oil phase residual tolerance. If the tolerance is

violated, a warning message is written. Default is
0.00001.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-289

trktlg Gas phase residual tolerance. If the tolerance is

violated, a warning message is written. Default is
0.00001.
NOWELL Alpha label specifying that production information

on the well level will not be written into the track
file. Default is to write the information.
TRCKOF Turns off tracking from this point on.
NOTE: The number of wtc and/or wtv values must equal the number of
tracked fluids.
4.12.2 Tracked Fluid Number (YINJT)

00 The YINJT card allows the user to specify the number of the tracked fluid
into which the injected gas will go.
YINJT wl
yinjt1 yinjt2 ... yinjtn
00 Definitions:
wl List of gas injection wells for which yinjt values are

yinjt Number of the tracked fluid into which the injected

gas will go. Default is 0, indicating that the injected
gas will not be tracked.
NOTE: The number of yinjt values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
4.12.3 Activates Tracked Fluid Composition Output (OPRSYS)

00 The OPRSYS card activates the output of produced tracked fluid
compositions, by pressure system, to Fortran unit 37. This output can only
be obtained for predictive well management cases (PREDICT card) and
the frequency of output is controlled by the WTRACK card. It should be
entered in the TRACK data group.
OPRSYS (GATHER)
4-290 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definition:
GATHER Alpha label that causes output to be by pressure

system, on a gathering center level. The default is
that output will be on a flow station level.
00 Information in the output file is organized in the form of time records.

Each time record contains the following information (format):
00 ITIME,TIME (I10,E15.7)
NC,NFLTRK,NGCFS,NPRSYS (4l5)
start ISYS loop (ISYS=1 ,NPRSYS)
ISYS (PSYS ,I5)
start IGC loop (IGC=1 ,NGCFS)
IGC (for LFSTRK=.TRUE.) (FLST ,I5)
IGC (for LFSTRK=.FALSE.) (GC ,I5)
((ZZ(I,J,IGC,ISYS) ,I=1 ,NC) ,J=1 ,NFLTRK) (8E15.7)
((YY(I,J,IGC,ISYS) ,I=1 ,NC) ,J=1 ,NFLTRK) (8E15.7)
end ISYS loop
end IGC loop
00 where:
ITIME Time step number.
TIME Time from the start of simulation, days,
NC Number of hydrocarbon components.
NFLTRK Number of tracked fluids.
NGCFS A number equal to the number of gathering stations

or flow stations depending on the value of the
logical LFSTRK.
NPRSYS Number of pressure systems.
LFSTRK Logical variable, which is set to .TRUE. when the

output on the flow station level is requested
(default). Otherwise, LFSTRK is set to .FALSE.
ZZ(I,J,K,L) Total molar production rate (moles/day) of the

component I, produced as the track fluid J, from the
flow station (gathering center) K, and pressure
system L.
YY(I,J,K,L) Gas molar production rate (moles/day) of the

component I, produced as the track fluid J, from the
flow station (gathering center) K, and pressure
system L.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-291

4.13 Water Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
4.13.1 Tracked Water Mixing Parameter (FTWMIX)

00 The FTWMIX card allow the user to specify how much of the insitu
(connate) water in a block will be considered mobile, in calculating the
fractional flow of each tracked water type. The irreducible water
saturation (Swirr) can be completely bypassed, or can be partially
replaced by other water types. This does not affect total water flow, but
only the allocation of this water flow among the various tracked water
types.
FTWMIX ftwmix
00 Definition:
ftwmix Tracked water mixing parameter; 0.0 ftwmix 1.0.

A value of 0.0 implies that insitu water below the
irreducible water saturation for the block is
immobile. A value of 1.0 implies that all of the
insitu water is mobile and that Swirr will be
composed of a mix of tracked water types. Any
value in between will yield a linear combination of
the two. The default is 1.0.
4.13.2 Tracked Water Type Number (WINJT)

00 The WINJT card allows the user to specify the index number of the
tracked water type into which the injected water will go.
WINJT wl
winjt1 winjt2 ... winjtn
00 Definitions:
wl List of water injection wells for which winjt values

winjt Number of the tracked water type into which the

injected water will go. Default is 0, indicating that
the injected water will not be tracked.
NOTE: The number of winjt values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
4-292 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
5
00000Predictive Well Management1
5.1 Introduction
00 This section describes the data required to use the predictive well
management (PWM) option in VIP-EXECUTIVE. The PREDICT card must
appear on every run, including any history runs, of a sequence of runs in
which predictive well management may be used. A WMITN card with a
value greater than zero is required to invoke the PWM calculations. The
variable dimensioned arrays used in PWM are described in the DIM card.
00 THP and PTARG cards are used in both basic well management and
predictive well management. If used for PWM data specifications, the
formats described in this section should be used.
00 When the PRINT FIELD option is selected and PWM is active, in addition
to the field production and injection reports, a report of production by
pressure system will be printed.
00 This section is divided into three parts: the first part describes the
keywords common to both "NEW" PWM and "MGOR" PWM; the second
part describes the keywords used in NEW PWM; and the third part
describes the keywords used in MGOR PWM.
00 The number of pressure systems (NPRSYS on the DIM card) must be two
for MGOR PWM.
00 Artificial lift is available only for pressure system one in MGOR PWM.
1. Not available in VIP-THERM
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-293

Predictive Well Management VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
5.2 Keywords Common to NEW PWM and MGOR PWM
5.2.1 Predictive Well Management (PREDICT)

00 If the PREDICT card is entered, it must occur along with other utility
data.
NEW
PREDICT
MGOR
00 Definitions:
PREDICT Alpha label that causes arrays that will be used in

predictive well management to be defined.
NEW "NEW" predictive well management algorithm.

MGOR "MGOR" predictive well management algorithm.
00 The PREDICT card must appear on every run, including any history runs,
of a sequence of runs in which predictive well management may be used.
00 The predictive well management package will not be executed unless a

nonzero value for the number of outer iterations using predictive well
management is specified in the recurrent data (see WMITN card).
5.2.2 Number of Outer Iterations Each Timestep (WMITN)

00 The WMITN card must be entered to use predictive well management.
WMITN nitn (ipwmspn)
00 Definition:
nitn Number of outer iterations in each timestep that

will use predictive well management. Default is 0.
ipwmspn Frequency of predictive well management calls

with which surface pipeline network calculations
will be done. Default is to do the surface pipeline
network calculations every call to predictive well
management. This value may be entered only if the
surface pipeline network option has been licensed.
5-294 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Predictive Well Management
00 The WMITN card and the PREDICT card supply the enabling data for
predictive well management. Both are necessary to use this option.
00 The WMITN card defines the number of outer iterations in each timestep
that will use the predictive well management set of routines to calculate
well rates and bottomhole pressures.
00 It is recommended that the number of iterations be held to a small value,

say 1 or 2. Larger values will probably degrade convergence considerably.
5.2.3 Pressure Systems and Lift Methods Available (PWMGC)

00 The PWMGC card is used to define which pressure systems and artificial
lift methods are available in each gathering center. Producers in gathering
centers with LIFT specified, for which no qlift has been input, will
automatically have a negative qlift assigned.
PWMGC GATHER SYSTEM (LIFT)

igc1 sysnmi (liftnm)
X sysnmj (liftnm)
igc2 sysnmk (liftnm)
. . .
. . .
00 Definitions:
GATHER Alpha label indicating that the first entry on

subsequent cards defines the gathering center
number.
SYSTEM Alpha label indicating that the second entry on

subsequent cards defines a pressure system
available to the gathering center.
LIFT Alpha label indicating that the third entry on

subsequent cards, if entered, defines an artificial lift
method attached to the pressure system.
igc Gathering center number. For each gathering center

the igc number may only be specified once.
X Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to the most recently specified gathering
center number.
sysnm Pressure system name.
liftnm Artificial lift method name.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-295

5.2.4 Tubinghead Pressure (THP)
THP wl
sysnm1 thp11 thp12. . .thp1n
sysnm2 thp21 thp22. . .thp2n
. . .
. . .
. . .
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which thp values are being entered

sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the thp

values on this card apply.
thp Tubinghead pressure limit when the well points to

the appropriate pressure system, psia (kPa).
NOTE: For predictive well management a tubinghead pressure value must

be specified for each well for each pressure system to which the
well may be produced.
The number of thp values on any of the cards must equal the
To invoke THP constraints for a well, the user must also define a
productivity index, BHPTAB data, and ITUBE / SYSTB data.
5.2.5 Production Target Data (PTARG)

00 A PTARG card is used to define a maximum production rate for a
gathering center, a flow station, an area, or the field, or for the subunits
sysnm within each entity.
GATHER O
PTARG FLOSTA inum
TOTAL G qtarg (coil cwat cgas (cwct)) LFTGAS
AREA SYSNM W NOLFTGAS
FIELD VEL
5-296 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the level of well management hierarchy to

which the specified maximum production rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
Alpha label indicating to which subunit (or total) the maximum rate
applies:
TOTAL Alpha label indicating the maximum rate applies to

the specified member as a whole, not to a particular
pressure system. This is the default.
sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the

maximum rate applies.
VEL Velocity, user-defined units (see NOTE below).
qtarg Maximum production rate or velocity.
coil Coefficient of the oil rate term; velocity option

only.
cwat Coefficient of the water rate term; velocity option

only.
cgas Coefficient of the gas rate term; velocity option

only.
cwct Minimum water cut for velocity option to be

invoked. Optional.
LFTGAS Alpha label indicating that the gas production

target qtarg also includes the amount of gaslift gas
used in the specified level of well management.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-297

This option applies only when the label G is

specified.
NOLFTGAS Alpha label indicating that the gas production

target qtarg does not include gaslift gas. This is the
default. This option applies only when the label G is
specified.
NOTE: In predictive well management mode, one and only one of TOTAL
or sysnm may be specified. If neither is input TOTAL is assumed.
Separate maxima can be established for each pressure system by
inputting multiple PTARG cards.

One and only one of the O, W, G, or VEL labels must be specified.

There is no default. The label VEL applies only when the label
GATHER is specified. Separate maxima can be established for oil,
water and gas by reading multiple PTARG cards.
The oil, water and gas maxima may be exceeded by the tolerance
factors specified on the TRGTOL card before violations occur.
The labels LFTGAS and NOLFTGAS apply only when the label G is
specified.
The values coil, cwat, cgas, and, optionally, cwct, must be entered
if and only if the label VEL is specified.
When the velocity option is invoked, the following velocity is

computed: coil x (oil rate) + cwat x (water rate) + cgas x (gas rate).
This quantity is then checked against the qtarg value in the same
manner as the production maxima. If cwct is entered, the
computed watercut must be larger than this in order for the
velocity to be checked.
00 Examples:
00 PTARG FIELD 1 TOTAL G 6861

PTARG GATHER 2 SYS1 W 50000
PTARG AREA 1 LPSYS G 100000 LFTGAS
5-298 Landmark - R2003.4

5.2.6 Frequency of PWM Calculations (PWMFRQ)
MONTHS
PWMFRQ freq DAYS
TSTEPS
00 Definitions:
freq Frequency with which the PWM calculations will be

performed. Default is 99999 timesteps.
00 The PWMFRQ card is used to specify the additional frequency with which
the PWM algorithm is performed. The PWM algorithm is automatically
performed at every DATE/TIME card.
00 Within the simulator the date on a DATE card is considered to be the

beginning of that day. For example, if output is desired at the end of
March 1988, the date card should contain 1/4/88 and not 31/3/88. Thus
the MONTHS option on the frequency card will force a timestep to start at
the date 1/month/year.
5.2.7 Bottomhole Pressure Tables (SYSTB)

00 The SYSTB card specifies the bottomhole pressure table to be used when a
well points to a pressure system with or without lift.
SYSTB wl
sysnm1 (liftnm1)itb11itb12. . .itb1n
sysnm2 (liftnm2)itb21 itb22. . .itb2n
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which table pointers are being

assigned (see Section 1.5.2).
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-299

sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the table

pointers on this card apply.
liftnm Name of the artificial lift method to which the table

pointers on this card apply.
itb Bottomhole pressure table pointer.
NOTE: The number of table pointers on each card must equal the number
If a pointer for a well for a lift method is not input, the table pointer
will default to the value for the appropriate pressure system.
If a pointer for a well for a pressure system is not input, the table
pointer will default to the value specified on the ITUBE card for the
well.
5-300 Landmark - R2003.4

5.2.8 Define Pressure Systems for Wells During History (HISTSYS)

00 The HISTSYS card is used to define the pressure system for each well
during the history period. This data is used to print production reports by
pressure system during the history period.
00 HISTSYS Card for WELLS
HISTSYS WELL wl
sysnm1 sysnm2 . . . sysnmn
00 HISTSYS Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
HISTSYS inum sysnm
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which pressure systems are being

sysnm Pressure system name for the well.
00 The number of sysnm values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.
Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierachy to

which the specified pressure system name applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-301


management level.
sysnm Pressure system name for each well under the

specified well management level.
NOTE: Pressure system names can be input at the well level or at any other
level of well management. The effective pressure system for a well
will be the one specified at the lowest level of the well hierarchy;
i.e., the first user-specified number found in the order: well, the
appropriate gathering center, the appropriate flow station, the
appropriate area, and the field.
If HISTSYS is specified by well management level, one and only

will be accepted.
5.2.9 Defining Pressure Systems (PRSYS)

00 The PRSYS card defines the names of the PWM pressure systems.
PRSYS sysnm1 sysnm2. . . sysnmNPRSYS
00 Definition:
sysnm sysnm1 is the name of the pressure system with the

lowest tubinghead pressure, sysnm2 is the name of
the pressure system with the next higher
tubinghead pressure, etc.
NOTE: The pressure system names can be up to six (6) characters long. If
this card is omitted the pressure systems are denoted as SYS1,
SYS2, ...,SYSn. The user can selectively use default names by
specifying X for a name in the above card.
00 Examples:
00 If NPRSYS = 3, the following are valid PRSYS cards:

PRSYS SYSTM1 SYSTM2 SYSTM3
PRSYS LOWPRS X HIGHPR (here X = SYS2)
PRSYS SYS1 SYS2 SYS3
5-302 Landmark - R2003.4

5.2.10 Artificial Lift Method Names (ARTLFT)

00 The ARTLFT card defines the names of the artificial lift methods.
ARTLFT alftnm1 alftnm2 ... alftnmNPWMAL
00 Definition:
alftnm Name of artificial lift method #n
00 The artificial lift method names can be up to six (6) characters long. If this
card is omitted, the default name for lift method #1 is GASLFT.
5.2.11 Tolerance for Production Rates (PWMTLP)

00 The PWMTLP card is used to define the tolerance within which the rates
in non-PWM timesteps must fall. It also defines the action to perform if a
violation occurs.
GATHER
O

FLOSTA inum TOTAL
PWMTLP G
AREA ALL sysnm W
FIELD
STOP
NONPWM tolr1 WARN
WMAN
STOP
TRGPWM tolr2 WARN
WMAN
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-303

00 Definitions:

which the specified data applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
ALL Alpha label indicating the tolerance applies to all

members in the specified well management level.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating the data applies to the

specified member as a whole, not to a particular
pressure system. This is the default.
sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the data

applies.
Alpha label indicating the tolerance applies to the rates:
O Oil production
G Gas production.
W Water production.
NONPWM Alpha label indicating the data on this card applies

to the comparison of the rates from non-PWM
timesteps to the PWM timestep.
tolr1 Tolerance within which the rate for a non-PWM

timestep must fall. That is, a violation occurs if
(RATE(PWM) - RATE(NON-PWM))/RATE(PWM) > tolr1
Default is to not do the comparison if the

NONPWM card is not input.
TRGPWM Alpha label indicating the data on this card applies

to the comparison of the rates from non-PWM
timesteps to the targets.
tolr2 Tolerance within which the rate for a non-PWM

timestep must fall. That is, a violation occurs if
5-304 Landmark - R2003.4

(RATE(NON-PWM) - TARGET) / TARGET > tolr2
Default is to not do the comparison if the TRGPWM

card is not input.
Alpha label indicating the action to take if a violation occurs:
STOP Write a restart record and stop the run.
WARN Write a warning message and continue the run.
WMAN Repeat this timestep performing the PWM

algorithm.
labels must be specified. There is no default, When FIELD is
One and only one of the O, W, or G labels must be specified. There

is no default.
One and only one of TOTAL or sysnm may be specified. If neither

is input TOTAL is assumed. Separate tolerances can be established
for each pressure system by inputting multiple PWMTLP cards.
Either one or both of the NONPWM and TRGPWM cards may be

input.
5.2.12 Oil Incremental Benefit with Gaslift (PWMOBN)

00 The PWMOBN card is used to specify the oil incremental benefit with
gaslift.
PWMOBN bnf
00 Definition:
bnf Fraction of the non-lifted oil rate above which

gaslift must improve in order to be eligible. Default
is 0.05.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-305

5.2.13 Maximum PWM Timestep Size (DTPWM)

00 The DTPWM card is used to specify the maximum allowable timestep size
for a predictive well management timestep.
DTPWM dtpwm
00 Definition:
dtpwm Maximum allowable timestep size that can be used

for a predictive well management timestep, days.
Default is no size restriction.
5.2.14 Write PWM Report to File (PWMFILE)

00 The PWMFILE card is used to request a report of pressure system
production rates written in spreadsheet format to FORTRAN Unit 63.
TIME

PWMFILE TNEXT ( freq )

OFF
00 Definitions:
TIME Alpha label that causes the file to be written each

time a TIME or DATE card is encountered. Default
is not to write on the basis of TIME or DATE cards.
TNEXT Alpha label that causes the file to be written only

the next time a TIME or DATE card is encountered.
Default is not to write on the basis of the next TIME
or DATE card.
OFF Alpha label that causes the file not to be output. It is

equivalent to specifying a frequency of 99999.
freq A number that causes the file to be written after

every freq timesteps (each timestep cut counts as
one timestep). Default is 99999.
5-306 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: At least one of the values, TIME, TNEXT, OFF, or freq must appear
on the PWMFILE card. Either TIME or TNEXT may appear with
freq.
The records are written to FORTRAN Unit 63, which may not be
saved unless the appropriate commands are added to the job
control stream.
5.2.15 Debug Output (PWMDBG)

00 The PWMDBG card is used to obtain debug output during the PWM
calculations.
PWMDBG idbg (NEXTONLY)

(ALL)
00 Definitions:
idbg Level of debug output for "NEW" PWM":
3 Well and well management output for each

pass.
2 Well management output for each pass.
1 Well management output for each step.
idbg Level of debug output for "MGOR" PWM:
4 Information at the operating points for the wells

specified on the WPWMDB card, plus the
reports for lesser values of idbg.
3 Well management report each time rates are

decreased to honor targets, plus the reports for
lesser values of idbg.
2 Well management report at the end of each

iteration of incremental gas-oil ratio value, plus
the report at the completion of the algorithm.
1 Well management report at the completion of

the algorithm.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-307

NEXTONLY Alpha label indicating the debug output will be

printed for the next PWM calculations only. This is
the default.
ALL Alpha label indicating the debug output will be

printed for all subsequent PWM calculations.
5-308 Landmark - R2003.4

5.3 Keywords for NEW PWM
5.3.1 Minimum Oil Rate for Producers (QOMIN)

00 The QOMIN card is used to define the minimum oil rate a well must have
in order to flow into any pressure system.
00 Each producing well must have a QOMIN value or QGMIN value, or

both, specified.
00 QOMIN Card for WELLS
QOMIN WELL wl
qomin1 qomin2 . . . qominn
00 QOMIN card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
QOMIN inum qomin
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which minimum oil rates are being

qomin Minimum oil rate for the well during PWM

categorization, STB/D (STCM/D).
00 The number of qomin values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.

which the specified minimum oil rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-309


management level.
qomin Minimum oil rate for each well under the specified
well management level during PWM
NOTE: Minimum oil rate values can be input at the well level or at any
other level of well management. The effective minimum value for a
well will be the one specified at the lowest level of the well
hierarchy; i.e., the first user-specified number found in the order:
well, the appropriate gathering center, the appropriate flow station,
the appropriate area, and the field.
If QOMIN is specified by well management level, one and only one

of the GATHER, FLOSTA, AREA, or FIELD labels must be
will be accepted.
5.3.2 Minimum Gas Rate for Producers (QGMIN)

00 The QGMIN card is used to define the minimum gas rate a well must have
in order to flow into any pressure system.
00 Each producing well must have a QOMIN value or QGMIN value, or

both, specified.
00 QGMIN Card for WELLS
QGMIN WELL wl
qgmin1 qgmin2 . . . qgminn
00 QGMIN Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
QGMIN inum qgmin
AREA
FIELD
5-310 Landmark - R2003.4

wl List of wells for which minimum gas rates are being

qgmin Minimum gas rate for the well during PWM

categorization, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
00 The number of qgmin values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.

which the specified minimum gas rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
qgmin Minimum gas rate for each well under the specified
well management level during PWM
categorization, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
NOTE: Minimum gas rate values can be input at the well level or at any

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-311

5.3.3 PWM Calculation Steps (PWMSTEP)

00 The PWMSTEP card is used to specify all the data needed to perform steps
2 and 3 of the new predictive well management.
PWMSTEP 2
PASS ipass (REMOVE)
BENEFIT bennam (a b c d e f g h i j)
PAFACT pa1 pa2 . . . paNPWMPA
PMFACT pm1 pm2 . . . pmNPWMPM
GATHER
FLOSTA
WMGL
AREA
FIELD
PRSYS sysnm
GORM gorm
GLRM glrm
WCUT wcut
EXCLUDE W
CUTOFF
ACTION AVG
SCALE
(card 1)

NOLIFTREQ

CATEGORY LIFTREQ

LIFTONLY
MUSTFLOW
MUSTLIFT (card 2)
ALL .
sysnm .
. .
.
ENDCATEGORY
PASS ipass (REMOVE)
.
ENDSTEP
5-312 Landmark - R2003.4

PWMSTEP 3 (STOP)
(WARN)
PASS ipass (REMOVE)
BENEFIT bennam (a b c d e f g h i j)
PAFACT pa1 pa2 . . . paNPWMPA
PMFACT pm1 pm2 . . . pmNPWMPM
GATHER
FLOSTA
WMGL
AREA
FIELD
sysnm
PRSYS
TOTAL
O SHUT
PHASE W SCALE
G AVG
PASS ipass (REMOVE)

.
.
.
ENDSTEP
00 Definitions: for PWMSTEP 2 card
PASS Alpha label indicating data for a pass is to be

input.
ipass Pass number. The value of ipass can not be
greater than NPWMPS.
REMOVE Alpha label indicating the designated pass
ipass should be removed from this step.
bennam Benefit function name. See notes below for
benefit function definitions.
a,...,j Benefit function coefficients. See notes below.
PAFACT Alpha label indicating the factors to be used for
each producing area are on this card. If the card
is not input, the factors default to 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-313

pa Producing area factor. Default is 1.

PMFACT Alpha label indicating the factors to be used for
each producing mechanism are on this card. If
the card is not input, the factors default to 1.
pm Producing mechanism factor. Default is 1.
WMGL Alpha label indicating the level of the well
management hierarchy to which the data for
this pass applies is on this card.
Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierarchy:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
PRSYS Alpha label indicating the system to be filled
during this pass.
sysnm Name of the pressure system to be filled.
GORM Alpha label indicating the maximum
producing GOR for wells in this pass is input
on this card. This card replaces any previously
specified GLRM data for this pass.
gorm Maximum producing GOR for wells in this
pass, SCF/STB (SCM/ STCM).
GLRM Alpha label indicating the maximum
producing GLR for wells in this pass is input on
this card. This card replaces any previously
specified GORM data for this pass.
glrm Maximum producing GLR for wells in this
pass, SCF/STB (SCM/ STCM).
WCUT Alpha label indicating the maximum
producing water-cut for wells in this pass is
input on this card.
wcut Maximum producing water-cut for wells in this
pass, fraction.
EXCLUDE W Alpha labels indicating that water rate
constraints are not to be checked during this
pass.
ACTION Alpha label indicating the procedure for
meeting the target.
5-314 Landmark - R2003.4

CUTOFF Assign wells in benefit

function order until target is
met. This is the default.
AVG Reset the rates of the highest
rate wells to an average rate to
meet the target. All eligible
wells are considered.
SCALE Scale all eligible wells to meet
the target.
CATEGORY Alpha labels indicating the well hydraulic
ENDCATEGORY categories that are eligible to be considered on
this pass are input between these two cards.
NOLIFTREQ Alpha label indicating, for the pressure system
categories specified on the following card(s),
wells are eligible under nolift conditions only
(i.e., do not consider lift rates in this pass). This
is the default.
LIFTREQ Alpha label indicating, for the pressure system
wells are eligible under both lift and nolift
conditions (i.e., if applicable the wells may
appear twice in the benefit function list: for lift
and non-lift rates).
LIFTONLY Alpha label indicating, for the pressure system
wells are eligible under lift conditions only (i.e.,
only consider gas lift rates for wells).
MUSTFLOW Alpha label indicating that the wells
categorized as MUSTFLOW on the PWMCAT
card are the eligible wells for this pass. The
ALL option must be used.
The following three options are used for determining the eligible
categories for the current pass:
MUSTLIFT Alpha label indicating wells that can only flow
when lifted are eligible on this pass.
ALL Alpha label indicating all well hydraulic
categories, including MUSTLIFT, are eligible on
this pass (i.e., every unassigned well in the list
is considered).
sysnm Name of the pressure system category to be
included on this pass (i.e. , select wells which
can flow to the pressure system sysnm).
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-315

ENDSTEP Alpha label indicating the end of the

PWMSTEP data. Required.
00 Definitions: for PWMSTEP 3 card
Alpha label indicating the action to take if any targets remain in

violation following step 3:
STOP Write a restart record and stop the run.
WARN Write a warning message and continue the run.
PASS Alpha label indicating data for a pass is to be
input.
ipass Pass number. The value of ipass cannot be
greater than NPWMPS.
REMOVE Alpha label indicating the designated pass ipass
should be removed from this step.
bennam Benefit function name. See notes below for
benefit function definitions.
a,...,j Benefit function coefficients. See notes below.
PAFACT Alpha label indicating the factors to be used for
each producing area are on this card. If the card
is not input, the factors default to 1.
pa Producing area factor. Default is 1.
PMFACT Alpha label indicating the factors to be used for
each producing mechanism are on this card. If
the card is not input, the factors default to 1.
pm Producing mechanism factor. Default is 1.
WMGL Alpha label indicating the level of the well
management hierarchy to which the data for
this pass applies is on this card.
Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierarchy:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
PRSYS Alpha label indicating the system to be filled

during this pass.
sysnm Name of the pressure system to be filled.
5-316 Landmark - R2003.4

TOTAL Alpha label indicating the entire well

management level member is to be checked.
PHASE Alpha label indicating which phase target is to
be checked and the action to be taken during
this pass are input on this card.
Alpha label indicating the phase target to be checked:
O Oil target.
W Water target.
G Gas target.
Alpha label indicating the action to take if a violation occurs:
SHUT Shut-in wells in the benefit function order.
SCALE Scale all eligible wells to meet the target.
AVG Reset the rates of the highest rate wells to an
average rate.
ENDSTEP Alpha label indicating the end of the PWMSTEP
data. Required.
NOTE: Multiple sets of pass data can be input for each PWMSTEP card.
The following data is required for each specified pass: BENEFIT,

WMGL, PRSYS, PHASE and CATEGORY.
Data for pass 1 must be specified.
The action CUTOFF must be used if LIFTREQ or LIFTONLY are

specified on the CATEGORY card (in step 2).
The category ALL must be used if MUSTFLOW is specified on the

CATEGORY card (in step 2).
The following is the list of available benefit functions:
BF1: PMi *PAj *(a*Qo +b*GOR+c*WCUT+d*GLGOR)
BF2: PMi * PAj * ( a + b*Qg + c*Qo + d*Qw + e*Qglg) /
( f + g*Qg + h*Qo + i*Qw + j*Qglg)
BF3: PMi* PAj* (a+Qo)**b* ( c+GOR )** d*
( e +WCUT )**f * ( g +GLGOR )**h
For benefit function BF3, the exponents b, d, f and h should be

integer values. If not, they are internally set to the nearest integer.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-317

5.3.4 Producing Area Number (PWMWPA)

00 The PWMWPA card is used to define the producing area in which a well
lies. This allows more flexibility in the use of the benefit functions.
00 PWMWPA Card for WELLS
PWMWPA WELL wl
ipa1 ipa2 . .. ipan
00 PWMWPA Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
PWMWPA inum ipa
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which producing area numbers are

ipa Producing area number for the well. Default is

NPWMPA+1.
00 The number of ipa values must equal the number of wells in the well list.

which the specified producing area number applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
5-318 Landmark - R2003.4

ipa Producing area number for each well under the

NPWMPA+1.
NOTE: Producing area numbers can be input at the well level, or at any
other level of well management. The effective producing area
If PWMWPA is specified by well management level, one and only

will be accepted.
5.3.5 Producing Mechanism (PWMWPM)

00 The PWMWPM card is used to define the producing mechanism for a
well. This allows more flexibility in the use of the benefit functions.
00 PWMWPM Card for WELLS
PWMWPM WELL wl
ipm1 ipm2 . . . ipmn
00 PWMWPM Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
PWMWPM inum ipm
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which producing mechanism

numbers are being specified (see Section 1.5.2).
ipm Producing mechanism number for the well. Default

is NPWMPM+1.
00 The number of ipm values must equal the number of wells in the well list.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-319


which the specified producing mechanism number applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.

management level.
ipm Producing mechanism number for each well under

the specified well management level. Default is
NPWMPM+1.
NOTE: Producing mechanism numbers can be input at the well level or at

any other level of well management. The effective producing
mechanism number for a well will be the one specified at the
lowest level of the well hierarchy; i.e., the first user-specified
number found in the order: well, the appropriate gathering center,
the appropriate flow station, the appropriate area, and the field.
If PWMWPM is specified by well management level, one and only

will be accepted.
5.3.6 Define Well Category (PWMCAT)

00 The PWMCAT card is used to explicitly define the PWM category for a
well.
( MUSTFLOW ) sysnm
PWMCAT (liftnm) wl
DECLASS
00 Definitions:
sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the wells are

explicitly categorized.
5-320 Landmark - R2003.4

MUSTFLOW Alpha label indicating that the wells listed on this

card are eligible when MUSTFLOW is specified on
the CATEGORY card in the PWMSTEP 2 data. Also,
these wells are not eligible for rate reduction during
the Step 3 process.
DECLASS Alpha label indicating that the wells are to be

declassified; i.e., remove any previous explicit
categorization.
liftnm Name of the artificial lift method to which the wells

are additionally categorized.
wl List of wells which are being explicitly categorized

5.3.7 MUSTFLOW Well Specification (MUSTFLOW)

00 The MUSTFLOW card is used to affect the eligibility of wells when
MUSTFLOW is specified on the CATEGORY card in the PWMSTEP 2 data.
Also, MUSTFLOW wells are not eligible for rate reduction during the Step
3 process.
MUSTFLOW ON wl
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the wells listed on this

card are to be considered MUSTFLOW wells. This is
the default if neither ON nor OFF is specified.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the wells listed on this

card are not to be MUSTFLOW wells.
wl List of wells which are either being assigned or

unassigned as MUSTFLOW wells (see Section
1.5.2).
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-321

5.3.8 Minimum Oil Rate for Wells on Gaslift (QOMINL)

00 The QOMINL card is used to define the minimum oil rate a well on gaslift
must have in order to flow into any pressure system.
00 QOMINL Card for WELLS
QOMINL WELL wl
qominl1 qominl2... qominln
00 QOMINL Card for WELL MANAGEMENT LEVELS
GATHER
FLOSTA
QOMINL inum qominl
AREA
FIELD
wl List of wells for which minimum oil rates are being

qominl Minimum oil rate for the well on gaslift during

PWM categorization, STB/D (STCM/D).
00 The number of qominl values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.
Alpha label indicating the level of the well management hierachy to

which the specified minimum oil rate applies:
AREA Area.
FIELD Field.
5-322 Landmark - R2003.4


management level.
qominl Minimum oil rate for each well under the specified
well management level on gaslift during PWM
NOTE: Minimum oil rate values can be input at the well level or at any
If the qominl value is not specified for a well, the qomin value
will be used.

5.3.9 Execute Normal Targeting Procedure (PWMTRG)

00 The PWMTRG card is used to force the execution of the normal targeting
procedure for checking well management level production constraints,
even during PWM iterations.
PWMTRG ON
OFF
00 Definitions:
00 ON Alpha label indicating that the normal targeting

procedure should be used to check production
constraints.
00 OFF Alpha label indicating that the normal targeting

procedure should not be used. This is the default if
the card is not entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-323

5.3.10 Frequency of Pressure System Switching (PRSDLT)

00 The PRSDLT card is used to define the length of time a well must be
assigned to a pressure system before it can be switched to another.
PRSDLT frqsys1 frqsys2 ...frqsysNPRSYS
00 Definition:
00 frqsys Length of time a well must be assigned to this

pressure system before it can be switched to another
pressure system, days. The alpha label X may be
entered instead of a value to indicate the value
should not be changed.
5.3.11 Well Rate Control (PWMWCN)

00 The PWMWCN card is used to specify how wells are to be handled during
non-PWM iterations and timesteps. Wells are either considered
bottomhole pressure controlled wells, where the bottomhole pressure
limit is the value from the last PWM iteration, or rate controlled.
BHP
OIL
PWMWCN WATER
GAS
LIQUID
00 Definitions:
BHP Alpha label indicating that the wells should be

treated as bottomhole pressure controlled. This is
the default.
OIL Alpha label indicating that the wells should be

treated as oil rate controlled.
WATER Alpha label indicating that the wells should be

treated as water rate controlled.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the wells should be

treated as gas rate controlled.
LIQUID Alpha label indicating that the wells should be

treated as liquid rate controlled.
5-324 Landmark - R2003.4

5.4 Keywords for MGOR PWM
5.4.1 Separator Battery Numbers (SYSSEP)

00 The SYSSEP card is used to specify the separator battery number to be
used when a well points to a pressure system.
SYSSEP wl
sysnm1 ibt11ibt12...ibt1n
sysnm2 ibt21ibt22...ibt2n
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which separator battery numbers

are being assigned (see Section 1.5.2).
sysnm Name of the pressure system to which the separator

battery numbers on this card apply.
ibt Separator battery number.
NOTE: The number of separator battery numbers on each card must equal
the number of wells in the well list.
If a battery number for a well for a pressure system is not input, the
separator battery number will default to the value specified on the
WELL card for the well.
5.4.2 MGOR Option Data (PRMGOR)

00 The PRMGOR card is used to specify the data needed to execute the
marginal gas-oil ratio (MGOR) option of the predictive well management
algorithm.
PRMGOR (FGRBGN)(FGRINC)(WCUTLM)(FIXGL)(EFF)

(fgrbgn)(fgrinc)(wcutlm)
ON ON
OFF OFF
00 Definitions:
fgrbgn Initial value of field total incremental gas-oil ratio

(TIGOR) at which to start the well assignment,
SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is 1000 SCF/STB.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-325

fgrinc TIGOR increment to use during the algorithm,

SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). Default is 500 SCF/STB.
wcutlm Water-cut value above which a well will not be

allowed to produce, fraction. Default is 1.
FIXGL Indicates the method of placing wells on gaslift:
ON Fixed gaslift gas rate. Wells are either on

gaslift at the rate corresponding to the
user-specified efficiency or not at all.
OFF Variable gaslift gas rate. The allocated

gaslift gas rate may range from zero to the
rate corresponding to the user-specified
efficiency. This is the default.
EFF Indicates the method of determining the lift

efficiency to use in the gaslift gas calculations under
the performance curve option:
ON User-specified table of water-cut versus

efficiency (EFFTAB card).
OFF User-specified value (PFMCRV card). This

is the default.
5.4.3 Water-Cut Versus Efficiency Table (EFFTAB)

00 EFFTAB data are used to relate lift efficiency to the water-cut of the well.
EFFTAB
WCUT EFF
wcut1 eff1
wcut2 eff2
.
wcutn effn
00 Definitions:
WCUT Alpha label indicating that this column contains

water-cut values.
EFF Alpha label indicating that this column contains lift

efficiency values.
wcut Water-cut values, fraction.
eff Lift efficiency values for use in the performance

curve option, BOPD/MMSCF (STCM/MSCM).
5-326 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: An EFFTAB card must be input if the EFF ON option is specified on

the PRMGOR card.
The number of water-cut (or efficiency) values must be no greater

than 100.
5.4.4 Specify Wells Included in Well Debug Report (WPWMDB)

00 The WPWMDB card specifies the wells for which debug output is desired
when the well debug option is specified on the PWMDBG card.
WPWMDB wl
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which debug output is requested

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-327

5-328 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
6
00000Output Control
6.1 Introduction
00 VIP-EXECUTIVE can generate a variety of output:
1. Timestep Summaries
2. Iteration Summaries
3. Array Reports
4. Well, Well Layer, Well Status Change, and Perf Status Change
Summaries
5. Separator Reports
6. Production/Injection Reports at any well management level
7. Potential production/injection reports.
8. Simulation Statistics
9. Region Summaries
10. Well RFT Reports
11. Restart Records
12. VDB File for Post-Processing Well and Array Data
13. Plot Files for Post-Processing Well Data
14. Map Files for Post-Processing Array Data
15. Relative Permeability Files for Pseudo Function Generation
16. Echo printing of time-dependent input data
00 The user can control the content and frequency of output of all items
except the timestep summaries.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-329

Output Control VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
6.2 Print/Map Arrays and Parameters (OUTPUT, MAPOUT)

00 The OUTPUT card and MAPOUT card are used to specify which arrays
are to be printed and written to the map file, respectively. The OUTPUT
card is also used to enter parameters which cause specific actions to be
taken.
00 The MAPOUT card may be entered only if a MAP card was specified in
the VIP-CORE data set.
OUTPUT array1 ... arraym param1 . . . paramn

MAPOUT array1 ... arrayk
MAPOUT NONE
00 Definitions:
OUTPUT Alpha label that causes the specified arrays to be

included in the array report, or the specified action
to occur.
MAPOUT Alpha label that causes the specified arrays to be

written to the map file.
NONE Alpha label that causes no arrays to be written to

the map file.
array Alpha label of those arrays being defined on either

an OUTPUT card or a MAPOUT card:
P Pressure.
PSAT Saturation pressure.
PDAT Datum pressure.
SO Oil saturation.
SW Water saturation.
SG Gas saturation.
SOM Normalized mobile oil saturation.
SWM Normalized mobile water saturation.
RS Solution gas-oil ratio.
RV Solution oil-gas ratio.
BOF Oil formation volume factor.
6-330 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Output Control
BG Gas formation volume factor.
GOR Total gas-oil ratio.
WCUT Water cut.
RSW Solution gas-water ratio. Available

only when the CO2 option is in use.
VISO Oil phase viscosity.
VISG Gas phase viscosity.
DENO Oil phase density.
DENG Gas phase density.
PV Pore volume including compaction

effects.
TX X direction transmissibility
including compaction effects.
TY Y direction transmissibility
TZ Z direction transmissibility
TR R direction transmissibility
TTHETA Angular-direction transmissibility

ITRAN Transmissibility region.
KRO Relative permeability of the oil

phase. Keywords KROX+, KROX-,
KROY+, KROY-, KROZ+, KROZ- can
be used for directional relative
permeabilities in X+, X-, Y+, Y-, Z+,
Z- directions, respectively.
KRG Relative permeability of the gas

phase. Keywords KRGX+, KRGX-,
KRGY+, KRGY-, KRGZ+, KRGZ- can
be used for directional relative
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-331

KRW Relative permeability of the water

phase. Keywords KRWX+, KRWX-,
KRWY+, KRWY-, KRWZ+, KRWZ-
can be used for directional relative
ISAT Relative permeability/capillary

pressure table pointers.
ISATI Imbibition relative permeability/

capillary pressure table pointers.
API API gravity of the liquid phase.

Available only when the PVT
interpolation option is in use.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange

transmissibility (VIP-DUAL only).
IFT Interfacial tension. Available only

when the IFT option is in use.
PHFLAG Phase equilibrium condition, (see

GIBBS, Section 8.1.1). Available only
when the GIBBS option is in use.
HG Fractional height of gas-oil contact in

a block (VE cases only).
HW Fractional height of water-oil contact

in a block (VE cases only).
FLOWO Flow of oil out of the 6 faces:

negative I, positive I, negative J,
positive J, negative K, positive K. Six
arrays are written.
FLOWG Flow of gas out of the 6 faces:

arrays are written.
FLOWW Flow of water out of the 6 faces:

arrays are written.
OIP Total oil volume, surface conditions.
GIP Total gas volume, surface conditions.
6-332 Landmark - R2003.4

WIP Total water volume, surface

conditions.
FGIP Free gas volume.
OCIP Condensate in free gas.
TDL -X, +Y diagonal transmissibility

including compaction effects,
available only with NINEPT option.
TDR +X, +Y direction diagonal

transmissibility including
compaction effects, available only
wth NINEPT option.
PVMUL Pore volume multiplier, ratio of

current value to reference value.
PVMULW Water-induced pore volume

multiplier, ratio of current value to
reference value.
TXMUL X-direction transmissibility

reference value.
TYMUL Y-direction transmissibility

reference value.
TZMUL Z-direction transmissibility

reference value.
TRMUL R-direction transmissibility

reference value.
TTMUL Angular direction transmissibility

reference value.
CN Capillary number. Available only

when the VELCTY CN option is in
use.
FNDG Non-Darcy gas flow mobility

multiplication factor. Available only
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-333

when the VELCTY NDARCY option

is in use.
PTHLD Threshold pressure.
STBDT Maximum IMPES stable timestep

size.
SAL Water salinity. Available only when

the PVTWSAL tables are entered in
VIP-CORE.
The following array names are valid on OUTPUT

and MAPOUT cards only in VIP-THERM:
T Temperature.
00 TXT X-direction thermal transmissibility.
00 TYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility.
00 TZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility.
00 TRT R-direction thermal transmissibility.
00 TTT Theta-direction thermal

transmissibility.
00 DENW Liquid water phase density.
00 VISW Liquid water phase viscosity.
00 HLOS Heat loss rate.
00 CHLOS Cumulative heat loss.
00 SOR Steam-oil ratio.
00 HOIL Oil phase enthalpy.
00 HGAS Gas phase enthalpy.
00 HWAT Water phase enthalpy.
00 F Flow rate arrays. A FLOWS card

must be input in VIP-CORE (VIP-
CORE Section 2.2.19.3) in order to
print these arrays. , , and are
unit, phase, and direction symbols
which are specified as follows. may
be omitted to print phase flows in all
directions. and may be omitted
6-334 Landmark - R2003.4

to print flows of all phases in all

directions
00 = V, N, M for volumetric, molar, or mass flow

rate.
00 = O, G, or W for oil, gas, or liquid water phase.
00 = X(R) flow in from i-1 for cartesian (radial)

grid.
00 = Y(T) flow in from j-1 for cartesian (radial)

grid
00 =Z
00 =E flow in from i+1, j-1 for cartesian grid

with 9-point.
00 =W flow in from i-1, j-1 for cartesian grid

with 9-point.
param Alpha label on an OUTPUT card causing an action

to be taken:
SHFTOG Instructs the program to shift all oil

and gas production/injection units
by a factor of 1000 for output
purposes. For example, cumulative
gas production will change from
MMSCF to BSCF.
SHFTW Instructs the program to shift all

water production/injection units by
a factor of 1000 for output purposes.
For example, water production rate
will change from STB/D to MSTB/
D.
TSSUM Causes a timestep summary that

includes all timesteps to be printed
at the end of the run. FORTRAN
Unit 15 is used to store the timestep
summary data. Once this keyword is
specified it cannot be turned off and
is not affected by subsequent
OUTPUT cards.
TSSUMG Causes a timestep summary of gas

lift usage to be printed at the end of
the run. Once this keyword is
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-335


OUTPUT cards.
TSSMFG Causes a timestep summary of flared

gas (gas available for reinjection not
actually injected) to be printed at the
end of the run. Once this keyword is
OUTPUT cards.
TSSDAT Causes the date instead of the

timestep number and the time in
days to be printed on the timestep
summary at the end of the run. Once
this keyword is specified, it cannot
be turned off and is not affected by
subsequent OUTPUT cards.
WELRPT Causes a report of well status

changes to be printed at the end of
specified, it cannot be turned off and
OUTPUT cards.
PRFRPT Causes a report of perforation status

changes to be printed at the end of
OUTPUT cards.
CPUWMG Causes a report of CPU time within

well management to be printed as
part of the PRINT SIM simulation
statistics report. Once this keyword
is specified, it cannot be turned off
and is not affected by subsequent
OUTPUT cards.
CNVFAIL Causes the detailed iteration

summary to be printed when a
convergence failure occurs. This
option is on unless turned off by use
of the CNVFLOFF keyword.
CNVFLOFF Turns off the printing of the detailed

iteration summary when a
convergence failure occurs.
6-336 Landmark - R2003.4

HCPVTS Causes hydrocarbon-pore-volume-

weighted average pressure to be
printed in the timestep summaries
instead of total-pore-volume-
weighted average pressure.
WRKRPT Causes an automatic workover

report to be printed at the end of the
run. Once this keyword is specified,
it cannot be turned off and is not
affected by subsequent OUTPUT
cards.
RCMRPT Causes a report of recompletion unit

status changes to be printed at the
end of the run. Once this keyword is
OUTPUT cards.
PCDON Causes condensate rate and

condensate yield to be printed in
well, gathering center, flow station,
area, field, and well group
compositional summaries.
PCDOFF Turns off the printing of condensate

rate and condensate yield in well,
gathering center, flow station, area,
field, and well group compositional
summaries.
PCCD Causes cumulative condensate

volume to be printed in well,
gathering center, flow station, area,
field, and well group compositional
summaries. Once this keyword is
OUTPUT cards.
RCDON Causes condensate rate and

region compositional summary.
RCDOFF Turns off the printing of condensate

rate and condensate yield in region
compositional summary.
RCCD Causes cumulative condensate

volume to be printed in region
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-337

compositional summary. Once this

keyword is specified, it cannot be
turned off and is not affected by
subsequent OUTPUT cards.
LCDON Causes condensate rate and

well layer compositional summary.
LCDOFF Turns off the printing of condensate

rate and condensate yield in well
layer compositional summary.
NOTE: 1. If a MAP card was specified in VIP-CORE and the MAPOUT

card is either omitted or entered with no subsequent keywords,
the 4 arrays P, SO, SG, and SW are, by default, written to the
map file. In VIP-THERM, T is also written by default.
2. To turn off the writing of any of the arrays listed in this section,
specify the card MAPOUT NONE.
3. If the OUTPUT card is omitted or entered with no subsequent

keywords, no array reports are printed.
4. All of the alpha labels must appear on one OUTPUT/

MAPOUT card. If necessary the continuation character > can
be used.
5. The order of the alpha labels is not significant. All are optional.
6. Each OUTPUT/MAPOUT card supersedes and replaces the

previous OUTPUT/MAPOUT card.
7. For output of arrays RS, RV, BOF, BG, GOR, SOR, WCUT, OIP,
GIP, FGIP, or OCIP, separator battery assignments must be
made for each reservoir region (REGSEP card) except for dead
oil runs in VIP-THERM.
8. The options PCDON, RCDON, LCDON, PCDOFF, RCDOFF,

LCDOFF, PCCD, and RCCD are used to specify whether the
condensate rates, condensate yields, and cumulative
condensate volumes are included in the output of
compositional summaries specified by the PRINT card options
WELCMP, WLLCMP, GCCMP, FSCMP, ARCMP, REGCMP,
FLDCMP, and WGPCMP.
These condensate printing options should be selected carefully

because they require additional flash calculations which could
significantly increase the CPU time. The cumulative well/
region condensate volume is zero when the PCCD/RCCN
option is first specified unless the CCNDN option is used on
the CPLOT card. If the CCNDN option and any of the well,
gathering center, flow station, area, or field classes are selected
on the CPLOT card, the cumulative well condensate volume is
6-338 Landmark - R2003.4

calculated starting from time zero. Likewise, if the CCNDN

option and the REGION class are selected on the CPLOT card,
the cumulative region condensate volume is calculated starting
from time zero.
00 Examples:
00 OUTPUT P SW SG
MAPOUT TX SOM DENO
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-339

6.3 Array Print Windows (OUTWINDOW)

00 The OUTWINDOW card is used to specify windows within the grid
system for which values of the arrays listed on the OUTPUT, OUTX,
OUTY, OUTZ, etc. cards are to be printed.
00 Currently the frequency of array printing is controlled by the PRINT

ARRAYS card and each array requested on any of the OUTPUT-type cards
is printed in its entirety for every grid. When windows are specified the
frequency is still controlled by the PRINT ARRAYS card; for each
requested array on the OUTPUT-type cards, all specified windows of
gridblock values are printed.
ADD
OUTWINDOW DELETE wname
1
i2 j2 k2 ONLYCHILDREN
(gridname) ii j1 k1 ( wname )
NX NY NZ ALSOCHILDREN
.
.
.
ENDWINDOW
00 Definitions:
ADD Alpha label indicating that the specified windows

are added to the current list. The default is to
replace the current list with the specified windows.
DELETE Alpha label indicating that the listed windows are

to be removed from the current list. It is an error if
no such named window exists. No data cards or
ENDWINDOW card may be entered when DELETE
is used.
wnamei Alphanumeric name of the window to be deleted

from the list. At least one name must be input after
the DELETE label.
gridname Name of the grid refinement to which this window

applies. If not specified, the window is assumed to
apply to the root grid.
Gridblock locations, relative to gridname, are defined by indices I, J, K

in reference to the (x, y, z) or (r, , z) grid. The gridblocks contained in
the window are those lying in the portion of the grid defined by:
6-340 Landmark - R2003.4

i1 I i2
j1 J j2 00
k1 K k2
NX Alpha label indicating that the value of i2 should be

set to nx (or nr).
NY Alpha label indicating that the value of j2 should be

set to ny (or ntheta).
NZ Alpha label indicating that the value of k2 should be

set to nz.
ONLYCHILDREN Alpha label indicating that a window is not

created for the blocks in grid gridname, but
windows are created for each child grid that exists
within this set of blocks. Each window thus
created will have the same name.
ALSOCHILDREN Alpha label indicating that, in addition to creating

a window in grid gridname, windows are created
for each child grid that exists within this set of
blocks. Each window thus created will have the
same name.
wname Alphanumeric name of this window or set of

windows.
ENDWINDOW Alaph label indicating the end of the window data.

This card may not be entered if the DELETE data is
entered.
NOTE: If neither ONLYCHILDREN nor ALSOCHILDREN is specified, a

single window is created.
The maximum number of windows is 250.
00 Example:
OUTWINDOW
ROOT 3 7 2 5 1 NZ WIN1
GASCAP 3 NX 3 NY 2 4 WIN2
4 4 7 7 1 NZ ALSOCHILDREN WIN3
ENDWINDOW
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-341

6.4 Content and Frequency of Printed Output (PRINT)

00 The PRINT card allows the user to control the content and frequency of
printed output. If the PRINT card is omitted, only the timestep summaries
and the simulation statistics report at the end of the run are printed.
TIME
( freq )

PRINT param1 param2 . . . paramn TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions:
param Alpha label of those report(s) being defined:
ITER Detailed iteration summary. For

IMPES only, the residuals will not be
recomputed after convergence. This
is the default.
ITERL Detailed iteration summary. This

option forces the residuals to be
recomputed after convergence.
WELLS Well production summary and well

injection summary.
WSTRM Include in the TSFM surface facility

report the compositions of various
production streams for each well.
The facility report is automatically
printed whenever PRINT WELLS is
active and only if the TSFM surface
facility model option is in use.
REGIONS Region report. To compute fluids-in-

place the hydrocarbon moles in each
region are flashed to the surface.
REGBLK Region report. To compute fluids-in-

place the hydrocarbon moles in each
gridblock are flashed to the surface.
The surface quantities are summed
over the regions. This is the method
used by VIP-CORE to compute
initial fluids-in-place.
REGOG Region report. Same as REGIONS

except that reservoir oil and gas
6-342 Landmark - R2003.4

compositions are printed instead of

total compositions and total moles
for each phase are added.
REGBOG Region report. Same as REGBLK

except that reservoir oil and gas
compositions are printed instead of
total compositions and total moles
for each phase are added.
ARRAYS Array reports.
SEP Separator battery report, with

compositional and volumetric
information at all stages and at
surface conditions.
SEPS Short form of the separator battery

report, with information only for
surface conditions.
FIELD Field production and injection

summaries. In addition to the field
production and injection reports, a
report of production by pressure
system will be printed if predictive
well management is active.
WLLYR Well production and injection

summaries detailed by layers for
active wells only. Also controls the
plot records written; i.e., only the
layers for active wells are written to
the plot file. Also controls the special
layer output reports for WBSIM
runs.
WLLYRS Well production and injection

summaries, detailed by layers for all
wells. Also controls the plot records
written; i.e., the layers for all wells
are written to the plot file. Also
controls the special layer output
reports for WBSIM runs.
WLGRP Well production and injection

summaries, for well groups defined
by the user (see the WLGRP card for
details).
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-343

GCLYR Gathering center production and

injection summaries detailed by
layers.
WLHIS Well production and injection

histories written to FORTRAN Unit
40.
FSLYR Flow station production and

injection summaries detailed by
layers.
ARLYR Area production and injection

summaries detailed by layers.
FLLYR Field production and injection

summaries detailed by layers.
WLPOT Well potential production summary

and well potential injection
summary.
FLPOT Field potential production summary

and field potential injection
summary.
WELCMP Well production and injection

WLLCMP Well production and injection

compositional summaries detailed
by well perforations.
GCCMP Gathering center production and

injection compositional summaries.
FSCMP Flow station production and

injection compositional summaries
detailed by gathering centers.
ARCMP Area production and injection

by gathering centers.
REGCMP Region production and injection

FLDCMP Field production and injection

by gathering centers.
6-344 Landmark - R2003.4

WGPCMP Well group production and injection

compositional summaries detail by
wells.
RFT Well RFT report. For vertical wells

the report includes gridblock
information for each layer. For
deviated wells this information is
printed only for each perforation.
RFTFILE Well RFT report written to

FORTRAN Unit 18.
FACUTL Facility utilization summary.

Information will be printed for any
well management entity for which
production targets were specified.
FACFIL Facility utilization summary written

to FORTRAN Unit 57.
MGOR Marginal gas-oil ratio report.

Available only if the PREDICT
MGOR option has been specified.
SIM Simulation statistics. This report is

automatically printed at the end of
the run. The report includes time
simulated, timestep information,
and, when available, CPU
information for the current run and
for cumulative simulation runs.
TSSUM Timestep summary report. This

parameter is used to control the
frequency of entries in the timestep
summary report produced at the end
of the run.
SSSUM Spread sheet summary report

written to FORTRAN Units 72-77.
The files to be written and the
quantities written on each file are
controlled by the SSSUM card.
SSSUMR Same as SSSUM except that each

time a file is written, it is rewound
and the header, if requested, is
written at the top.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-345

WLSUM Well production and injection

summaries detailed by layers written
to FORTRAN Unit 1
TRACK Tracking output on FORTRAN unit

17.
TRACKW Water tracking report.
FLUX Boundary flux summaries.
TIME Alpha label that causes all reports named on this

card to be printed each time a TIME or DATE card is
encountered. Default is not to print on the basis of
TIME or DATE cards.
TNEXT Alpha label that causes all reports named on this

card to be printed only the next time a TIME or
DATE card is encountered. Default is not to print on
the basis of the next TIME or DATE card.
OFF Alpha label that causes all reports named on this

card to not be printed. It is equivalent to specifying
a frequency of 99999.to
freq A number that causes reports named on this card to

be printed after every freq timesteps (each timestep
cut counts as one timestep). Default is 99999.
NOTE: 1. At least one of the report labels given above must appear on
the PRINT card. If a report label appears on more than one
PRINT card, the frequency specified on the last PRINT card
applies.
2. At least one of the values, TIME, TNEXT, OFF, or freq, must

appear after the report label(s) on the card. Either TIME or
TNEXT may appear with freq, but not with each other.
3. Different frequencies of printing can be used for each report

label.
4. Any number of PRINT cards may appear in any data group.
5. If an ARRAYS label is specified on the PRINT card, but no array

names are specified on an OUTPUT card, then no array reports
are printed.
6. For the RFT/RFTFILE reports the OUTRFT card must be used

to specify the wells to be included.
7. For compositional summaries (i.e., the WELCMP, WLLCMP,

GCCMP, FSCMP, ARCMP, REGCMP, FLDCMP, and WGPCMP
options), the user can use the options PCDON, RCDON,
6-346 Landmark - R2003.4

LCDON, PCDOFF, RCDOFF, LCDOFF, PCCD, and RCCD on

the OUTPUT card to specify whether the condensate rates,
condensate yields, and cumulative condensate volumes will be
included in the output.
8. Three additional output reports will be printed when using the

WBSIM option. These are all printed at the same frequency as
the PRINT WLLYR report. These include: [1] an output table at
the start of the timestep containing the effective wellbore
permeability for the step, Moody friction factor, mixture
density, delta-P friction, phase velocities, critical velocities
[minimum gas flow velocities to lift insitu liquids], Reynolds
numbers, and alpha and beta parameters for all of the wellbore
segments, [2] an output table at the end of the timestep for the
wellbore perforations, showing the production/injection rates
and gas-oil ratios and water cuts, production and injection
cumulatives, and reservoir and wellbore pressures, and [3] an
output table presenting a profile of all of the wellbore
segments, containing the insitu saturations, average densities
and viscosities, alpha and beta flow parameters, effective
wellbore permeabilities, and wellbore pressures.
00 Examples:
00 PRINT REGION TIME
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-347

6.5 Buildup Pressure Output Control (BUILDUP)
BUILDUP wl
time1 ... timen
comp1 ... compn
grad1 ... gradn
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which buildup data is specified (see

Section 1.5.2).
time Time in hours for shut in.
comp Total compressibility of fluids and formation near

the well, psi-1 (kPa-1). A value of zero causes the
compressibility to be computed internally. The
compressibility comp is given by
comp = cr + Soco + Sgcg + Swcw ,
where cr, co, cg, and cw are the compressibilities of

rock, oil, gas, and water, respectively, and So, Sg,
and Sw are oil, gas, and water saturations,
respectively.
grad Average gradient of fluids in the well measured in

the field, psi/ft (gm/cc). A value of zero causes the
gradient to be computed internally.
00 This option computes and writes to a formatted results file corrected

buildup pressures for wells. This information is written on Fortran unit 30.
The calculation of buildup pressure in multi-layered wells is based on a
development of the Peaceman equations. When a BUILDUP card appears
in a recurrent data group, the requested information will be output at the
time corresponding to the next TIME or DATE card only. Buildup pressure
is calculated for each perforated layer in requested wells at the shut in
time specified by the user. The number of time, comp and grad values
must equal the number of wells in the well list.
00 In field tests a single buildup pressure is measured for a well, not for each
perforation. Therefore, a single buildup pressure must be obtained from
the layer values. There is no unique weighting method to determine the
single buildup-pressure value. The weighting scheme adopted here is the
production-rate-weighted buildup pressure.
00 Note that the total compressibility and the density should be the estimated
values obtained in the field during the buildup test. Users should be
cautious in using the default values computed by the simulator.
6-348 Landmark - R2003.4

6.6 Write Files (WPLOT, WMAP, WMAPOLD, WREST, WFLUX,

WFILE, WCPLOT)
TIME
( freq )

writef TNEXT
OFF
00 writef can be one of the following:

WPLOT, WMAP, WMAPOLD, WREST, WFLUX, WFILE, WCPLOT
00 Definitions:
TIME Alpha label that causes the appropriate file or

record to be written each time a TIME or DATE card
is encountered. Default is not to write on the basis
of TIME or DATE cards.
TNEXT Alpha label that causes the appropriate file or

record to be written only the next time a TIME or
DATE card is encountered. Default is not to write
on the basis of the next TIME or DATE card.
OFF Alpha label that causes the appropriate file or

record to not be output. It is equivalent to
specifying a frequency of 99999.
freq A number that causes the appropriate file or record

to be written after every freq timesteps (each
timestep cut counts as one timestep). Default is
99999.
WPLOT The WPLOT card controls the writing of data to the

vdb file or to the plot file (FORTRAN Unit 11) that
can be used to plot the production/injection
performance of individual wells, well management
levels, regions, and the field. These plots are
generated by a plotting program that is separate
from VIP-EXECUTIVE. WPLOT can only be used
if a PLOT card was included in the utility data.
WMAP The WMAP card invokes the writing of array data

to the vdb file or to the map file (FORTRAN Unit
27). Maps of this array data are generated by a
program that is separate from VIP-EXECUTIVE.
WMAP can only be used if a MAP card was
included in the initialization data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-349

WMAPOLD The WMAPOLD card invokes the writing of

SIMOUT map files on FORTRAN Unit 9 (output of
selected array data). Maps of this array data are
generated by a program that is separate from VIP-
EXECUTIVE. WMAPOLD can only be used if a
MAPOLD card was included in the initialization
data.
WREST The WREST card controls the writing of restart

records on FORTRAN Unit 2. If no WREST cards
are used, no user-specified restart records are
written during the recurrent portion of the
simulation. A restart record is automatically written
after initialization.
WFLUX The WFLUX card controls the writing of a file, on

FORTRAN Unit 16, that contains boundary flux
data for input into a subsequent simulation model.
WFLUX can only be used if a FLUX card was
included in the initialization data.
WFILE The WFILE card controls the writing of a special

well file to FORTRAN Unit 71.
WCPLOT The WCPLOT card controls the writing of data to

the vdb file or to the cplot file (FORTRAN Unit 26)
that can be used to plot the production/injection
compositional performance of individual wells,
well management levels, regions, and the field.
These plots are generated by a plotting program
that is separate from VIP-EXECUTIVE. WCPLOT
can only be used if a CPLOT card was included in
the initialization data.
NOTE: At least one of the values, TIME, TNEXT, OFF, or freq, must
appear on the writef card. Either TIME or TNEXT may appear
with freq.
Files will not be saved unless the appropriate commands are added
to the job control stream. Information is only written out to the
appropriate file when one of the writef commands is encountered.
6-350 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Examples:
00 To write data out to the PLOT file at every TIME (or DATE card)
and every 30 timesteps:
00 WPLOT TIME 30
6.7 Save Temporary Restarts (WLASTR)
TIME
( freq )

WLASTR TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions: As defined for WREST (Section 6.6).
NOTE: The WLASTR option writes restart records according to the time or
frequency specified retaining only the last restart record written,
essentially to provide a recovery mechanism for jobs that terminate
abnormally due to time limits, etc. It supplements rather than
replaces the restart records written as a result of the WREST card(s).
At each time a restart record is written, if the previous restart

record was a temporary one (one written by a WLASTR card) it is
first removed before the current restart record is written.
Restart records written by a WLASTR card do not replace ones

written by WREST cards.
6.8 Write Fluid Tracking Data (WTRACK)
TIME
( freq )

WTRACK (INPLACE) TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions:
INPLACE Alpha label indicating that reservoir in-place

tracked fluid moles should also be written to the
file.
TIME Alpha label that causes a record to be written each

R2003.4 - Landmark 6-351

is not to write records on the basis of TIME or DATE

cards.
TNEXT Alpha label that causes a record to be written only

Default is not to write records on the basis of the
next TIME or DATE card.
OFF Alpha label that causes the record not to be output.

It is equivalent to specifying a frequency of 99999.
freq A number that causes records to be written after

every freq timesteps (each timestep cut counts as
one timestep). Default is 99999.
NOTE: The WTRACK card controls the writing of fluid tracking results
into a separate file. WTRACK can only be used if a TRACK
card was included in the initialization data.
At least one of the values, TIME, TNEXT, OFF, or freq, must

appear on the WTRACK card. Either TIME or TNEXT may appear
with freq.
Tracking records are written on FORTRAN Unit 17, but may not be
saved unless the appropriate commands are added to the job
control stream.
If no WTRACK cards are used, no tracking records are written.
6-352 Landmark - R2003.4

6.9 Print/Map Mole Fractions (OUTX, OUTY, OUTZ, OUTXT,

OUTYT, OUTZT, MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ, MAPXT, MAPYT,
MAPZT)
outf cmpid1 cmpid2 ... cmpidk
00 outf can be one of the following:

OUTX, OUTY, OUTZ, OUTXT, OUTYT, OUTZT
MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ, MAPXT, MAPYT, MAPZT
00 Definitions:
cmpid Alpha label identifying a component whose mole

fractions will be included in the array reports/map
file. Only those components named will be printed/
mapped.
OUTX Print liquid mole fractions.
OUTY Print vapor mole fractions.
OUTZ Print overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
OUTXT Print tracked liquid mole fractions.
OUTYT Print tracked vapor mole fractions.
OUTZT Print tracked overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
MAPX Map liquid mole fractions.
MAPY Map vapor mole fractions.
MAPZ Map overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
MAPXT Map tracked liquid mole fractions.
MAPYT Map tracked vapor mole fractions.
MAPZT Map tracked overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
NOTE: 1. If the user wishes to print/map arrays of mole fractions, they

must explicitly select the components to be output on one of the
above cards.
2. When the tracked mole fraction arrays are requested, the order
of printing is: all requested components for tracked fluid 1, all
requested components for tracked fluid 2, etc.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-353

3. In VIP-THERM, H2O may be specified for cmpid on the

OUTY, OUTYT, MAPY, or MAPYT cards for the water mole
fraction in the vapor phase.
6.10 Format of Mole Fraction Array Print (ALLCOMP)

00 The ALLCOMP card is used to specify how mole fraction arrays (selected
with OUTX, OUTY, OUTZ, OUTXT, OUTYT, OUTZT) are to be printed.
The default mode is to print each component of a mole fraction array
individually. When ALLCOMP is specified, all requested components of a
mole fraction array (e.g. liquid mole fraction) are printed in a vertical
column for each gridblock.
ALLCOMP ON
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that all requested

components of a mole fraction array are printed in a
vertical column for each gridblock. This is the
default if neither ON nor OFF is specified.
OFF Alpha label indicating that all requested

components of a mole fraction array are printed
individually. This is the default when no
ALLCOMP card is entered.
6.11 Tracked Water Type Fractions (OUTWT, MAPWT)
OUTWT tknamw1tknamw2...tknamwk
MAPWT tknamw1tknamw2...tknamwn
00 Definitions:
tknamw Alpha label identifying the tracked water type for

which the fractional saturations of that fluid will be
included in the array reports/map file. Only those
tracked water types named will be printed/
mapped.
6-354 Landmark - R2003.4

6.12 Specify Which Separator Batteries to Process (OUTSEP)

00 The user may control the amount of output produced by the program for
separator battery reports by specifying which batteries should be
processed. If no battery designation follows the OUTSEP label, no battery
report will be printed.

DEF
ibat idfbat
OUTSEP
ALL ALL
00 Definitions:
ibat List of user-defined separator batteries. No VIP-

CORE generated default separator batteries can be
specified here.
ALL Alpha label indicating that reports for all user-

defined separator batteries should be generated.
DEF Alpha label indicating that the remaining data on

the OUTSEP card apply to default separator
batteries.
idfbat List of default separator batteries. A value of -npvt,

where npvt is the number of a PVT table (VIP-
ENCORE) or npvt is 1 (VIP-COMP), will cause the
use of one of the default separator batteries defined
by VIP-CORE.
ALL Alpha label indicating that reports for all default

separator batteries should be generated.
NOTE: Each OUTSEP card supersedes and replaces the previous OUTSEP
card.
00 Example:
00 OUTSEP 1
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-355

6.13 Reservoir Region Separator Battery Assignment (REGSEP)

00 The REGSEP card is used to assign separator batteries to output regions
for surface volume calculations. If the number of separators is increased
for this run, then a REGSEP card will be required to handle region
assignment.
00 In order to calculate surface volumes to be included in region reports, VIP-

EXECUTIVE must have a separator battery assignment for each reservoir
region. The battery assignments are also needed if the arrays RS, GOR,
WCUT, OIP, GIP, FGIP, or OCIP are to be printed or mapped.
REGSEP ibat1...ibatnreg
00 Definitions:
ibat Separator battery number for each output region.

Alternatives include the battery number of a
separator input in the separator data (Surface
Separation Data), a value of -npvt which accesses a
default separator, and a value of 0:
ibati = nbat (input battery)

= -npvt (default separator)
= 0
A value of 0 will result in the default value -1 being

used for surface volume calculations in VIP-CORE,
and no surface volumes will be reported for that
region report in the simulation modules.
nreg Maximum output region number defined in the

IREGION data.
NOTE: REGSEP data is passed from VIP-CORE to the simulation module,

but under certain circumstances the value may be changed. If a
default separator battery was specified in VIP-CORE, and REGSEP
is not input in the simulation module, then the value from VIP-
CORE will be changed to 1 if Separator 1 has been input or -1 if
Separator 1 has not been input. If any other default separator is
desired for a region, then the REGSEP card must be specified in the
simulation module. To specify a default separator ibat should be
set to -npvt, where npvt is a PVT table number (VIP-ENCORE) or
npvt is 1 (VIP-COMP).
6-356 Landmark - R2003.4

6.14 Compute Potentials for Plot File (PLOTPTN)

00 The PLOTPTN card controls whether well and well management level
potential production and injection rates are computed for inclusion in the
plot file. If PLOTPTN ON has not been specified, the 5 potential rate
variables in the plot files will have value zero.
ON
PLOTPTN
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating potential production and

injection rates are to be included in the plot files.
OFF Alpha label indicating potential production and

injection rates are to show as zeroes in the plot files.
6.15 Printout Processed Well Cards (PRINTOUT)

00 The PRINTOUT card controls the printout of the processed well and table
data cards.
ON
PRINTOUT
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating all processed recurrent data

cards are to be printed. This is the default.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the printing of well and

tabular data will be suppressed.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-357

6.16 Logical Unit for Timestep Summary Output (IPRTSS)

00 The IPRTSS card is used to define the FORTRAN logical unit onto which
the end-of-run timestep summary output will be written. This summary
output is identical to the timestep summary in the main output file and is
controlled by the TSSUM and TSSDAT keywords on the OUTPUT card
and the TSSUM keyword on the PRINT card.
IPRTSS iunit
00 Definition:
iunit FORTRAN logical unit number for the timestep

summary report. Default is to not write this
summary to a file.
NOTE: The user should specify a unit number that is not used for another
file. It is suggested that unit 80 be used for the unit number.
6.17 Specify Wells Included in Well RFT Report (OUTRFT)

00 The OUTRFT card is used to specify the wells to be included in the well
RFT report (RFT or RFTFILE on the PRINT card).
OUTRFT wl
00 Definition:
wl List of wells for which an RFT report will be

generated.
NOTE: Each OUTRFT card supersedes and replaces the previous OUTRFT
card.
6-358 Landmark - R2003.4

6.18 Spreadsheet Files (SSSUM)

00 The SSSUM card is used to specify options and variables to appear in the
spreadsheet summary files. By specifying separate SSSUM cards, a
spreadsheet summary file may be obtained for each of the following: field,
area, flow station, gathering center, well, region. The FORTRAN units
used are, respectively, Unit 72, Unit 73, Unit 74, Unit 75, Unit 76, Unit 77.
All variables that are plotted can be written to be the spreadsheet
summary files. The frequency of the output is controlled by the SSSUM
parameter on the PRINT card.
00 The member number, time, and member name are automatically written
in the first three fields of each requested spreadsheet file.
00 A maximum of 33 variables may be written to any spreadsheet summary

file.
00 The optional SSSID card is used to specify an alphanumeric run

identification label, up to eight characters, which can be written to the
spreadsheet files as specified by the RUNID keyword. This label is useful
when spreadsheet data from different runs are combined in a single file by
the user. This option is only available in VIP-THERM.
(SSSID sssid)
FIELD
AREA
FLOSTA
SSSUM (TAB)(HEADER) (RUNID) varnm1 varnm2 ... varnmn
GATHER
WELL
REGION
00 Definitions:
Alpha label indicating the spreadsheet summary file to which the

subsequent data applies:
FIELD Field.
AREA Area.
WELL Well.
REGION Output region.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-359

TAB Alpha label indicating that the columns will be

separated by a tab character. Omission will result in
columns separated by a comma.
HEADER Alpha label indicating that a title line, column

header line, and a units line should be included in
the file at each time.
RUNID Alpha label indicating that the run identification

label specified on the SSSID card will be written as a
column in the spreadsheet file. Available only in
VIP-THERM.
varnm Alpha label specifying one or more of the following

variables:
The following may be used for any of the files:
DATE Calendar date.
TSNUM Timestep number.
QGP Gas production rate.
QOP Oil production rate.
QWP Water production rate.
QGI Gas injection rate.
QWI Water injection rate.
CGP Cumulative gas production.
COP Cumulative oil production.
CWP Cumulative water production.
CGI Cumulative gas injection.
CWI Cumulative water injection.
The following may be used for any file except

REGION:
GLG Gaslift gas injection rate.
CGLG Cumulative gaslift gas injection.
MGOR Marginal gas-oil ratio.
POTQGP Gas potential production rate.
6-360 Landmark - R2003.4

POTQOP Oil potential production rate.
POTQWP Water potential production rate.
POTQGI Gas potential injection rate.
POTQWI Water potential injection rate.
OGR Oil-gas ratio.
WGR Water-gas ratio.
WCUT Water cut.
GOR Gas-oil ratio.
WOR Water-oil ratio.
SAL Water salinity.
The following may be used for FIELD only:
PZ P/Z (Equal to P in VIP-THERM).
The following may be used for FIELD or REGION

only:
TPVP Total PV-weighted average pressure.
HCPVP Hydrocarbon PV-weighted average

pressure.
HCPVPD HCPV-weighted average pressure at

datum.
GIP Gas-in-place.
OIP Oil-in-place.
WIP Water-in-place.
OREC Percent oil recovery.
GREC Percent gas recovery.
AQNFLX Water influx from analytical aquifers.
The following may be used for WELL only:
PERF1P Gridblock pressure of first

perforation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-361

PAVE Mobility-weighted average well

pressure.
BHP Well bottomhole pressure.
THP Well tubinghead pressure.
DRDWNP Well average drawdown pressure.
BLDP Well buildup pressure.
ONTIME Ontime factor.
DAYSP Days well has produced.
DAYSI Days well has injected.
PLFS TSFM plant liquid flow stream.
CPLFS TSFM cumulative plant liquid flow

stream.
PRGAS TSFM plant residual gas.
CPRGAS TSFM cumulative plant residual gas.
EQWL TSFM equivalent total wellstream.
CEQWL TSFM cumulative equivalent total

wellstream.
GCNAME Name of gathering center to which

well belongs.
GCNUM Number of gathering center to which

well belongs.
The following may be used for WELL or GATHER

only:
FSNAME Name of the flow station to which

well/gathering center belongs.
FSNUM Number of the flow station to which

well/gathering center belongs.
The following may be used for WELL, GATHER, or

FLOSTA only:
ARNAME Name of area to which well/

gathering center/flow station
belongs.
6-362 Landmark - R2003.4

ARNUM Number of areas to which well/

gathering center/flow station
belongs.
The following may be used for GATHER, FLOSTA,

AREA, or FIELD only:
WELLS Number of active:
1. Total wells.
2. Producers.
3. Gaslift producers.
4. Water injectors.
5. Gas injectors.
The following may be used for FIELD or AREA

only:
GFO Gas field operations (single or

multiple contracts):
1. DCQ.
2. ACQ.
3. Potential gas production rate.
4. Gas sales rate.
5. Cumulative sales gas.
6. Number of cycles in first pass.
varnm Additional alpha labels specifying variables valid in

VIP-THERM only:
The following may be used for any of the files:
QEP Energy production rate.
QSTP Steam production rate.
QRLP Reservoir liquid production rate.
QEI Energy injection rate.
CEP Cumulative energy production.
CSTP Cumulative steam production.
CRLP Cumulative reservoir liquid

production.
CEI Cumulative energy injection.
The following may be used for FIELD or REGION

only:
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-363

EIP Energy in place.
STIP Steam in place.
QHL Heal loss rate.
CHL Cumulative heat loss.
PVSI Pore volumes steam injected.
PVOP Pore volumes oil produced.
FIOP Fraction of initial oil produced.
The following may be used for REGION only:
QRGP Reservoir gas production rate.
QROP Reservoir oil production rate.
QRWP Reservoir water production rate.
QRSP Reservoir steam production rate.
QRGI Reservoir gas injection rate.
QRWI Reservoir H2O injection rate.
CRGP Cumulative reservoir gas

production.
CROP Cumulative reservoir oil production.
CRWP Cumulative reservoir water

production.
CRSP Cumulative reservoir steam

production.
CRGI Cumulative reservoir gas injection.
CRWI Cumulative reservoir H2O injection.
QBGP Boundary reservoir gas outflow rate.
QBOP Boundary reservoir oil outflow rate.
QBWP Boundary reservoir water outflow

rate.
QBSP Boundary reservoir steam outflow

rate.
6-364 Landmark - R2003.4

QBEP Boundary energy outflow rate.
QBGI Boundary reservoir gas inflow rate.
QBOI Boundary reservoir oil inflow rate.
QBWI Boundary reservoir water inflow

rate.
QBSI Boundary reservoir steam inflow

rate.
QBEI Boundary Energy outflow rate.
CBGP Cumulative boundary reservoir gas

outflow.
CBOP Cumulative boundary reservoir oil

outflow.
CBWP Cumulative boundary reservoir

water outflow.
CBSP Cumulative boundary reservoir

steam outflow.
CBEP Cumulative boundary energy

outflow
CBGI Cumulative boundary reservoir gas

inflow.
CBOI Cumulative boundary reservoir oil

inflow.
CBWI Cumulative boundary reservoir

water inflow.
CBSI Cumulative boundary reservoir

steam inflow.
CBEI Cumulative boundary energy inflow.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-365

NOTE: 1. All of the alpha labels must appear on one SSSUM card. If
necessary the continuation character > can be used.
2. One and only one of the FIELD, AREA, FLOSTA, GATHER,

WELL, or REGION labels must be specified.
3. Except for TAB and HEADER, the order of the alpha labels is
the order the variables will appear in the file.
4. The member number, simulation time, and member name are

automatically written in the first three fields of the file.
5. Each SSSUM card for a specific level (FIELD, etc) supersedes

and replaces the previous SSSUM card for that level.
6. A FLOWS card must be input in the initialization utility data in

order to write the region boundary rates and cumulatives (QB*
and CB*) in VIP-THERM.
00 Example:
00 SSSUM WELL TAB HEADER DATE QOP BHP

SSSUM FIELD HEADER TAB DATE COP PZ
6.19 Well Average Pressure Calculation (OUTPAVG)

00 The OUTPAVG card is used to specify the method for computing the well
average pressure in the production/injection summaries and output to the
plot file. The choices are mobility-weighted datum pressure average or
one of several patterns.
OUTPAVG STD
or
OUTPAVG PATTERN (DATUM) iptn

(GRIDBLOCK)
or
OUTPAVG PATTERN (DATUM) (card 1)

(GRIDBLOCK)
iptn1 . . . iptnNZ (card 2)
00 Definitions:
STD Alpha label indicating that the mobility-weighted

datum pressure average is to be computed. This is
the default.
6-366 Landmark - R2003.4

PATTERN Alpha label indicating one of the possible patterns

is to be used to compute the well average pressure.
DATUM Alpha label indicating that the well average datum

pressure is to be computed. This is the default for a
pattern calculation.
GRIDBLOCK Alpha label indicating that the well average

gridblock pressure is to be computed.
iptn Pattern type:
1 Square pattern of size 1 gridblock by 1

gridblock
2 5-spot pattern
3 Square pattern of size 3 gridblocks by 3

gridblocks

gridblocks

gridblocks

gridblocks
0 Exclude this layer from the calculation.
NOTE: 1. In the second format, the iptn pattern will be used for each
block in the well.
2. Each OUTPAVG card supersedes and replaces the previous

OUTPAVG card.
3. All perforations are used in the calculation, including inative or

shut-in perforations.
6.20 Print Well Indices (PRWI)

00 The PRWI card causes an immediate printout of the well index for each
well.
PRWI
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-367

6.21 Print Well Properties Summary (PRWSTA)

00 The PRWSTA card causes an immediate printout of the well properties for
each well.
PRWSTA
6-368 Landmark - R2003.4

6.22 Track File Format (TFORM)

00 The TFORM card is used to control the format of fluid tracking results file,
the writing of which is controlled by the WTRACK card.
TFORM [FORM]
[BINARY]
00 Definitions:
TFORM Keyword indicating that the track file format is to

be specified. If the TFORM card is omitted,
formatted records are written to the track files (.trk
and .tps files).
FORM Keyword indicating that formatted records are to be

written to the track files.
BINARY Keyword indicating that binary records are to be

written to the track files.
NOTE: The TFORM card should appear only once (before the first DATE or
TIME card) in each restart run, and different formats may be
specified for successive restart runs. Since this information is stored
in the restart record, this card needs only appear once (at time zero)
if the same format is to be used throughout the entire simulation.
00 Examples:
00 C TO SPECIFY BINARY TRACK FILES

TFORM BINARY
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-369

6.23 Boundary Flux File Format (FXFORM)
FXFORM [FORM]
[BINARY]
00 Definitions:
FORM Alpha label indicating that a formatted flux file is to

be written or read-in. This is the default.
BINARY Alpha label indicating that a binary flux file is to be

written or read-in.
NOTE: The FXFORM card specifies either formatted or binary flux file is to
be written (in the output mode of the boundary flux option) or
read-in (input mode of the boundary flux option).
00 Examples:
C***** Boundary Flux File Format

FXFORM BINARY
6.24 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS)

00 The CROSS card causes arrays to be printed by cross-sections (vertical
planes), instead of by areal planes. This card is necessary only if the user
wishes to change the printout from what was used in VIP-CORE.
ON
CROSS
OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that arrays are to be printed

by cross-sections (vertical planes). This is the
default if neither ON nor OFF is specified.
OFF Alpha label indicating that arrays are to be printed

by areal planes.
6-370 Landmark - R2003.4

6.25 Grouping Wells (WLGRP)

00 The WLGRP card is used to define well groups which are used for
reporting purposes and/or for easily setting maximum well rates. The
well group report will be printed when the keyword WLGRP is included
on the PRINT card. The QMAXGR card (see following section) is used to
set the maximum rate for all wells in a group.
WLGRP grpnum (grpnam)

wl
00 Definitions:
grpnum Group number.
grpnam Group name of up to six (6) characters. The first

wl List of wells belonging to the group. If the group

number is equal to zero, then the well numbers
included in the well list are removed from all well
groups.
NOTE: Well groups can be formed or modified by means of new WLGRP

cards. At least one WLGRP card should be included for each group.
This card specifies the group number, the group name, and the list
of wells belonging to the group. Each well can belong to only one
group. If a well was included in one group and then it is included
in a second group, this well is automatically deleted from the first
group. If several WLGRP cards are included with the same group
number, then all wells specified in these cards will belong to one
group. To remove a well from the group, the number of this well
should be included in the WLGRP card with a zero group number.
00 Examples:
00 In this example, the names GROUP_1 and GROUP_2 are assigned

to Group 1 and Group 2. Initially Wells 25, 26, 29, 2, 6, and 12 are
included in Group 1 and Wells 27, 28, and 30 are included in Group
2. Then Well 29 is removed from Group 1, Well 31 is added to
Group 2, and Well 26 is moved from Group 1 to Group 2.
00 WLGRP 1 GROUP_1
25 26 29
WLGRP 1
2 6 12
WLGRP 2 GROUP_2
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-371

00 27 28 30
PRINT WLGRP TIME
...
...
...
DATE 1 7 1987
WLGRP 0
29
WLGRP 2
26, 31
6.26 Group Specification of Maximum Well Rates (QMAXGR)

00 The QMAXGR card used to set the maximum well rates for all wells in a
well group defined with the WLGRP card. The QMAX and QMAXGR
cards are order-dependent.
QMAXGR grp qmaxgr
00 Definitions:
00 grp Group name or group number.
qmaxgr Maximum well rate to assign to each of the wells in

the well group. For each well the unit of this rate
depends on the wells type. That is, whatever unit
would have applied on the QMAX card applies
here.
6.27 Plot File Well Specification (PLOTLIST)

00 The PLOTLIST card is used to specify which wells are to be included in
the well plot file and/or the well layer plot file.
WELL ON ALL
PLOTLIST
WLLYR O FF wl
00 Definitions:

applies to the well plot file.
WLLYR Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to the well layer plot file.
6-372 Landmark - R2003.4

ON Alpha label indicating that the specified wells are to

be included in the plot file.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the specified wells are to

be excluded from the plot file.
ALL Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to all wells.
wl List of wells to which the data on this card applies

NOTE: 1. If the PLOTLIST card is not entered, all wells are included in the
plot file.
2. To restrict the wells on the plot file, all wells must first be
excluded (OFF), then the desired wells included (ON).
00 Example:
00 PLOTLIST WELL OFF ALL

PLOTLIST WELL ON D*
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-373

6.28 Spreadsheet Well Specification (SPRLIST)

00 The SPRLIST card is used to specify which wells are to be included in the
well spreadsheet file.
ON ALL
SPRLIST WELL
O FF wl
00 Definitions:

applies to the well spreadsheet file.
ON Alpha label indicating that the specified wells are to

be included in the spreadsheet file.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the specified wells are to

be excluded from the spreadsheet file.
ALL Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to all wells.
wl List of wells to which the data on this card applies

(see section 1.5.2).
NOTE: 1. If the SPRLIST card is not entered, all wells are included in the
spreadsheet file.
2. To restrict the wells on the spreadsheet file, all wells must first
be excluded (OFF), then the desired wells included (ON).
00 Example:
00 SPRLIST WELL OFF ALL

SPRLIST WELL ON PROD*
6-374 Landmark - R2003.4

6.29 Results File Formats

00 The PLOT, CPLOT and MAP files written out by VIP-EXECUTIVE can be
post-processed by a variety of programs. To facilitate user access to these
files, the content and formats are described below. Each line corresponds
to a different record. The "Type" column specifies the variable type for
each field in the record. The "Format" column specifies the format used to
write the record to a formatted file.
00 The meanings of the symbols in the "Type" column are:
C*4 CHARACTER*4
C*6 CHARACTER*6
C*8 CHARACTER*8
C*20 CHARACTER*20
C*80 CHARACTER*80
I INTEGER
R REAL
6.29.1 Plot File Organization

Once, at top of file 00
Type Format Record
C*6 10A6 PLOT <FORM | BIN> 1.1.1 <simulator><simulator version> [DUAL]

C*20 2A20 <casename><case parent>
C*80 A80 <title1>
C*80 A80 <title2>
C*80 A80 <title3>
I 10I5 <# classes> <day> <month> <year> <nx> <ny> <nz> <# comps>
C*8 10A8 <class #1 name> <class #2 name> ...
I 10I5 <# variables in class #1> <# variables in class #2> ...
Loop for each class
C*4 18A4 TIME <variable #1 name> <variable #2 name> ...
end loop for class
Repeated for each requested time

Data for each class is output only if requested 00
Type Format Record
WELL Class
C*8 A8 WELL
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# wells> <max # wells> 1
Loop for each well
C*8 8A8 <well name> <well #> 0 <1st perf i><1st perf j><gc #><fs #><area #>
R 1P6E13.6 <variable #1 value> < variable #2 value> ...
end loop for well
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-375

WLLYR Class
C*8 A8 WLLYR
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# wells> <max # wells> <max # perfs>
Loop for each well
C*8 8A8 <well name><well #><# perfs><1st perf i><1st perf j><gc#><fs #><area #>
Loop for each perf
C*8 2A8 <perf gridblock #> <layer name>
R 1P6E13.6 <variable #1 value> <variable #2 value> ...
end loop for perf
end loop for well
GATHER Class
C*8 A8 GATHER
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# gathering centers> <max # gcs> 1
Loop for each gathering center
C*8 8A8 <gc name> <gc #> 0 0 0 <gc #> <fs #> <area #>
end loop for gathering center
FLOSTA Class
C*8 A8 FLOSTA
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# flow stations> <max # fss> 1
Loop for each flow station
C*8 8A8 <fs name> <fs #> 0 0 0 0 <fs #> <area #>
end loop for flow station
AREA Class
C*8 A8 AREA
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# areas> <max # areas> 1
Loop for each area
C*8 8A8 <area name> <area #> 0 0 0 0 0 <area #>
end loop for area
REGION Class
C*8 A8 REGION
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# regions> <max # regions> 1
Loop for each region
C*8 8A8 <region name> <region #> 0 0 0 0 0 0
end loop for region
FIELD Class
C*8 A8 FIELD
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> 1 1 1
C*8 8A8 FIELD 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
C*8 A8 STOP (only at end-of-file)
6-376 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: See the PLOT card in Utility Data for a list of valid Class names.
The current set of variable names can be obtained from the example
below.
Well Pressures written to the PLOT file depend on parameters set

during the run. By default, PTOP is the pressure of the top
perforated block, PAVE is a mobility weighted block pressure at
datum (mobility of the well production/injection phase) and BHP
is the bottomhole flowing pressure at datum (DRDN is (PAVE-
BHP)). The datum depth defaults to the depth of the first
equilibration region, but can be set with a BHP or THP card. These
pressures are modified by the OUTPAVG and BUILDUP cards. In
contrast, all layer pressures are at depth.
The variables beginning with the character "?" denote temporary

positions in the plot file. These may be used for future development
without changing the size of the plot records.
00 Examples:
00 Plot File - Based on "PLOT ALL FILE"

PLOT FORM 5.0.0 EXEC v1998r
TEST
VIP TEST MODEL
EXAMPLE FOR DOCUMENTATION PURPOSES
7 1 1 1992 18 6 3 3
WELL WLLYR GATHER FLOSTA AREA REGION FIELD
39 25 26 25 27 23 35
TIMEQGP QOP QWP QGI QWI CGP COP CWP CGI CWI PTOPPAVEBHP THP DRDNPBLDQGLG
CGLGDYSPDYSIMGORPLF CPLFPRG CPRGETW CETWPQGPPQOPPQWPPQGIPQWIOGR WGR ?TM1
?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
TIMEIX JY KZ QOP QGP QWP GOR WC PRESPDATBHP QGI QWI ROP RGP RWP RGI
RWI DTOPDBOTPLOSPWDPPLENPANVPANA
TIMEQGP QOP QWP QGI QWI CGP COP CWP CGI CWI CGV QGLGCGLGMGORPQGPPQOPPQWP
PQGIPQWIOGR WGR ?TM1?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
TIMEQGP QOP QWP QGI QWI CGP COP CWP CGI CWI QGLGCGLGMGORPQGPPQOPPQWPPQGI
PQWIOGR WGR ?TM1?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
TIMEQGP QOP QWP QGI QWI CGP COP CWP CGI CWI QGLGCGLGMGORPQGPPQOPPQWPPQGI
PQWIOGR WGR QSG CSG ?TM1?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
TIMECGP COP CWP CGI CWI PAVDPAVTPAVHGIP OIP WIP QOP QGP QWP QGI QWI OGR
WGR ?TM1?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
TIMEQGP QOP QWP QGI QWI CGP COP CWP CGI CWI PAVTPAVHGIP OIP WIP QGLGCGLG
MGORP/Z PQGPPQOPPQWPPQGIPQWIOGR WGR ORECGRECQSG CSG ?TM1?TM2?TM3?TM4?TM5
WELL
14.000 274.00 3.0000 20.000 1.0000
PRD 8 0 5 2 1 1 1
1.280376E+02 5.242931E+02 9.459076E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.521548E+04
1.439770E+05 2.142366E+04 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.724752E+03 2.693599E+03
2.453844E+03 0.000000E+00 2.397549E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
2.740000E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 4.094837E+03 7.387733E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
INJ1 1 0 3 3 1 1 1
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 5.495544E+02 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.422169E+05 2.819950E+03 2.750626E+03
2.837861E+03 0.000000E+00-8.723476E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 2.740000E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-377

0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

INJ6 6 0 3 3 1 1 1
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.594420E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 6.894230E+04 0.000000E+00 2.775718E+03 2.760035E+03
2.761008E+03 0.000000E+00-9.733106E-01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 2.740000E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
WLLYR
14.000 274.00 3.0000 20.000 100.00
INJ1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1
255 K3
3.000000E+00 3.000000E+00 3.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.819950E+03 2.750626E+03 2.907185E+03 0.000000E+00
5.495544E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 5.557241E+02
5.754000E+03 5.780000E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
INJ6 6 1 3 3 1 1 1
39 K1
3.000000E+00 3.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.775718E+03 2.760035E+03 2.776692E+03 2.594420E+02
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.778621E+02 0.000000E+00
5.700000E+03 5.727000E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
PRD 8 2 5 2 1 1 1
23 K1
5.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 2.913259E+02 7.329747E+01 2.062178E+01
2.515996E+02 6.610653E-02 2.724752E+03 2.686124E+03 2.492472E+03 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 3.322876E+02 0.000000E+00 2.085887E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5.700000E+03 5.733000E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
131 K2
5.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.329666E+02 5.474043E+01 7.396899E+01
2.349711E+02 2.409918E-01 2.754788E+03 2.703844E+03 2.504788E+03 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 2.639768E+02 0.000000E+00 7.481309E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5.733000E+03 5.766000E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
GATHER
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 1 1 1
1.943243E+03 7.093291E+03 1.114112E+03 2.594420E+02 3.353396E+03 5.335137E+05
1.943689E+06 2.220256E+05 6.894230E+04 8.946251E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 3.650234E+03 5.733261E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
FLOSTA
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1.943243E+03 7.093291E+03 1.114112E+03 2.594420E+02 3.353396E+03 5.335137E+05
1.943689E+06 2.220256E+05 6.894230E+04 8.946251E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
3.650234E+03 5.733261E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
AREA
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
1.943243E+03 7.093291E+03 1.114112E+03 2.594420E+02 3.353396E+03 5.335137E+05
1.943689E+06 2.220256E+05 6.894230E+04 8.946251E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
3.650234E+03 5.733261E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
REGION
14.000 274.00 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.332544E+05 1.944172E+06 2.220256E+05 6.894230E+04 8.946251E+05 2.651545E+03
2.661513E+03 2.658203E+03 1.711230E+07 6.371604E+07 3.296248E+07 7.094940E+03
1.942356E+03 1.114112E+03 2.594420E+02 3.353396E+03 3.116205E+00 3.051307E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
FIELD
14.000 274.00 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000
6-378 Landmark - R2003.4

FIELD 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1.943243E+03 7.093291E+03 1.114112E+03 2.594420E+02 3.353396E+03 5.335137E+05
1.943689E+06 2.220256E+05 6.894230E+04 8.946251E+05 2.661513E+03 2.658203E+03
1.711230E+07 6.371604E+07 3.296248E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
2.860177E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
3.650234E+03 5.733261E+01 3.116205E+00 3.051307E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
STOP
6.29.2 Compositional Plot File Organization

Once, at top of file 00
Type Format Record
C*6 10A6 PLOT <FORM | BIN> 5.0.0 <simulator><simulator version> [DUAL]

C*20 2A20 <casename><case parent>
C*80 A80 <title1>
C*80 A80 <title2>
C*80 A80 <title3>
I 10I5 <# classes> <day> <month> <year> <nx> <ny> <nz> <# comps>
C*8 10A8 <class #1 name> <class #2 name> ...
I 10I5 <# variables in class #1> <# variables in class #2> ...
Loop for each class
C*4 18A4 TIME <variable #1 name> <variable #2 name> ...
end loop for class
Repeated for each requested time

Data for each class is output only if requested 00
Type Format Record
WELL Class
C*8 A8 WELL
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# wells> <max # wells> 1
Loop for each well
C*8 8A8 <well name> <well #> 0 <1st perf i><1st perf j><gc #><fs #><area #>
R 1P6E13.6 <variable #1 value> < variable #2 value> ...
end loop for well
WLLYR Class
C*8 A8 WLLYR
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# wells> <max # wells> <max # perfs>
Loop for each well
C*8 8A8 <well name><well #><# perfs><1st perf i><1st perf j><gc#><fs #><area #>
Loop for each perf
C*8 2A8 <perf gridblock #> <layer name>
end loop for perf
end loop for well
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-379

GATHER Class
C*8 A8 GATHER
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# gathering centers> <max # gcs> 1
C*8 8A8 <gc name> <gc #> 0 0 0 <gc #> <fs #> <area #>
end loop for gathering center
FLOSTA Class
C*8 A8 FLOSTA
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# flow stations> <max # fss> 1
Loop for each flow station
C*8 8A8 <fs name> <fs #> 0 0 0 0 <fs #> <area #>
end loop for flow station
AREA Class
C*8 A8 AREA
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# areas> <max # areas> 1
Loop for each area
C*8 8A8 <area name> <area #> 0 0 0 0 0 <area #>
end loop for area
REGION Class
C*8 A8 REGION
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> <# regions> <max # regions> 1
Loop for each region
C*8 8A8 <region name> <region #> 0 0 0 0 0 0
end loop for region
FIELD Class
C*8 A8 FIELD
R 5G15.5 <timestep #> <time> 1 1 1
C*8 8A8 FIELD 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
6-380 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: See the CPLOT card in uility data for a list of valid Class names.
The current set of variable names can be obtained from the example
below.
00 Examples:
00 Cplot File - Based on "CPLOT ALL FILE"

PLOT FORM 5.0.0 EXEC v1998r
TEST
VIP TEST MODEL
7 1 1 1992 18 6 3 3
WELL WLLYR GATHER FLOSTA AREA REGION FIELD
21 14 21 21 21 21 21
TIMEQ1P Q2P Q3P C1P C2P C3P X1P X2P X3P Y1P Y2P Y3P Q1I Q2I Q3I C1I C2I
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
TIMEQ1P Q2P Q3P X1P X2P X3P Y1P Y2P Y3P Q1I Q2I Q3I QCDPYCDP
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
C3I QCDPYCDPCCDP
WELL
14.000 274.00 3.0000 20.000 1.0000
PRD 8 0 5 2 1 1 1
3.405392E+02 2.014404E+02 6.630428E+02 9.365748E+04 5.532673E+04 1.820668E+05
1.112212E-02 2.304266E-01 7.584513E-01 9.841481E-01 3.693783E-03 1.215812E-02
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
INJ1 1 0 3 3 1 1 1
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
INJ6 6 0 3 3 1 1 1
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
WLLYR
14.000 274.00 2.0000 20.000 100.00
INJ6 6 1 3 3 1 1 1
39 K1
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
PRD 8 2 5 2 1 1 1
23 K1
1.947711E+02 1.122778E+02 3.679337E+02 1.112236E-02 2.312086E-01 7.576690E-01
9.840874E-01 3.720505E-03 1.219207E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
131 K2
1.457680E+02 8.916255E+01 2.951092E+02 1.112182E-02 2.294493E-01 7.594289E-01
9.842236E-01 3.660599E-03 1.211581E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
GATHER
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 1 1 1
5.145818E+03 2.819694E+03 8.822700E+03 1.412639E+06 7.732170E+05 2.416716E+06
1.112383E-02 2.394468E-01 7.494294E-01 9.829879E-01 4.237121E-03 1.277496E-02
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-381

0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FLOSTA
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 1 1
5.145818E+03 2.819694E+03 8.822700E+03 1.412639E+06 7.732170E+05 2.416716E+06
1.112383E-02 2.394468E-01 7.494294E-01 9.829879E-01 4.237121E-03 1.277496E-02
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
AREA
14.000 274.00 1.0000 5.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
5.145818E+03 2.819694E+03 8.822700E+03 1.412639E+06 7.732170E+05 2.416716E+06
1.112383E-02 2.394468E-01 7.494294E-01 9.829879E-01 4.237121E-03 1.277496E-02
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
REGION
14.000 274.00 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.145818E+03 2.819694E+03 8.822700E+03 9.051556E+03 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.112475E-02 2.394976E-01 7.493776E-01 9.834299E-01 4.013149E-03 1.255697E-02
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
FIELD
14.000 274.00 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000
FIELD 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.145818E+03 2.819694E+03 8.822700E+03 1.412639E+06 7.732170E+05 2.416716E+06
1.112383E-02 2.394468E-01 7.494294E-01 9.829879E-01 4.237121E-03 1.277496E-02
5.450015E+02 1.021878E+02 3.406259E+01 1.448249E+05 2.715467E+04 9.051556E+03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
STOP
6.29.3 Map File Organization

VIP-CORE 00
Type Format Record
C*6 10A6 MAP <FORM | BIN> 1.0.1 <simulator><simulator version> [DUAL]

C*80 A80 <title1>
C*80 A80 <title2>
C*80 A80 <title3>
I 8I5 2 <day><month><year><nx><ny><nz><# comps>
R G15.5 <inner radius for radial model; 0. otherwise>
C*8 2A8 INIT RECURR
I 2I5 <# of INIT arrays> <# of RECURR arrays>
C*4 18A4 <INIT array #1 name><INIT array #2 name> ...
C*4 18A4 <RECURR array #1 name><RECURR array #2 name> ...
C*8 10A8 <component #1 name> <component #2 name> ...
C*8 A8 INIT
R 3G15.5 0 0.0 <# of INIT arrays>
Loop for each INIT array
R 1P6E13.6 <array value i> , i = 1, ..., number of gridblocks
end loop for INIT array
C*8 A8 STOP
6-382 Landmark - R2003.4

Simulation Modules - Repeated for each requested time 00
Type Format Record
C*8 A8 RECURR
R 3G15.5 <timestep #><time><# of RECURR arrays>
Loop for each RECURR array
R 1P6E13.6 <array value i>, i = 1, ..., number of gridblocks
end loop for RECURR array
C*8 A8 WLOC
R 3G15.5 <timestep #><time><number of perforations>
Loop for each perforation
I 3I5 <well number><perforation status><gridblock number>
end loop for perforation
NOTE: Perforation Status values are as follows

0Shut in
1Gas Injector
2Water Injector
3Solvent Injector
4Producer
00 Examples:
00 CORE Map File Format -Based on "MAPOLD P SG SW FORM"

MAP FORM 1.0.1 CORE v1998r
VIP TEST MODEL
2 1 1 1992 18 6 3 3
.00000E+00
INIT RECURR
54 3
DX DY DZ DEP DZN POR KX KY KZ ISATIPVTIEQUTMX TMY TMZ ?FX ?FY DXB
DYB DZB DZBNMDEPPVR TXR TYR TZR MLTXMLTYMLTZP SG SW SWM PSATSO SOM
PDATX1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 X3 Y3 Z3 PV TX TY TZ API KH GOC WOC
P SG SW
LIGHT HEAVY1 HEAVY2
INIT
.00000E+00 .00000E+00 54.000
6.220000E+02 6.220000E+02 6.220000E+02 6.220000E+02 6.220000E+02
6.220000E+02
.....
.....
STOP
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-383

00 EXEC Map File Format - Based on "MAPOLD P SG SW FORM"

RECURR
.00000E+00 .00000E+00 3.0000
2.952821E+03 2.952821E+03 2.952821E+03 2.953362E+03 2.953904E+03 2.953904E+03
2.951562E+03 2.940778E+03 2.933616E+03 2.926477E+03 2.924697E+03 2.922384E+03
.....
.....
WLOC
.00000E+00 .00000E+00 .00000E+00
RECURR
14.000 274.00 3.0000
2.760746E+03 2.757746E+03 2.762810E+03 2.761857E+03 2.756173E+03 2.758267E+03
2.753419E+03 2.737406E+03 2.730219E+03 2.720897E+03 2.715025E+03 2.713665E+03
.....
.....
WLOC
14.000 274.00 4.0000
8 4 23
8 4 131
1 2 255
6 1 39
STOP
6-384 Landmark - R2003.4

6.29.4 Hydrocarbon Track File Organization

00 The hydrocarbon track file is written by the simulation modules.
Information in a track file is organized in the form of records. There are
three types of records: the header record, the production time record, and
the in-place time record. The frequency of output of these records is
controlled through use of the WTRACK card.
Header Record - Written only once at time = 0. 00
Type Format Record
I 4I10 <# tracked fluids> <max # wells> <max # gcs> <# comps>
C*80 A80 <title1> <title2> <title3>
C*6 10A6 <tracked fluid #1 name> <tracked fluid #2 name> ...
I 3I5 <day> <month> <year>
R*8,I F12.3,I10 0.0 <number of gridblocks>
R*8 8E15.7 <flag array value i>, i = 1, ..., number of gridblocks
R*8 8E15.7 <initial gas saturation value i>, i = 1, ..., number of gridblocks
In-Place Time Record - Repeated for each requested time 00
Type Format Record
C*8 A8 IN PLACE
R*8,I F12.3,I10 <time> <number of gridblocks>
Loop for each gridblock
C*6,I A6,I5 BLOCK <gridblock number>
Loop for each tracked fluid
R*8 8E15.7 <tracked gas mole fraction value i>, i = 1, ..., # components
End loop for tracked fluid
R*8 8E15.7 <gas mole fraction value i>, i = 1, ..., # components
R*8 8E15.7 <tracked total mole fraction value i>, i = 1, ..., # components
R*8 8E15.7 <total mole fraction value i>, i = 1, ..., # components
End loop for gridblock
R*8 8E15.7 <gas saturation value i>, i = 1, ..., number of gridblocks
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-385

Well Production Time Record - Repeat for each requested time

Output if NOWELL has not been specified with TRACK card. 00
Type Format Record
C*8 A8 WELLS
R*8,I F12.3,I10 <time> <# wells>
Loop for each well
C*4,I A4,I5 WELL <well #>
End loop for well
Production Time Record - Repeated for each requested time 00
Type Format Record
C*8 A8 GATHER
R*8,I F12.3,I10 <time> <# gcs>
C*4,I A4,I5 GC <gc #>
End loop for gathering center
6-386 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
7
00000Simulator Control
7.1 Timestep Control

00 VIP-EXECUTIVE moves the reservoir model through a succession of
timesteps. The interval of time between states is called the timestep.
Within each timestep the simulator performs outer iterations, that is,
Newton iterations, to resolve the non-linear changes in pressures and
saturations which may occur over the timestep. In most cases inner
iterations are performed within each outer iteration to iteratively solve
the linearized system of equations for the changes in reservoir variables
between successive Newton steps. (If the direct linear solver is used, then
no inner iterations are required.)
00 VIP-EXECUTIVE can select its own timesteps. They are constrained only
by (1) the maximum changes in reservoir variables specified on the DT
card, or (2) by gridblock throughput limitations when the IMPES
formulation is used (see IMPSTAB card). Timestep size is altered
automatically to hit exactly the times or dates on TIME or DATE cards.
Under automatic timestep control maximum pressure, saturations, vapor
fraction, and total composition changes sometimes are exceeded slightly
to save the work required to repeat the timestep.
00 The number of outer iterations (Newton steps) performed during a

timestep is governed by the ITNLIM, TOLD, and TOLR cards. The TOLD
and TOLR cards establish two sets of criteria for convergence of a
timestep. The TOLD card specifies one set of convergence criteria based on
the maximum changes in the primary unknowns over the last Newton
step. Convergence of the outer iterations over a timestep is achieved when
none of the changes in P, S, (Sw), V (Sg), or Z which occurred
during the previous iteration are larger in absolute value than the
corresponding tolerances established on the TOLD card. A second set of
tests for convergence is defined by the TOLR cards. When the material
balance error for each phase in each gridblock is less than the tolerances
specified on the TOLR card, the conservation equations are assumed to
have been solved and the timestep is concluded. The TOLD tests are
independent of the TOLR tests. Either set of convergence tests can signal
convergence of the timestep even if the other has not yet been satisfied.
The ITNLIM card specifies the minimum and maximum number of outer
iterations to be used for a timestep, as well as bounding limits for the
maximum changes in the primary unknowns for any Newton step. Should
any of these limits be exceeded, VIP-EXECUTIVE will damp the entire
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-387

Simulator Control VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
solution vector, such that the reduced changes now honor the maximum
changes specified on the DT card, and then perform another outer
iteration. For this reason, an excessively small value for any of the
iteration limits slows or even prevents convergence. Failure to converge
the outer iterations of a timestep within itnmax outer iterations will
normally cause the timestep to be repeated. A timestep will also be
repeated if the tolerances on the DT card are exceeded, if the maximum
changes are being checked (see the optional second line following the DT
card below).
7.1.1 Timestep Controls (DT)

00 The DT card defines the timestep size and the maximum changes allowed
during the timestep.
DT dt dtmin dtmax dpmax (dtmpmx) dsmax dvmax dzmax (dtswmx)(card 1)
BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH

DTONLY
MAXONLY
DTONLY
DTONLY DTONLY DTONLY
MAXONLY
DTONLY

MAXONLY
NONE p NONE T MAXONLY
NONE
MAXONLY
NONE v
MAXONLY
NONE z NONE
s tsw
(card 2)
00 Definitions:
dt Timestep size, days. A negative value triggers the

use of automatic timestep control. Here, the next
timestep is +dt in length; thereafter, the program
chooses timestep size within user constraints. Omit
the remaining variables on this card if dt is positive.
dtmin Minimum timestep size, days. Default is 1 day.
dtmax Maximum timestep size, days. Default is 100 days.
dpmax Maximum pressure change allowed during a time-

step, psia (kPa). Default is 300 psia for the IMPES
formulation; 500 psia for the implicit formulation.
dtmpmx Maximum temperature change allowed during a

timestep, F(C). Default is 100F. Enter only in VIP-
THERM.
dsmax Maximum saturation change allowed during a

timestep using the IMPES formulation. Maximum
change in water saturation allowed during a
timestep using the implicit formulation. Default is
0.03 for the IMPES formulation; 0.1 for the implicit
formulation.
7-388 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Simulator Control
dvmax Maximum change in vapor fraction allowed during

a timestep using the IMPES formulation. Maximum
change in gas saturation allowed during a timestep
using the implicit formulation. Default is 0.04 for
the IMPES formulation; 0.1 for the implicit
formulation.
dzmax Maximum change in total mole fraction allowed

during a timestep. Default is 0.03 for the IMPES
formulation; 0.1 for the implicit formulation.
dtswmx Maximum tracked water saturation change allowed

during a timestep. Default is 0.1.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the appropriate

maximum will be used for both checking the
maximum change over the timestep and timestep
size calculation. This is the default for a problem
using the IMPES formulation.
DTONLY Alpha label indicating that the appropriate

maximum will be used for timestep size calculation
only. The maximum change check will be ignored.
This is the default for a problem using the implicit
formulation.
MAXONLY Alpha label indicating that the appropriate

maximum will be used for checking the maximum
change over the timestep only. The timestep size
calculation will ignore this constraint.
NONE Alpha label indicating that the appropriate

maximum will be ignored completely.
NOTE: 1. The DT card may contain dt only, all values through dpmax,
all values through dzmax, or all values. No other combinations
are allowed.
2. A value of zero may be input for dt. At time = 0, this causes the
first timestep to be of size dtmin and subsequent timestep
sizes to be under automatic timestep control. At time > 0, the
timestep size calculation remains under automatic timestep
control, allowing the user to change the other parameters
without having to set the timestep size.
3. Timestep size is altered automatically to coincide exactly to the

times or dates specified on TIME and DATE cards, even when
fixed timesteps are used.
4. Under automatic timestep control the maximum pressure,

saturation, vapor fraction (gas saturation) and composition
changes specified on the DT card are sometimes exceeded by a
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-389

small amount to save the work required to repeat the timestep.

If they are exceeded by a large amount (MAXOVR card), the
timestep will be repeated. The maximum number of timesteps
cuts is three by default, but it may be respecified using the
TCUT card.
5. Card 2 is an optional card that allows the user to control when

the maximum constraints will be used. The data is order
dependent; e.g., if an alpha is needed for dvmax, then one
must also be specified for dpmax and dsmax.
6. The optional last parameter can be specified to enable timestep

control as a function of the maximum changes in the saturation
of any of the tracked water types. This parameter will be used
in the timestep size calculation only, and will not result in a
timestep cut-back if its value is exceeded during a timestep.
7.1.2 Timestep Size After Rate Changes (DTQMAX)

00 The DTQMAX card defines the timestep size to use for the first timestep
following well rate changes (QMAX/QMULT cards).
DTQMAX dtqmax
00 Definition:
dtqmax Timestep size to be used for the first timestep

following the input of rate changes (QMAX/
QMULT cards), days.
NOTE: 1. The value of dtqmax will apply only if automatic timestep

control is on.
2. If no dtqmax value is input, or if a value less than or equal to 0

is specified, automatic timestep size selection will be used.
3. If a DT card is entered at the same time as rate changes, the

value of dt on that card will be honored.
7-390 Landmark - R2003.4

7.1.3 Outer Iteration Controls (ITNLIM)
ITNLIM itnmin itnmax (dplim) (dtlim) (dswlim) (dvlim) (dzlim)
00 Definitions:
itnmin Minimum number of outer iterations per timestep

required before convergence is allowed. Default
is 1.
itnmax Maximum number of outer iterations per timestep.

Failure to converge will normally cause the
timestep to be repeated. Default is 10.
dplim Maximum pressure change allowed during any

single outer iteration, psia (kPa). Default is 450 psia
for the IMPES formulation; 750 psia for the implicit
formulation.
dtlim Maximum temperature change allowed during any

single outer iteration, F(C). Default is 150F. Enter
only in VIP-THERM.
dswlim Maximum change in water saturation allowed

during any single outer iteration. Default is 0.045
for the IMPES formulation; 0.15 for the implicit
formulation.
dvlim Maximum change in vapor fraction allowed during

any single outer iteration using the IMPES
formulation. Maximum change in gas saturation
allowed during any single outer iteration using the
implicit formulation. Default is 0.06 for the IMPES
formulation; 0.15 for the implicit formulation.
dzlim Maximum change in total composition allowed

during any single outer iteration using the IMPES
formulation. Maximum change in primary phase
composition allowed during any single outer
iteration using the implicit formulation. Default is
0.045 for the IMPES formulation; 0.15 for the
implicit formulation.
NOTE: For each of the maximum changes on this card, if the value is not
entered but the corresponding maximum change is entered on the
DT card, then the default value is set to the product of the value on
the DT card and MAXOVR (MAXOVR card).
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-391

7.1.4 Control Convergence Failures and Timestep Cuts (TCUT)

00 The TCUT card is used to control simulator treatment of convergence
failures and timestep cuts.
TCUT
nfails
( nctol )
OFF
00 Definitions:
nfails Maximum number of convergence failures

permitted during a single timestep. Default is 3.
OFF Alpha label that causes the simulator to ignore

convergence failures.
nctol Maximum number of timestep cuts for any reason

permitted during a single timestep. Default is 3.
NOTE: 1. After each convergence failure the timestep size is cut by a

factor of 2 and the timestep is retried, if OFF was not specified.
2. After nctol-1 timestep cuts in a single timestep, the timestep

size is set equal to dtmin (see DT card).
3. If a convergence failure occurs for a timestep size of dtmin, an

additional attempt is made using a timestep size of 0.1*dtmin.
4. If more than nfails convergence failures (or possibly nfails+1;

see note 3) or more than nctol timestep cuts occur during a
single timestep, the run is terminated and a restart record is
written at the end of the last successful timestep.
5. The keyword OFF causes the simulator to ignore convergence

failures in determining the acceptability of a timestep. The
result of the timestep will be accepted (subject to the tolerances
on the DT card) without regard to the inadequate closure of the
material balance equations. This will frequently lead to poor
material balances in the model.
6. If it was not already printed, an iteration summary will be

printed for a timestep that has a convergence failure unless the
CNVFLOFF keyword has been specified on the OUTPUT card.
00 Example:
00 TCUT 10 10
7-392 Landmark - R2003.4

7.1.5 Control Treatment of IMPES Stability (IMPSTAB)

00 The IMPSTAB card is used to control simulator treatment of IMPES
stability restrictions. By default, the simulator calculates the maximum
timestep size for which IMPES is a stable formulation (based on
volumetric and molar throughput) and forces the timestep to be no larger
than this value.
ststar
IMPSTAB (V98) ( stslim ) ( mxstsc ) ( FLOWIN )
OFF
( NOCUTS )
ON
00 Definitions:
V98 Alpha label that causes the version 98 algorithm to

be used.
ststar Fraction of the maximum stable IMPES timestep to

use as the target for each calculation of timestep
size. Default is .9.
OFF Alpha label that causes the simulator to ignore

IMPES stability restrictions.
ON Alpha label that causes the simulator to take IMPES

stability restrictions into account using the most
recent values of ststar, stslim, and mxstsc.
stslim Largest fraction of the maximum stable IMPES

timestep at which the simulator is permitted to run.
Default is 1.0.
NOCUTS Alpha label that causes the simulator to ignore

violations of the stslim limit.
mxstsc Maximum number of timestep reductions due to

violation of the stslim limit on a single timestep.
Default is 3.
FLOWIN Alpha label indicating that flow both into and out of
blocks is to be checked for stability. Default is to
only check the flow out of blocks.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-393

NOTE: 1. Unless OFF is specified, for each timestep the timestep size will
be set equal to ststar times the maximum stable IMPES
timestep, provided that this timestep would satisfy the
constraints imposed by the DT card.
2. Unless OFF or NOCUTS is specified, the simulator will enforce

the stslim limit. If the chosen timestep exceeds stslim times
the maximum stable IMPES timestep, it is immediately
reduced to the target value. This reduction is not counted as a
timestep cut.
3. After mxstsc-1 timestep reductions on a single timestep, the

timestep size is set equal to dtmin (see DT card).
4. If more than mxstsc reductions are required on a single

timestep due to the stslim limit, the run is terminated and a
restart record is written at the end of the last successful
timestep.
5. The maximum stable IMPES timestep is constrained by the

total volumetric throughput (based on a Buckley-Leverett-type
analysis) and by the possible composition changes for each
phase in each gridblock. Complete details are available in a
separate document. Inactive blocks are ignored.
6. The parameters are order-dependent and must be specified if

subsequent parameters are input.
7.1.6 Maximum Variable Change Overshoot (MAXOVR)

00 The MAXOVR card is used to control when a timestep cut occurs due to
maximum variable changes over a timestep. If any variable changes
relative to its maximum allowed (from the DT card) more than the factor
specified on this card, a timestep cut will occur. Does not aply to VIP-
THERM.
MAXOVR maxovr
00 Definition:
maxovr Maximum variable change factor above which a

timestep cut will occur. Default is 1.5.
7-394 Landmark - R2003.4

7.1.7 Convergence Tolerance on Unknowns (TOLD)
TOLD tolp (tolt) tols tolv tolz
00 Definitions:
tolp Convergence tolerance used to test the pressure

changes occurring in each gridblock during each
Newton (outer) iteration, psia (kPa). Default is 0.1
psia.
tolt Convergence tolerance used to test the changes in

temperature occurring in each gridblock during
each outer iteration, F(C). Default is 100F. Enter
only in VIP-THERM.
tols Convergence tolerance used to test the changes in

water saturation occurring in each gridblock during
each outer iteration. Default is 0.0001.
tolv Convergence tolerance used to test the changes in

vapor fraction (IMPES) or gas saturation (implicit)
occurring in each gridblock during each outer
iteration. Default is 0.0001.
tolz Convergence tolerance used to test the changes in

total composition (IMPES) or primary phase
composition (implicit) occurring in each gridblock
during each outer iteration. Default is 0.0001.
NOTE: 1. Convergence is achieved when none of the pressure,

saturation, vapor fraction (gas saturation), or composition
changes occurring over the previous iteration are larger in
absolute value than the corresponding tolerances.
2. The TOLD tests are independent of the TOLR tests. If either set
of convergence tests is satisfied no further outer iterations are
performed and the timestep is concluded.
3. A negative value for a tolerance causes that variable to be

ignored in the convergence check.
4. A zero value for any of the tolerances forces non-convergence

based on maximum changes.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-395

7.1.8 Convergence Tolerance on Residuals (TOLR)

00 The TOLR card is used to define a set of convergence tolerances based on
how well the conservation equations are resolved. Separate tolerances are
specified for the water material balance equation and for the sum of the
hydrocarbon material balance equations, and they can be in terms of
relative reduction or absolute values. For the relative reductions, the
values are relative to the largest residuals encountered during the first
itnmax/2 outer iterations, which is normally the residuals at the start of
the first iteration. If relative reductions are being used and the maximum
residual is less than 1E-4, the relative reduction for that constituent will
not be required.
TOLR tolrw tolhc (tole)

( ABSTOL ) ( ABSRES ) (SUM) (MAX)
( RELTOL ) ( RELRES )
00 Definitions:
tolrw Convergence tolerance used to test the water

"residual". This tolerance measures how well the
water material balance equation for each gridblock
has been solved. Default is 0.001.
tolhc Convergence tolerance used to test the hydrocarbon

"residual". This tolerance measures how well the
hydrocarbon material balance equations for each
gridblock have been solved. Default is 0.001.
tole Convergence tolerance used to test the energy

balance residual. This tolerance measures how
well the energy balance equations for each
gridblock have been solved. Default is 0.001. Enter
only in VIP-THERM.
ABSTOL Alpha label indicating that the water and

hydrocarbon residuals are to be checked directly
against tolrw and tolhc, respectively. This is the
default in VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE if the TOLR
card is input but neither ABSTOL nor RELTOL are
specified.
RELTOL Alpha label indicating that the water and

hydrocarbon residuals must be decreased from the
values at the beginning of the timestep by at least
the factors tolrw and tolhc, respectively. This is the
default in VIP-THERM, and this is the default in
VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE if no TOLR card is
input.
7-396 Landmark - R2003.4

ABSRES Alpha label indicating that the residuals to be

checked are calculated simply as the maximum
residuals over all gridblocks. This is the default.
RELRES Alpha label indicating that the residuals to be

checked are calculated as the maximum over all
gridblocks of the water residual divided by the
water volume (tolrw), the hydrocarbon residual
divided by the number of hydrocarbon moles
(tolhc), and, in VIP-THERM, the energy residual
divided by the total energy (tole).
SUM Alpha label indicating that convergence is to be

achieved if the sum over all gridblocks of the water,
hydrocarbon, and energy residuals (absolute) are
reduced below the tolerances as defined by the
ABSTOL/RELTOL settings. This is the default in
VIP-THERM.
MAX Alpha label, valid only in VIP-THERM, indicating

that only the maximum residuals over all
gridblocks are to be checked, as is the default in
VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE.
NOTE: 1. When the residual error in each material balance equation in

each gridblock (or over all gridblocks, for the SUM option)
satisfies the appropriate tolerance, the equations are assumed
to have been solved and the timestep is concluded.
2. The TOLR tests are independent of the TOLD tests. If either set
of convergence tests is satisfied, no further outer iterations are
performed and the timestep is concluded.
3. For the combination of ABSTOL and ABSRES, the units of

tolrw and tolhc are STB/D (STCM/D) and lb-moles/D (lb-
moles/D), respectively. In VIP-THERM, the unit of tole is Btu/
D (kj/D).
4. For fluid tracking cases, the recommended tolerance type is

ABSTOL RELRES.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-397

7.1.9 Saturation Convergence Tolerance for OPTMBL and VOLBAL

(TOLSCN)
TOLSCN errsat
00 Definition:
errsat Convergence tolerance used to test the saturation

constraint equation. Default is 0.005.
NOTE: When using the OPTMBL option or the VOLBAL option, errsat is
used to test for convergence of the saturation constraint equation.
7.1.10 Well Convergence Tolerance for OPTMBL and VOLBAL (TOLWCN)
TOLWCN errwel
00 Definition:
errwel Convergence tolerance used to test the well

constraint equation. Default is 0.00001 for OPTMBL
and 0.01 for VOLBAL.
NOTE: When using the OPTMBL option or the VOLBAL option, errwel is
used to test for convergence of the well constraint equation.
7.1.11 Maximum Allowable Material Balance Error (ABORT)

00 The ABORT card defines the maximum allowable material balance error.
When this is reached, the program automatically terminates. This
automatic termination control is activated only by data entry.
ABORT ew ehc ee
00 Definitions:
ew Maximum allowed water material balance error

before the program terminates.
ehc Maximum allowed hydrocarbon material balance

error before the program terminates.
7-398 Landmark - R2003.4

ee Maximum allowed energy balance error before the

program terminates. Enter only in VIP-THERM.
NOTE: 1. Both values ew and ehc must be included on the card in the
above order. A zero entry is ignored. An ee value is also
required for VIP-THERM.
2. The program compares the normalized cumulative balance

error to these constraints at the end of each timestep.
00 Example:
00 ABORT 0.001 0.001
7.1.12 Minimum BHP Damping Factor (CBHPMN)

00 The CBHPMN card is used to set the minimum BHP damping factor. A
value of 1.0 will cause the CHKBHP subroutine to be ignored. Allowed
values are 0 cbhpmn 1.0.
CBHPMN cbhpmn
00 Definitions
cbhpmn Minimum BHP damping factor. Default is 0.05.
7.1.13 Table Extrapolation Control (CHKTAB)
PVT
BHP
CHKTAB (nex)
ALL
NONE
00 Definitions:
PVT Alpha label that allows the simulator to extrapolate

the PVT/K-value table during look-ups.
BHP Alpha label that allows the simulator to extrapolate

the BHP table during look-ups.
ALL Alpha label that allows the simulator to extrapolate

both the PVT/K-value and BHP tables during look-
ups. This is the default.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-399

NONE Alpha label that causes the simulator to stop rather

than extrapolate outside the table boundaries.
nex Number of table extrapolations allowed before run

is terminated. Default is 0.
00 The CHKTAB card is used to control the action taken when table look-ups
require extrapolation outside the range of the defined data. This is
generally not encouraged and can lead to convergence problems. By
default, extrapolation warning messages are printed in the output file,
along with the offending values. If the NONE option is specified then the
model will write a restart record at the end of the last acceptable timestep
and the run will be terminated. The PVT, BHP and ALL options will write
warning messages until nex extrapolations have been performed, then the
run will be terminated (as above). A value of zero for nex will suppress
run termination. Tables checked for extrapolation include the black-oil
PVT/K-value tables (end of timestep only) and the wellbore hydraulics
(BHPTAB tables (every occurrence)).
7-400 Landmark - R2003.4

7.2 Matrix Solution Options

00 For each outer iteration, VIP-EXECUTIVE must solve one or more large
linear systems of equations. This step is usually the most expensive
activity performed during an outer iteration. The choice of matrix solver
can have a very large impact on the overall cost of the simulation. VIP-
EXECUTIVE offers both direct and iterative matrix solvers for this task.
00 Direct Solver
GAUSS Gaussian elimination with the D4 ordering of

unknowns.
00 Iterative Solvers
BLITZ Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual

Method (Reference 5).
EXCEL Generalized Incomplete Factorization

Preconditioning.
00 A matrix solver should probably be specified at the beginning of every

simulation run, but it may be defaulted. At time = 0, the default is BLITZ
for single grid runs and CBLITZ for multigrid runs. At time > 0 the matrix
solver choice and parameters are retrieved from the restart file.
00 EXCEL and BLITZ are available for both the IMPES and fully implicit
formulation options. With certain restrictions, BLITZ and EXCEL can be
invoked for reservoir models that use either the FAULT option or the
PINCHOUT option. Each of these options generates nonstandard
connections between gridblocks.
00 A connection is standard when a gridblock, identified by the coordinates

(i, j, k), connects to an adjoining gridblock with coordinates of one of the
forms:
00 (i-1, j, k)
(i+1, j, k)
(i, j-1, k)
(i, j+1, k)
(i, j, k-1)
(i, j, k+1)
00 A nonstandard connection is called logically vertical when the connection

exists between gridblock (i, j, k) and one of the gridblocks:
00 (i-1, j, *)
(i+1, j, *)
(i, j-1, *)
(i, j+1, *)
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-401

00 where * denotes any value less than or equal to NZ other than k. A

nonstandard connection to any other gridblock is called logically
nonvertical.
7.2.1 Gaussian Elimination (GAUSS)

00 Invokes Gaussian elimination.
GAUSS
NOTE: 1. Use of Gaussian elimination maximizes the probability of

successful convergence, but it also tends to increase computer
time and storage requirements.
2. This option does not allow for faults.
7.2.2 Iterative Solver (EXCEL)

00 EXCEL is an iterative solver, available for both the IMPES and fully
implicit options. It will handle all types of nonstandard connections,
including logically nonvertical ones. For an explanation of this method,
see Reference 4.
EXCEL
( ITER ) (ilu) (north) (rtol) (nit)
( NOITER )
00 Definitions:
ITER Alpha label indicating that an EXCEL iteration

summary should be printed.
NOITER Alpha label indicating that an EXCEL iteration

summary should not be printed. This is the default.
ilu Incomplete factorization level in EXCEL. Default is

0.
north Number of orthogonalizations used in EXCEL.

Minimum value is 4, maximum value is 20. Default
is 10.
rtol Tolerance for convergence of EXCEL. Default is

0.001.
7-402 Landmark - R2003.4

nit Maximum number of iterations allowed in EXCEL.

Minimum value is 5. Default is 25.
NOTE: The ITER/NOITER label is optional and may be omitted. The other
parameters are order-dependent and must be specified if
subsequent parameters are input.
7.2.3 Iterative Solver (BLITZ)

00 BLITZ is an iterative solver, available for both the fully implicit and IMPES
options. For an explanation of this method, see Reference 5.
BLITZ param1 . . . paramn (card 1)

value1 . . . valuen (card 2)
00 Definitions:
ITER A BLITZ iteration summary should be printed. No

entry should be made on card 2 corresponding to
this entry.
NOITER A BLITZ iteration summary should not be printed.

This is the default. No entry should be made on
card 2 corresponding to this entry.
NORTH Maximum number of orthogonalizations for the

generalized conjugate residual method in BLITZ.
Default is 10.
RTOL Norm (EUCLIDEAN) residual reduction ratio

convergence criterion in BLITZ. Default is .005.
NIT Maximum number of iterations allowed in BLITZ.

Default is 20.
JLUN Preconditioning option in BLITZ for multi-variable

equations (IMPLICIT):
0 = Reduced system/diagonal scaling.

1 = Reduced system/ILU(0).
2 = Line Gauss-Seidel.
3 = Modified Nested Factorization, Option 1.
4 = Diagonal scaling.
5 = MVP default, Option 1.
6 = MVP, Option 2
Default is 1 without faults and 2 with faults.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-403

JLU1 Preconditioning option in BLITZ for single-variable

equations (IMPES or CPR):
-1 = D4 Gauss (direct solution).

0 = Reduced system/diagonal scaling.
1 = Reduced system/ILU(0).
2 = Line Gauss-Seidel.
6 = MVP, Options .
7 = MVP, Option 2.
If the reservoir model does not have faults, default

is 1 for IMPES and 3-D constrained pressure
residual problems and is -1 for 2-D constrained
pressure residual problems. With faults, the default
is 3.
PTOL Residual norm reduction ratio convergence

criterion for pressure solution (for implicit
formulation with jcor=1). Default is .005.
JCOR Constraint option associated with the pressure

solution (available with implicit formulation only if
jcpr=1; always available with IMPES formulation):
0 = no constraints.
1 = use line constraints.
Default is 1.
JCPR Constrained pressure residual method option

(implicit formulation only):
0 = no pressure predictor step.

1 = use pressure predictor step.
Default is 1.
JOPTN Ordering option for line constraints for multi-

variable equations (IMPLICIT):
0 = Automatic determination.
3-D Problems:
1 = XYZ 3 = XZY 5 = YZX
2 = YXZ 4 = ZXY 6 = ZYX
2-D Problems:
1 = XY or XZ
2 = YX or ZX
7-404 Landmark - R2003.4

Default is 0 for unfaulted problems. With faults,

default is 2 for 2-D problems, 4 for 3-D problems
with NY NX, and 6 otherwise.
JOPT1 Ordering option for line constraints for single-

variable equations (IMPES or CPR):
0 = Automatic
3-D Problems:
1 = XYZ 3 = XZY 5 = YZX
2 = YXZ 4 = ZXY 6 = ZYX
2-D Problems:
1 = XY or XZ
2 = YX or ZX
Defaults are the same as joptn.
JGAUS Solution method for line constraints when jcor=1:
0 = Iterative solution
1 = Direct solution
Default is 0 for 3-D problems. Must be 1 for 2-D
problems.
ADJTOL Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm

with default values for TOLMN, TOLMX, TOLST and
TOLEX. No entry should be made on card 2
corresponding to this entry.
TOLMN Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the minimum value of linear tolerance to be
used throughout the simulation. Default is RTOL so that,
if RTOL is defaulted, then TOLMN defaults to 5.E-03 but,
if RTOL is specified, then TOLMN is set to the specified
RTOL value. TOLMN must range between 0.0 and 1.0.
TOLMX Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the maximum value of linear tolerance to be
used throughout the simulation. Default is 0.5. TOLMX
must range between 0.0 and 1.0.
TOLST Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the value of linear tolerance to be used in the
first Newton step of each timestep. Default is
max(TOLMX, 5 * RTOL). TOLST must be less than
TOLMX and greater than or equal to 0.0.
TOLEX Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the value of the exponent in the power law used
to control the reduction of the linear solver tolerance as
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-405

the Newton iteration nears convergence. Default is 3.0.

TOLEX must be nonnegative.
NOTE: A less storage intensive algorithm may be requested by specifying

a negative value for NORTH. For example, to specify six
orthogonalizations with this algorithm, use NORTH=-6. This
algorithm will cause an increased amount of execution time,
approximately equal to an extra iteration.
00 Examples
00 BLITZ ITER
00 BLITZ ITER NIT TOLST JLUN

15 0.3 3
00 BLITZ ADJTOL PTOL RTOL
00 1.E-5 1.E-4
7.2.4 Bad Solution Indicator (SLVCUT)

00 The SLVCUT card is used to activate the option to have the solver return a
bad solution indicator when convergence seems to be failing or very slow.
In this case, a convergence failure is assumed and the timestep will be
repeated, potentially saving a large number of iterations.
ON
SLVCUT (itn)
O FF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the timestep will be

repeated when the solver returns a bad solution
indicator after Newton iteration itn. This is the
default if the card is entered without specifying ON
or OFF.
OFF Alpha label indicating that the option is off. This is

the default if the SLVCUT card is not entered.
itn Newton iteration after which the bad solution

indicator would be returned. Default is 1.
7-406 Landmark - R2003.4

7.3 Implicit Well Options
7.3.1 Implicit Well Calculations in IMPES Grids (IMPWEL)

00 The IMPWEL card is used to specify the level of implicitness in the well
rate equations to be used for wells within IMPES grids. The default is
OFF, which uses the standard IMPES formulation for the wells, with the
rates implicit in pressure, only. If the feature is set to ON, the well rate
equations will be implicit in saturations, also. This requires additional
work in reducing the possible well constraint equations, but in most cases,
it will result in larger, stable timestep sizes for runs involving IMPES
grids.
ON
IMPWEL
O FF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that well constraint

equations are to be set up and that these equations
are to be implicit in both pressure and relative
permeabilities.
OFF Alpha label indicating that well constraint

equations are to be set up and that these equations
are to be implicit in pressure only. This is the
default.
NOTE: 1. The implicit well option may not be used with the following
options:
VE
CO2 in water
2. If IMPWEL is used in conjunction with OPTMBL and if any

FRES or FSTD reinjection wells are active, it is recommended to
also set ITNSTQ to 1 iteration, in order to reduce the number of
outer iterations that might result when the production rates are
updated. The well convergence tolerance, TOLWCN, applies to
both production and injection wells
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-407

7.4 Interactive Suspend Option

00 The INTERACTIVE card allows the user to suspend execution at the
beginning of the current timestep. Execution will resume when the
program detects the existence of a file named
vip_interactive_resume in the directory in which the program is
running. The content of the file does not matter, only its existence.
00 Optionally, through the FILE keyword on the INTERACTIVE card, a file

may be specified that contains recurrent data to be read immediately upon
resumption of execution. If any errors are detected in the data in this file,
or if the file does not exist at the time execution is resumed, execution will
go back into suspend mode.
00 The default is for suspension to occur at the beginning of every timestep

once the option has been turned on. The BATCH keyword on the
INTERACTIVE card instructs the program to only suspend at the
beginning of this timestep. Normal execution will resume after this one
suspension.
00 The BATCH card causes the interactive suspend option to be immediately

turned off. This card would be input in the file designated by FILE on the
INTERACTIVE card or possibly in the original dataset at a future TIME or
DATE card.
00 Two files are created in the running directory by this option. The file
named vip_interactive_status is created at the time of the
suspension. It contains the current time-of-day and current date. It will
also indicate if any errors were found in the specified data file. These
errors are written to a file named vip_interactive_errors.
00 Note that the entire block of data that contains the INTERACTIVE card is
read before execution is suspended. The only data that will be read when
execution is resumed is the data contained in the file designated by FILE
on the INTERACTIVE card.
00 It is important to remember that the three files

vip_interactive_status, vip_interactive_resume, and
vip_interactive_errors exist only in the directory in which the
program is running. They will not be in the working directory from which
a remote-execution job was submitted.
7-408 Landmark - R2003.4

7.4.1 Interactive Card (INTERACTIVE)
INTERACTIVE (BATCH) (FILE filenm)
00 Definitions:
INTERACTIVE Alpha label indicating that the interactive suspend

option is on.
BATCH Alpha label indicating that the execution should

suspend only at the beginning of this timestep.
Normal execution resumes after this one
suspension. The default is to suspend execution at
the beginning of each timestep.
FILE Alpha label indicating that a file containing

recurrent data is being specified that should be read
when execution is resumed.
filenm The pathname to the file from which data should be

read.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-409

7.4.2 BATCH Card (BATCH)
BATCH
00 Definition:
BATCH Alpha label indicating that the interactive suspend

option is to be immediately turned off.
00 Examples
00 Run starts at 1/1/2000. Suspend execution after each of first 2 years. Enter
new data each time.
00

START

DATE 1 1 2001
INTERACTIVE BATCH FILE /home/user/data

DATE 1 6 2001

00 DATE 1 1 2002
INTERACTIVE BATCH FILE /home/user/data

00
7-410 Landmark - R2003.4

7.5 Interactive Recurrent Data Changes

00 Changes to the recurrent data can be made while the simulation is in
progress.
1. The user needs the process identification (pid) of the run so as to be

able to send a signal to the process. The pid can be obtained by issuing
the unix ps command on the machine that is executing the
simulation. The pid is also written to Fortran Unit 15 which is referred
to as the timestep summary file elsewhere. The user can type the unix
head command on the timestep summary file and get the pid from
the first line of the file.
2. The user then sends the unix hangup signal to the process by the
following unix command.
kill -HUP pid
Once the simulator receives the hangup signal it will continue

executing the current timestep, then searches the recurrent data file for
the last DATE (TIME) line read, writes relevant information to the
output (Fortran Unit 6) file, and suspends itself.
3. The user should then edit the output file, or use the unix tail
command to read the program messages and find which lines of the
recurrent data file may be changed. In general any line following and
including the last line read may be changed, while none of the
preceding lines should be changed.
4. When the user is finished with the data changes, the simulation can be
continued by sending the unix continue signal to the process.
kill -CONT pid
5. The user should check the output file to see if the data changes have
been accepted and that the run is progressing.
NOTE: The hangup signal may be used repeatedly during a run. Recurrent
data changes are not required to continue a run.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-411

7-412 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
8
00000Miscellaneous Options
8.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (VIP-COMP)
8.1.1 Invoking the Gibbs Algorithm (GIBBS)
GIBBS (tcrit) (maxitr) (tskip) (tpbyp) (txbyp) (tfbyp) (itngbs)
00 Definitions:
tcrit Tolerance value in the test for the critical condition.

Default is 0.15.
maxitr Maximum number of iterations allowed in the

Gibbs energy minimization process. Default is 30.
tskip Tolerance value in the test to skip the phase

equilibrium calculations for two-phase blocks.
Default is 0.05.
tpbyp Tolerance value for block pressure change, psi

(kPa). Default is 1 psi.
txbyp Tolerance value for composition change. Default is

0.01.
tfbyp Tolerance value for the stability function. Default is

0.015.
itngbs Maximum number of outer iterations that phase

stability test is performed on for single-phase
hydrocarbon gridblocks. Default is 5.
00 This card invokes the phase stability test and Gibbs energy minimization
algorithm for phase equilibrium calculations. The GIBBS card
automatically activates the feature which identifies gridblocks near the
critical point and allows large changes of oil saturation, gas saturation,
and vapor fraction in these blocks during simulation. All parameters on
the card are optional, but they are order dependent and must be specified
through the last value required. Parameters not specified will be set equal
to their defaults. PHFLAG on the OUTPUT card will print the phase
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-413

Miscellaneous Options VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
equilibrium condition in each gridblock for the IMPES formulation. Codes

are as follows:
0. Two phase block.
1. Single-phase block. The fluid is gas.
1.1 Single-phase block. The fluid is gas and is

determined to be far from the two-phase region.
1.5 Single-phase block. The fluid is supercritical and is

far from the critical point.
2. Single-phase block. The fluid is oil.
2.1 Single-phase block. The fluid is oil and is

determined to be far from the two-phase region.
-3. Two-phase block. The fluid is near the critical point

at the end of the timestep.
-3.5 Two-phase block. The fluid is near the critical point

at the beginning of the timestep.
-1. Single-phase block. The fluid is supercritical. The

fluid is near the critical point at the end of the
timestep.
-1.25 Single-phase block. The fluid is supercritical. The

fluid is near the critical point at the beginning of the
timestep.
-1.5 Single-phase block. The fluid is gas and is near the

critical point.
-2.5 Single-phase block. The fluid is oil and is near the

critical point.
-1.75 Single-phase block. The fluid is gas. The fluid has

changed phase during the timestep.
-2.75 Single-phase block. The fluid is oil. The fluid has

changed phase during the timestep.
00 For a simulation run starting at time = 0 and the GIBBS card was input in
VIP-CORE, the GIBBS option will automatically be on unless a GIBOFF
card is specified in the initial set of recurrent data. The default values
noted above will be used if no GIBBS card is input.
8-414 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Miscellaneous Options
8.1.2 Turning Off the Gibbs Algorithm (GIBOFF)
GIBOFF
00 The GIBOFF card is used to turn off the Gibbs energy minimization
algorithm from this timestep onward. The Gibbs algorithm may only be
reinvoked by respecifying the GIBBS card.
8.2 Successive Substitution Flash Data (VIP-COMP)
8.2.1 Definition of Flash Calculation Method (FLASH)

00 The FLASH card allows the user to define the flash calculation method
and maximum allowable iterations for reservoir and surface flashes. The
two available methods are accelerated successive substitution and
Newton-Raphson with successive substitution preconditioning. The
default method for reservoir flashes is accelerated successive substitution.
The default method for surface flashes is Newton-Raphson.
RES
FLASH maxss maxnr (ACC)
SURF
00 Definitions:
maxss Maximum number of successive substitution

iterations allowed for a flash calculation. Default is
5 for flashes to surface conditions and 20 for flashes
to reservoir conditions.
maxnr Maximum number of Newton-Raphson iterations

allowed for a flash calculation. Default is 10 for
flashes to surface conditions and 0 for flashes to
reservoir conditions.
RES Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to flashes to reservoir conditions.
SURF Alpha label indicating that the data on this card

applies to flashes to surface conditions.
ACC Alpha label indicating that accelerated successive

substitution flash calculations will be performed.
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-415

NOTE: 1. One and only one of the RES or SURF labels must be specified.
There is no default. Separate FLASH cards can be input for RES
and SURF.
2. If a FLASH card with the RES option is not input, then ACC
(accelerated successive substitution) is the default. If a FLASH
card with the SURF option is not input, accelerated successive
substitution calculations are not performed. When a FLASH
card is input, ACC must be specified to invoke the option.
8.2.2 Control of Flash Calculations (KMAX)

00 VIP-EXECUTIVE allows the input of data which controls the use of the
accelerated successive substitution flash calculation. By default, phase
behavior calculations are imbedded in the Newton-Raphson mass balance
calculations. Only when a block becomes two-phase, and a flash
calculation is to be performed, is the accelerated successive substitution
preconditioning used. However, for difficult fluids near their critical point,
it may be advantageous to provide a more robust flash treatment. The data
cards described below should be entered only for fluids that have shown
some difficulty in phase behavior convergence. The use of this data may
significantly affect computation time.
PSAT
KMAX KMAX2 KAC KAC2
NOPSAT (SS) (EST) (card 1)
kmax kmax2 kac kac2 (card 2)
00 Definitions:
KMAX Alpha label for maximum iterations during

preconditioning for gridblocks becoming two-
phase.
KMAX2 Alpha label for maximum iterations during

preconditioning for mass balance calculations.
KAC Alpha label for maximum acceleration steps to be

performed during preconditioning for gridblocks
becoming two-phase.
KAC2 Alpha label for maximum acceleration steps to be

performed during preconditioning for mass balance
calculations.
PSAT Alpha label indicating that the saturation pressure

calculation will be performed for all single phase
blocks. This is the default.
8-416 Landmark - R2003.4

NOPSAT Alpha label indicating that the saturation pressure

calculation will be bypassed for blocks that have
previously failed the saturation pressure
calculation.
SS Alpha label indicating that phase equilibrium

calculations in the mass balance calculation should
be bypassed. This option should be used only for
near-critical fluids that have not converged without
this option.
EST Alpha label indicating that the flash calculation

should use estimates of initial K-values from a
correlation instead of from current phase
compositions at the beginning of phase behavior
calculations. This option should be used only for
near-critical fluids which have difficulty
converging.
kmax Maximum number of iterations during

phase. If X is entered for this field, the default value
is 50. If this card is not entered, the default value is
15.
kmax2 Maximum number of iterations during

preconditioning for mass balance calculations. If X
is entered for this field, the default value is 50. If this
card is not entered, the default value is 0.
kac Maximum number of acceleration steps during

phase. If X is entered for this field, the default value
is 10. If this card is not entered, the default value is
2.
kac2 Maximum number of acceleration steps during

preconditioning for mass balance calculations. If X
is entered for this field, the default value is 10. If this
card is not entered, the default value is 1.
00 Examples:
00 (1) KMAX KMAX2 KAC KAC2

X X X X
00 is equivalent to
00 KMAX KMAX2 KAC KAC2

50 50 10 10
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-417

00 (2) Omitting the data cards from input is equivalent to:
00 KMAX KMAX2 KAC KAC2

15 0 2 1
NOTE: Any occurrence of this data supersedes previous occurrences of this

data.
8.3 Gas Percolation Algorithm (GASPERC) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
OFF
GASPERC
ON
00 Definitions:
OFF Alpha label that causes the gas percolation

algorithm to not be used. This is the default if the
card is not input.
ON Alpha label that causes the gas percolation

algorithm to be used.
8.4 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRMON) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
00 The gas remobilization option models the remobilization of trapped gas
resulting from gas expansion during pressure blowdown. The option may
be turned on any time during the simulation. To invoke this option, gas
remobilization tables must be input in the initialization module input data
set (see Section 4.3.9, Gas Remobilization Option, of the VIP-CORE
Reference Manual).
GASRMON grmdsw
00 Definitions:
GASRMON Alpha label indicating that the gas remobilization

option is invoked at the time specified in the
preceding TIME/DATE card. This option may only
be invoked once in a simulation run and may not be
turned off after it is invoked.
8-418 Landmark - R2003.4

grmdsw Incremental water saturation increase (from the

gridblock historic minimum water saturation) as a
fraction of total pore volume beyond which a
gridblock may be considered as a gas expansion
gridblock and hence is subject to remobilization
calculation. The default value for grmdsw is 0.02.
NOTE: A gridblock is subject to remobilization calculation only if all of the

following conditions are met at the time this option is invoked.
1. The water saturation must be greater than the historical

minimum water saturation (Swmin) plus the user-controlled
incremental saturation (grmdsw), i.e., Sw > Swmin + grmdsw.
2. The gas saturation must be less than or equal to the trapped gas
saturation (Sgtr,m) corresponding to the gridblock historical
maximum gas saturation (Sgmax,m), i.e., Sg Sgtr,m(Sgmax,m).
3. The gridblock historical maximum gas saturation must be

greater than its critical gas saturation, i.e., Sgmax,m > Sgc,m.
00 Example:
00 TIME 3650.
C
C Turn on Gas Remobilization Option
C
GASRMON 0.05
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-419

8.5 Modified Lands Constant for Hysteresis (MODLAND)

00 The MODLAND card is used to specify the form of Lands constant to use
for both gas phase and oil phase hysteresis in calculating the trapped
saturations.

MODLAND ON

OFF
00 Definitions:
ON Alpha label indicating that the modified Lands

constant is to be used. This is the default if neither
ON nor OFF is specified.
1 1
C = --------------------------- ---------------------------
S nwr S nwc S nwi S nwc
OFF Alpha label indicating that the original Lands

constant is to be used:
1 1
C = ---------- ----------
S nwr S nwi
This is the default if the MODLAND card is not

specified.
NOTE: Snwr= residual non-wetting phase saturation.

Snwi= maximum historical non-wetting phase
saturation.
Snwc= critical non-wetting phase saturation.
8-420 Landmark - R2003.4

8.6 Modifying VIP-CORE Array Data

00 OVER and VOVER cards may be used to modify certain gridblock arrays
that are read or computed in VIP-CORE. The OVER card is used to apply a
constant arithmetic operation to a portion of the grid system. The VOVER
card modifies the specified array data with an individual value for each
changed gridblock.
8.6.1 Override Modification (OVER)

00 The OVER card is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to a
portion of the grid system. Only one title card is required, but the data
cards may be repeated as necessary. The parentheses indicate optional
values. They are not part of the data. Array names are shown in
parentheses since any combination of the arrays can appear on the title
card. Do not use parentheses during input. The array names can appear in
any order. The order of #vs on the data cards corresponds to the order of
the array names. Although several array names can appear on the OVER
card, it is generally less confusing to have "sets" of OVER cards, with each
set modifying only one array.
TX TY
OVER (ITRAN) (ISAT) (ISATI)
TR TTHETA (TZ)(TKWEXP)(card 1)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (#v) (card 2)

(Repeat card 2 as necessary)
00 Definitions:
OVER Alpha label indicating that changes are to be made

to the specified arrays:


capillary pressure table pointers
for hysteresis.
ITRAN Transmissibility region identifier.
TX(TR) X(R) direction transmissibilities.
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-421

TY(TTHETA) Y(Theta) direction

transmissibilities.
TZ Z direction transmissibilities.
TKWEXP Fractional flow exponent for

extraneous tracked water types.
00 Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, K in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements lying
in the portion of the grid defined by:
00 i1 i2
j1 J j2
k1 K k2
# An operator that describes how the array is to be

modified. Any of the following symbols may be
used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal
LE values larger than v will be set equal to v
GE values smaller than v will be set equal to v
There are no spaces between the operator and the

value, #v. except when # is LE or GE.
v The value to be applied to the indicated portion of

the corresponding array by using the specified
operation.
8.6.2 Override Modification, VIP-DUAL (OVER)

00 The following are additional arrays available when the DUAL option is
invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the OVER
card.
TXF TYF
OVER (ITRANF) (ISATF)(ISATIF)
TRF TTHETF (TZF) (TEX)(card 1)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (card 2)

(Repeat card 2 as necessary)
00 Definition:
8-422 Landmark - R2003.4


ISATF Fracture relative permeability/

ISATIF Fracture imbibition relative

permeability/capillary pressure
table pointers for hysteresis.
ITRANF Fracture transmissibility region

identifier.
TXF (TRF) X(R)-direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TYF(TTHETF) Y(Theta)-direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TZF Z-direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TEX Exchange transmissibilities.
8.6.3 Individual Value Override Modification (VOVER)

00 The VOVER card modifies the specified array data with an individual
value for each changed gridblock. A minimum of two cards must follow
the VOVER card. The first contains the locations describing the gridblocks
to be changed. The second card contains the altered values for those
gridblocks. A new VOVER card and its corresponding data cards are read
for each different portion of the grid system being altered.
VOVER array (card 1)

i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op) (card 2)
values as necessary (card 3)
00 Definitions:
array One of the following array names to be altered:
ITRAN Transmissibility region identifier.


capillary pressure table pointers
for hysteresis.
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-423

TX(TR) X(R) direction transmissibilities.
TY(TTHETA) Y(Theta) direction

transmissibilities.
TZ Z direction transmissibilities.
TKWEXP Fractional flow exponent for

extraneous tracked water types.
00 Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, K in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements lying
in the portion of the grid defined by:
00 i1 i2
j1 J j2
k1 K k2
op an optional keyword that defines the operation to

apply to the array. Any of the following labels may
be used:
ADD Add.
SUB Subtract.
DIV Divide.
MULT Multiply.
EQ Equal. This is the default.
00 Enough values must be read to replace all array elements in the

designated portion of the grid. The number of values required is:
00 (k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 + 1) * (i2 - i1 + 1) .
00 The order of replacement is by x-direction (r-direction) rows. All rows

for the first xy (r) plane are entered in order of increasing J index,
followed by the remaining planes in order of increasing K index.
NOTE: Only one array can be changed with each VOVER card.
8-424 Landmark - R2003.4

8.6.4 Individual Value Override Modification, VIP-DUAL (VOVER)

00 The following are additional arrays available when the DUAL option is
invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the
VOVER card.

i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op) (card 2)
00 Definitions:
array One of the following array names to be altered:
ISATF Fracture relative permeability/

ISATIF Fracture imbibition relative

permeability/capillary pressure
table pointers for hysteresis.
ITRANF Fracture transmissibility region

identifier.
TXF(TRF) X(R) direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TYF(TTHETF) Y(Theta) direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TZF Z direction fracture

transmissibilities.
TEX Exchange transmissibilities.
8.6.5 Modifying Fault Connection Transmissibilities (FTRANS)

00 The FTRANS card may be used to modify the transmissibilities across
arbitrary connections between gridblocks. No new fault connections may
be established. The data must specify a VIP-CORE generated fault
connection or a standard connection. If a standard connection is specified,
the regular transmissibility array will be changed (this could also have
been accomplished using OVER/VOVER).
FTRANS (card 1)
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t tt (card 2)
(repeat as necessary) (card 3)
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-425

00 Definitions:
i1 X(R) direction index for the block on the "left" of the

fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the "left" of

the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the block on the "left" of the

fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the block on the "right" of

the fault.
j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the "right"

of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the block on the "right" of the

fault.
t Transmissibility for the connection across the fault.

This replaces any other transmissibility defined for
the pair of blocks. Units for t are the same as those
for transmissibilities read for the standard
transmissibility arrays.
tt Thermal transmissibility for the connection across

the fault. This replaces any other transmissibility
defined for the pair of blocks. Units for tt are the
same as those for thermal transmissibilities read for
the standard arrays. Enter in VIP-THERM only
(required).
8.6.6 Modifying Fault Connection Transmissibilities, VIP-DUAL

(FTRANF)
00 The FTRANF card may be used to modify the transmissibilities across
arbitrary connections between fracture gridblocks. No new fault
connections may be established. The data must specify a VIP-CORE
generated fault connection or a standard connection. If a standard
connection is specified, the regular transmissibility array will be changed
(this could also have been accomplished using OVER/VOVER).
FTRANF (card 1)
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (card 2)
(repeat as necessary) (card 3)
8-426 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
i1 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the

"left" of the fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on

the "left" of the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the fracture block on the "left"

of the fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the

"right" of the fault.
j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on

the "right" of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the fracture block on the

"right" of the fault.
t Transmissibility for the connection across the fault.

This replaces any other transmissibility defined for
the pair of fracture blocks. Units for t are the same
as those for transmissibilities read for the standard
fracture transmissibility arrays.
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-427

8.7 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL)

The MULTFL keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between
grid blocks that have been assigned a name. Grid blocks can be assigned a
name using the FNAME parameter on the MULT ( Section 1.6), FAULTS
(Section 6.2), OVER (Section 7.2) and VOVER (Section 7.4) options in VIP-
CORE. Both standard and non-standard transmissibility connections if
any are multiplied. 00
MULTFL fname tmul

(Repeat as necessary)
Definition: 00
MULTFL Alpha character keyword.
fname Name or number identifying the fault or group of

grid block to be operated upon.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier.
8.8 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR)

The MULTIR keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between
and within regions. The transmissibility regions are defined using the
ITRAN(F) array data (Section 5.26 in VIP-CORE. In VIP-EXEC, the
ITRAN(F) array can be modified using the OVER (Section 8.6.2) and
VOVER options (Section 8.6.3). 00
MULTIR
itr1 itr2 tmul (X) (Y) (Z)
Definition: 00
itr1, itr2 Positive integer values identifying

transmissibility regions. The transmissibility
regions are defined using the ITRAN(F) arrays
(Section..). When itr1 and itr2 are different, the
transmissibilities between these regions are
multiplied by tmul wherever they are in contact.
When itr1 and itr2 are equal the transmissibilities
within the region are multiplied by tmul.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier between regions itr1

and itr2 wherever they are in contact.
8-428 Landmark - R2003.4

XYZ Directions for applying the multiplier. The letters

are order independent and spaces are optional.
Default XYZ.
NOTE: The MULTIR option in VIP-EXEC always operates on both

standard and non-standard connections.
8.9 Pressure Threshold for Limiting Grid Block to Grid Block

Flow (PTHLD)
00 The PTHLD keyword is used to define threshold pressures for limiting
flow between grid blocks that are part of an identifiable interface. Flow
across any interface connection will not occur until the phase potential
difference across the connection exceeds the threshold pressure. The phase
potential difference to flow will be reduced by the threshold pressure.
00 Grid blocks can be assigned to an interface using the FNAME parameter

on the MULT (Section 1.6), FAULTS (Section 6.2), OVER (Section 7.2) and
VOVER (Section 7.4) options in VIP-CORE. Interfaces can also be defined
between transmissibility regions. Transmissibility regions are defined
using the ITRAN(F) array data (Section 5.25 and Section 5.26 in VIP-
CORE. In VIP-EXEC, the ITRAN(F) array can be modified using the OVER
(Section 8.6.2) and VOVER options (Section 8.6.3). The threshold pressure
applies to both standard and non-standard connections. The threshold
pressure arrays can be printed or mapped using PTHLD on the OUTPUT
or MAPOUT keywords.
PTHLD fname Pthreshold
or
PTHLD itr1 itr2 Ptreshold

EQUIL
00 Definition:
PTHLD Alpha character keyword.
fname Name or number identifying the fault or group of

grid blocks that describe an interface.
itr1, itr2 Positive integer values identifying

transmissibility regions. Transmissibility regions
are defined using the ITRAN(F) arrays (). The
threshold pressure will apply to all connections
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-429

across the interface defined by itr1 and itr2. Itr1

and itr2 cannot be the same.
Pthreshold Value of threshold pressure.
EQUIL This will calculate threshold pressures for each

connection at the interface such that there will
be no flow at initial conditions. The threshold
pressuresaresettothemaximumphasepotential
difference for a particular connection.
This option is only allowed at time = 0.0.
NOTE: Pressure threshold values for a particular interface replace

any previous values assigned to that interface.
00 Example:
00 PTHLD NW-SE 100

PTHLD 1 2 200
PTHLD 2 3 EQUIL
00 If any connection across the named interface NW-SE,are also shared across
regions 1 and 2, or 2 and 3, then the pressure threshold values for these
connections will be those from the latest specification.
8-430 Landmark - R2003.4

8.10 Phase Identification (PHASID)

00 When two hydrocarbon phases first appear in a gridblock, by default the
simulator identifies the denser phase as the oil phase and the other phase
as the gas phase. In some cases, especially when CO2 is injected, the
evolving gas phase may actually be initially denser than the oil phase.
After a short time, the gas phase would again become less dense than the
oil phase. The symptom of this phenomenon is the appearance of a gas
phase during the simulation that is denser than the oil phase. To prevent
this from happening, the PHASID option provides an alternative means
for identifying the oil or gas phases, based on composition. By default, the
PHASID keyword (with no other parameters) will identify the phase with
the greatest mole fraction of the heaviest component as the oil phase.
Alternatively, the user can tag the oil or gas phase as the one that contains
the greatest mole fraction of any one component.

PHASID OIL cmpid
GAS
00 Definitions:
OIL Alpha label indicating that the oil phase will be

identified as the phase that has the greatest mole
fraction of component cmpid.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the gas phase will be

identified as the phase that has the greatest mole
fraction of component cmpid.
cmpid The alphanumeric component identifier. This

identifier must have been previously identified on
the COMPONENTS input card of VIP-CORE.
00 Examples:
C Identify the oil phase as the phase that has the greatest mole
fractionof C the heaviest component.
PHASID
C Identify the gas phase as the phase that has the greatest mole
fraction of C component CO2:
PHASID GAS CO2
00
00
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-431

8-432 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
9
00000Polymer Option (VIP-POLYMER)1
9.1 Polymer Physical Property Data

00 The polymer physical property data for VIP-POLYMER can be introduced
at any point within the recurrent data. However the data can only be read
once.

00 If entered the DIM card(s) must immediately follow the RUN/
STORAGE card, or be the first card(s) in the deck.
00 The POLYMER option allows additional changes to the default

dimensions.

00 Definitions:
param Alpha labels of those dimension parameters being

defined.
NCPDIM Number of polymer concentration points for each

salinity curve in the reconstructed polymer
properties tables. Default is 51.
NCPMAX Maximum number of different polymer property

regions. Default is 1.
NESMAX Maximum number of salinity curves in each

polymer properties table. Default is 1.
NSLUG Maximum number of steps in a polymer slug.

Default is 4. See PSLUG card.
size The value or size of the corresponding parameter.
1. Available as a separately licensed option. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-433

Polymer Option (VIP-POLYMER) VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
9.1.2 Polymer Mode (POLYMER)

00 The POLYMER card must be followed by the polymer physical property
cards. The POLYMER card puts the model in the polymer mode and will
subsequently solve the polymer and electrolyte equations and include the
polymer physical properties in the calculations.
POLYMER
9.1.3 Polymer Concentration/Salinity Table (POLYT)

00 The polymer concentration/salinity table defines the rock and fluid
properties that depend on polymer concentration and salinity: polymer
phase viscosity at zero shear rate, polymer adsorption, and the
permeability reduction factor. These properties can be alternatively
defined by functions as described in Section 9.1.4.
POLYT npt (NOPRTI) (PRTR) (card 1)

ESALT PERM POR (card 2)
csep perm por (card 3)
CP VP0 CPADS RK (card 4)
cp vp0 cpads rk (card 5)
00 Definitions:
POLYT Alpha label indicating that the data on the

following cards are the polymer concentration/
salinity table.
npt The table number. This value corresponds to the

values of the IPOLYT array defined by either an
OVER or VOVER card. (Section 9.6).
NOPRTI Alpha label indicating that the following table will

not be printed on output. Default prints table.
PRTR Alpha label indicating that the reconstructed table

will be printed on output. Default does not print the
reconstructed table.
00 The values shown on Card 3 must appear in the order shown.
csep Effective salinity of the following table values,

meq/ml.
perm Absolute permeability for the permeability

reduction factor input on the following cards, md.
9-434 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Polymer Option (VIP-POLYMER)
por Porosity for the permeability reduction factor input

on the following cards, fraction.
00 The values on Card 5 must appear in the order shown.
00 There must be a minimum of two Card 5 data cards.
cp Polymer concentration, ppm. Values must increase

consecutively.
vp0 Polymer phase viscosity at zero shear rate, cp.

Values must increase with increasing polymer
concentration.
cpads Polymer adsorption, lb/ac-ft (g/m3) of bulk

reservoir volume. Values must increase with
increasing polymer concentration. Polymer
adsorption is instantaneous and irreversible.
rk Permeability reduction factor, defined as the

permeability to brine divided by the permeability to
polymer solution. Values must increase with
increasing polymer concentration. Permeability
reduction is only applied to the aqueous phase and
is considered irreversible.
NOTE: 1. Cards 2 through 5 can be repeated as necessary up to NESMAX

times for each POLYT card. The values of csep within a
particular table must increase consecutively, and a zero value is
not allowed. The POLYT card can be repeated NCPMAX times.
NESMAX and NCPMAX are defined by the DIM card (Section
9.1.1).
2. The use of the POLYT table option to define the polymer/

salinity dependent properties disallows the use of the function
option POLYF.
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-435

9.1.4 Polymer Concentration/Salinity Functions (POLYF)

00 The polymer concentration/salinity functions define the rock and fluid
properties that depend on polymer concentration and salinity: polymer
phase viscosity at zero shear rate; polymer adsorption; and the
permeability reduction factor. These properties can be alternatively
defined by tables as described in Section 9.1.3.
POLYF npf (card 1)

AP1 AP2 AP3 SSLOPE (card 2)
ap1 ap2 ap3 sslope (card 3)
ADP1 ADP2 BP (card 4)
adp1 adp2 bp (card 5)
BRK CRK (card 6)
brk crk (rkmax) (card 7)
00 Definitions:
POLYF Alpha label indicating that the data on the

following cards are the polymer concentration/
salinity functions parameters.
npf The functions number. This value corresponds to

the values of the IPOLYT array defined by either an
OVER or VOVER card Section 9.6).
00 Card 2 indicates that the data being read are polymer phase viscosity
at zero shear rate parameters. The values on the data cards following
this card appear in the order shown on this card. They must appear in
the order shown.
ap1 Viscosity parameter (ppm-1) (meq/ml)1/sslope.
sslope Slope of log (viscosity) versus log (effective salinity)

(dimensionless).
00 Card 4 indicates that the data being read are polymer adsorption
parameters. The values on the data cards following this card appear in
the order shown on this card.
adp1 Polymer adsorption parameter (lb/ac-ft)/(ppm),

(g/m3)/(ppm).
9-436 Landmark - R2003.4

adp2 Polymer adsorption parameter (lb/ac-ft)/(ppm)/

(meq/ml).
bp Polymer adsorption parameter (1/ppm).
00 Card 6 indicates that the data being read are permeability reduction
factor parameters. The values on the data cards following this card
appear in the order shown on this card.
brk Permeability reduction parameter (1/ppm).
crk Permeability reduction parameter. A positive value

calculates RKMAX as a function of permeability,
porosity, water saturation and salinity (darcy1/2)
(ppm1/3).
A negative value uses |crk| as the value of

RKMAX, hence independent of permeability,
porosity water saturation and salinity.
(dimensionless).
rkmax The rkmax cutoff for calculated RKMAX, used

when crk is positive, such that RKMAX rkmax
(dimensionless). Default = 10.
NOTE: 1. Cards 1 through 7 can be repeated as necessary up to NCPMAX

times. NCPMAX is defined by the DIM card (Section 9.1.1).
2. When the function option POLYF is chosen to define the

polymer/salinity dependent properties, the table option
POLYT is not allowed.
9.1.5 Non-Newtonian Viscosity Cards (SHEAR)

00 The effect of shear rate on the viscosity of the polymer phase is modeled
by Meters (Reference 6) equation. The equivalent shear rate for
multiphase flow in porous media is according to Hongs (Reference 7)
approximation. The required parameters are introduced by the following
cards.
SHEAR nsh (GRID) (card 1)

GAMMAC GAMHF POWN (card 2)
gammac gamhf pown (card 3)
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-437

00 Definitions:
SHEAR Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
shear rate viscosity parameters.
nsh Polymer property region number corresponding to

the values of the IPOLYT array defined by the
OVER or VOVER cards. (Section 9.6)
GRID Alpha label indicating that the shear rate is a scalar

property and calculated using the magnitude of the
velocity vector at the gridblock center.
gammac Constant related to the power law exponent for

non-Newtonian fluid viscosity. It is used to
calculate the equivalent shear rate for fluid flow vs.
porous media. Values of gammac range from 0.78 to
1.0.
gamhf Shear rate (1/sec) at which the polymer phase

viscosity is equal to the average of the polymer
solution viscosity at zero shear rate and of the water
viscosity.
pown Exponent in Meters (Reference 6) viscosity

equation.
NOTE: 1. If GRID is not specified, shear rate is calculated as a vector

property. The directional property is calculated at the block
faces.
2. When multiple polymer property regions are read, the method

used for calculating shear rate is that specified on the last
SHEAR card read.
3. Shear rate adjusted viscosities for well calculations require

equivalent block radius and well radius data entered using the
RFLOW or FPERF cards. Wells at the edge of the reservoir also
require FLOANG data.
9-438 Landmark - R2003.4

9.1.6 Polymer Inaccessible Pore Volume Card (EPHIP)

00 The polymer inaccessible pore volume is introduced by the EPHIP card.
Polymer inaccessible pore volume is used to model the phenomenon of
polymer molecules propagating faster than the solvent for flow in porous
media.
EPHIP nep ephip
00 Definition:
nep Polymer property region number corresponding to

OVER or VOVER cards (Section 9.6).
ephip Effective polymer porosity normalized by the true

porosity, p/.
9.1.7 Cation Exchange Cards (IONEX)

00 The exchange of monovalent and divalent cations between the aqueous
phase and the clays is modeled using electrostatic association (Reference
8). The required parameters are introduced by the following cards.
IONEX nex (card 1)

QV XKC (card 2)
qv xkc (card 3)
00 Definitions:
IONEX Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
cations exchange parameters.
nex Polymer property region number corresponding to

OVER or VOVER cards (Section 9.6).
qv Cation exchange capacity of the reservoir rock.

(meq/ml of P.V.).
xkc Cation exchange constant (meq/ml)-1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-439

9.1.8 Effective Divalent Salinity Cards (CSEP)

00 Divalent cations affect the polymer properties more than the monovalent
cations. An effective divalent salinity is the equivalent monovalent salinity
which gives the same polymer properties. In general the effective divalent
salinity is a multiple of the divalent salinity. The required parameters are
introduced by the following cards.
CSEP (card 1)
BETAP CSE1 (card 2)
betap cse1 (card 3)
00 Definitions:
CSEP Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
effective divalent salinity parameters.
betap Multiplier for the effective divalent salinity

(dimensionless).
cse1 Salinity value below which the polymer properties

are considered to be independent of salinity (meq/
ml).
9.1.9 Salinity Units Card (SUNITS)

00 The electrolyte concentrations can be specified in units of either meq/ml
or ppm. (Section 9.6) The SUNITS card indicates which type of unit to use.
MEQ ML
SUNITS
PPM
00 The SUNITS card can be used more than once to change the units of the
data being read and printed. The default is MEQ/ML.
9-440 Landmark - R2003.4

9.2 Injectors
9.2.1 Polymer Concentration (CPINJ)

00 An INJ card specifying the well as a water injector must precede a
CPINJ card.
00 The CPINJ card is used to specify the concentration of polymer injected

for water injection wells in VIP-POLYMER.
CPINJ wl (card 1)
cpw1 cpw2 . . .cpwn (card 2)
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which cpw values are being

cpw Polymer concentration being injected in the well.

Units are ppm.
NOTE: The number of cpw values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
9.2.2 Anion (Chloride) Concentration (CLINJ)

CLINJ card.
00 The CLINJ card is used to specify the anion (chloride) concentration for
water injection wells in VIP-POLYMER.
CLINJ wl (card 1)
clw1 clw2 . . .clwn (card 2)
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which clw values are being

clw Anion concentration of the water being injected in

the well. Units are meq/ml (ppm).
NOTE: The number of clw values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-441

9.2.3 Divalent Cation (Calcium) Concentration (CAINJ)

CAINJ card.
00 The CAINJ card is used to specify the divalent cation (calcium)

concentration for water injection wells in VIP-POLYMER.
CAINJ wl (card 1)
caw1 caw2 . . .cawn (card 2)
00 Definitions:
wl List of wells for which caw values are being

caw Divalent cation concentration of the water being

injected in the well. Units are meq/ml (ppm).
NOTE: The number of caw values must equal the number of wells in the
well list.
9.2.4 Polymer Slug Definition (PSLUG)

PSLUG card.
00 The PSLUG card is used to define a polymer slug. A Polymer slug consists
of a series of steps. Each step is defined by a polymer concentration and
size.
PSLUG
well number [cpw1 size1] ......(cpwn sizen)
well name
00 Definitions:
well number Well number for which data is being defined.
well name Well name for which data is being defined
cpwn Polymer concentration of step n. Units are ppm.
sizen Polymer size of step n. Units are Lb (kg).
9-442 Landmark - R2003.4


00 The POLYMER option allows additional FPERF parameters.
FPERF (card 1)
WELL ........ (RADBP) (RADWP) ...... (card 2)
........ (radbp) (radwp) ...... (card 3)
(Card 3 is repeated as necessary to describe
all the perforations for each well being perforated)
00 Definitions:
RADBP Colummn heading for radbp, ft (m), the equivalent

radius of the gridblock used for calculating the
shear rate effective polymer viscosity. Default is
radb, or rb from the RFLOW card. A value less than
or equal to zero will result in zero shear rate
polymer viscosity for well inflow calculations.
RADWP Colummn heading for radwp, ft (m), the wellbore

radius. Default is radw, or rw from the RFLOW
card. This value is used for calculating the shear
rate effective polymer viscosity for well inflow
calculations. A value less than or equal to zero will
result in a zero shear rate polymer viscosity.
9.3 Instantaneous Gel Model

00 An aqueous phase containing polymer in the reservoir can be gelled
instantaneously provided the polymer concentration is above a certain cut
off value. The gelled phase is considered immobile and the initial gel
saturation is equal to the water saturation in the gridblock at the time
specified. The gelled phase has the same compressibility as the aqueous
phase. The water relative permeability in a gridblock containing a gel
phase is calculated as follows:
00 krw(Sw) = krw(Sw + Sgel) - krw(Sgel)
00 Polymer and electrolytes are not allowed to flow out of a gridblock that
has a gel saturation.
9.3.1 Gel Data (GEL)
GEL (cpgel) (print)
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-443

00 Definitions:
cpgel Polymer concentration cut off, ppm (Default is 0.0)
print Prints gel saturation array.
NOTE: Both cpgel and print are order dependent.
9.3.2 Permeability Reduction Multiplier (RKMULT)
RKMULT (rkm) (print)
00 Definitions:
rkm Aqueous phase permeability reduction multiplier

(Default is 1.0). rkm modifies the current rk as
follows:
rk = 1. + (rk - 1) * rkm
print Prints the modified rk array.
NOTE: Both rkm and print are order dependent.
9.4 Print/Map Arrays and Parameters (OUTPUT, MAPOUT)

00 The POLYMER option allows additional arrays for the OUTPUT and/or
MAPOUT cards.
OUTPUT array1 . . . arraym

MAPOUT array1 . . . arrayk
00 Definitions:
array Alpha label of those arrays being defined on either

an OUTPUT card or a MAPOUT card:
CPW Polymer concentration in aqueous

phase, ppm.
CPA Adsorbed polymer, lb/ac-ft bulk

reservoir.
CPTOT Total polymer concentration on a

pore volume basis (ppm).
9-444 Landmark - R2003.4

CPTOT = SW * CPW + CPADS
RK Permeability reduction factor.
VISW0 Polymer phase viscosity at zero

shear rate, cp.
VISW Effective polymer phase viscosity

(includes shear rate effects), cp. This
results in the output of 3 arrays: x
direction shear, y direction shear and
z direction sheer.
SHEAR Shear rate, 1/sec. This results in the

output of the 3 directional arrays.
CSEP Effective salinity for calculating the

salinity dependent polymer
properties, (meq/ml).
NAW Sodium concentration in aqueous

phase, (meq/ml).
NAA Adsorbed sodium concentration,

(meq/ml P.V.).
NATOT Total sodium concentration, (meq/

ml P.V.).
CLW Chlorine concentration in aqueous

phase, (meq/ml).
CLTOT Total chlorine concentration, (meq/

ml P.V.).
CAW Calcium concentration in aqueous

phase, (meq/ml).
CAA Adsorbed calcium concentration,

(meq/ml P.V.).
CATOT Total calcium concentration, (meq/

ml P.V.).
IPOLYT Polymer properties region index.
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-445

9.5 Timestep Controls (DT)

00 The POLYMER option allows additional parameters for the DT card.
DT . . . . . . . dcpmax dclmax dcamax
00 Definitions:
dcpmax Maximum change in total polymer concentration

allowed during a timestep, ppm. Default is 50 ppm.
dclmax Maximum change in total anion concentration

allowed during a timestep, meq/ml pore volume.
Default is 0.1 meq/ml.
dcamax Maximum change in total divalent ion

concentration allowed during a timestep, meq/ml
pore volume. Default is 0.1 meq/ml.
NOTE: 1. The use of dcpmax requires that all values on the DT card,
through dzmax, be specified, as defined above.
2. The use of dclmax requires dcpmax to be specified and-the

use of dcamax requires dclmax to be specified.
9-446 Landmark - R2003.4

9.6 Modifying VIP-CORE Array Data
9.6.1 Override Modification (OVER)

00 The following are additional arrays available when the POLYMER option
is invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the
OVER card.
OVER (IPOLYT) (CLW) (CAW) (card 1)

i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (card 2)
00 Definition:

IPOLYT POLYMER properties table pointers.
CLW Anion concentration of the aqueous

phase, meq/ml (ppm).
CAW Divalent cation concentration of the

aqueous phase, meq/ml (ppm).
9.6.2 Individual Value Override Modification (VOVER)

00 The following are additional arrays available when the POLYMER option
is invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the
VOVER card.

i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op) (card 2)
00 Definitions:
array One of the following array names to be defined or

altered:
IPOLYT POLYMER properties table pointers.
CLW Anion concentration of the aqueous

phase, meq/ml (ppm).
CAW Divalent cation concentration of the

aqueous phase, meq/ml (ppm).
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-447

9-448 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
10
Surface Pipeline Network Option1
10.1 General Information

The surface pipeline network option may be used to define a production network
and/or an injection network. These networks must be independent of each other;
i.e. a node may exist in only one network and production and injection wells may
not point to the same node.
Before using the injection network option, please read Understanding Injection
Network Allocations and Node Pressures in VIP on page 10-523.
Input data of the surface pipeline network option can be divided into the following
major groups:
1. Profiles of temperature, temperature gradient, inclination angle, valve

coefficient, and choke correlation.
2. Pipe, well tubing, and valve data.
3. Link data.
4. Node data. (pressure and rate constraints, partial separation data).
5. Node connection data.
6. Data of well connections to nodes.
7. Satellite oil field production data.
8. Pseudo well modeling.
9. General parameters.
10. Output information.
11. Integration with predictive well management.
12. Production well optimization.
These groups will be described in the following sections.
Surface pipeline network data can be changed during a reservoir simulation after
the DATE or TIME card.
1. Available as a separately licensed option. Not available in VIP-THERM
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-449

Surface Pipeline Network Option VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
Input of some surface pipeline network data is position-dependent. Profile data

must precede pipe and well tubing data. Data of the flow devices (BHPTAB,
BHITAB, pipe, and well tubing data) must precede link data. Link and flow device
data must precede node and well connection data.
The hydraulic tables (BHPTAB or BHITAB) can be used for the description of the
multi-phase fluid flow in the flow devices of the surface pipeline network system.
Besides, the BHPTAB hydraulic table can be applied for the determination of the
pressure gradients in pipelines and well tubing. Input format of the BHPTAB or
BHITAB hydraulic tables has not changed. However, their parameters have
different definitions, which are described below. An option has been developed to
generate five-dimensional hydraulic tables for any well tubing string and/or any
connection between nodes of the surface pipeline network system.
Each node of the surface pipeline network system can have any number of input
connections. Each node may also have multiple output connections under two
possible scenarios:
1. One active connection with additional potential output connections. The

simulator can automatically select an output connection if fluid rate drops
below a minimum value.
2. Multiple active connections. The fluid volume in each active connection is

assigned using splitting factors. No robust hydrodynamic calculations are
made for the allocation of the fluid to the connections.
The surface pipeline network model has a general tree-like structure with any
number of node levels. However, loops can not be included.
As with nodes, wells may be connected to more than one node under two possible
scenarios:
1. One active connection with additional potential output connections. The

simulator can automatically select a well connection to a node if the NEW
predictive well management option is active (PREDICT NEW).
2. Multiple active connections. The fluid volume in each active connection is

assigned using splitting factors. No robust hydrodynamic calculations are
made for the allocation of the fluid to the connections.
The pseudo well option is provided to model some parts of the reservoir or
satellite oil fields which are connected to the surface pipeline network system but
which are not represented in the reservoir model. Inflow performance correlations
are applied for the definition of pseudo well production rates. Most available well
management features can be used for these wells.
Names of profiles, pipes, well tubings, valves, links, and nodes can not be longer
than eight characters. The first character in the name must be alphabetic unless the
The simplified heat transfer analysis option applies only to production networks.
When the water salinity option is active, the surface pipeline network option does
not take into account any salinity values.
10-450 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Surface Pipeline Network Option
The following gathering system will be used as an example in the keyword

descriptions:
pipe3 Node4
Node3 pipe3
pipe1 pipe2 link1
Node2 Node5
Node1 pipe6
Wellhead pipe3
tubing1 tubing2 link2 BHPTAB link3
Well1 Well4 Well5 Well 6 Well 7
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-451

10.2 Flow Modeling in Well Tubing Strings

All capabilities for modeling of multiphase compositional flow in devices of the
surface pipeline network system can be applied for flow modeling in well tubing
from a wellbore to a wellhead. Therefore, CURVE, PIPES, TUBING, VALVES,
BHPTAB, BHITAB, LINK, and WELCON cards can be applied for flow
modeling in well tubing strings. This part of the surface pipeline network option
can be used independently from the more general surface pipeline network
modeling.
The following data in the specified sequence must be provided to apply these
capabilities for flow modeling in well tubing strings:
tubinghead pressure (THP cards);
profiles of temperature, temperature gradient, inclination angle, valve

coefficient, and choke correlation, if required (CURVE cards);
hydraulic table, pipe, well tubing, and/or valve data, if required (BHPTAB,
BHITAB, PIPES, TUBING, VALVES, and/or LINK cards);
well tubing connection data (WELCON cards).
Example:
C
C In the following example, a well string for Well 1 consists of
C 3 tubing sections with different diameters, thicknesses, lengths,
C and temperature distributions. They are connected using Link LINK1.
C The well string for Well 2 is modeled by tubing TUBIN4.
C
THP 1 2
750 750
TUBINGS
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN LENGTH TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR
1 TUBIN1 1.128 0.619 0.00001 590 400 397.3 HAGEDORN
2 TUBIN2 1.375 0.75 0.00001 17501 397.3 316.1 HAGEDORN
3 TUBIN3 1.338 0.820 0.00001 3458 316.1 300 HAGEDORN
4 TUBIN4 1.338 0.820 0.00001 21100 400 300 HAGEDORN
LINK 1 LINK1
C NN Name Type Num_Drop Pressure_CorrectionIPVT
1 TUBIN1 TUBING 1 0. 2
2 TUBIN2 TUBING 1 10 1
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT WDZ WDAT
1 LINK1 LINK 20500 21000
2 TUBIN4 TUBING 20900 21000
C
10-452 Landmark - R2003.4

10.3 Application of Hydraulic Tables for Modeling Flow in Flow

Devices
Hydraulic tables (BHPTAB or BHITAB) can be used for modeling of the fluid
flow in the flow devices of the surface pipeline network system.
The five-dimensional hydraulic table (BHPTAB) defines pressure at the inlet of

the flow device (BHP) as a tabular function of pressure at the outlet of this device
(THP), liquid rate (QLIQ), gas-oil ratio (GOR), water cut (WCUT), and artificial
lift quantity value (ALQ). Alternatively, oil or gas rate (QO or QG) may be used
instead of the liquid rate, and gas-liquid or oil-gas ratios (GLR or OGR) may be
used instead of the gas-oil ratio, and water-gas ratio (WGR) may be used instead
of the water cut. The artificial lift quantity is an additional input variable which
may be pipe inclination angle, gas-lift rate, pump efficiency or power, etc.
The two-dimensional hydraulic table (BHITAB) defines pressure at the inlet of the
flow device (BHP) as a tabular function of pressure at the outlet of this device
(THP) and the liquid or gas rate (QI).
Pressure, temperature, and the PVT table number (in non-thermal problems),
which are used for the determination of the volumetric rates, are determined in the
LINK card.
10.4 Application of Look-Up Tables for Pressure Gradient

Determination in Pipes
A five-dimensional hydraulic table (BHPTAB) can be used for modeling of
pressure gradient in different pipe locations. In this case, the hydraulic table
BHPTAB defines pressure (BHP) at the beginning of a pipe interval with the
specified length (dzw) as a tabular function of the pressure (THP) at the end of
this interval, liquid rate (QLIQ), gas-oil ratio (GOR), water cut (WCUT), and
inclination angle (ALQ). Alternatively, oil or gas rate (QO or QG) may be used
instead of the liquid rate, and gas-liquid or oil-gas ratios (GLR or OGR) may be
used instead of the gas-oil ratio, and water-gas ratio (WGR) may be used instead
of the water cut.
The pressure gradient at the current pipe location L is calculated as a difference of

the pressures at the end and the beginning of a pipe interval divided by the interval
length:
dP THP BHP
------- ( L ) = ------------------------------
dL dzw
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-453

10.5 Profiles of Temperature, Inclination Angle, Valve Coefficient,

Choke Correlation, and PVT Tables (CURVE)
10.5.1 Temperature Profile (CURVE TEMPPR)

A temperature profile determines a temperature distribution in pipes and well
tubing. It is used to relate temperature in different pipe locations to variable pipe
length.
CURVE TEMPPR tname

LENGTH length1 length2 . . . lengthn
TEMP temp1 temp2 . . . tempn
Definitions:
TEMPPR Alpha label indicating that the temperature profile is

input.
tname Name of the temperature profile.
LENGTH Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
pipe length values. The values of the pipe length must
be input in increasing order.
length Length of the pipe from the inlet to the current
position, ft (m).
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
temperature values.
temp Temperature in the current pipe position, F (C).
NOTE: 1. Values of length and temperature can be input on several cards.
2. The linear interpolation technique is used for the determination of

temperature between the entries of the temperature profile.
3. In general, this data defines a fluid temperature profile. But, in the

simplified heat transfer analysis option (HEATTR = 1 in the NETPAR
card), this data defines an ambient temperature profile.
Examples:
C
C Two temperature profiles.
C
CURVE TEMPPR TEMPPR1
LENGTH 0 3000 5000 6000
TEMP 150 140 130 120
C
10-454 Landmark - R2003.4

CURVE TEMPPR TEMPPR3

LENGTH 0
8500
TEMP 60 160
10.5.2 Temperature Gradient Profile (CURVE TMGRPR)

A temperature gradient profile determines a temperature gradient distribution in
pipes and well tubing strings. It is used to relate temperature gradient in different
pipe locations to subsea depth.
CURVE TMGRPR tname

DEPTH depth1 depth2 ... depthn
TEMP temp1 temp_grad2... temp_gradn
Definitions:
TMGRPR Alpha label indicating that the temperature gradient

profile is input.
tname Name of the temperature gradient profile.
DEPTH Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
subsea depths. The values of the subsea depth must be
input in increasing order.
depth Subsea depth, ft (m).
temperature or temperature gradient values.
temp Temperature at the first subsea depth, depth1, F (C).
temp_grad Temperature gradient at the current subsea depth, F/
feet (C/m).
NOTE: 1. Values of subsea depth and temperature gradient can be input on several
cards.
2. In general, this data defines a fluid temperature gradient profile. But, in

the simplified heat transfer analysis option (HEATTR = 1 in the
NETPAR card), this data defines an ambient temperature gradient
profile.
Example:
C
CURVE TMGRPR temgrpr
DEPTH 0 1369 5962
TEMP 60 0.022 0.021
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-455

10.5.3 Elevation Profile (CURVE ELEVPR)

An elevation profile relates inclination angle at different pipe locations to the
cumulative pipe length from the beginning position of the pipe segment. The
beginning position of the pipe is the end of the pipe closest to the well.
CURVE ELEVPR ename

LENGTH length1 length2 . . . lengthn
ANGLE angle1 angle2 . . . anglen
Definitions:
ELEVPR Alpha label indicating that the elevation profile is

input.
ename Name of the elevation profile.
LENGTH Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
cumulative pipe lengths. The values of length must be
length Cumulative length of the pipe from the beginning
position of the pipe segment to the position at which
the inclination applies, ft (m).
ANGLE Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
inclination angle values.
angle Inclination angle from the horizontal axis at this
position of the pipe, degrees (radians).
NOTE: Values of length and inclination angle can be input on several cards.
Examples:
C
C Three elevation profiles.
C
CURVE ELEVPR ELEVPR1
LENGTH 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
ANGLE 0 5 8 12 0
C
LENGTH 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
ANGLE 3 5 8.4 12 4
C
LENGTH
4200 8400
ANGLE 95 97
10-456 Landmark - R2003.4

10.5.4 Valve Coefficient Profile (CURVE VCPR)

Valve coefficient profile relates valve coefficient in a valve model to valve setting.
CURVE VCPR vname

SET set1 set2 . . . setn
VC vc1 vc2 . . . vcn
Definitions:
VCPR Alpha label indicating that the valve coefficient profile

is input.
vname Name of the valve coefficient profile.
SET Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
valve settings. The values of valve setting must be
set Valve setting.
VC Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
valve coefficients.
vc Valve coefficient.
NOTE: 1. Values of valve setting and valve coefficient can be input on several
cards.
2. The linear interpolation technique is used for the determination of the

valve coefficient between the entries of the valve coefficient profile.
Examples:
C
C Two dummy valve coefficient profiles.
C
CURVE VCPR VC1
SET 1 2 3 4
VC 5.4 0.8 0.3 0.01
C
CURVE VCPR VC2
SET 1 2
3 4
VC 3.8 2.7
0.8 0.1
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-457

10.5.5 Choke Correlation (CURVE IDPR)

Choke correlation relates choke internal diameter in a Perkins choke model to
choke setting.
CURVE IDPR cname

SET set1 set2 . . . setn
ID id1 id2 . . . idn
Definitions:
IDPR Alpha label indicating that the choke correlation is

input.
cname Name of the choke correlation.
SET Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
choke settings. The values of choke setting must be
set Choke setting.
ID Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
choke inner diameters.
id Choke inner diameter, in (cm).
NOTE: 1. Values of choke setting and diameter can be input on several cards.

choke diameter between the entries of the choke correlation table.
3. Choke correlation must be defined to apply the Perkins choke model. It

must be input before the Perkins choke model description in the
VALVES card.
Example:
C
C WILLIS 0.75 Choke
C
CURVE IDPR C0201
C Choke setting in degrees
SET 20.5 21 21.5 22 22.5 23 ..........
C Choke inner diameter in inches
ID 0.014465 0.034404 0.050908 0.065789 0.079637 0.092741 ......
10-458 Landmark - R2003.4

10.5.6 PVT Property Table Profile (CURVE IPVTPR)

A PVT property table profile determines a relationship between a PVT table
number and temperature. It is used to relate fluid PVT properties to temperature in
different elements of the surface pipeline network system in black-oil models.
CURVE IPVTPR iname

TEMP temp1 temp2 . . . tempn
IPVT ipvt1 ipvt2 . . . ipvtn
Definitions:
IPVTPR Alpha label indicating that the PVT property table

profile is input.
iname Name of the PVT property table profile.
temperatures.
temp Temperature, F (C). Temperature values must be
IPVT Alpha label indicating that the values on this card are
PVT property table numbers.
ipvt PVT property table number.
NOTE: 1. Temperature values and PVT property table numbers can be input on
several cards.

fluid PVT properties between the temperature entries of the PVT
property profile.
Examples:
C
C PVT property table profiles.
C
CURVE IPVTPR PVTPROFI
TEMP 52 60 100 200
IPVT 4 3 2 1
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-459

10.6 Pipe Data (PIPES)

Parameters of horizontal or inclined pipes are input after the PIPES keyword. A
five-dimensional hydraulic table (BHPTAB) can be used for the determination of
the pressure gradient at different pipe locations instead of the analytical
correlations. In this case, the hydraulic table number should be input with a minus
sign in the PDCORR column.
PIPES
NN param1 param2 . . . paramn
num1 value1 value2 . . . valuen
.
.
.
numm value1 value2 . . . valuen
Definitions:
NN Alpha label indicating that the pipe number is input in

this column.
num Pipe number. The pipe numbers must be input in
increasing order.
param Alpha labels of those pipe parameters being defined.
The following parameters can be input: DIAMETER,
THICKNESS, ROUGHNESS, LENGTH, ANGLE,
YOUNG, NAME, PRESIN, TEMPUP, TEMPDW,
PDCORR, DHCOR, ELEVPR, TEMPPR, TMGRPR,
HTC, GRPGCR, FRPGCR, ACPGCR.
DIAMETER Pipe inner diameter, in (cm). This parameter must be
input.
THICKNESS Pipe thickness, in (cm). This parameter must be input.
ROUGHNESS Pipe roughness factor, in (mm). This parameter must
be input.
LENGTH Pipe total length, ft (m). One of the parameters
elevation profile (ELEVPR) or pipe total length
(LENGTH) must be input. If ELEVPR is input,
LENGTH is ignored, in which case the total pipe
length is set to the last entry in the LENGTH row of
the elevation profile.
ANGLE Pipe inclination angle from the horizontal axis,
degrees (radians). This parameter is ignored if pipe
elevation profile (ELEVPR) is input. Default is zero.
10-460 Landmark - R2003.4

YOUNG Young modules, million psia (million kPa). The

default value of this parameter is defined on the
NETPAR card.
NAME Pipe name.
PRESIN Pressure increment, psia (kPa). A second order Runge-
Kutta procedure with an automatic selection of
integration intervals is applied for the numerical
solution of the pipe flow equations. The integration
interval is selected to assure that the pressure drop in
this interval is not larger than the pressure increment
PRESIN. The default value of this parameter is
defined on the NETPAR card.
TEMPUP Upstream temperature of the pipe for production,
downstream temperature of the pipe for injection, F
(C). This parameter is ignored if the temperature
profile is input. The default value of this parameter is
TEMPDW Downstream temperature of the pipe for production,
upstream temperature of the pipe for injection, F (C).
This parameter is ignored if the temperature profile is
input. The default value of the parameter is defined on
the NETPAR card.
PDCORR Pressure drop correlation for two-phase flow (see Note
1). The following correlations can be used:
NOSLIP without slip effect;
DUKLER Dukler II with Flanigan
correction for elevation;
DUKEAT Dukler II with Eaton holdup
and Flanigan correction for
elevation;
BEGGS Beggs and Brill;
MUKHERJEE Mukherjee and Brill;
-n Use hydraulic table
(BHPTAB) number n to
determine the pressure
gradient in the pipe.
Default is BEGGS.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-461

DHCOR Downhill correction flag. The downhill correction

(meaning ignore elevation pressure gradient) is
applied if the value of this parameter is one. The
downhill correction is not used if a value of zero is
input. Only the values zero and one may be entered.
Default is zero.
ELEVPR Name of the elevation profile, from the CURVE
ELEVPR card.
TEMPPR Name of the temperature profile, from the CURVE
TEMPPR card.
TMGRPR Name of the temperature gradient profile, from the
CURVE TMGRPR card.
HTC Pipe heat transfer coefficient, BTU/(hr*ft2*0F)
( W/(m2*0K)). This parameter is applied only in the
simplified heat transfer analysis option (HEATTR = 1
in the NETPAR card). Defaults to HTCPIPE in the
NETPAR card.
GRPGCR Correction factor for the gravity pressure gradient.
FRPGCR Correction factor for the friction pressure gradient.
ACPGCR Correction factor for the acceleration pressure
gradient.
value The value of the corresponding parameter.
NOTE: 1. During the pressure drop calculation, if it is determined that only a

single-phase fluid exists (i.e., only gas or only liquid), the NOSLIP
correlation will be used. The PDCORR option entered by the user (or
defaulted) is only used for two-phase flow.
2. The default values of the pressure gradient correction factors GRPGCR,

FRPGCR, and ACPGCR are defined in the NETPAR card. They can be
automatically adjusted using the TBADJ or TUNING options.
2. In the simplified heat transfer analysis option (HEATTR = 1 in the

NETPAR card), TEMPUP and TEMPDW are ambient temperatures;
otherwise they are fluid temperatures.
10-462 Landmark - R2003.4

Examples:
C
C Parameters of six pipelines.
C
PIPES
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR LENGTH
1 PIPE1 4. 0.2 0.0001 500 100. 60. BEGGS 10000
2 PIPE2 4. 0.2 0.0001 500 100. 60. BEGGS 5000
C
PIPES
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR LENGTH ANGLE
3 PIPE3 16 0.2 0.0006 500 100. 60. BEGGS 10000 3
C
PIPES
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN ELEVPR TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR
4 PIPE4 4. 0.2 0.0001 500 ELEVPR1 100 60 MUKHERJEE
C
PIPES
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN LENGTH ANGLE TEMPPR PDCORR
5 PIPE5 4. 0.2 0.0001 500 6000 4. TEMPPR2 BEGGS
C
C Hydraulic table (BHPTAB) with Number 2 is used for
C the determination of the pressure gradient in Pipe 6.
C
PIPES
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PDCORR ELEVPR PRESIN
6 PIPE6 4. 0.2 0.0001 -2 ELEVPR1 200
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-463

10.7 Tubing Data (TUBING)

The parameters of vertical or inclined well tubing are input after the TUBING
keyword.
TUBING
.
.
.
Definitions:
NN Alpha label indicating that the well tubing number is

input in this column.
num Well tubing number. The well tubing numbers must be
param Alpha labels of those tubing parameters being defined.
The following parameters can be input: DIAMETER,
THICKNESS, ROUGHNESS, LENGTH, DEPTH,
YOUNG, NAME, PRESIN, TEMPUP, TEMPDW,
PDCORR, ELEVPR, TEMPPR,TMGRPR, HTC,
GRPGCR, FRPGCR, ACPGCR.
DIAMETER Well tubing inner diameter, in (cm). This parameter
must be input.
THICKNESS Well tubing thickness, in (cm). This parameter must be
input.
ROUGHNESS Well tubing roughness coefficient, in (mm). This
parameter must be input.
LENGTH Well tubing total length, ft (m). One of the parameters
elevation profile (ELEVPR), total length (LENGTH),
or subsea depth (DEPTH) must be input. If the
ELEVPR is input, LENGTH is ignored, in which case
the total length is set to the last entry in the LENGTH
row of the elevation profile. The total length is assumed
to be the true vertical length if on ly the true vertical
length is input. The tubing inclination angle is
calculated using values of the true vertical length and
total length, if the elevation profile is not input.
10-464 Landmark - R2003.4

DEPTH True vertical length of well tubing, ft (m). That is, this
is the length of the projection of the tubing onto the
vertical axis. The value will always be less than or
equal to LENGTH. This parameter is ignored if the
elevation profile is input. The true vertical length is
assumed to be the total length if only the total length is
input. The tubing inclination angle is calculated using
the true vertical length and total length if the elevation
profile is not input.
YOUNG Young modules, million psia (million kPa). The default
value of this parameter is defined on the NETPAR card.
NAME Well tubing name.
PRESIN Pressure increment, psia (kPa). A second order Runge-
Kutta procedure with an automatic selection of
integration intervals is applied for the numerical
solution of the pipe flow equations. The integration
interval is selected to assure that the pressure drop in
this interval is not larger than the pressure increment
PRESIN. The default value of this parameter is defined
on the NETPAR card.
TEMPUP Upstream temperature of the well tubing for
production, downstream temperature of the well tubing
for injection, F (C). This parameter is ignored if the
temperature profile is input. The default value of this
parameter is defined on the NETPAR card.
TEMPDW Downstream temperature of the well tubing for
production, upstream temperature of the well tubing for
injection, F (C). This parameter is ignored if the
temperature profile is input. The default value of this
parameter is defined on the NETPAR card.
PDCORR Pressure drop correlation for two-phase flow (see Note
1). The following correlations can be used:
NOSLIP without slip effect;
HAGEDORN Hagedorn and Brown;
DUNROS Duns and Ross;
BEGGS Beggs and Brill;
AZIZ Aziz and Govier;
ORKISZEWSKI Orkiszewski;
GRIFFITH Griffith, Lau, Hon, and Pear-
son;
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-465

HAG-BEG Hagedorn and Brown, for

deviation angle between -45o
and 45o; Beggs, otherwise;
-n Use hydraulic table
(BHPTAB) number n to
determine the pressure
gradient in the pipe.
Default is BEGGS.
ELEVPR Name of the elevation profile, from the CURVE
ELEVPR card.
TEMPPR Name of the temperature profile, from the CURVE
TEMPPR card.
TMGRPR Name of the temperature gradient profile, from the
CURVE TMGRPR card.
HTC Tubing heat transfer coefficient, BTU/(hr*ft2*0F)
(W/(m2*0K)). This parameter is applied only in the
in the NETPAR card). Defaults to HTCTUB in the
NETPAR card.
GRPGCR Correction factor for the gravity pressure gradient.
FRPGCR Correction factor for the friction pressure gradient.
ACPGCR Correction factor for the acceleration pressure gradient.
NOTE: 1. During the pressure drop calculation, if it is determined that only a

single-phase fluid exists (i.e., only gas or only liquid), the NOSLIP
correlation will be used. The PDCORR option entered by the user (or
defaulted) is only used for two-phase flow.
2. The default values of the pressure gradient correction factors GRPGCR,

FRPGCR, and ACPGCR are defined in the NETPAR card. They can be
automatically adjusted using the TBADJ or TUNING options.
3. In the simplified heat transfer analysis option (HEATTR = 1 in the

NETPAR card), TEMPUP and TEMPDW are ambient temperatures;
otherwise they are fluid temperatures.
10-466 Landmark - R2003.4

Examples:
C
C Well tubing parameters.
C
TUBING
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN DEPTH LENGTH TEMPPR PDCORR
1 TUBIN1 4. 0.2 0.0001 500 8400 8500 TEMPPR2 ORKISZ
TUBING
NN NAME DIAMET THICKN ROUGHN PRESIN ELEVPR TEMPUP TEMPDW
2 TUBIN2 4. 0.2 0.0001 400 ELEVPR3 160 60
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-467

10.8 Valve Data (VALVES, VALSET)

Valve or choke parameters are input after the VALVES card. The VALVEC valve
model or PERKINS choke model can be applied.
The VALVEC valve model predicts subcritical pressure drop across a valve using
the following equation6,7:
Q tot Q tot
p out p in = CVX ( X ) ------------------------

where:
pout is the pressure at the outlet of the valve in psia (kPa);
pin is the pressure at the inlet of the valve in psia (kPa);
Qtot is the total mass rate of the fluid in lb. per sec., which is calculated as a
sum of the mass rates of the oil, gas, and water phases;
is the density of the mixture in lb. per cu.ft.
CVX(X) is the valve coefficient which depends on a valve setting X. The user
should define the valve coefficients for the different valve settings using a
valve coefficient profile (CURVE VCPR).
The oil, gas, or liquid mass rate can be used (instead of the total mass rate) for the
definition of the pressure drop in a valve.
The PERKINS choke model represents critical and sub-critical multiphase fluid
flow across a choke. The following input is required to apply the Perkins choke
model:
1. Input a choke correlation which relates choke setting with choke inner
diameter after the CURVE IDPR card.
2. Define the PERKINS model, a choke correlation name, and inner diameter of
tubing segment with embedded choke using keywords MODEL, IDPR, and
TUBID.
3. Apply choke model in well connections to nodes, node connections, or links.
A pressure control valve or a flow control valve is simulated as follows: The

pressure control valve model automatically selects the valve coefficient CVX or
the choke setting from a specified range. This coefficient or choke setting
minimizes the absolute value of the difference between a valve upstream pressure
and a target pressure. The valve coefficient range is defined by a valve coefficient
profile and a valve status. If the valve status is OPEN, the whole range of the
valve coefficient profile is used in the calculations. If the valve status is CLOSE,
the valve coefficient range consists only from the first entry of the valve
coefficient profile. In the flow control valve model, the valve coefficient is defined
as one of the end points of the valve coefficient profile. If the valve status is
10-468 Landmark - R2003.4

OPEN, the valve coefficient is determined as the last entry in the valve
coefficient profile. If the valve status is CLOSE, the valve coefficient is selected
as the first entry in the valve coefficient profile. In the flow control valve/choke,
the valve/choke setting can be input in the VALSET card.
VALVES
..
Definitions:
NN Alpha label indicating that the valve number is input in

this column.
num Valve number. The valve numbers must be input in
increasing order.
param Alpha labels of those valve parameters being defined.
The following parameters can be input: NAME,
MODEL, IDPR, TUBID, TEMPUP, TEMPDW,
VCPR, TYPE, CONTROL, TARGET, STATUS,
MAXPRD.
NAME Valve name.
MODEL VALVEC valve model (default) or PERKINS choke
model.
IDPR Name of the choke correlation from the CURVE IDPR
card. This parameter must be defined if the PERKINS
model is used.
TUBID Inner diameter of a tubing segment with choke, in
(cm). This parameter must be defined if the PERKINS
model is used.
TEMPUP Upstream temperature of the valve for production,
downstream temperature of the valve for injection, F
(C). The default value of this parameter is defined on
the NETPAR card.
TEMPDW Downstream temperature of the valve for production,
upstream temperature of the valve for injection, F
(C). The default value of this parameter is defined on
the NETPAR card.
VCPR Name of the valve coefficient profile from the CURVE
VCPR card. This parameter must be defined if the
VALVEC model is used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-469

TYPE Valve type. One of the following mass rates is used to

calculate the pressure drop in the valve:
OIL;
GAS;
LIQUID;
ALL.
Default is ALL.
CONTROL Valve control. A pressure control valve or a flow
control valve can be simulated as follows:
PRESUP;
FLOW.
Default is FLOW. The target pressure must be input if
the pressure control option is used.
TARGET Target pressure, psia (kPa). This parameter is used
only in the valve or choke model with the upstream
pressure control.
STATUS Valve status: CLOSE or OPEN. Default is CLOSE.
MAXPRD Maximum pressure drop in a choke/valve, psia (kPa).
Default is 2000 psia.
Examples:
C Valve parameters.
VALVES
NN NAME TEMPUP TEMPDW CONTROL STATUS VCPR TYPE TARGET
1 VALVE1 20. 14.4 PRESUP OPEN VC1 OIL 2000.
2 VALVE2 20. 14.4 PRESUP CLOSE VC2 OIL 70.
C Choke parameters.
VALVES
NN NAME MODEL IDPR TUBID TEMPUP TEMPDW
3 W0001C PERKINS C0201 5.875 172 172
VALSET
valve_name1 valve_setting1
valve_name2 valve_setting2
.. ..
10-470 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
valve_name Valve/choke name or number. It must be defined in the

VALVES card before it can be referenced in the
VALSET card.
valve_setting Valve/choke setting. It is used only if the FLOW valve
control is defined in the VALVES card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-471

10.9 Link Data (LINK)

A link simulates the flow of the multi-phase fluids in
well tubing and casing,
connections between wellheads and nodes of the surface pipeline network

system, and
connections between nodes.
Each link has only one inlet and one outlet. A link can be constructed from several
flow device models sequentially connected with each other. The following models
of the flow devices can be used in the link:
pipe,
well tubing,
valve,
five-dimensional hydraulic table (BHPTAB),
two-dimensional hydraulic table (BHITAB) with the liquid rate as input

variable (BHLTAB),
two-dimensional hydraulic table (BHITAB) with the gas rate as input variable
(BHVTAB).
If the hydraulic tables are applied for the determination of the pressure drop in
some flow device included in the link, the volumetric rates are determined from
flash calculations. Pressure, temperature, and PVT table number, which are used
in these calculations, can be input on the LINK card.
LINK link_number (link_name)

n um pcor ipvt 1 alq 1 temp 1 pres 1
1
1 nm1 tp1
.
1
IBAT ibat 1 alq 1
.
n nmn tpn ipvt n alq n temp n pres n
num n pcor n
IBAT ibat n alq n
Definitions:
link_number Link number. The link numbers should be input in

increasing order.
link_name Link name.
10-472 Landmark - R2003.4

n Sequential number of the flow device. All flow devices

in the link must be numbered starting from the
upstream link inlet.
nm Flow device name or number. A value of the NN or
NAME parameter in the PIPES, TUBING, or
VALVES card should be input in this column. Or, a
hydraulic table number (nbhp or nbhi) from the
BHPTAB or BHITAB card can be used.
tp Flow device type:
PIPE;
TUBING;
VALVE;
BHPTAB;
BHLTAB (the BHITAB hydraulic table with the liquid
rate as the input variable);
BHVTAB (the BHITAB hydraulic table with the vapor
rate as the input variable).
num The determination of the pressure drop on the flow
device is sequentially repeated num times. Default is
one.
pcor Additive pressure correction to apply to the value of
pressure at the upstream inlet of the flow device, psia
(kPa). Default is zero.
ipvt Flash calculations in the flow device are performed
using the "table" ipvt.
For black-oil models, ipvt is a PVT property table
number or a PVT property profile name (CURVE
IPVTPR).
For compositional models, ipvt is an equation-of-state
table number.
For models using EOSINT, ipvt is an EOSINT table
number (equilibrium region number).
For the first flow device in the link, default is one. For
all other devices in the link, default is the PVT table
number of the previous device.
IBAT Alpha label designating that the separator battery
model is to be used for the determination of
volumetric rates instead of a PVT table or an equation-
of-state. This parameter is used only in a model of a
flow device described by the hydraulic table
(BHPTAB or BHITAB).
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-473

ibat Separator battery number. Alternatives include the

battery number of a separator input in the separator
data (Surface Separator Data), or a value of -npvt
which accesses a default separator. This parameter
must follow the IBAT alpha label.
alq Artificial lift quantity. This parameter is used only in a
model of the flow device described by the hydraulic
table (BHPTAB or BHITAB). Default is zero.
temp Temperature applied in flash calculations for the
determination of volumetric rates, F (C). This
parameter is used only in a model of a flow device
described by the hydraulic table (BHPTAB or
BHITAB). The default value of this parameter is
pres Pressure applied in the flash calculations for the
determination of volumetric rates, psia (kPa). This
parameter is used only in a model of a flow device
described by the hydraulic table (BHPTAB or
BHITAB). The default value of this parameter is
Examples:
C
C Link definitions.
C
LINK 1 LINK1
C NN Name Type Numberr_Devices Pressure_Correction
1 PIPE4 PIPE 1 0.
2 PIPE5 PIPE 2 2.
3 VALVE1 VALVE 2 5.
LINK 2 LINK2
1 1 BHPTAB 1 0
LINK 3 LINK3
1 1 BHLTAB 1 10.
LINK 4 LINK4
1 1 BHPTAB 1 0. IBAT -1
10-474 Landmark - R2003.4

10.10 Node Data (NODES)

The following information about nodes of the surface pipeline network system are
input after the NODES keyword:
node name and number,
name and level of the normal VIP well management structure (gathering
center, flow station, area, or field) which corresponds to the node,
pressure system assigned to the node,
number of a separator battery attached to the node,
rate and pressure constraints at the node,
parameters of a partial fluid separation in the node.
NOTE: Before using the injection network option, please read

Understanding Injection Network Allocations and Node Pressures in
VIP on page 10-523.
NODES
..
Definitions:
NN Alpha label indicating that the node number is input in

this column.
num Node number. The node numbers must be input in
increasing order.
param Alpha labels of those node parameters being defined.
The following parameters can be input: NAME,
WMN, WML, PRSYS, IBAT, QO, QG, QW, QL,
PMIN, PMAXI, TEMP, QOMIN, QGMIN, FRO,
FRG, FRW, FRGFO, GASSPM, REMOVE, REINJ,
PTARG. See Section 10.18.5 for additional parameters
related to the well optimization option.
NAME Node name.
WMN Name or number of the gathering center, flow station,
area, or field which corresponds to the node. Default is
zero.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-475

WML Level of the VIP well management structure which

corresponds to the node:
GATHER Gathering Center;
FLOSTA Flow Station;
AREA Area;
FIELD Field.
Default value is GATHER.
PRSYS Name or number of the pressure system assigned to
the node. This parameter is applicable only if the
predictive well management option (PREDICT NEW)
is used. Default is one.
IBAT Number of the separator battery attached to the node.
The corresponding separator battery model is used for
the determination of the fluid volumetric rates at the
node. If a negative value is input, the default separator
is used. Default is one if separator battery one is
defined. Otherwise, default is -1.
QO Maximum produced oil rate at the node, STB/D
(STCM/D). Default is 1.E+15.
QG Maximum produced or injected gas rate at the node,
MSCF/D (SCM/D). Default is 1.E+15.
QW Maximum produced or injected water rate at the node,
STB/D (STCM/D). Default is 1.E+15.
QL Maximum produced liquid rate at the node, STB/D
(STCM/D). Default is 1.E+15.
PMIN Minimum pressure for production nodes, psia (kPA).
Default is -1.E+9.
PMAXI Maximum pressure for injection nodes, psia(KPA).
Default is 1.E+9.
TEMP Fluid temperature in the node, oF (oC), for the
in the NETPAR card). This value replaces the
internally calculated value of fluid temperature.
10-476 Landmark - R2003.4

QOMIN Minimum oil rate at the node, STB/D (STCM/D). If

the oil rate in the node outlet is less than the minimum
value and potential node connections (OUTCN2, etc.)
are defined in the NODCON card, then the active node
connection can be automatically changed. Only
potential node connections will be considered. Next
potential connection will be selected as the active
connection if pressure in the corresponding output
node is less than pressure in the current output node.
Default is -1.E+9.
QGMIN Minimum gas rate at the node, MSCF/D (SCM/D). If
the gas rate in the node outlet is less than the minimum
value and potential node connections (OUTCN2, etc.)
are defined in the NODCON card, then the active node
connection can be automatically changed. Only
potential node connections will be considered. Next
potential connection will be selected as the active
connection if pressure in the corresponding output
node is less than pressure in the current output node.
Default is -1.E+9.
FRO Fraction of the oil rate in the node inlet supplied to the
node outlet. The inlet oil rate is calculated using the
separator model (IBAT) assigned to the node. It is
assumed that the remaining fraction (1-FRO) of the
inlet oil rate is partially separated in the node. Default
is one.
FRG Fraction of the gas rate in the node inlet supplied to the
node outlet. The inlet gas rate is calculated using the
separator model (IBAT) assigned to the node. It is
assumed that the remaining fraction (1-FRG) of the
inlet gas rate is partially separated in the node. Default
is one.
FRW Fraction of the water rate in the node inlet supplied to
the node outlet. It is assumed that the remaining
fraction (1-FRW) of the inlet water rate is partially
separated in the node. Default is one.
FRGFO Oil rate fraction. If FRGFO is entered, the gas rate in
the node outlet is calculated as the FRGFO fraction
times the oil rate in the node inlet. The outlet gas rate
is also limited by the inlet gas rate. If both FRG and
FRGFO fractions are input, then the gas rate in the
node outlet is determined as the maximum value of the
inlet gas rate multiplied by FRG and the inlet oil rate
multiplied by FRGFO.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-477

GASSPM Maximum rate of gas that can be partially separated in

the node, MSCF/D (SCM/D). All gas in excess of the
maximum gas separation capacities is supplied to the
output flow line of the node. Default value is 1.E+15.
REMOVE Well rate modifier indicator. If YES is entered and the
node is assigned to a well management level using
keywords WML and WMN, then gas rates and/or
water rates of all production wells connected to the
node will be adjusted for targeting calculations taking
into account gas and/or water partial separation in the
node. The REMOVE YES option can be applied only
in the node assigned to the gathering center
(GATHER) well management level. Default is NO,
meaning that the well production rates are not to be
adjusted.
REINJ Gas re-injection indicator. If YES is entered and the
node is assigned to a well management level using
keywords WML and WMN, then gas partially
separated in the node will be available for re-injection
in the corresponding well management level. The
REINJ YES option can be applied only in the node
assigned to the gathering center (GATHER) well
management level. Default is NO.
PTARG YES indicates that any constraints specified in this
NODES data (parameters QO, QG, QW, QL) are
interpreted as if read on PTARG cards (Section 4.3.1.)
The well management level and number are specified
using parameters WML and WMN, respectively. The
parameter WMN is required when PTARG is entered.
A gas production constraint entered in this manner
includes gas lift gas unless the GASLIF parameter on
the NETPAR card (Section 10.16) is set to zero. The
value NO indicates to use the standard surface pipeline
network algorithm. NO is the default if the PTARG
parameter is not entered.
Examples:
C
C Node parameter input.
C
NODES
NN NAME IBAT PMIN
1 NODE1 1 -1.E+9
2 NODE2 2 -1.E+9
3 NODE3 1 1620.
10-478 Landmark - R2003.4

C
NODES
NN NAME QO QL
4 NODE4 26500 1.E+15
C
C Gas partial separation in Node 5.
C
NODES
NN NAME WMN WML IBAT FPG GASSPM REMOVE QL
5 NODE5 1 GATHER 3 0.2 20000 YES 3000
10.10.1 Gas Partial Processing Optimization (PPOPT)

A gas partial processing optimization procedure is implemented. The procedure is
executed in the first num_out outer iterations of the next timestep after input of
the PPOPT card. An optimum fraction of gas supplied to an output flow line of
each node with partial processing is determined. This fraction is applied in
timesteps between the partial processing optimization calculations. The optimum
gas fraction is determined minimizing an objective function subject to constraints
on maximum amount of the separated gas and minimum fraction of gas supplied
to the node output flow line. The objective function is determined as a linear
combination of the field oil, gas, and water rates with the user-supplied
coefficients. The optimum control problem is sequentially solved for each node
for which GASSPM and FRG/FRGFO data was entered in the NODES card.
The PPOPT card must be input to apply the gas partial processing optimization
procedure. The coefficients of the objective function and number of outer
iterations in which the optimization procedure is executed are input in this card. If
PPOPT OFF is input, the optimum partial separation fractions, calculated in the
previous execution of the optimum gas partial processing optimization procedure,
will be ignored, and the normal partial processing algorithm will be executed.
ON num out oil coef gas coef water coef

PPOPT
OFF
Definitions:
num_out Number of outer iterations in which the partial

processing optimization will be executed.
oil_coef Coefficient of field oil production term in the objective
function.
gas_coef Coefficient of field gas production term in the
objective function.
water_coef Coefficient of field water production term in the
objective function.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-479

Example:
C
C Execute the partial processing optimization procedure in
C three outer iterations of the next time step.
C Use field oil production as the objective function.
PPOPT ON 3 1 0 0
10-480 Landmark - R2003.4

10.11 Node Connection Data (NODCON)

The NODCON card is used to define output connections for each node of the
surface pipeline network model.
NODCON
NODE param1 param2 . . . paramn
nm1 value1 value2 . . . valuen
nm2 value1 value2 . . . valuen
.
.
.
nmm value1 value2 . . . valuen
Definitions:
NODE Alpha label indicating that this column will contain a

name or number of a node.
nm Name or number of the node. A value of NN or a
NAME parameter previously defined in the NODES
card should be used in this column.
The following parameters can be input: OUTCON,
OUTNOD, OUTCNT, SPFCT, OUTCN2, OUTND2,
OUTCT2, SPFCT2, OUTCN3, OUTND3, OUTCT3,
SPFCT3, OUTCN4, OUTND4, OUTCT4, SPFCT4,
OUTCN5, OUTND5, OUTCT5, SPFCT5, OUTCN6,
OUTND6, OUTCT6, SPFCT6, IPVT.
OUTCON Name or number of the output connection. A value of
NN or a NAME parameter from the PIPES, TUBING,
or VALVE cards should be used in this column. Also,
a link name (link_name) or number (link_number)
from the LINK card can be input.
OUTNOD Name or number of the output node. A value of NN or
a NAME parameter from the NODES card should be
used in this column. The output connection defined in
column OUTCON links the node from column
NODE and the node from column OUTNOD.
OUTCNT Output connection type:
PIPE,
TUBING,
VALVE,
LINK.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-481

Default is PIPE.
SPFCT Fluid splitting factor for the output connection.
Default is 1.
OUTCNi, Name or number of additional output connections. A
i = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 value of NN or a NAME parameter from the PIPES,
TUBING, or VALVE cards should be used in this
column. Also, a link name (link_name) or number
(link_number) from the LINK card can be input.
OUTNDi, Name or number of additional output nodes. A value
i = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of NN or a NAME parameter from the NODES card
should be used in this column. The output connection
defined in column OUTCNi links the node from the
column NODE and the node from column
OUTNDi.
OUTCTi, Type of additional output connections.
i = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
PIPE,
TUBING,
VALVE,
LINK.
Default is PIPE.
SPFCTi, Fluid splitting factor for the output connections. A
i = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 non-zero value indicates the output connection is
active. The non-zero splitting factors are normalized to
the value one. Default is zero.
IPVT Flash calculations in the output connection are
performed using the "table" ipvt.
IPVTPR).
table number.
Default is one.
Examples:
C
C Nodes connection input.
C
NODCON
10-482 Landmark - R2003.4

NODE OUTNOD OUTCON OUTCNT

NODE1 NODE3 PIPE1 PIPE
NODE2 NODE3 PIPE2 PIPE
NODE3 NODE4 3 PIPE
C
C Node connection switching in Node 5
C
NODES
NN NAME PMIN IBAT QOMIN
4 NODE4 650 1 -1.E+9
5 NODE5 -1.E+9 1 10000.
6 NODE6 165 2 -1.E+9
C
C Active and potential connections for Node 5.
C
NODCON
NODE OUTNOD OUTCON OUTND2 OUTCN2
NODE5 4 PIPE3 NODE6 PIPE3
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-483

10.12 Lift Gas Composition (YINJA)

The YINJA card is used to specify the lift gas composition for production wells.
It is assumed that the DISSOL fraction of the gaslift gas has the composition
specified in the YINJA card. The composition of the other part of the gaslift gas is
assumed to be equal to the composition of the produced gas. The DISSOL fraction
can be input in the WELCON card(s).
YINJA wl
yinja1 yinja2... yinjanc
Definitions:
wl List of production wells for which lift gas

compositions are being specified (see Section 1.5.2).
yinjak The mole fraction of component k in the lift gas
stream. A value must be specified for each of the
components and the values must sum exactly to 1.0.
10-484 Landmark - R2003.4

10.13 Well Connection Data (WELCON)

Data of well connections are input after the WELCON keyword, including tubing
connections (from wellbore to wellhead) and well connections to nodes of the
surface pipeline network system.
WELCON
WELL param1 param2 . . . paramn
wn1 value1 value2 . . . valuen
.
.
.
wnm value1 value2 . . . valuen
Definitions:
WELL Alpha label indicating that a name or number of a

production or injection well is input in this column.
wn Name or number of a production or injection well.
The following parameters can be input: TUBCON,
TUBCNT, IPVTTB, WDZ, WDAT, WELHEAD,
OUTCON, OUTNOD, OUTCNT, SPFCT, OUTCN2,
OUTCN3, OUTCN4, OUTCN5, OUTCN6,
OUTND2, OUTND3, OUTDN4, OUTND5,
OUTND6, OUTCT2, OUTCT3, OUTCT4, OUTCT5,
OUTCT6, SPFCT2, SPFCT3, SPFCT4, SPFCT5,
SPFCT6, GLVDZ, DISSOL, IPVTOC, BHTEMP.
TUBCON Name or number of well tubing connection:
A value of NN or a NAME parameter from the PIPES,
TUBING, or VALVE card;
A link name (link_name) or number (link_number)
from the LINK card.
TUBCNT Tubing connection type:
PIPE,
TUBING,
VALVE,
LINK.
Default is TUBING.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-485

IPVTTB Flash calculations in the well tubing are performed

using the "table" ipvt.
IPVTPR).
table number.
Default is one.
WDZ Subsea depth of the first perforation, ft (m).
WDAT Subsea depth to which the flowing bottomhole
pressure is referenced, ft (m).
WELHEAD Wellhead subsea depth, ft (m). A negative value
should be input if a depth above sea level is desired.
OUTCON Name or number of the output connection. A value of
NN or a NAME parameter from the PIPES, TUBING,
or VALVE cards should be used in this column. Also,
a link name (link_name) or number (link_number)
from the LINK card can be input.
OUTNOD Name or number of the output node. A value of the
NN or a NAME parameter from the NODES card
should be used in this column. The output connection
defined in column OUTCON links the well from
column WELL and the node from column
OUTNOD.
OUTCNT Output connection type:
PIPE,
TUBING,
VALVE,
LINK.
Default is PIPE.
SPFCT Fluid splitting factor for the output connection.
Default is one.
OUTCNi, Name or number of additional output connections. A
i=2,3,4,5,6 value of NN or a NAME parameter from the PIPES,
TUBING, or VALVE cards should be used in this
column. Also, a link name (link_name) or number
(link_number) from the LINK card can be input.
10-486 Landmark - R2003.4

OUTNDi, Name or number of additional output nodes. A value

i=2,3,4,5,6 of NN or a NAME parameter from the NODES card
should be used in this column. The i-th output
connection defined in column OUTCN(i) links the
well from column WELL and the node from column
OUTND(i).
OUTCTi, Type of additional output connections:
i=2,3,4,5,6
PIPE,
TUBING,
VALVE,
LINK.
Default is PIPE.
SPFCTi, Fluid splitting factor for the output connection. A non-
i=2,3,4,5,6 zero value indicates the output connection is active.
The non-zero splitting factors are normalized to the
value one. Default is zero.
GLVDZ Subsea depth of the gaslift valve, ft (m).
DISSOL Percent of the lift gas that dissolves in the well fluid.
IPVTOC Flash calculations in the output connections are
performed using the "table" ipvt.
IPVTPR).
table number.
Default is one.
BHTEMP Bottomhole temperature, 0F (oC). This parameter is
used only if the heat transfer analysis is applied for the
determination of the temperature distribution in well
tubing string. Default is an ambient temperature in the
well bottomhole.
NOTE: When the WELCON card is used in combination with the ITUBE/TUBE
card for a production or injection well, the dzw parameter on the ITUBE/
TUBE card means subsea depth of the first perforation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-487

NOTE: Well potential connections OUTND(i), i=2,3,4,5,6 are applied only if the
surface pipeline network option is used in combination with the predictive
well management option (PREDICT NEW). In this case, the predictive well
management option is used for the well allocation to the pressure systems.
Well connections to nodes are automatically modified after the well
allocation to the pressure systems. Well management levels and pressure
systems must be defined for all potential nodes in the NODES cards using
keywords WML, WMN, and PRSYS.
Examples:
C
C Well connection input.
C
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT OUTNOD OUTCON OUTCNT
1 TUBIN1 TUBING NODE1 LINK1 LINK
4 TUBIN2 TUBING NODE2 PIPE5 PIPE
5 LINK2 LINK NODE3 LINK1 LINK
C
C Active and potential connections of Well 7.
C
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT OUTNOD OUTCON OUTND2 OUTCN2
7 LINK3 LINK NODE5 PIPE3 NODE2 PIPE3
C
C Flow in tubing of Well 6 is described by Hydraulic Table 1.
C
ITUBE 6
1
8335
WLWDAT 6
8300
C
WELCON
WELL OUTNOD OUTCON OUTCNT
6 NODE5 PIPE6 PIPE
C
C 2 "active" connections with equal fluid distributions of well 8.
C
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT OUTNOD OUTCON OUTND2 OUTCN2 SPFCT2
8 LINK3 LINK NODE5 PIPE3 NODE2 PIPE3 1.0
10-488 Landmark - R2003.4

10.14 Satellite Field Production Data (NODSOURCE and

SOUCOM)
In some cases, production from several reservoir oil fields are processed in shared
surface facilities. An option has been implemented to represent production from
satellite oil fields in integrated reservoir and surface pipeline network modeling.
Oil, gas, and water rates of the satellite oil fields and their fluid compositions can
be input as functions of time using the NODSOURCE and SOUCOM cards.
Satellite production modeling impacts pressure drop calculations in flow lines and
the targeting procedure in different well management levels, because satellite
production increases the amount of fluids supplied to pipelines and different levels
of the well management structure.
NODSOURCE
NODES node1 node2 . . . noden
(OIL oil_rate1 oil_rate2 . . .oil_raten)
(GAS gas_rate1 gas_rate2 . . .gas_raten)
(WATER water_rate1 water_rate2. . .water_raten)
Definitions:
node Name or number of a node to which a satellite field is

connected. The node must have been defined in the
NODES card as a value of NN or a NAME parameter.
oil_rate Oil rate of the satellite field connected to the node,
STB/D (STCM/D).
gas_rate Gas rate of the satellite field connected to the node,
MSCF/D (SCM/D).
water_rate Water rate of the satellite field connected to the node,
STB/D (STCM/D).
NOTE: If some node with satellite connections is assigned to a well management

level using keywords WML and WMN in the NODES card, the satellite
production will be added to the production in this level and all higher levels.
Otherwise, the satellite production will not be added to the production in
different well management levels and it only impacts pressure drop
calculations in flow lines.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-489

Example:
NODSOURCE
NODES NODE1
OIL 8537
GAS 18636
WATER 5751
SOUCOM node
comp1 comp2 . . . compnc
Definitions:
node Name or number of a node to which a satellite field is

connected. The node must have been defined in the
NODES card as a value of NN or a NAME parameter.
compk Molar fraction of the k-th hydrocarbon component in
satellite field fluids, fraction.
NOTE: NC molar fractions must be input. They can be input in several lines. The
sum of the molar fractions must be equal to one.
Example:
SOUCOM NODE1
0.0059000 0.4185992 0.0444999 0.0318999 0.0124000 0.0157 0.0179
0.0803058 0.1127808 0.0882468 0.1085218 0.0632459
10-490 Landmark - R2003.4

10.15 Pseudo Well Option

In some cases, sections of an oil/gas field are not represented in a reservoir model
but wells located in these sections are connected to the surface pipeline network
system. The pseudo well option has been implemented to represent production
from wells (which are not included in the reservoir model) using well inflow
correlations. The pseudo well option also can be used for satellite oil field
modeling. In this case, each satellite oil field should be represented as a pseudo
well.
The pseudo well option has been implemented only for production wells.
As a minimum, the following input are required for modeling each pseudo well:
the WELL card to assign a gathering center and a separator battery,
the PROD card to define the well type,
the FPERF card. Default values of reservoir pressure and fluid composition in
the pseudo well are computed as averaged values from the perforated
gridblocks defined with this card. The PSEUPRES and PSEUXY cards can be
used to overwrite the default values,
the QMAX card to set the maximum production rate,
three BHITAB tables to use in the well inflow performance correlations,
the PSEUTAB card to assign the corresponding well inflow correlations (the
BHITAB tables) to the pseudo well.
In addition, most well management options (for example, BHP, THP, QMIN,
ITUBE, WELCON, etc) can be used for the pseudo wells.
The production from the pseudo well can be included in the reservoir material
balance calculations using the PSEUPS card(s). Also, the PSEUPS card can be
used to convert a pseudo well to a normal production well or a normal well to
a pseudo well.
The following three well inflow correlations must be defined for each pseudo
well:
1. Bottomhole pressure as a two-dimensional tabular function of resevoir

pressure and production rate (oil, gas, water, or liquid).
2. Gas-oil ratio (or gas-liquid ratio, or oil-gas ratio) as a two-dimensional tabular

function of resevoir pressure and production rate (oil, gas, water, or liquid).
3. Water cut (or water-gas ratio) as a two-dimensional tabular function of

resevoir pressure and production rate (oil, gas, water, or liquid).
Also, a special option has been provided to define tubinghead pressure as a tabular
two-dimensional function of resevoir pressure and production rate (oil, gas,
water, or liquid). For this option, a tubing string model must be assigned to the
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-491

pseudo well in the WELCON card. The simulator internally calculates bottomhole
pressure for each entry of the two-dimensional BHITAB table. Then, it determines
parameters of Bendakhia and Azizs inflow performance relationships (see SPE
Paper 19823: H. Bendakhia and K. Aziz Inflow Performance Relationships for
Solution-Gas Drive Horizontal Wells presented in the 64th Annuak Technical
Conference and Exhibition held in San Antonia, TX, October 8-11, 1989) using a
curve fitting procedure.
10.15.1 Inflow Performance Correlations (BHITAB)

Three inflow performance correlations must be defined for each pseudo well:
BHP/THP, GLR/GOR/OGR, and WCUT/WGR.
O

BHITAB nbhi G

W
L
QI q1 q2 ... qk
QLIFT g1 g2 ... gk
PRES p1 p2 ... pn
BHP ( IQ )
THPIQ )
GLR ( IQ )
IPRES GOR ( IQ )
OGR ( IQ )
WCUT ( IQ )
WGR ( IQ )
ipres1 par(iq1) par(iq2) ... par(iqk)

...
...
...
ipresn par(iq1) par(iq2) ... par(iqk)
Definitions:
nbhi Number of the inflow performance table being read.

O Alpha label indicating that oil rates are entered on the
QI line. This is the default.
G Alpha label indicating that gas rates are entered on the
QI line.
10-492 Landmark - R2003.4

W Alpha label indicating that water rates are entered on

the QI line.
L Alpha label indicating that liquid rates are entered on
the QI line.
QI Alpha label indicating that values on this card are
production rates.
q Production rates; oil, water and liquid, STB/D
(STCM/D), or gas MSCF/D (SCM/D). Values can be
unequally spaced and must increase monotonically.
QLIFT Alpha label indicating that values on this card are
gaslift gas rates.
g Gaslift gas rates, MSCF/D (SCM/D). The number of
values must equal the number of values on the QI card.
PRES Alpha label indicating that values on this card are
reservoir pressure.
p Reservoir pressure values, psia (kPa). Values can be
unequally spaced and must increase monotonically.
column under this heading are reservoir pressure
indices.
BHP(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are bottomhole pressure
values for each production rate input. Parentheses
must appear in this alpha label.
THP(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are tubinghead pressure
values for each production rate input. Parentheses
must appear in this alpha label. The simulator
internally calculates bottomhole pressure for each
entry of the two-dimensional BHITAB table. Then, it
determines parameters of Bendakhia and Azizs inflow
performance relationships using a curve fitting
procedure.
GLR(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are gas-liquid ratio values
for each production rate input. Parentheses must
appear in this alpha label.
GOR(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are gas-oil ratio values for
each production rate input. Parentheses must appear in
this alpha label.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-493

OGR(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the value read in the

column under this heading are oil-gas ratio values for
this alpha label.
WCUT(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are water cut values for
this alpha label.
WGR(IQ) Alpha label indicating that the values read in the
column under this heading are water-gas ratio values
for each production rate input. Parentheses must
appear in this alpha label.
ipresn Index refering to the n-th reservoir pressure entry
read.
par(iq) Value of corresponding parameter,
psia (kPa) if BHP or THP;
SCF/STB (SCM/STCM) if GLR or GOR;
STB/SCF (STCM/SCM) if OGR;
fraction if WCUT;
STB/SCF (STCM/SCM) if WGR;
for corresponding production rate. The corresponding
production rate is the q value that would correspond to
iq. The number of parameter values on this card must
equal to the number of q values on the QI card.
NOTE: 1. Liquid rate (L) must be used with gas-liquid ratios (GLR(IQ)).
Oil rate (O) must be used with gas-oil ratios (GOR(IQ)).
Gas rate (G) must be used with oil-gas ratios (OGR(IQ)).
Liquid rate (L) or oil rate (O) must be used with water cuts
(WCUT(IQ)).
Gas rate (G) must be used with water-gas ratios (WGR(IQ)).
2. When tubinghead pressures (THP(IQ)) are input, the first rate entry q1
must be zero.
3. QLIFT data may only be entered when tubinghead pressures (THP(IQ))

are input.
4. Bottomhole pressures/tubinghead pressures may not exceed the

maximum reservoir pressure pn.
5. A tubinghead pressure correlation may be assigned to only one pseudo

well.
10-494 Landmark - R2003.4

Example:
C Inflow performance Curve for Well TB04

BHITAB 26 O
QI 140 280 420 560 700 840 980 1120 1260 1400
PRES 4604
IPRES BHP(IQ)
1 4509 4410 4310 4211 4112 4012 3913 3813 3714 3614
C
C Gas-Oil Ratio Curve for Well TB04
BHITAB 27 O
QI 140 280 420 560 700 840 980 1120 1260 1400
PRES 4604
IPRES GOR(IQ)
1 1289 1330 1344 1350 1354 1356 1358 1360 1361 1362
C
C Water Cut Curve for Well TB04
BHITAB 28 O
QI 140 280 420 560 700 840 980 1120 1260 1400
PRES 4604
IPRES WCUT(IQ)
1 .598 .674 .693 .702 .707 .711 .713 .715 .716 .717
10.15.2 Correlation Assignments (PSEUTAB)

Assignments of inflow performance correlations (BHITAB tables) to each pseudo
well are input using the PSEUTAB card.
PSEUTAB well ibhp ig iw
Definitions:
well Well name or well number of a pseudo well.

ibhp BHITAB table number which defines bottomhole
pressure or tubinghead pressure as a tabular function
of production rate and reservoir pressure (BHP(IQ) or
THP(IQ)).
ig BHITAB table number which defines gas-liquid ratio,
or gas-oil ratio, or oil-gas ratio as a tabular function of
production rate and reservoir pressure (GLR(IQ), or
GOR(IQ), or OGR(IQ)).
iw BHITAB table number which defines water cut or
water-gas ratio as a tabular function of production rate
and reservoir pressure (WCUT(IQ) or WGR(IQ)).
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-495

Example:
PSEUTAB TB04 26 27 28
10.15.3 Reservoir Pressure (PSEUPRES)

Reservoir pressure used in inflow performance correlations for pseudo wells can
be input using the PSEUPRES card.
PSEUPRES wl
pres1 pres2 . . . presn
Definitions:
w1 List of pseudo wells for which reservoir pressure

values are being entered (see Section 1.5.2).
pres Reservoir pressure value, psia (kPa), used in inflow
performance correlations for the corresponding
pseudo well. If a value of 1 is entered as a reservoir
pressure or the PSEUPRES card is not entered for a
pseudo well, the average reservoir pressure in
gridblocks with open well perforations is used.
Example:
PSEUPRES TB04 TB06 TB07

4604 4700 -1
10.15.4 Compositions (PSEUXY)

Compositions of liquid and vapor hydrocarbon phases for pseudo wells can be
input using the PSEUXY card.
PSEUXY w1
x1 x2 ... xk ... xnc
y1 y2 ... yk ... ync
Definitions:
w1 List of pseudo wells for which compositions of liquid

and vapor hydrocarbon phases are being entered (see
Section 1.5.2).
10-496 Landmark - R2003.4

xk Molar fraction of the k-th hydrocarbon component in

the liquid phase of fluids produced in the
corresponding pseudo wells, fraction. If a value of -1
is entered as the first component fraction or the
PSEUXY card is not entered for a pseudo well, the
average values of the compositions in gridblocks with
open well perforations are used.
yk Molar fraction of the k-th hydrocarbon component in
the vapor phase of fluids produced in the
corresponding pseudo well, fraction.
Example:
PSEUXY TB04 TB06

.8934337E-01 .4506625E+00 .5055475E-01 .3244427E-01 .5654376E-02 >
.1570380E-01 .1594286E-01 .7097116E-01 .9432530E-01 .6633679E-01 >
.6332303E-01 .4473776E-01
.1156343E+00 .7543256E+00 .5447269E-01 .2560875E-01 .3748278E-02 >
.9230980E-02 .6947261E-02 .1682564E-01 .1040004E-01 .2378132E-02 >
.4222647E-03 .6095310E-05
PSEUXY TB07
-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
100000000000
10.15.5 Well Status (PSEUWS)

The production from pseudo wells can be included in the reservoir material
balance calculations using the PSEUPS card(s). Also, the PSEUPS card can be
used to convert pseudo wells to normal production wells or normal
production wells to pseudo wells.
TABLE IGNORE
PSEUWS
NORMAL INCLUDE w1
Definitions:
w1 List of pseudo wells for which data is being entered

TABLE Alpha label indicating that the wells in the specified
list are to be considered as pseudo wells.
NORMAL Alpha label indicating that the pseudo wells in the
specified list are to be considered as normal
production wells.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-497

IGNORE Alpha label indicating that production from the

pseudo wells in the specified list is to be excluded
from reservoir material balance calculations. This
option is not compatible with NORMAL.
INCLUDE Alpha label indicating that production from the wells
in the specified list is to be included in reservoir
material balance calculations.
NOTE: If the PSEUTAB cards are used for some production wells these wells are
considered as pseudo wells and inflow performance correlations are applied
from production modeling in these wells. In some time during the
simulation, you can switch these wells to normal wells using the PSEUPS
card(s). Later you can convert them back to the pseudo wells (again applying
the PSEUPS cards) if it is required.
The IGNORE option can be applied only for pseudo wells.
Example:
PSEUWS NORMAL TB04 TB05

PSEUWS TABLE INCLUDE TB07
10-498 Landmark - R2003.4

10.16 General Parameters of the Surface Pipeline Network System

(NETPAR)
General parameters of the surface pipeline network system can be divided into the
following groups:
default parameters of pressure calculations in pipes and well tubing strings

(YOUNG, PRESIN),
parameters and tolerances which are used in the phase-equilibrium

calculations (TOLRKV, TOLRTC, TOLRPC, TOLRSP, TOLCP, TOLCMC,
MAXFLI, MAXSSI),
parameters and tolerances that are applied for the determination of the
pressure distribution in the surface pipeline network system (PS, TS, TNET,
MAXNIT, PRRTOL, RTRTOL, TIMEIN, TIMEST, OUTITR, GASLIF,
OUTFIL, FRLOSS),
parameters of the simplified heat transfer analysis option for production

networks only (HEATTR, SHCOIL, SHCGAS, SHCWAR, HTCPIPE,
HTCTUB),
pressure gradient correction factors (GRPGCR, FRPGCR, ACPGCR), and
parameters used for sonic velocity calculations (SVLOIL, SVLGAS,

SVLWAT).
NETPAR
param1 param2 . . .paramn
value1 value2 . . .valuen
Definitions:

The following parameters can be input:
YOUNG, PRESIN,
TOLRKV, TOLRTC, TOLRPC, TOLRSP, TOLCP,
TOLCMC, MAXFLI, MAXSSI,
PS, TS, TNET, MAXNIT, PRRTOL, RTRTOL,
TIMEIN, TIMEST, OUTITR, GASLIF, OUTFIL,
FRLOSS,
HEATTR, SHCOIL, SHCGAS, SHCWAT, HTCPIPE,
HTCTUB,
GRPGCR, FRPGCR, ACPGCR,
SVLOIL, SVLGAS, SVLWAT
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-499

PIPE AND TUBING DEFAULT PARAMETERS

YOUNG Default value of the Young modules (see descriptions
of the YOUNG keyword in the PIPES and TUBING
cards), million psia (million kPa). Default is 30.E+6
psia.
PRESIN Default value of the pressure increment (see
descriptions of the PRESIN keyword in the PIPES and
TUBING cards), psia (kPa). Default is 400 psia.
PARAMETERS OF FLASH CALCULATIONS
MAXFLI Maximum number of iterations allowed for phase-
equilibrium calculations. Default is 20.
MAXSSI Maximum number of successive-substitution
iterations allowed for phase-equilibrium calculations.
The successive-substitution procedure is used as the
preconditioning step in the phase-equilibrium
calculations. Default is 4.
TOLRKV Relative K-value tolerance. It is assumed that the
phase equilibrium calculations converge in an iteration
when the maximum value of relative K-value changes
is less than the tolerance TOLRKV and a matrix of
second derivatives of the Gibbs free energy function is
positive-definite. Default is .005.
TOLCP Chemical potential tolerance. It is assumed that the
phase equilibrium calculations converge in an iteration
when the maximum value of absolute differences
between chemical potentials in liquid and vapor
hydrocarbon phases is less than the tolerance TOLCP
and a matrix of second derivatives of the Gibbs free
energy function is positive-definite. Default is .0001.
TOLRTC Relative temperature tolerance. The phase equilibrium
computations are not repeated if relative changes of
temperature, pressure, and composition are less than
the corresponding tolerances TOLRTC, TOLRPC, and
TOLCMC, and if the relative difference between the
current pressure and the previously calculated
saturation pressure is larger than TOLRSP. Default is
.01.
10-500 Landmark - R2003.4

TOLRPC Relative pressure tolerance. The phase equilibrium

computations are not repeated if relative changes of
pressure, temperature, and composition are less than
the corresponding tolerances TOLRPC, TOLRTC, and
TOLCMC, and if the relative difference between the
.001.
TOLCMC Composition tolerance. The phase equilibrium
computations are not repeated if the maximum value
of composition changes and relative changes of
pressure, and temperature are less than the
corresponding tolerances TOLCMC, TOLRPC, and
TOLRTC, and if the relative difference between a
.001.
TOLRSP Saturation pressure tolerance. The phase equilibrium
computations are not repeated if the relative difference
between the current pressure and the previously
calculated saturation pressure is larger than TOLRSP,
and if relative changes of pressure, temperature, and
composition are less than the corresponding tolerances
TOLRPC, TOLRTC, and TOLCMC. Default is .001.
PARAMETERS OF SURFACE PIPELINE
NETWORK CALCULATIONS
TS Standard temperature, F (C). Default is 60F (15C).
PS Standard pressure, psia (kPa). Default is 14.65 psia
(101.325 kPa or 1.03353 kg/cm2).
TNET Default value of temperature in nodes of the surface
pipeline network system, F (C). Default is 60F
(15C).
TIMEIN Time increment between two sequential recalculations
of production rates using the surface pipeline network
option, days. Default is 30 days.
TIMEST Maximum number of timesteps between two
sequential recalculations of production rates using the
surface pipeline network option. Default is 99999.
OUTITR Maximum number of outer iterations in which the
surface pipeline network calculations are executed.
Default is 2.
MAXNIT Maximum number of iterations allowed in the surface
pipeline network calculations. Default is 100.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-501

PRRTOL Relative pressure tolerance. It is assumed that the

surface pipeline network calculations converge if the
relative difference between bottomhole pressure
values on the inflow performance curve (defined by a
wellbore model) and outflow performance curve
(defined by the surface pipeline network model) is less
than the tolerance PRRTOL in any production well
connected to the surface pipeline network system.
Default is .0001.
RTRTOL Relative rate tolerance. It is assumed that the surface
pipeline network calculations converge if the relative
difference between values of the specified rate and the
calculated rate in a node of the surface pipeline
network system is less than the tolerance RTRTOL.
Default is .0001.
GASLIF Gaslift indicator. Gaslift rates are included in the
surface pipeline network calculations if the value of
this parameter is one. They are excluded from these
calculations only if a value of zero is input. Default is
one.
OUTFIL Fortran unit number used for the output of the tubing
report. Default is 30.
FRLOSS Friction loss indicator. The friction loss between
perforations of a horizontal or inclined well will be
computed if the value of this parameter is one. It will
be ignored if the value is zero. Default is zero.
PARAMETERS OF HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS
(Applies only to production networks.)
HEATTR Heat transfer analysis indicator. This parameter must
be set to one to apply the simplified heat transfer
analysis option for the determination of the
temperature distribution in well tubing strings. The
option is not used if the parameter value of zero is
input. Default is zero.
SHCOIL Specific heat capacity of oil, BTU/(lbm*oF)
(J/(kg*oK). This parameter is applied only if the
simplified heat transfer analysis option is used. Default
is 0.53 BTU/(lbm*oF).
SHCGAS Specific heat capacity of gas, BTU/(lbm*oF)
10-502 Landmark - R2003.4

SHCWAT Specific heat capacity of water, BTU/(lbm*oF)

HTCPIPE Default value of heat transfer coefficient of pipes,
BTU/hr*ft2*oF), (W/(m2*oK). This parameter is
applied only if the simplified heat transfer analysis
option is used. Default is 1.0 BTU/(hr*ft2*oF).
HTCTUB Default value of heat transfer coefficient of tubing,
BTU/(hr*ft2*oF), (W/(m2*oK). This parameter is
applied only if the simplified heat transfer analysis
option is used. Default is 3.0 BTU/(hr*ft2*oF).
GRPGCR Correction factor for gravity pressure gradient in pipes
and tubing, fraction. Default is 1.0.
FRPGCR Correction factor for friction pressure gradient in pipes
and tubing, fraction. Default is 1.0.
ACPGCR Correction factor for acceleration pressure gradient in
pipes and tubing, fraction. Default is 1.0.
SVLOIL Sonic velocity of oil, ft/s (m/s). Default is 3000 ft/s.
SVLGAS Sonic velocity of gas, ft/s (m/s). Default is 1200 ft/s.
SVLWAT Sonic velocity of water, ft/s (m/s). The default value is
2700 ft/s.
value Value of the corresponding parameter.
NOTE: In-situ fluid velocity in pipes and tubing strings is limited by the fluid sonic
velocity. The sonic velocity of the multiphase fluid which depends on
properties of oil, gas, and water is calculated using Goulds method. If the in-
situ fluid velocity in pipes and tubing strings exceeds 95% of the fluid sonic
velocity, it is reduced to this value.
Examples:
C
C General parameter input.
C
NETPAR
PS TS MAXNIT PRRTOL TIMEIN
14.7 60. 30 1.E-4 15
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-503

10.17 Output of Surface Pipeline Network Information

Results of the well tubing string and surface pipeline network calculations can be
output in the following reports:
node report,
node spreadsheet.
tubing report, and
automatic tuning reports (see Chapter 11).
They also can be output in the plot file.
Five-dimensional hydraulic tables can be generated for any well tubing string and/
or any connection between nodes of the surface pipeline network system at any
time during the simulation.
10.17.1 Node Report in Print File

Pressures and rates at different nodes of the surface pipeline network system can
be output in the print file using the modified WLGRP card with the keyword
NODES. The information will be printed for nodes specified after the WLGRP
card. Also, a well report will be output for all production or injection wells
connected to the specified nodes through the surface pipeline system. The
frequency of the node and group report output can be controlled by the PRINT
WLGRP card.
WLGRP grpnum (grpnam) NODES

node_list
Definitions:

grpnam Group name of up to eight (8) characters. The first
NODES Alpha label indicating that node report will be
generated.
node_list List of surface pipeline network nodes belonging to
the group. A value of NN or a NAME parameter from
the NODES card can be input in this list.
10-504 Landmark - R2003.4

Examples:
WLGRP 1 WELLGR1 NODES

NODE1 2 4
WLGRP 2 NODES
5
10.17.2 Node Spreadsheet File (SSSUM)

The SSSUM card, with the NODE keyword, is used to specify options and
variables to appear in the node spreadsheet summary file. See section 6.18 for a
description of the other types of spreadsheet files that may be requested. The node
spreadsheet file is written to FORTRAN Unit 80. The frequency of the output is
controlled by the SSSUM parameter on the PRINT card.
No variables are automatically written to this file. Each must be explicitly

requested.
SSSUM NODE (TAB) (HEADER) varnm1 varnm2 ... varnmn
Definitions:
NODE Alpha label indicating that the subsequent data applies to

the node spreadsheet file.
TAB Alpha label indicating that the columns will be separated

by a tab character. Omission will result in columns
separated by a comma.
HEADER Alpha label indicating that a title line, column header

line, and a units line should be included in the file at each
time.
varnm Alpha label specifying one or more of the following

variables:
NUMBER Node number.
NAME Node name.
TIME Simulation time.
DATE Calendar date.
TSNUM Timestep number.
QGP Gas production rate.
QOP Oil production rate.
QWP Water production rate.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-505

CGP Cumulative gas production.
COP Cumulative oil production.
CWP Cumulative water production.
QGI Gas injection rate.
QWI Water injection rate.
CGI Cumulative gas injection.
CWI Cumulative water injection.
TEMP Node temperature.
PRES Node pressure.
WMLVL Associated well management level.
WMNAME Well management member name.
WMNUM Well management member number.
NOTE: 1. All of the alpha labels must appear on one SSSUM card. If necessary,
the continuation character > can be used.
2. The alpha label NODE must be specified to obtain the node

spreadsheet file.
3. Except for TAB and HEADER, the order of the alpha labels is the
order the variables will appear in the file.
4. Each SSSUM NODE card supercedes and replaces the previous

SSSUM NODE card.
10-506 Landmark - R2003.4

10.17.3 Tubing Report
A tubing report can be output for any set of wells at any time during simulation.
Pressure, temperature, hold-up, flow regime, pressure gradient, in situ velocities,
and densities at different subsea depths of well tubing strings are included in the
report. Values of these variables are printed at the subsea depths defined in the
CURVE ELEVPR card. If the CURVE ELEVPR card is not used for some tubing
segment, the values of the specified variables are printed in the inlet and outlet of
the tubing segment. The tubing report is generated in Fortran unit OUTFIL, which
can be input in the NETPAR card. The default unit number is 30.
The following steps are required to print the tubing report:
1. Group all wells for which the tubing reports must be generated in some well
group using the WLGRP card;
2. Include the TUBING keyword in the WLGRP card;
3. Determine frequencies of the tubing report output in the PRINT WLGRP card.
WLGRP grpnum (grpnam) TUBING

well_list
Definitions:

grpnam Group name of up to eight (8) characters. The first
TUBING Alpha label indicating that tubing report will be
output.
well_list List of wells for which the tubing report will be
generated.
Examples:
WLGRP 3 WELLGR3 TUBING

WELL1 WELL2
PRINT WLGRP TIME
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-507

10.17.4 Surface Pipeline Network Information in Plot File

Pressure and rates at different nodes of the surface pipeline network system will
be output in the plot records if the keyword PLOT is included in the Utility Data,
the keyword WPLOT is included in the recurrent data, and:
1. when the vdb file is being written, the SURFACE class of data is requested on
the PLOT card,
2. when the plot file is being written, the GATHER class of data is requested on
the PLOT card.
10.17.5 Generation of Hydraulic Tables (HTOUTPUT)

Five-dimensional hydraulic tables can be generated for any well tubing string and/
or any connection between nodes of the surface pipeline network system at any
time during the simulation. The hydraulic table constructs pressure at the inlet of
the connection (well tubing string or connection between nodes) as a five-
dimensional tabular function of pressure at the outlet of the connection, liquid
rate, gas-oil ratio, water cut, and gas-lift rate. Alternatively, oil or gas rate may be
used instead of the liquid rate, oil-gas ratio may be used instead of the gas-oil
ratio, and water-gas ratio may be used instead of the water cut.
If the HTOUTPUT is requested for some well, the hydraulic table will be
generated for the tubing string of this well. If the HTOUTPUT is requested for
some node, the hydraulic table will be generated for the output connection
between this node and the node of the higher level.
Liquid or gas hydraulic tables can be generated. For the generation of the liquid
hydraulic table, outlet pressure entries (PRESSURE card), liquid or oil rate entries
(QLIQ or QO card), gas-oil ratio entries (GOR card), and water cut entries
(WCUT card) must be input. Optionally, the gas-lift rate entries (GASLIFT card)
may also be input. For the generation of a gas hydraulic table, outlet pressure
entries (PRESSURE card), gas rate entries (QGAS card), oil-gas ratio entries
(OGR card), and water-gas entries (WGR card) must be input.
The hydraulic table is generated at the end of the timestep following the
specification of the HTOUTPUT card.
Hydraulic tables can be generated only for wells (and/or nodes) with non-zero
production rates at the end of the timestep following the specification of the
HTOUTPUT card. Also, the well tubing strings (node connections) for which the
output of the hydraulic tables are requested must be assigned to the wells (nodes)
in the WELCON (NODCON) cards. The corresponding WELCON (NODCON)
cards must be input before the HTOUTPUT card.
The generated hydraulic tables can be output in BHPTAB format or they can be
output in spreadsheet format. If the BHPTAB format is applied, the hydraulic
table can be used as input data in a VIP-EXEC data set.
The generated hydraulic tables are stored internally in VIP, and they can be used
in LINK cards. However, they can be referenced in the LINK cards only after the
DATE/TIME card following the HTOUTPUT input.
10-508 Landmark - R2003.4

If the hydraulic table is generated for a well tubing string, the THP values in the
table are the values of tubinghead pressure at the subsea depth of the wellhead
which is input as WELHEAD in the corresponding WELCON card. The BHP
values in the table are the values of bottomhole pressure at the reference depth.
The reference depth is defined as the subsea depth of the first active perforation if
it is smaller than the subsea depth of the tubing string bottom. Otherwise, the
reference depth is determined as the subsea depth of the tubing string bottom. The
subsea depth of the first active perforation can be input by the user in the
WELCON card as the WDZ parameter. If it is not input, the subsea depth of the
first active perforation is determined by the simulator as the subsea depth of the
top of the first open perforation with non-zero permeability-thickness. The
difference between the reference depth and the wellhead subsea depth is printed as
the third parameter in the BHPTAB card.
If the hydraulic table is generated for a node, the THP values in the table are the
values of pressure at the outlet of the connection between this node and the node
of the higher level. The BHP values in the table are the values of pressure at the
inlet of the connection. The difference between the subsea depth of the connection
inlet and the subsea depth of the connection outlet is printed as the third parameter
in the BHPTAB card.
Values of oil and gas rates required for the construction of the hydraulic table are
determined using the separator battery assigned to the corresponding well (node)
in the WELL (NODES) card as the IBAT parameter.
The number of the gas-oil ratio (oil-gas) entries must be input in the GOR (OGR)
card. Values of the gas-oil ratio entries are calculated internally by varying the
liquid mole fraction in the range from 0.05 to 0.95, or the range specified by the
user, with equally spaced intervals.
Number of entries, minimum value, and maximum value must be input in each of
the PRESSURE, QLIQ/QO/QGAS, WCUT/WGR, and GASLIFT cards. Values
of each of the entries will be equally spaced.
HTOUTPUT
WELLS w1
tnw 1 tnw 2 tnw n
NODES n1
tnn 1 tnn 2 tnn n
PRESSURE nnp pmin pmax
QLIQ
QO nnq qmin qmax
QGAS
GOR nng gmin gmax

OGR
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-509

WCUT nnw wmin wmax

WGR
(GASLIFT nngl glmin glmax)
(FILENUMBER un (SPREADSHEET))
Definitions:
WELLS Alpha label indicating that the well list is input in this
card.
wl List of wells for which hydraulic tables should be
generated. (See Section 1.5.2)
tnw Hydraulic table numbercorresponding to each well.
The table number should not exceed NBHPMX
defined in the DIM card.
NODES Alpha label indicating that the node list is input in this
card.
nl List of nodes for which hydraulic tables should be
generated. (See Section 1.5.2)
tnn Hydraulic table number corresponding to each node.
The table number should not exceed the NBHPMX
limit defined in the DIM card.
PRESSURE Alpha label indicating that the outlet pressure entries
in the hydraulic tables are described in this card.
nnp Number of outlet pressure entries (THP) in the
hydraulic tables. The number of outlet pressure entries
should not exceed the NBHPQ limit defined in the
DIM card.
pmin Minimum value of the outlet pressure entries (THP) in
the hydraulic tables, psia (kPa).
pmax Maximum value of the outlet pressure entries (THP) in
the hydraulic tables, psia (kPa).
QLIQ Alpha label indicating that the liquid rate entries in the
hydraulic tables are described in this card. This must
be used with PRESSURE, GOR, and WCUT.
QO Alpha label indicating that the oil rate entries in the
be used with PRESSURE, GOR, and WCUT.
10-510 Landmark - R2003.4

QGAS Alpha label indicating that the gas rate entries in the
be used with PRESSURE, OGR, and WGR.
nnq Number of liquid, oil, or gas rate entries in the
hydraulic tables. The number of the rate entries should
not exceed the NBHPQ limit defined in the DIM card.
qmin Minimum value of the liquid or oil rate entries, STB/D
(STCM/D), or the gas rate entries, MSCF/D (SCM/D)
in the hydraulic tables.
qmax Maximum value of the liquid or oil rate entries, STB/
D (STCM/D), or the gas rate entries, MSCF/D (SCM/
D) in the hydraulic tables.
GOR Alpha label indicating that the gas-oil ratio entries in
the hydraulic tables are described in this card. This
must be used with QLIQ and QO.
OGR Alpha label indicating that the oil-gas ratio entries in
the hydraulic tables are described in this card. This
nng Number of gas-oil ratio or oil-gas ratio entries in the
hydraulic tables. The number of gas-oil ratio or oil-gas
ratio entries should not exceed the NBHPQ limit
gmin Minimum value of the liquid mole fraction, to be used
in computing gas-oil ratio or oil-gas ratio. Default is
0.05.
gmax Maximum value of the liquid mole fraction, to be used
in computing gas-oil ratio or oil-gas ratio. Default is
0.95.
WCUT Alpha label indicating that the water cut entries in the
be used with QLIQ and QO.
WGR Alpha label indicating that the water-gas ratio entries
in the hydraulic tables are described in this card. This
nnw Number of water cut or water-gas ratio entries in the
hydraulic tables. The number of water cut or water-gas
ratio entries should not exceed the NBHPQ limit
wmin Minimum value of the water cut entries, fraction, or
water-gas ratio entries, STB/MMSCF (STCM/
MSCM) in the hydraulic tables.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-511

wmax Maximum value of the water cut entries, fraction, or

water-gas ratio entries, STB/MMSCF (STCM/
MSCM) in the hydraulic tables.
GASLIFT Alpha label indicating that the gas-lift rate entries in
the hydraulic tables are described in this card. This can
be used with QLIQ or QO.
nngl Number of gas-lift rate entries in the hydraulic tables.
The number of gas-lift rate entries should not exceed
the NBHPQ limit defined in the DIM card.
glmin Minimum value of the gas-lift rate entries in the
hydraulic tables, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
glmax Maximum value of the gas-lift rate entries in the
hydraulic tables, MSCF/D (SCM/D).
FILENUMBER Alpha label indicating that the FORTRAN logical unit
for the output of the hydraulic tables is input in this
card.
un FORTRAN logical unit for the output of the hydraulic
tables. Default is 6.
SPREADSHEET Alpha label indicating that the hydraulic tables must
be output in spreadsheet format. If the
SPREADSHEET keyword is not input, the hydraulic
tables are output in BHPTAB format.
NOTE: 1. The number of tnw values must equal the number of wells in the well
list.
2. The number of tnn values must equal the number of nodes in the node
list.
3. The total number of inlet pressure values (BHP), which is equal to nnp
* nng * nnw * nng1, should not exceed the NBHPV limit defined in the
DIM card.
4. One and only one of the QLIQ, QO, or QGAS labels must be
specified.
5. One and only one of the GOR or OGR labels must be specified.
6. One and only one of the WCUT or WGR labels must be specified.
10-512 Landmark - R2003.4

Example:
C
C Apply Link LINK1 for tubing string modeling in Well WELL1
C
LINK 1 LINK1
C NN Name Type Num Pressure_CorrectionIPVT
1 TUBIN1 TUBING 1 0. 2
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT WDZ WDAT
WELL1 LINK1 LINK 20500 21000
C
C Generate hydraulic table with Number 5 for Well WELL1
C
HTOUTPUT
WELLS WELL1
5
PRESSURE 11 1000 2000
QLIQ 11 1000 40000
GOR 4
WCUT 6 0 0.95
GASLIFT 2 0 6000
FILENUMBER 30 SPREADSHEET
.
.
C
C Apply the generated hydraulic table in Link LINK1 after DATE card following
C the HTOUTPUT input.
C
DATE 1 12 2002
C
.
.
LINK 1 LINK1
C NN Name Type Num Pressure_Correction Separator
1 5 BHPTAB 1 0. IBAT 1
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-513

10.18 Production Well Optimization Option

The production well optimization option allocates well production rates and
selects the surface network connections through the maximization of the
following objective function:
pn
Objective Function = ( c oj q oj + c gj q gj + c gj q glgj + c wj q wj )
j = p1
where:
qo, qg, qglg, and qw are the oil production, gas production, gaslift gas injection,
and water production rates, respectively, and
the objective coefficients, coj, cgj, and cwj, are specified by the user.
The well rates are constrained by maximum oil rate, total gas (production gas and
gaslift gas) rate, liquid rate and well velocity specified at the well level. They are
also constrained by maximum rates and velocity at the nodes. By assuming
constant gas-oil ratio, water cut and total gas-liquid ratio, the problem is
simplified to a linear optimization problem. The SLATEC (Sandia, Los Alamos,
Air Force Weapons Laboratory Technical Exchange Committee) library, linear
programming package dsplp is incorporated into VIP to solve this linear
optimization problem.
10.18.1 Default Dimensions (DIM)

Definition:
MXLSPN Maximum number of levels for the surface pipeline

network structure. Default is 5.
10.18.2 Objective Coefficients (OBJCOEF)

The OBJCOEF card is used to assign objective coefficients for wells. This card is
required to turn on the production well optimization option.
OBJCOEF w1
headings
values
10-514 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
w1 List of wells for which objective coefficients are

being specified (see Section 1.5.2). If the well list is
not input, the coefficients are assumed to apply to
all production wells.
OIL Column heading for Co, the objective coefficient for

oil rate, (STB/D)-1, ((STCM/D)-1). Default is zero.
GAS Column heading for Cg, the objective coefficient for

gas rate, (MSCF/D)-1, ((SCM/D)-1). Default is zero.
WATER Column heading for Cw, the objective coefficient for

water rate, (STB/D)-1, ((STCM/D)-1). Default is
zero.
NOTE: 1. For the optimization option to be performed, at least one well with
non-zero objective coefficient must be specified.
2. All 3 headings do not have to be specified for a well, but the omitted
coefficients are set to zero. That is, previously specified coefficients
are not retained.
Examples:
C
C DEFINE OBJECTIVE COEFFICIENTS FOR ALL
C PRODUCTION WELLS
C
OBJCOEF
OIL GAS WATER
1. 0. 0.
10.18.3 Lock Well Rates (LOCK)
LOCK w1
ON
OFF
Definitions:
w1 List of wells for which lock status is being specified

(see Section 1.5.2). If the well list is not input, the
lock status is assumed to apply to all production
wells.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-515

ON This list of wells will be locked from production

well optimization.
OFF This list of wells will not be locked from production

well optimization. This is the default.
Example:
C
C LOCK WELL W32 AND E12A FROM PRODUCTION WELL
C OPTIMIZATION
C
LOCK W32 E12A
ON
10.18.4 Surface Network Optimization Control (NTOPTC)

The NTOPTC card is used to control the well and node reconnections in the
production well optimization option. This card is required each time when the
well and node reconnections are considered.
NTOPTC
param1 param2 . . . paramn
value2 value2 . . . valuen
Definitions:
param Alpha label of those control parameters being

defined. The following parameters can be input:
DOBJMN Minimum increment of the objective function for a

well to change its connection to another node.
Default is zero. A value of zero means that the
reconnection of wells to other nodes is not allowed.
Default is 0.
NWSWT Maximum number of reconnections allowed for

wells. Default is 0.
SIMPL Indicates whether the simplified method for the

well rates calculation will be applied. The
simplified method calculates well rates according to
the new tubinghead pressure and it assumes that
other well rates are not affected by the reconnection.
YES means to use the simplified method; NO means
not to use it. Default is NO.
NCYCLES Maximum number of search cycles performed in

well connection optimization. One search cycle is
defined as the procedure that all eligible wells have
10-516 Landmark - R2003.4

been tested for other potential reconnections. This

parameter does not apply to node connection
optimization. Default is 1.
DOBJND Minimum increment of the objective function for a

node to change its connection to another node. A
value of zero means that the reconnection of wells
to other nodes is not allowed. Default is 0.
NWSWT Maximum number of reconnections allowed for

nodes. Default is 0.
VELRST Indicates whether velocity limits are to be reset if

the specified velocity limits are violated. YES means
to reset; NO means not to reset. Default is NO.
NOTE: When this card is entered, all data is reset to default values.
Example:
C
C MAXIMUM 10 WELL RECONNECTIONS ARE ALLOWED.
C EACH RECONNECTION NEEDS TO AT LEAST INCREASE
C THE OBJECTIVE FUNCTION BY 100. MAXIMUM 2 SEARCH
C CYCLES ARE ALLOWED.
C
NTOPTC
DOBJMN NWSWT SIMPL NCYCLES
100. 10 YES 2
10.18.5 Node Data (NODES)
NODES
Definitions:
NN Alpha label indicating that the node number is

input in this column.
num Node number. The node number must be input in

increasing order.
param Alpha labels of those node parameters being

defined. The following parameters are used for the
well optimization option: QO, QG, QOMIN,
QGMIN, PMAX, MAXVEL, VELWCU. PMAX,
MAXVEL, VELWCU are new parameters.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-517

PMAX Maximum pressure at the node for the changes of

the node connection to be considered, psia (kPa).
This parameter can be input only when the
optimization option is used. If the node pressure is
larger than the maximum pressure and several
potential node connections are defined in the
NODCON card, node reconnection will be
considered. Default is 1.E15. If the user wants to
turn off node reconnection, this parameter needs to
be set to a large value.
MAXVEL Maximum velocity at the node if the water cut is

greater than the value specified by the VELWCU
parameter, ft/sec (m/sec).
VELWCU Minimum water cut for the maximum velocity

constraint for the node to be activated, fraction.
10.18.6 Well Connection Data (WELCON)
WELCON
WELL param1 param2 . . . paramn
Definitions:
WELL Alpha label indicating that this column will contain

a name or number of a production well.
wn Name or number of a production well. A value of

the N or NAME parameter from the WELL card
should be used in this column.
param Alpha labels of those well parameters being

defined. The following parameters are added for
the well optimization option: QOMIN, QGMIN,
PMAX.
QOMIN Minimum oil rate at the well, STB/D(STCM/D).

This parameter is applied only if the optimization
option is used. If the oil rate is less than the
minimum value and several potential well
connections are defined, well reconnection will be
considered. Default is 1.E9.
QGMIN Minimum gas rate at the well, MSCF/D(SCM/D).

This parameter is applied only if the optimization
10-518 Landmark - R2003.4

option is used. If the gas rate is less than the

minimum value and several potential well
considered. Default is 1.E9.
PMAX Maximum pressure for the changes of the well

connection to be considered, psia(kPa). This
parameter is applied only if the optimization option
is used. If the well pressure is larger than the
maximum pressure and several potential well
considered. Default is 1.E15. If the user wants to
turn off well reconnection, this parameter needs to
be set to a large value.
10.18.7 Maximum Velocity Constraints (WLVEL)
WLVEL (w1)
MAXVEL (VELCUT)
mxvel (wcut)
Definitions:
wl List of wells for which maximum well velocity data

is being specified (see Section 1.5.2). If the well list is
not input, the data is assumed to apply to all
production wells.
MAXVEL Alpha label indicating that the maximum velocity

for a well connection will be entered.
VELWCUT Alpha label indicating that the minimum water cut

for a velocity constraint to be activated will be
entered.
mxvel Maximum velocity for a well connection, ft/sec (m/

sec).
wcut Minimum water cut for the velocity constraint

specified by MAXVEL to be activated, fraction.
Default is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-519

10.18.8 Output Well and Node Connection Changes (PRTSWT)

The PRTSWT card is used to print surface network connection changes to the
FORTRAN file named <casename>.conn_chg.
PRTSWT ON
OFF
Definitions:
ON Well and node connection changes will be printed.
OFF Well and node connection changes will not be

printed. This is the default.
10-520 Landmark - R2003.4

10.19 Integration of Surface Pipeline Network and Predictive Well

Management
The predictive well management option (PREDICT NEW) has been integrated
with the surface pipeline network option. The integrated tools can be effectively
used for well assignments to different pressure systems and well rate
optimization. The predictive well management option is applied for the well
allocations to the pressure systems. The surface pipeline network option is used
for tubing head pressure and well rate calculations from pressure drop
relationships in reservoir, tubing string, and flow lines. Well connections to nodes
are automatically modified after well allocation to the pressure system.
The following input is required to combine two options:
1. Define all headers to which production wells can be connected as nodes of the
surface pipeline network system. Assign well management level and pressure
system for header nodes using keywords WML, WMN, PRSYS in the
NODES card.
2. Determine current and potential well connections to headers using the

keywords OUTNOD, OUTND2, OUTND3, OUTND4, OUTND5, and
OUTND6 in the WELCON card. The OUTNOD keyword must be used for
the current connection. The keywords OUTND2, OUTND3, OUTND4,
OUTND5, and OUTND6 are used for potential connections.
10.19.1 Number of Outer Iterations Each Timestep (WMITN)

The WMITN card must be entered to use predictive well management.
WMITN nitn (nspnc)
Definition:
nitn Number of outer iterations in each timestep that will use

predictive well management. Default is 0.
nspnc Frequency of the surface pipeline network calculations.

Default is 1.
The WMITN card and the PREDICT card supply the enabling data for predictive
well management. Both are necessary to use this option.
The WMITN card defines the number of outer iterations in each timestep that will
use the predictive well management set of routines to calculate well rates and
bottomhole pressures.
It is recommended that the number of iterations be held to a small value, say 1 or

2. Larger values will probably degrade convergence considerably.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-521

If the surface pipeline network option is used in combination with predictive well
management, the surface pipeline network procedure is executed each nspnc-th
execution of the predictive well management procedure. In this case, tubinghead
pressure in production wells for each pressure system are recalculated only when
the surface pipeline network procedure is executed. The TIMEIN, TIMEST, and
OUTITR parameters defined in the NETPAR card are ignored and the frequencies
of the surface pipeline network calculations are controlled by WMITN and
PWMFRQ cards. When nspnc is equal to one, the surface pipeline network
procedure in executed in the same outer iterations and the same timesteps as the
predictive well management procedure.
10-522 Landmark - R2003.4

10.20 Understanding Injection Network Allocations and Node

Pressures in VIP
When using the injection network capability within VIP, it is important to
understand how injection rates are allocated to the wells. There are four basic
methods of specifying injection targets when using an injection network. These
are:
Specification of individual well targets (QMAX) with no group targets
Specification of group targets using ITARG
Specification of group targets using injection regions
Specification of node targets on the NODES card
When injection network data is defined, VIP will use the network data to calculate
rates for all wells connected to the network. If there are no rate constraints on the
network NODE cards, these rates will always be pressure limited. If there are rate
constraints on the NODE cards, the constraints will be accounted for in the
network solution. Once the network is solved VIP will check for non-network
group targeting. At this point the individual well rates will be allocated based on
normal VIP group targeting methods. If no additional group targets are specified
then each calculated well rate will be checked against the wells QMAX target
and cut back to the QMAX target if necessary. If the ITARG or INJECTION
REGION options are used VIP will take the following steps:
Check each well's calculated rate against its QMAX target and cut back the
injection rate to QMAX if necessary
Sum the rates for all wells in the specified group
If the sum of the rates is less than the specified group target then no further cut
backs will be performed
If the sum of the rates is greater than the specified group target then each well
will be allocated a portion of the group's target as a ratio of its current rate to
the sum of the rates.
Regarding reported node pressures, the reported pressure may not correspond to
the actual pressure required for the given output node or wellhead pressure. If all
wells which branch out from a node are pressure limited then the reported
pressure should correspond to the pressure actually required for the given flow
rates in the output connections. However, if any wells are rate limited (either
through QMAX targets or cut backs due to group targeting), then chokes are
implied to exist in the connections to those wells and the reported node pressure
will correspond to the MAXIMUM pressure that node requires to deliver the
reported flow rates.
All of the examples shown below contain injection network data as shown below.
In summary, there are seven water injection wells connected to a central platform
through a series of manifolds and connections. Please refer to this network data
when examining the results for the following examples.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-523

10.20.1 Examples
The input data injection network data for the examples to follow is shown below.
INJECTION NETWORK DATA

PIPES
NN NAME DIAMETER THICKNESS ROUGHNESS LENGTH TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR
1 pipe1 4 0.2 0.001 500 60 60 DUKLER
2 pipe2 4 0.2 0.001 2000 60 60 DUKLER
3 pipe3 4 0.2 0.001 3500 60 60 DUKLER
C
TUBING
NN NAME DIAMETER THICKNESS ROUGHNESS LENGTH DEPTH TEMPUP TEMPDW PDCORR
1 TUB1W1 4 0.2 0.001 425 361 150 150 BEGGS
2 TUB2W1 4 0.2 0.001 12001 12001 150 150 HAGEDORN
C
LINK 1 LINK1
1 1 TUBING
2 2 TUBING
C
NODES
NN NAME ! pmaxi ! qW
C
1 node1 ! 12000.0 ! 8000
2 node2 ! 2400.0 ! 8500
3 node3 ! 12000.0 ! 7500
4 node4 ! 3600.0 ! 7500
C
NODES
NN NAME pmaxi ! QW
C
5 node5 8000.0 ! 30000
C
NODCON
NODE OUTCON OUTCNT OUTNOD
C
C
node4 pipe2 pipe node1
C
C
C ********************************
WELCON
WELL TUBCON TUBCNT OUTCON OUTCNT OUTNOD WDAT WELHEAD
I1 1 LINK pipe2 pipe node4 12500 -100
10-524 Landmark - R2003.4

10.1.0.1 Injection Network with No Group Targeting
Example 1 below is a model with an injection network and no group targets. All
wells have QMAX targets of 10,000 STBD. From the injection network
calculations, wells I1, I2, I3, I4, and I7 have pressure limited rates less than
QMAX and wells I5 and I6 have pressure limited rates greater than QMAX. Thus,
the actual injected rates for wells I1, I2, I3, I4, and I7 are the calculated pressure
limited rates while the injected rates for wells I5 and I6 correspond to the QMAX
value. Additionally, since wells I1, I2, I3, I4, and I7 are pressure limited, the
pressures reported at nodes 1, 2, 4, and 5 should correspond to the pressures
required for the given flow rates. The pressure reported at node 3 will be the
MAXIMUM pressure required to deliver the specified rates to wells I5 and I6.
One of the well connections will have an implied choke. Additionally, since all
wells downstream of node 3 are rate limited, the pressure drop from node 5 to
node 3 will not be a true representation of the described equipment because of an
implied choke in the connection.
EXAMPLE 1
No Group Targeting
WELL GROUP # 1 ()
WELL DAILY INJECTION PRESSURES, PSIA

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
PERF LOCATION GRID BOTTOM TUBING
------------- GAS WATER BLOCK HOLE HEAD
NO. NAME I J LAYER STAT MSCF/D STB/D DATUM DATUM
--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
9 I1 2 10 2- 4 PLIM 0. 9899.88 7821. 8747. 7129.
10 I2 2 29 3- 5 PLIM 0. 5121.88 8130. 12324. 7279.
11 I3 2 20 3- 5 PLIM 0. 9967.41 8099. 10731. 7262.
15 I7 10 10 1- 3 PLIM 0. 9976.28 7886. 10084. 7103.
13 I5 29 10 2- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7623. 9073. 4226.
14 I6 18 10 1- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7369. 7986. 3157.
12 I4 23 27 4- 5 PLIM 0. 4897.79 8543. 13049. 7983.
========= =========
WELL GROUP TOTALS 0. 59863.
NODES OF GROUP # 1 ()
NODE DAILY INJECTION PRESSURES, PSIA

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
------------- GAS WATER

NO. NAME MSCF/D STB/D
--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
1 NODE1 - 0. 34965. 7296.
2 NODE2 - 0. 4897.79 7985.
3 NODE3 - 0. 20000. 4288.
4 NODE4 - 0. 19876. 7163.
5 NODE5 - 0. 59863. 8000.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-525

10.1.0.2 Injection Network with Group Targeting Using ITARG
Example 2 is identical to Example 1 with the addition of group targeting through

the use of an ITARG card. In this case the group target is 50000 STBD while the
sum of the individual well rates (with cut backs for exceeding QMAX targets
already accounted for) is 60442.0 STBD. The actual injection rate for each well
will thus be the ratio of its current target rate to the sum multiplied against the
group target. From the potential report in the output file, the rate for well I1 was
9987.19. Taking this rate as a ratio to the group summation gives well I1 16.524%
of the group target, or 8261.2 STBD. Also, from the potential report, the rate for
well I5 is 51680 STBD. As this exceeds the wells QMAX target of 10000 STBD,
the QMAX target becomes the calculated well rate. This is then taken as a ratio to
total group production to give well I5 16.544% of the groups target injection. This
calculates out to 8272.4 STBD. Regarding node pressures, since all wells are on
rate target control, all reported pressures will correspond to MAXIMUM
pressures required for delivery of the specified rates. For example, the 4670 psia
reported at node 2 will be the maximum pressure required to deliver 8261.7 STBD
to well I1 and 8266.48 STBD to well I7.
EXAMPLE 2
ITARG Group Targeting
WELL GROUP # 1 ()

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
9 I1 2 10 2- 4 WTAR 0. 8261.71 7675. 8449. 3546.
10 I2 2 29 3- 5 WTAR 0. 4394.29 7952. 11558. 6503.
11 I3 2 20 3- 5 WTAR 0. 8266.34 7900. 10085. 5157.
15 I7 10 10 1- 3 WTAR 0. 8266.48 7725. 9547. 4627.
13 I5 29 10 2- 5 WTAR 0. 8272.31 7507. 8706. 3800.
14 I6 18 10 1- 5 WTAR 0. 8272.31 7298. 7809. 2916.
12 I4 23 27 4- 5 WTAR 0. 4266.56 8293. 12222. 7155.
========= =========

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
------------- GAS WATER

--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
1 NODE1 - 0. 29189. 6516.
2 NODE2 - 0. 4266.56 7157.
3 NODE3 - 0. 16545. 3843.
4 NODE4 - 0. 16528. 4670.
5 NODE5 - 0. 50000. 7169.
10-526 Landmark - R2003.4

10.1.0.3 Injection Regions for Group Targets
Example 3 uses injection regions instead of ITARG cards for group targets. The
allocation calculations are identical to those used for ITARG allocations. In this
example, target injection rate is controlled by voidage replacement and exceeds
the sum of the individual well rates. Thus, no further cut backs are performed and
the injection well rates are identical to those shown in example 1. The node
pressures reported in this case are identical to those of example 1.
EXAMPLE 3
Injection Region
WELL GROUP # 1 ()

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
9 I1 2 10 2- 4 PLIM 0. 9899.88 7821. 8747. 7129.
10 I2 2 29 3- 5 PLIM 0. 5121.88 8130. 12324. 7279.
11 I3 2 20 3- 5 PLIM 0. 9967.41 8099. 10731. 7262.
15 I7 10 10 1- 3 PLIM 0. 9976.28 7886. 10084. 7103.
13 I5 29 10 2- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7623. 9073. 4226.
14 I6 18 10 1- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7369. 7986. 3157.
12 I4 23 27 4- 5 PLIM 0. 4897.79 8543. 13049. 7983.
========= =========

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
------------- GAS WATER

--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
1 NODE1 - 0. 34965. 7296.
2 NODE2 - 0. 4897.79 7985.
3 NODE3 - 0. 20000. 4288.
4 NODE4 - 0. 19876. 7163.
5 NODE5 - 0. 59863. 8000.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-527

10.1.0.4 Injection Regions with Network Node Targets
Example 4 uses a water constraint on a NODE card with no further group targets.
In this case this corresponds to a field target of 50000 STBD. The calculated rates
indicate wells I2, I3, I4, and I7 are target limited while QMAX targets of 10000
STBD limit I1, I5, and I6. As the rate limits are actually included as part of the
network calculations instead of being applied afterwards, the rate and pressure
distributions in the case may be substantially different than in the other 3 cases.
Note that node pressures reported in this example appear to be much more
physically consistent than in the other 3 examples.
EXAMPLE 4
Network Node Targets
WELL GROUP # 1 ()

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
9 I1 2 10 2- 4 QMAX 0. 10000. 7824. 8760. 4490.
10 I2 2 29 3- 5 QMAX 0. 2607.25 7537. 9687. 4633.
11 I3 2 20 3- 5 QMAX 0. 6924.28 7749. 9580. 4617.
15 I7 10 10 1- 3 QMAX 0. 7880.43 7684. 9422. 4491.
13 I5 29 10 2- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7617. 9066. 4777.
14 I6 18 10 1- 5 QMAX 0. 10000. 7364. 7982. 4803.
12 I4 23 27 4- 5 QMAX 0. 2579.98 7741. 10120. 5070.
========= =========

------------------------------- -------------------- -----------------------
------------- GAS WATER

--- -------- --- --- ----- ---- --------- --------- ------- ------ ------
1 NODE1 - 0. 27412. 4634.
2 NODE2 - 0. 2579.98 5071.
3 NODE3 - 0. 20000. 4838.
4 NODE4 - 0. 17880. 4525.
5 NODE5 - 0. 49992. 5075.
10.20.2 Summary
In summary, it is important to understand that any rate limited well or node
connection implies the presence of a choke which is not actually present in the
network equipment description. The presence of this implied choke may result in
what may seem to be physically inconsistent node pressures as described in
Examples 1-3. As a well or node connection becomes rate limited, this implies a
choke is being adjusted, which will result in a pressure drop through the choke,
which is not accounted for in hydraulic tables, or flow correlation calculations.
10-528 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
11
Automatic Tuning Procedures
11.1 General Information

Automatic tuning procedures have been implemented to improve the match
between field observations and simulator predictions of
well bottomhole pressure,
well tubinghead pressure,
pressure in headers and flow lines of the surface pipeline network system,
well oil, gas, and water production rates.
Parameters of well perforations, tubing strings, and pipelines of the surface

pipeline network system can be automatically adjusted from the user specified
ranges to improve the match.
Static and dynamic tuning procedures have been implemented. In static

tuning procedures TBADJ and WIADJ, parameters of tubing string models
(TBADJ) and well indices (WIADJ) are adjusted to match tubinghead or
bottomhole pressure in production wells with specified well production rates at
one snapshot of time. The static procedures are executed only in one timestep
- the next timestep after the TBADJ and/or WIADJ input. The dynamic tuning
procedure TUNING can be applied to match field observations in specified time
intervals. The TBADJ, WIADJ, and TUNING procedures are described below.
11.2 Well Index Adjustment Procedure (WIADJ) and Tubing String

Parameter Adjustment Procedure (TBADJ).
The WIADJ and TBADJ procedures are designed to match well tubinghead
pressure (or bottomhole pressure) in production wells with specified well rates. A
well index is selected from a specified range in the WIADJ procedure for each
tuned well. Parameters of the tubing string are selected from specified ranges in
the TBADJ procedure. The procedures can be applied for all wells in the model or
for a subset of wells at any time during the simulation. They are executed for a
user specified number of outer iterations in the next timestep after the WIADJ/
TBADJ input. If both TBADJ and WIADJ procedures are applied for some
production well, the TBADJ procedure is executed first, then the WIADJ
procedure, then the BHPADD parameters are adjusted. In the TBADJ procedure,
the gravity pressure gradient is adjusted first, then the friction pressure gradient is
modified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-529

Automatic Tuning Procedures VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
If the tubinghead pressure is specified for some well, a second order optimization
procedure is applied to select parameters of the well tubing string and/or well
index from the user specified ranges by minimizing the difference between inflow
and outflow bottomhole pressure,. The inflow bottomhole pressure is calculated
using the specified well rate, gridblock pressure, and inflow relationships in well
perforations. The outflow pressure is determined using the specified tubinghead
pressure and pressure drop relationships in the well tubing string. Molar rates of
the hydrocarbon components required for the definition of the pressure drop in the
tubing string are calculated from inflow correlations in well perforations.
If the bottomhole pressure is specified, the well index is calculated from the
specified well rate, gridblock pressure, and inflow relationships in well
perforations. Only the WIADJ procedure can be applied in this case.
A multiplier of well indices by perforations is determined in the WIADJ

procedure. Therefore, the user specified profile of well indices by perforations is
maintained and properly scaled. This multiplier is used in all future timesteps, or
until well indices for well perforations are redefined using the FPERF, WI, PI, or
RFLOW cards.
Correction factors (GRPGCR and FRPGCR) for the gravity and friction pressure
gradients in all tubing segments of each tuned well are selected in the TBADJ
procedure. These correction factors are used in all future timesteps, until they are
redefined in the TUBING or PIPES cards.
The tuning procedures can be applied together with the predictive well
management option PREDICT NEW. In this case, the tuning procedure is applied
after the predictive well management algorithm is used to select the pressure
system and gas-lift rate for each tuned well. If the predictive well management
option is used in combination with the surface pipeline network option and the
optional keyword NOCPRS is included in the TBADJ/WIADJ card, the pressure
system is not selected and the existing pressure system is applied for each tuned
well. The existing pressure system is determined as the pressure system of the first
node in the WELCON card to which the tuned well is connected.
If the NEWWEL keyword is included in the TBADJ/WIADJ card, the tuning

procedures are executed only for new wells that are selected for drilling in the
correspondent time in the automatic drilling option.
The following input is required for the application of the TBADJ and WIADJ
procedures:
1. Define a group of wells that need to be tuned using the WLGRP card. This
step is not required if all wells in a reservoir model need to be tuned.
2. Input well rate type (oil, gas, water, liquid, QMULT, etc.) in the PROD card
for each tuned well. This rate type is applied in the TBADJ and WIADJ
procedures.
3. Input instantaneous well rate for each tuned well in the QMAX or QMULT
card. A well performance can be tuned only if the well rate is larger that zero.
The rate of each tuned well can be automatically defined as the average well
rate in the gathering center to which the well is assigned. To apply this option,
keyword RGCAVR must be included in the TBADJ/WIADJ card.
11-530 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Automatic Tuning Procedures
4. Define well tubinghead pressure for each tuned well in the THP card. If the
predictive well management option is applied, the tubinghead pressure for the
selected pressure system is applied in the tuning procedures. If the surface
pipeline option is applied, the tubinghead pressure is calculated using
pressure drop relationships in flow lines. The tubinghead pressure input is not
required in this case.
5. Input the WIADJ and/or TBADJ cards after the proper DATE card. Define in
the WIADJ/TBADJ cards:
group name or number, if the tuning procedure must be executed for some group
of wells;
ranges of tuning parameters;
number of outer iterations in which the tuning procedures must be executed;
convergence parameters of the tuning procedure.
Results of the WIADJ and TBADJ tuning procedures are output in Fortran unit
30.
RGCAVR
RGCAVO

WIADJ (noutit) (NOCPRS) (SHUTPF) RGCAVG (NEWWEL) (wlgrp)

RGCAVW
RGCAVL
(nwiit mxwic mxwil prrtol pratol aprtol avrmul)
RGCAVR
RGCAVO

TBADJ (noutit)(NOCPRS)(SHUTPF) RGCAVG (NEWWEL) (TOTAL) (wlgrp)

RGCAVW
RGCAVL
(ngpgit nfpgit mxgpgc mxfpgc mnbhpa mxbhpa prrtol pratol aprtol avrmul)
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-531

Definitions:
noutit Number of outer iterations of a timestep in which

WIADJ/TBADJ procedures will be executed. Default
is one.
NOCPRS Alpha label indicating that production well
assignments to pressure systems must not be changed
in outer iterations in which the WIADJ/TBADJ
procedure is executed. This keyword can be applied
only if the WIADJ/TBADJ procedure is used with the
predictive well management option (PREDICT NEW)
and the surface pipeline network option.
SHUTPF Alpha label indicating that the status of all
perforations will be changed to OFF in the WIADJ/
TBADJ procedure for production wells with
QMAX=0.
RGCAVR Alpha label indicating that average oil/gas/water/
liquid rates in corresponding gathering centers will be
applied for tuning production wells with well type
PROD O/G/W/LIQUID. The maximum well rates of
these wells (QMAX) are set to the average gathering
center rate multiplied by the avrmul factor. The
average gathering center rates are calculated based on
the well production rates in the previous timestep. The
RGCAVR option can not be used in the first timestep
after a restart.
RGCAVO Alpha label indicating that average oil rates in
corresponding gathering centers will be applied in the
WIADJ/TBADJ procedures. The well type of tuned
wells is set to PROD O. The maximum well rates of
center oil rate multiplied by the avrmul factor. The
average gathering center oil rates are calculated based
on the well production rates in the previous timestep.
The RGCAVO option can not be used in the first
timestep after a restart.
RGCAVG Alpha label indicating that average gas rates in
wells is set to PROD G. The maximum well rates of
center gas rate multiplied by the avrmul factor. The
average gathering center gas rates are calculated based
on the well production rates in the previous timestep.
The RGCAVG option can not be used in the first
timestep after a restart.
11-532 Landmark - R2003.4

RGCAVW Alpha label indicating that average water rates in

wells is set to PROD W. The maximum well rates of
center water rate multiplied by the avrmul factor. The
average gathering center water rates are calculated
based on the well production rates in the previous
timestep. The RGCAVW option can not be used in the
first timestep after a restart.
RGCAVL Alpha label indicating that average liquid rates in
wells is set to PROD LIQUID. The maximum well
rates of these wells (QMAX) are set to the average
gathering center liquid rate multiplied by the avrmul
factor. The average gathering center liquid rates are
calculated based on the well production rates in the
previous timestep. The RGCAVL option can not be
used in the first timestep after a restart.
NEWWEL Alpha label indicating that the WIADJ/TBADJ
procedure will be applied only for new wells selected
for drilling in the automatic drilling procedure. The
well group number/name wlgrp must be input in this
case. The new wells will be automatically assigned to
this group, while all existing wells will be
automatically removed.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating that correction factors for total
pressure gradient in well tubing strings will be
determined in the TBADJ procedure. Maximum
number of iterations and maximum total correction
factor can be input as ngpgit and mxgpgc,
respectively. Parameters nfpgit and mxfpgc are
ignored.
wlgrp Well group name or number. The WIADJ/TBADJ
procedure will be executed for all production wells in
the specified well group. The procedure will be
executed for all production wells if wlgrp is not input.
nwiit Maximum number of iterations of the WIADJ
optimization procedure. Default is 10.
mxwic Maximum change of well index, in percent (%). It is
assumed that the well index multiplier can be changed
in the range from 1/(1+.01mxwic) to (1+.01mxwic).
Default is 50%.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-533

mxwil Maximum perforation well index value. Default is 30.

prrtol Pressure relative convergence tolerance. If the
absolute value of relative differences between inflow
and outflow bottomhole pressure is less than prrtol in
some iteration, the WIADJ/TBADJ procedure
converges. Default is .0001.
pratol Pressure absolute convergence tolerance, psia (kPA).
If the absolute value of differences between inflow and
outflow bottomhole pressure is less than pratol, the
WIADJ/TBADJ procedure converges. Default is 3
psia.
aprtol Adjustment parameter relative convergence tolerance.
If the absolute value of the relative change of a tuning
parameter is less than aprtol, the WIADJ/TBADJ
procedure converges. Default is .0001.
avrmul Average gathering center rate multiplier. This
parameter is applied only if one of the RGCAVR,
RGCAVO, RGCAVG, RGCAVW, or RGCAVL
options is used. Default is one.
ngpgit Maximum number of iterations used in the TBADJ
procedure for the calculation of the gravity pressure
gradient correction factor. Default is 10.
nfpgit Maximum number of iterations used in the TBADJ
procedure for the calculation of the friction pressure
gradient correction factor. Default is 10.
mxgpgc Maximum change of the gravity pressure gradient, in
percent (%). It is assumed that the gravity pressure
gradient correction factor can be changed in the range
from 1/(1+.01mxgpgc) to (1+.01mxgpgc). Default is
30%.
mxfpgc Maximum change of the friction pressure gradient, in
percent (%). It is assumed that the friction pressure
gradient correction factor can be changed in the range
from 1/(1+.01mxfpgc) to (1+.01mxfpgc). Default is
30%.
mnbhpa Minimum bottomhole pressure adjustment BHPADD,
psia (kPA). The default value is 0.
mxbhpa Maximum bottomhole pressure adjustment BHPADD,
psia (kPA). The default value is 0.
11-534 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: If Parameters NOCPRS, SHUTPF, RGCAVR, RGCAVO, RGCAVG,

RGCAVW, RGCAVL, NEWWEL, noutit, wlgrp, prrtol, pratol, and/or
avrmul are input in both TBADJ and WIADJ cards in the same
simulation time, values of these parameters from the last card will be
applied in both TBADJ and WIADJ procedures.
Example:
C
C Apply the WIADJ procedure for Wells WELL1 and WELL2
C
WLGRP 1 TUNE_WELLS
WELL1 WELL2
C Number Use Average Apply Existing Tuned Well
C Outer GC Rate Pressure System Group Name
C Iterations Well Assignments
WIADJ 1 RGCAVR NOCPRS TUNE_WELLS
C Maximum Number Maximum Change Maximum Index in
C of Iterations of Well Index % Well Perforations
100 30 20
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-535

11.3 Dynamic TUNING Procedure

A tuning procedure has been implemented to match field measurements in
specified time intervals by adjusting parameters of the well perforation, tubing
string, and surface pipeline network models.
The simulations are automatically repeated several times (passes) in the specified
time interval. Values of history matching relative error functions are determined in
each pass. If these values are less than the user specified tolerances, or the number
of the passes exceeds its limit, the tuning procedure is terminated. Otherwise, new
values of adjusted parameters are selected at the end of each pass and the next
pass is executed.
The start of the tuning time interval is defined by the TIME/DATE card after
which the TUNING card is included. The end of the tuning time interval is
determined by next TIME/DATE card following the ENDTUNING card.
The history matching relative error functions for oil, gas, and water production
rates of the i-th production well are defined as follows:
cqi ( t j ) [ Qqi ( t j ) Qqi ( t j ) ]

C M
qi = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
j=1
N
-, , q = o, g, w.
cqi ( t j ) [ Qqi ( t j ) ]
M
j=1
Where:
M
Q qi ( t j ) , q=o,g,w are measurements of oil, gas, and water production rates of the
i-th well at the simulation time tj. They are input using the QMULT card after the
corresponding TIME/DATE card;
C
Q qi ( t j ) , q=o,g,w are calculated oil, gas, and water production rates of the i-th
well at the simulation time tj. They are determined at the end of the timestep after
each TIME/DATE card in the tuning time interval;
N is the number of TIME/DATE cards in the tuning time interval;
c qi ( t j ) , q=o,g,w are the error function coefficients which can be input by the user
using the TERC cards. The default values of these coefficients are one.
The error function for gas-oil ratio or gas-liquid ratio can be applied instead of the
error function for gas rate using the GOR or GLR keywords in the TUNING card.
The error function for water cut or water-gas ratio can be applied instead of the
error function for water rate using the WCUT or WGR keywords in the TUNING
card.
11-536 Landmark - R2003.4

The history matching relative error functions for pressure at well bottomhole,
tubinghead, and nodes of the surface pipeline network system are determined as
follows:
c pi ( t j ) [ P pi ( t j ) P pi ( t j ) ]
C M
pi = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
j=1
N
, , p = b, t, n.
c pi ( t j ) [ P pi ( t j ) ]
M
j=1
Where:
M
P pi ( t j ) , p=b,t,n are measurements of bottomhole pressure, tubinghead pressure,
and node pressure in the i-th well or i-th node at the simulation time tj. They are
input using the TBHP, TTHP, and TPRND cards after the corresponding TIME/
DATE card;
C
P pi ( t j ) , p=b,t,n are calculated bottomhole pressure, tubinghead pressure, and
node pressure in the i-th well or i-th node at the simulation time tj. They are
determined at the end of the timestep after each TIME/DATE card in the tuning
time interval;
c pi ( t j ) , p=b,t,n are the error function coefficients which are input using the TBHP,
TTHP, and TPRND cards. Defaults of these coefficients are one.
If the RELERR keyword is included in the TUNING card, the error functions are
calculated as follows:
N C M
[ Q qi ( t j ) Q qi ( t j ) ]
qi =
c qi ( t j ) ----------------------------------------------, q = o, g, w.
M
[ Q qi ( t j ) ]
j=1
A similar expression is used for the pressure error functions in this case.
The tuning procedure is terminated when values of the relative error functions are
less than the tolerances specified by the user in the MAXRER and MAXRNE
cards or the numbers of passes for the different steps of the tuning procedure
exceeds the maximum values.
The following steps are executed sequentially in the tuning procedure:
1. Tune parameters of well perforations and well indices. The maximum number
of simulator passes in this step (maxnip) is input by the user in the TUNING card.
In each pass, the simulation is executed in the time interval defined by the
TUNING and ENDTUNING cards.
2. Set M to the maximum node level.
3. Tune parameters of output flow lines for all nodes of Level M.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-537

4. Reduce node Level M by one. Repeat Step 3 if M is larger than one.
5. Tune parameters of flow lines connecting well heads to nodes of the surface
pipeline network system, if M is equal to one.
6. Tune parameters of well tubing strings. The maximum number of simulator

passes (maxnil) in each of Steps 3, 5, and 7 is specified by the user in the
TUNING card.
If parameter maxnil is input as a negative number, the parameters of flow lines,

well lines, and tubing strings are tuned simultaneously. In this case, the absolute
value of parameter maxnil is the maximum number of passes in this step.
If keyword RNP is included the TUNING card, pressures in nodes of Levels M+1,
M+2, ... are reset to their measured values in Step 3 of the tuning procedure.
Otherwise, the calculated values are applied.
If keyword RTHP is included the TUNING card, tubinghead pressures in

production wells are reset to their measured values in Step 6 of the tuning
procedure. Otherwise, the calculated values are applied.
A range of parameter multiplier changes must be specified to tune any parameter.

A maximum parameter change dmax (in percent) is input by the user. It is
assumed that the parameter multiplier can be changed in the range from
max((1-.01dmax), (1 + .01dmin)), to (1+dmax). The minimum parameter
changes for well perforations and flowlines are input in the MNPFCF and
MNFLCF cards.
The well indices can be adjusted within the user specified ranges to match
bottomhole pressure measurements in production wells. The ranges of the well
indices are specified in the TWELL cards.
If the bottomhole pressure measurements are not available, they can be estimated
by the simulator, using tubinghead pressure and pressure drop relationships in
well tubing strings. The keyword TCBHP must be included in the TUNING card
to use this option.
The following well perforation parameters can be tuned within the user specified
ranges to improve the history match between field measurements and predictions
of the oil, gas, and water production rates:
endpoints of gas and water relative permeability curves in well perforations,
permeability thickness (KH) values in well perforations,
water and gas relative permeabilities at residual oil saturation in well

perforations.
The ranges of the well perforation parameters are specified in the TWELL and/or
TFPERF cards.
The following parameters of tubing strings can be adjusted within the user
specified ranges to match well inflow and outflow bottomhole pressures:
roughness,
11-538 Landmark - R2003.4

length,
diameter,
pressure gradient,
pressure drop in well chokes.
The ranges of the well tubing string parameters are specified in the TTUBING
cards.
The following parameters of well flowlines connecting wellheads to nodes of the

surface pipeline network system can be adjusted within the user specified ranges
to match measurements of well tubinghead pressure:
roughness coefficient,
length,
diameter,
pressure gradient,
pressure drop in well chokes.
The ranges of the well flowline parameters are specified in the TWLFL cards.
The following parameters of output flowlines of nodes can be adjusted within the
user specified ranges to match measurements of node pressure:
roughness coefficient,
length,
diameter,
pressure gradient.
The ranges of the parameters of the node output flowlines are specified in the
TSPN cards.
Inactive perforations with status OFF specified in the FPERF card can be
automatically turned ON if predicted oil, gas or water production rates in the well
are significantly less than their measurements. The MINRER card is used to
activate this option.
The calculated adjustment factors for well perforation, tubing string, well
flowline, and pipeline parameters can be printed if keywords PRADJFPERF and/
or PRTUBSPN are included in the TUNING card. These adjustment factors can
be input to the simulator in the cards ADJFPERF, ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL,
ADJSPN, and ADJWI. Therefore, the TUNING procedure can be executed in one
history matching run to calculate the adjustment factors and print them. In all
other runs, these adjustment factors can be used as input and the TUNING
procedure is not required.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-539

The adjustment factors calculated in different passes of the tuning procedure can
be output if debug print is requested using keyword PRDEBUG in the TUNING
card.
The tuning procedure results for wells and/or nodes can be output to two
spreadsheet files if keywords PRWLRP and/or PRNDRP are included in the
TUNING card. The measurements and predictions of the oil, gas, and water well
production rates, bottomhole pressure, and tubinghead pressure for different times
in the tuning time interval are output to the well spreadsheet file (Fortran unit 30).
The measurements and predictions of the oil, gas, and water rates and pressure in
the nodes of the surface pipeline network system are output to the node
spreadsheet file (Fortran unit 69).
Input to the TUNING procedure can be divided into the following groups:
Determination of general parameters (tuning time interval, types of error

functions, and output requests) (TUNING, ENDTUNING).
Convergence parameters (MAXRER, MAXRNE).
Definition of tuning parameter ranges (TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING,

TWLFL, TSPN, MNPFCF, MNFLCF).
Request for the activation of inactive perforations (MINRER), if it is required.
Field measurements (QMULT, TBHP, TTHP, TPRND).
Adjustment factors (ADJFPERF, ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL, ADJSPN,

ADJWI).
The convergence parameters (MAXRER, MAXRNE), the tuning parameter

ranges (TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING, TWLFL, TSPN, MNPFCF, MNFLCF),
and the MINRER card must be input immediately following the TUNING card as
one package of data.
The field measurements (QMULT, TBHP, TTHP, TPRND) can be input at any
time in the tuning time interval.
The adjustment factors (ADJFPERF, ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL, ADJSPN,

ADJWI) can be input independently from the TUNING procedure at any time
during a simulation.
11-540 Landmark - R2003.4

11.3.1 General Parameters (TUNING, ENDTUNING)

The start of the tuning time interval is defined by the TIME/DATE card after
which the TUNING card is included. The end of the tuning time interval is
determined by the next TIME/DATE card following the ENDTUNING card.
GRATE WRATE

TUNING (maxnip maxnil) GOR WCUT (param)

GLR WGR
ENDTUNING
Definitions:
maxnip Maximum number of simulation passes used for

tuning parameters of well perforations. Default is 10.
maxnil Maximum number of simulation passes used for
tuning parameters in EACH level of the surface
pipeline network structure. If the maxnil is negative,
the parameters of flowlines, well lines, and tubing
strings are tuned simultaneously. In this case, the
absolute value of maxnil is the maximum number of
the simulation passes used for tuning of the surface
pipeline network parameters. Default is 5.
GRATE Alpha label indicating that well gas production rates
will be applied in error function calculations. This is
the default.
GOR Alpha label indicating that well gas-oil ratio will be
applied in error function calculations.
GLR Alpha label indicating that well gas-liquid ratio will be
WRATE Alpha label indicating that well water production rates
will be applied in error function calculations. This is
the default.
WCUT Alpha label indicating that well water cut will be
WGR Alpha label indicating that well water-gas ratio will be
The following additional parameters may be entered:
RELERR Alpha label indicating that relative error functions will
be applied.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-541

RNP Alpha label indicating that measured pressure in a

node will be used for tuning parameters in all nodes
from lower levels. If this keyword is not included, the
calculated pressure will be applied.
RTHP Alpha label indicating that measured well tubinghead
pressure will be used for tuning parameters of tubing
strings. If this keyword is not included, the calculated
tubinghead pressure is applied.
TCBHP Alpha label indicating that output bottomhole pressure
calculated from pressure drop calculations in tubing
strings will be used for tuning well indices. If this
keyword is not included, the measured bottomhole
pressure is applied.
PRWLRP Alpha label indicating that a well report in spreadsheet
format will be generated in Fortran unit 30.
Measurements and predictions of oil, gas, and water
well production rates, bottomhole pressure, and
tubinghead pressure for different times in the tuning
time interval are included in this report before and
after tuning.
PRNDRP Alpha label indicating that a node report in
spreadsheet format will be generated in Fortran unit
69. Measurements and predictions of oil, gas, and
water well production rates, and pressure in nodes for
different times in the tuning time interval are included
in this report before and after tuning.
PRADJFPERF Alpha label indicating that adjustment factors for well
perforation parameters and well indices will be printed
in the output file at the end of the tuning procedure.
The adjustment factors are printed in the format for
cards ADJFPERF and ADJWI.
PRTUBSPN Alpha label indicating that adjustment factors for
parameters of well tubing strings, well flowlines, and
surface pipeline network will be printed in the output
file at the end of the tuning procedure. The adjustment
factors are printed in the format for cards
ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL, and ADJSPN.
PRFPER Alpha label indicating that well perforation parameters
in FPERF format will be printed in the output file at
the end of the tuning procedure.
PRDEBUG Alpha label indicating a debug report will be printed in
the output file at the end of each pass of the tuning
procedure.
11-542 Landmark - R2003.4

Example:
C
C Start the TUNING procedure at Jan. 1, 1998
C
DATE 01 01 1998
TUNING GOR WCT PRWLRP PRNDRP PRADJFPERF PRTUBSPN
......
......
C
C End the TUNING procedure at Jun 1, 1998
C
ENDTUNING
DATE 01 06 1998
11.3.2 Convergence Tolerances (MAXRER and MAXRNE)

The MAXRER and MAXRNE cards must be input in the group of data
immediately following the TUNING card.
MAXRER oilrtl (gasrtl watrtl bhprtl)
MAXRNE prnrtl (biortl)
Definitions:
oilrtl Relative tolerance for oil rate error functions, fraction.

Default is 0.01.
gasrtl Relative tolerance for gas rate error functions, fraction.
Default is 0.01.
watrtl Relative tolerance for water rate error functions,
fraction. Default is 0.01.
bhprtl Relative tolerance for bottomhole pressure error
functions, fraction. Default is 0.01.
prnrtl Relative tolerance for tubinghead error functions and
pressure error functions in nodes of the surface
pipeline network system, fraction. Default is 0.01.
biortl Relative tolerance for differences in inlet and outlet
bottomhole pressure, fraction. Default is 0.01.
Examples:
MAXRER 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002
MAXRNE 0.002 0.002
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-543

11.3.3 Parameter Ranges (TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING, TWLFL, TSPN,

MNPFCF, MNFLCF)
The TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING, TWLFL, TSPN, MNPFCF, and MNFLCF
cards must be input in the group of data immediately following the TUNING card.
Ranges of adjusted parameters of well perforations are specified in the TWELL

and TFPERF cards.
Ranges of adjusted parameters of well tubing strings are specified in the

TTUBING card.
Ranges of adjusted parameters of well flowlines connecting wellheads to nodes of

the surface pipeline network system are specified in the TWLFL card.
Ranges of adjusted parameters of flowlines connecting nodes of the surface

pipeline network system are specified in the TSPN cards.
Minimum values of correction factors for perforation parameters are specified in

the MNPFCF card.
Minimum values of correction factors for flowline parameters are specified in the
MNFLCF card.
A parameter will not be adjusted if a range of parameter changes is not defined in

the appropriate TWELL, TFPERF, TTUBING, TWLFL, or TSPN card.
Therefore, the default values of the maximum parameter changes dmax are zero.
TWELL (well_list)
(DWI) (DSWR) (DSGR) (DKH) (DKRW) (DKRG)
(dmax) (dmax) (dmax) (dmax) (dmax) (dmax)
TFPERF
WELL (DSWR) (DSGR) (DKH) (DKRW) (DKRG)
wn (dmax)(dmax) (dmax) (dmax) (dmax)
The last card is repeated as necessary to describe all the
perforations for each well being tuned.
TTUBING(well_list)
(DDIAM) (DLENGTH) (DROUGH) (DPRGR)
(dmax) (dmax) (dmax) (dmax)
TWLFL (well_list)
TSPN (node_list)
11-544 Landmark - R2003.4

MNPFCF dminDSWR(dminDSGRdminDKRW dminDKRG dminDKH dminDWI)
MNFLCF dminDROUGH(dminDDIAM dminDLENGTH dminDPRGR)
Definitions:
well_list List of production wells for which maximum

parameter changes are input in the TWELL,
TTUBING, or TWLFL cards (see Section 1.5.2). If the
well list is not input, the maximum parameter changes
are assumed to apply to all production wells.
node_list List of nodes for which maximum parameter changes
are input in the TSPN card. If the node list is not input,
the maximum parameter changes are assumed to apply
to all nodes of the surface pipeline network system.
wn Well number or well name (TFPERF card). The well
number or name must be entered for each data card.
For multiple completions in a single well, the alpha
label X must be substituted for the well number or
well name on each data card after the first.
WELL Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a well
number, a well name, or the alpha label X.
DWI Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum well index change.
DSWR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of endpoints of the water relative
permeability curve in well perforations.
DSGR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of endpoints of the gas relative
DKH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of permeability thicknesses in well
perforations.
DKRW Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of the water relative permeability at
residual oil saturation in well perforations.
DKRG Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of the gas relative permeability at
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-545

DDIAM Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a

maximum change of diameter of well tubing
(TTUBING), well output flowline (TWLFL), or node
output flowline (TSPN).
DLENGTH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of length of well tubing
DROUGH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of roughness coefficient in well
tubing (TTUBING), well output flowline (TWLFL),
or node output flowline (TSPN).
DPRGR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a
maximum change of pressure gradient in well tubing
dmax Maximum change of the corresponding parameter,
percent (%). It is assumed that the parameter
multiplier can be changed in the range from max((1-
.01dmax), (1 + .01dmin)) to (1+.01dmax). Default
is zero.
dmin Minimum change of the corresponding parameter,
percent (%). It is assumed that the parameter
multiplier can be changed in the range from max((1-
.01dmax), (1 + .01dmin)) to (1+.01dmax). The value
of dmin can not be positive and must be larger than
-100. Default is -99.9.
Examples:
C
C Allow changes of well indices, endpoints of water relative permeability curves,
C water relative permeability, and KH values in well perforations of
C Wells WELL1 and WELL2 by 20%, 10%, 20%, and 30%, respectively.
C
TWELL WELL1 WELL2
DWI DSWR DKRW DKH
20 10 20 30
C
C Allow changes of roughness coefficients and pressure gradient in tubing
C strings of all wells by 50% and 40%
C
TTUBING
DROUGH DPRGR
50 40
11-546 Landmark - R2003.4

11.3.4 Activation of Inactive Perforations (MINRER)

The MINRER card must be input in the group of data immediately following the
TUNING card.
MINRER roilmin (rgasmin rwatmin rkhmin frfoil frfgas frfwat)
Definitions:
roilmin Minimum oil relative error, fraction. An inactive

perforation in a production well is considered for
activation only if the oil relative error function
(calculated minus measured oil production rate) is
negative and its absolute value is larger than roilmin.
Default is 1.E+10.
rgasmin Minimum gas relative error, fraction. An inactive
activation only if the gas relative error function
(calculated minus measured gas production rate) is
negative and its absolute value is larger than rgasmin.
Default is 1.E+10.
rwatmin Minimum water relative error, fraction. An inactive
activation only if the water relative error function
(calculated minus measured water production rate) is
negative and its absolute value is larger than rwatmin.
Default is 1.E+10.
rkhmin Minimum relative permeability thickness (KH) value,
fraction. An inactive perforation in a production well
is considered for activation only if the ratio of KH *
WIL in this perforation to the maximum KH * WIL in
active perforations is larger than rkhmin. Default is
0.1.
frfoil Minimum oil fractional flow coefficient, fraction. An
inactive perforation in a production well is considered
for activation only if the oil relative error function in
the well is negative, its absolute value is larger than
roilmin, the perforation relative KH value is larger
than rkhmin, and the oil fractional flow coefficient in
this perforation is larger than frfoil. Default is 0.1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-547

frfgas Minimum gas fractional flow coefficient, fraction. An

inactive perforation in a production well is considered
for activation only if the gas relative error function in
the well is negative, its absolute value is larger than
rgasmin, the perforation relative KH value is larger
than rkhmin, and the gas fractional flow coefficient in
this perforation is larger than frfgas. Default is 0.1.
frfwat Minimum water fractional flow coefficient, fraction.
An inactive perforation in a production well is
considered for activation only if the water relative
error function in the well is negative, its absolute value
is larger than rwatmin, the perforation relative KH
value is larger than rkhmin, and the water fractional
flow coefficient in this perforation is larger than
frfwat. Default is 0.1.
Examples:
MINRER 1.E+10 0.1 0.1 0.1 1.E+10 0.2 0.2
11-548 Landmark - R2003.4

11.3.5 Field Measurements and Error Function Coefficients (QMULT, TBHP,

TTHP, TPRND, TERC)
Field measurements of well bottomhole pressure, well tubinghead pressure, and
pressure in nodes (TBHP, TTHP, TPRND) as well as error function coefficients
(TERC) can be input at any time in the tuning time interval defined by the
TUNING and ENDTUNING cards.
Field measurements of oil, gas, and water rates in production wells can be input
using the QMULT cards.
If field measurements (TBHP, TTHP, TPRND, QMULT) are not input after some
TIME/DATE card in the tuning time interval, values from the previous input are
applied. Before the tuning time interval, they are set to zero. It is assumed that a
measurement is not available if a zero value of this measurement is input.
TBHP well_list
bhp1 bhp2... bhpn
(efc1 efc2... efcn)
TTHP well_list
thp1 thp2... thpn
(efc1 efc2... efcn)
TPRND node_list
prnd1 prnd2...prndn
(efc1 efc2... efcn)
TERC (well_list)
(OIL) (GAS) (WATER)
(efc) (efc) (efc)
Definitions:
well_list List of production wells for which field measurements

and/or error function coefficients are input in the
TBHP, TTHP, or TERC cards (see Section 1.5.2). If
the well list is not input in the TERC card, the error
function coefficients are assumed to apply to all
production wells.
node_list List of nodes for which pressure measurements and
error function coefficients are input in the TPRND
card.
bhp Bottomhole pressure measurement in a production
well, psia (kPA).
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-549

thp Tubinghead pressure measurement in a production

well, psia (kPA).
prnd Node pressure measurement, psia (kPA).
OIL Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
error function coefficient for the well oil rate.
GAS Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
error function coefficient for the well gas rate.
WATER Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
error function coefficient for the well water rate.
efc Coefficient of the corresponding error function.
NOTE: The number of the bhp/thp/prnd values must equal to the number of
wells/nodes in the well/node list.
Examples:
C
C Input rate and pressure measurements for Wells WELL1 and WELL2
C
QMULT WELL1 WELL2
200 320 !Oil rates
6210 7340 !Gas rates
4 400 !Water rates
TBHP WELL1 WELL2
4230 4920
TTHP WELL1 WELL2
1210 1310
C
C Pressure measurements in Node NODE3
C
TPRND NODE3
650
11-550 Landmark - R2003.4

11.3.6 Adjustment Factors (ADJWI, ADJFPERF, ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL,

ADJSPN)
The ADJWI, ADJFPERF, ADJTUBING, ADJWLFL, and ADJSPN cards can be
input at any time during a simulation.
ADJWI well_list
adfc1 adfc2... adfcn
ADJFPERF
WELL (DSWR) (DSGR) (DKH) (DKRW) (DKRG)
wn (adfc) (adfc) (adfc) (adfc) (adfc)
The last card is repeated as necessary to describe all the
perforations for each well for which parameters are being
adjusted.
ADJTUBING (well_list)
(adfc) (adfc) (adfc) (adfc)
ADJWLFL (well_list)
ADJSPN (node_list)
Definitions:
well_list List of production wells for which simulation

parameters are being adjusted (see Section 1.5.2).
node_list List of nodes for which simulation parameters of
output flowlines are being adjusted.
wn Well number or well name. The well number or name
must be entered for each data card. For multiple
completions in a single well, the alpha label X must be
substituted for the well number or well name on each
data card after the first.
WELL Alpha label indicating that this field will contain a well
number, a well name, or the alpha label X.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-551

DSWR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an

adjustment factor for endpoints of the water relative
DSGR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for endpoints of the gas relative
DKH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for permeability thicknesses in well
perforations.
DKRW Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for the water relative permeability at
DKRG Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for the gas relative permeability at
DDIAM Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for diameter of well tubing
(ADJTUBING), well output flowline (ADJWLFL), or
node output flowline (ADJSPN).
DLENGTH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for length of well tubing
DROUGH Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for roughness coefficient in well
tubing (ADJTUBING), well output flowline
(ADJWLFL), or node output flowline (ADJSPN).
DPRGR Alpha label indicating that this field will contain an
adjustment factor for pressure gradient in well tubing
adfc Adjustment factor of the corresponding parameter,
percent (%). The parameter multiplier will be defined
as 1 + .01adfc.
Examples:
C
C Adjust well indices, endpoints of water relative permeability curves,
C water relative permeability, and KH values in well perforations of
C Well WELL1 by 18%, 4%, 17%, and -5%, respectively.
C
ADJWI WELL1
18
11-552 Landmark - R2003.4

ADJFPERF
WELL DSWR DKRW DKH
WELL1 4 17 -5
X 4 17 -5
C
C Adjust roughness coefficient and pressure gradient in a tubing
C string of Well WELL1 by 27% and 32%, respectively.
C
ADJTUBING WELL1
DROUGH DPRGR
27 32
11.3.7 Output of Automatic Tuning Results

The adjustment factors for well perforation, tubing string, well flowline, and
pipeline parameters calculated in the TUNING procedure can be printed if
keywords PRADJFPERF and/or PRTUBSPN are included in the TUNING card.
The adjustment factors calculated in different passes of the tuning procedure can
be output if the debug print is requested using keyword PRDEBUG in the
TUNING card.
The tuning procedure results for wells and/or nodes can be output to two
spreadsheet files if keywords PRWLRP and/or PRNDRP are included in the
TUNING card. The measurements and predictions of the oil, gas, and water well
production rates, bottomhole pressure, and tubinghead pressure for different times
in the tuning time interval are output to the well spreadsheet file (Fortran unit 30).
The measurements and predictions of the oil, gas, and water rates and pressure in
the nodes of the surface pipeline network system are output to the node
spreadsheet file (Fortran unit 69).
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-553

11-554 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
12
Gas Field Operations (GFO) Option
12.1 Introduction
The Gas Field Operations (GFO) option provides a set of tools which have been
developed to assist the engineer in simulating various forms of gas deliverability
requirements found in many gas sales contracts. The principle factors involved
are as follows:
1. Annual contract -- For the number of years specified for the GFO contract, the
simulation time is advanced one year at a time, rather than through the use of
TIME or DATE cards. The contract must start on the first day of a month.
2. Multiple contracts -- The annual contract may actually be a set of contracts,

each corresponding to an area in the simulation model. All contracts start on
the same date.
3. DCQ - Daily Contracted Quantity -- This is the average daily rate for each
contract that must be delivered for the entire contract year.
4. Seasonality profile factors -- Monthly adjustment factors to adjust the DCQ

for the different seasons. Actual production for each month for each contract
is the DCQ times the profile factor for the month.
5. Swing factors -- There are several different variations with the use of the
swing factors, but in general and with varying conditions, the field, or each
contract area, must be capable of producing at a rate of DCQ times the swing
factor. If not, the DCQ must be reduced to a value which would allow this
excess capacity to be available at any time during the contract year. These
swing factors are specified monthly, just like the profile factors, and should be
equal to or greater than the profile factors.
6. Sales gas rate -- For GFO, the gas targets (DCQ's) are sales gas rates,
accounting for gas production minus gas consumption (fuel gas) and
shrinkage gas, plus extraneous gas imported from outside of the field.
7. ACQ - Annual Contracted Quantity -- This is equal to DCQ times the number
of days in the contract year.
8. Estimation of delivery capacity (maximum deliverability when all targets are

removed).
R2003.4 - Landmark 12-555

Gas Field Operations (GFO) Option VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
9. Multiple simulations of each contract year -- Normally at least two passes are
made through each contract year, depending on which DCQ contract option
(DCQCON) is being used. Pass 1 will be testing to ensure that the swing
constraints for each contract can be met and, if so, pass 2 will be made using
the seasonality profile factors. If the swing constraints cannot be met for each
contract, the appropriate DCQ values are reduced, and another pass 1 cycle is
performed.
10. Simulator output -- No output will be produced during the pass 1 simulations,
with the exception of the basic timestep summary lines so that the engineer
can monitor the progress of the simulation. Requested reports, using data not
included in an Annual Scheduling File (ASF), will be generated after the
completion of the pass 2 simulation of the annual contract, and any new input
data may be entered at the end of any contract. If additional reports and/or
data changes are required during a contract year, they must be set up in an
Annual Scheduling File.
12.2 Gas Field Operations Data (GFO)

This set of data controls the functionality of the gas contract for one or more
years. For the initial introduction, all data lines must be specified (optional data
elements may be defaulted). However, for subsequent entries such as extending a
contract, only the number of years is required. The current simulation time at the
beginning of a contract must correspond to the first day of a month.
GFO NYEARS (MAXCYC) (MONTH) (CUMTOL) (RDFAC)
(maxcyc) NO
YES
nyears (cumtol) (rdfac)
(CONTRACT (area))
(SWING swJAN ... swDEC)
(PROFILE prJAN ... prDEC)
(TAKE tkJAN ... tkDEC)
(DCQ) (DCQCON) (DCQLIM) (DCQANT)
YEAR
INSTANT
(dcq) (dcqlim)
ACQ (dcqant)
month
NO
(CONTRACT (area))
ENDGFO
Definitions:
NYEARS Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

appropriate position on the following card is the
12-556 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Gas Field Operations (GFO) Option
number of years for the contract(s). This entry is

required.
MAXCYC Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

maximum number of DCQ reduction cycles in the
first pass.
MONTH Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

appropriate position on the following card denotes
whether the simulation is forced to end a timestep
at the beginning of each month.
CUMTOL Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

tolerance to use when checking the gas production
target(s).
RDFAC Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

additional DCQ reduction factor.
nyears Number of years in the contract(s). This entry is

required.
maxcyc Maximum number of DCQ reduction cycles in the

first pass of each contract year. When this number
of cycles has been performed, the second pass is
performed. Default is 5 if the MAXCYC entry is
never included on a GFO card.
YES Alpha label indicating that the simulation is forced

to end a timestep at the beginning of each month.
NO Alpha label indicating that the simulation is not

forced to hit the beginning of each month. This is
the default if the MONTH entry is never included
on a GFO card.
cumtol Tolerance to use when checking the gas production

target(s) fraction. The DCQ will be reduced, and
another cycle performed, if the actual gas produced
is not within the tolerance of the required amount.
Default is 0.9999 if the CUMTOL entry is never
included on a GFO card.
rdfac Additional DCQ reduction factor, fraction. When

the DCQ is reduced based on actual production
divided by required production, it is further
multiplied by this factor to help speed convergence.
R2003.4 - Landmark 12-557

Default is 0.99 if the RDFAC entry is never included

on a GFO card.
CONTRACT Alpha label indicating that subsequent data (up to

another CONTRACT card or the ENDGFO card)
applies to this contract. At least one CONTRACT
must have been entered in the first set of GFO data.
area Area number or name. Specifying this data implies

that the multiple contracts option will be used, and
that all the production wells in this area are part of
this contract group. If this data is not entered, all
production wells in the field are considered to be in
the single contract group.
SWING Alpha label indicating that the following 12 values

on this card are monthly swing factors for this
contract.
sw Monthly swing factors for this contract, starting

with January. There must be 12 values. Default is
1.0 for each factor if SWING is never included in
GFO data.
PROFILE Alpha label indicating that the following 12 values

on this card are the monthly profile factors for this
contract.
pr Monthly profile factors for this contract, starting

with January. There must be 12 values. Default is
1.0 for each factor if PROFILE is never included in
GFO data.
TAKE Alpha label indicating that the following 12 values

on this card are the monthly gas take factors for this
contract.
tk Monthly gas take factors for this contract, starting

with January fraction. There must be 12 values.
Default is 1.0 for each factor if TAKE is never
included in the GFO data.
DCQ Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

initial daily contracted quantity (DCQ) for this
contract. This must be entered in the first set of
GFO data.
DCQCON Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

12-558 Landmark - R2003.4

DCQ swing condition for this contract. This must

have been entered in the first set of GFO data.
DCQLIM Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

DCQ limiting factor per cycle for this contract.
DCQANT Alpha label indicating that the entry in the

anticipated DCQ reduction factor per year for this
contract.
dcq Initial daily contracted quantity for this contract,

MSCF/D (SCM/D). This must have been entered
in the first set of GFO data.
One of the next 5 entries must have been entered in the DCQCON position in
the first set of GFO data.
YEAR Alpha label indicating that the field, or contract

area, must be able to produce at the DCQ
multiplied by the monthly swing factor for the
entire contract year.
INSTANT Alpha label indicating that the field, or contract

area, must be able to raise its production rate from
DCQ times profile to DCQ times swing for an
instant at any time in the contract year.
ACQ Alpha label indicating that the field must be able to

produce at DCQ times swing continuously until it
has produced the annual contracted quantity
(ACQ). This may not be used with the multiple
contracts option.
month Possible values: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN,

JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, DEC. The field must be
able to produce at DCQ times swing continuously
until it has produced a fraction of its annual
contracted quantity proportional to the sum of
profile factors up to the end of the specified month.
This may not be used with the multiple contracts
option.
NO Alpha label indicating that the swing requirement

will not be tested. The DCQ will not be reduced
even if the field cannot produce at DCQ times
profile.
dcqlim DCQ limiting factor per cycle for this contract,

fraction. The DCQ may not be reduced by more
R2003.4 - Landmark 12-559

than this factor times the original DCQ for each

cycle for this set of GFO data. Default is 0.0
(allowing unlimited reduction) if the DCQLIM
entry is never included in GFO data.
dcqant Anticipated DCQ reduction factor per year for this

contract, fraction. At the beginning of each
subsequent contract year, the current DCQ will be
further multiplied by this factor. Default is 1.0 if the
DCQANT entry is never included in GFO data.
ENDGFO Alpha label indicating the end of this set of GFO

data. Required. Simulation of the GFO contract
year(s) begins immediately at this point.
NOTE: 1. Almost all of the data that can be entered with the GFO card is
remembered when subsequent GFO data is entered. The only
required data in subsequent GFO data is NYEARS.
2. If area is specified on any CONTRACT card, then all

CONTRACT cards must have an area specified.
3. The data DCQ, DCQCON, DCQLIM, and DCQANT may all be

entered on one card or may be entered in any combination on
multiple cards.
4. When the maximum number of cycles, maxcyc, has been

performed during the first pass, the second pass is performed
with the reduced DCQ calculated at the end of that last cycle.
5. A contract year must start on the first day of a month.
6. Simulator output (e.g. WPLOT 1, PRINT WELLS TIME) that is

active at the time GFO data is entered is handled as follows:
a. TIME - the output is generated at the end of each

contract year.
b. TNEXT - the output is generated at the end of the last year
of the contract.
c. freq - the data is ignored and is not remembered when
the contract ends.
12-560 Landmark - R2003.4

12.3 Annual Scheduling File (ASF)

An Annual Scheduling File (ASF) is required if any data changes or output
reports are required during the contract year. Once introduced, the ASF will
remain in effect for subsequent contract years, until replaced by another ASF.
ASF
(recurrent data)
(MONTH month)
(recurrent data)
(MONTH month)
.
.
.
ENDASF
Definitions:
ASF Alpha label indicating the beginning of the Annual

Scheduling File.
MONTH Alpha label indicating that a timestep will end at

exactly the beginning of the specified month.
month Month at which the timestep will end. Possible

values: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL,
AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, DEC.
recurrent data Any recurrent data allowed by the simulator except

for the keywords listed in the notes below.
ENDASF Alpha label indicating the end of the Annual

Scheduling File.
NOTE: 1. The data within the Annual Scheduling File is read and applied
during each GFO contract year.
2. A new ASF/ENDASF set of data replaces the previously

specified set of data.
3. To turn off the Annual Scheduling File, enter ASF/ENDASF

with no data in between.
4. Data entered between the ASF card and the first MONTH card
(or the ENDASF card if no MONTH card) applies at the
beginning of each contract year.
5. A MONTH card is not allowed for the month at which the

contract begins.
R2003.4 - Landmark 12-561

6. If multiple MONTH cards are entered, they must occur

chronologically following the month at which the contract
begins.
7. The following data cards are not allowed within an ASF/

ENDASF set of data: TIME, DATE, STOP, END, WELL,
WREST, WLASTR, BLITZ, CBLITZ, TUNING, GFO, ASF.
8. Simulator output entered within the Annual Scheduling File is

handled as follows:
a. TIME - the output is generated at the beginning of each

month specified on a MONTH card and at the
end of each contract year.
b. TNEXT - the output is generated at the beginning of the
next month specified on a MONTH card or at the
end of the contract year, whichever occurs first.
c. freq - the output is generated every freq timesteps.
12-562 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
13
Local Grid Refinement1
13.1 Introduction
The use of the Local Grid Refinement (LGR) option in VIP-EXECUTIVE
requires only a relatively small amount of additional input data. This
involves primarily the location of the well perforations relative to the grid
refinements, which must be specified unless the well is located entirely in
the ROOT grid. Other input data provide options for significantly
improving the CPU run time performance, particularly for multi-grid
system runs involving mixed levels of implicitness.
13.2 Formulation Options

In VIP-THERM, only IMPLICIT is allowed.
In VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE, two formulation options are available

for use with multi-grid systems; IMPES and IMPLICIT. The formulation
option may be switched at the beginning of any restart run. If no
formulation specification is entered in a run starting from initial
conditions, the IMPES form of the finite difference equations will be used.
If no formulation specification is entered in a restart run, the formulation
will be the same as used during the previous run. Unless otherwise
specified, the same formulation option will be used for all of the grids.
However, significant CPU time savings may be achieved by varying the
level of implicitness to be used with each of the grids.
13.2.1 Formulation Specification by Grid (IMPGRID) (VIP-COMP or VIP-

ENCORE)
If entered, the IMPGRID/ENDIMPGRID data must occur along with
other utility data and should follow any IMPES/IMPLICIT data.
The IMPGRID keyword indicates that the following lines will declare the
finite difference formulation to be used for specific grids. This data must
be followed by an ENDIMPGRID keyword.
1. Available as a separately licensed option.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-563

Local Grid Refinement VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
IMPGRID
gridnamei formulationi
ENDIMPGRID
Definitions:
IMPGRID Alpha label indicating the beginning of the

formulation specification data by grid.
gridnamei Name of the grid, as specified in the grid refinement

data in the initialization data set.
formulationi Type of finite difference formulation to be used for

this grid. It must be either IMPES or IMPLICIT. This
can be changed at the start of any restart run.
ENDIMPGRID Alpha label indicating the end of the formulation

specification data by grid.
Example:
IMPLICIT
C
RESTART 0
C
IMPGRID
ROOT IMPES
OILCOLMN IMPES
ENDIMPGRID
C
START
In this example, the IMPLICIT card first sets the formulation to IMPLICIT
for all grids. Then the ROOT grid and the OILCOLMN grid are reset to
IMPES, leaving all the radial well grids using the IMPLICIT formulation.
13.2.2 Turn Off Pressure Interpolation (NOPINT)

If entered, the NOPINT card must occur along with other utility data.
This option is not saved on the restart file and thus must be respecified
at the beginning of each run.
The NOPINT card is used to turn off the default pressure interpolation
calculation across grids. The default procedure is to do linear
interpolations for pressures in the parent block boundaries opposite
refined gridblocks. This interpolation is performed in all three directions,
if there is communication in the respective directions. However, for
comparisons to results from previous simulator versions, this procedure
13-564 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Local Grid Refinement
may be turned off, resulting in the usage of constant pressures across the
parent gridblocks. In VIP-THERM the NOPINT card also turns off an
equivalent temperature interpolation calculation.
NOPINT
13.3 Activate/Deactivate Grids (Not available in VIP-THERM)

At initial conditions, all grid refinements are assumed to be active.
However, any refinement may be deactivated and/or reactivated at any
time during the simulator run. This feature may be used to achieve
significant CPU time savings by activating refined grids only during the
simulation time at which there is significant activity occurring within the
grid. If a grid refinement is deactivated, then all sub-refinements
[children] of the grid are also deactivated. When a grid refinement is
activated, then all grid refinements which contain it [parents] are also
activated.
Only the pore volumes and transmissibilities at initial conditions are

preserved and reinstated as necessary, as grid refinements are deactivated
and reactivated. When a grid refinement that has been active for one or
more timesteps is deactivated, new values for the unknowns (pressure,
composition, saturations, etc.) are calculated for each of the gridblocks
that had been refined in the parent grid, such that precise material balance
is maintained. When a grid is activated after having been inactive for one
or more timesteps, the unknowns of the parent gridblocks are propagated
directly to the refined gridblocks, again preserving material balance. The
activation/deactivation procedure is performed after all input for the time
interval has been read.
ACTIVATE gridname1 gridname2 . . . . gridnamen

DEACTIVATE gridname1 gridname2 . . . . gridnamem
Definitions:
ACTIVATE Alpha label indicating that the following named

grids are to be activated.
gridnamei Names of the grid refinements to be activated. If

this list contains only the keyword ALL, then all
grid refinements will be activated.
DEACTIVATE Alpha label indicating that the following named

grids are to be deactivated.
gridnamej Names of the grid refinements to be deactivated.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-565

Example:
ACTIVATE ALL
DEACTIVATE WELL21 WELL28 WELL35
13.4 Timestep Controls

For multi-grid systems which may involve mixed levels of implicitness, it
may be necessary to have separate sets of maximum change parameters
for both the iteration and the timestep. To accomplish this, two new
optional keywords have been implemented: DTMPL and ITNMPL. When
a DT keyword is read, the maximum change parameters for both the
IMPES grids and the IMPLICIT grids are set to the values specified on the
DT card. Also when an ITNLIM keyword is read, the maximum change
parameters for both the IMPES grids and the IMPLICIT grids are set to the
values specified on the ITNLIM card. If different values are desired for the
IMPLICIT grids, the DTMPL and ITNMPL keywords must be used to
specify the maximum change parameters for the IMPLICIT grids only.
13.4.1 Timestep Controls for IMPLICIT Grids (DTMPL) (VIP-COMP or

VIP-ENCORE)
The DTMPL card defines the maximum changes allowed during the
timestep for IMPLICIT grids only. The values are order dependent, but
only as many as necessary need be entered. They will not affect the values
used for IMPES grids.
DTMPL dpmax (dsmax) (dvmax) (dzmax) (card 1)
BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH

DTONLY DTONLY DTONLY DTONLY
(card 2)
MAXONLY MAXONLY MAXONLY MAXONLY
NONE NONE NONE NONE
13-566 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
dpmax Maximum pressure change allowed during a

timestep in IMPLICIT grids, psi (kPa). Default is
500 psi.
dsmax Maximum water saturation change allowed during

a timestep in IMPLICIT grids. Default is 0.1.
dvmax Maximum gas saturation change allowed during a

timestep in IMPLICIT grids. Default is 0.1.
dzmax Maximum change in total mole fraction allowed

during a timestep in IMPLICIT grids. Default is 0.1.
The optional second card can be input to modify the usage of the new
maximum changes as to whether the appropriate maximum will be used
for checking the maximum change over the timestep, calculating the next
timestep size, both of these, or none.
Example:
DT -1 1 93 100 .03 .10 .04

DTMPL 300 .10 .10 .10
13.4.2 Iteration Controls for IMPLICIT Grids (ITNMPL) (VIP-COMP or

VIP-ENCORE)
The ITNMPL card defines the maximum changes allowed for each outer
iteration for IMPLICIT grids only. The values are order dependent, but
only as many as necessary need be entered. They will not affect the values
used for IMPES grids.
ITNMPL dplim (dswlim) (dsglim)(dzlim)
Definitions:
dplim Maximum pressure change allowed during any

single outer iteration in IMPLICIT grids, psi (kPa).
Default is 300 psia.
dswlim Maximum water saturation change allowed during

any single outer iteration in IMPLICIT grids.
Default is 0.1.
dsglim Maximum gas saturation change allowed during

any single outer iteration in IMPLICIT grids.
Default is 0.1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-567

dzlim Maximum change in primary phase composition

allowed during any single outer iteration in
IMPLICIT grids. Default is 0.1.
Example:
ITNLIM 1 10 100 .03 .10 .04

ITNMPL 300 .10 .10 .10
13-568 Landmark - R2003.4

13.5 Matrix Solution Option (CBLITZ)

A new matrix solver package, CBLITZ, has been developed specifically for
the composite system of linear equations. CBLITZ is an iterative solver,
using the Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (GMRES)
method. CBLITZ must be used for all multi-grid systems and for three-
dimensional radial single-grid systems using the FLOW360 feature. Other
single-grid systems may still use BLITZ, EXCEL, or GAUSS.
CBLITZ (param1) . . . (paramn) (card 1)

(value1) . . . (valuen) (card 2)
Definitions:
CBLITZ Alpha label indicating that the CBLITZ solver is to

be used for this run.
ITER A CBLITZ iteration summary should be printed. No

entry should be made on card 2 corresponding to
this entry.
NOITER A CBLITZ iteration summary should not be

printed. This is the default. No entry should be
made on card 2 corresponding to this entry.
NORTH Maximum number of orthogonalizations used by

the GMRES method. Default is 10.
NIT Maximum number of CBLITZ iterations allowed.

Default is 20.
NITG Maximum number of subgrid iterations on each

grid to be performed for each CBLITZ iteration.
Default is 1 for Cartesian refinements and 3 for
radial refinements.
NOPTG Ordering option for line constraints for each grid.

The grid ordering can have a significant effect upon
convergence. Typically a grid should be ordered
first in the direction of the strongest transmissibility,
then in the next strongest direction, etc. Also it may
be beneficial to order first in the direction of the
smallest grid dimension, then in the direction of the
next smallest grid dimension, etc. A value of 0
allows CBLITZ to determine the ordering for each
grid. Default is 0.
0 = Automatic determination.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-569

3-D Problems:
1 = XYZ 3 = XZY 5 = YZX
2 = YXZ 4 = ZXY 6 = ZYX
2-D Problems:
1 = XY or XZ
2 = YX or ZX
NBEPS Composite grid preconditioning:
0= Sequential preconditioning
1= BEPS preconditioning
2= FAC preconditioning
Default is 02 when JCPR=1; default is 0 otherwise.
NHARM Preconditioning method for the subgrids. The

current implementation utilizes nested
factorization, and the input value is not used.
JCPR Constrained pressure residual method (CPR)

option:
0= No pressure predictor step.

1= Use pressure predictor step.
Default is 1 if any grid is implicit.
RTOL Norm (EUCLIDEAN) residual reduction ratio

convergence tolerance parameter for the composite
system. Default is .005.
RTOLG Norm (EUCLIDEAN) residual reduction ratio

convergence tolerance parameter for each grid.
Default is .005.
ADJTOL Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm

with default values for TOLMN, TOLMX, TOLST and
TOLEX. No entry should be made on card 2
corresponding to this entry.
TOLMN Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the minimum value of linear tolerance to be
used throughout the simulation. Default is RTOL so that,
if RTOL is defaulted, then TOLMN defaults to 5.E-03 but,
if RTOL is specified, then TOLMN is set to the specified
RTOL value. TOLMN must range between 0.0 and 1.0.
TOLMX Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the maximum value of linear tolerance to be
used throughout the simulation. Default is 0.5. TOLMX
must range between 0.0 and 1.0.
13-570 Landmark - R2003.4

TOLST Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the value of linear tolerance to be used in the
first Newton step of each timestep. Default is
max(TOLMX, 5 * RTOL). TOLST must be less than
TOLMX and greater than or equal to 0.0.
TOLEX Turns on the adjustable linear tolerance algorithm and

specifies the value of the exponent in the power law used
to control the reduction of the linear solver tolerance as
the Newton iteration nears convergence. Default is 3.0.
TOLEX must be nonnegative.
NOTE: The pressure predictor step (JCPR=1) should only be used in

conjuction with the implicit formulation.
Example:
CBLITZ NORTH RTOL NITG RTOLG

20 .002 3 .002
13.5.1 CBLITZ Parameters by Grid (CBLGRID)

Three of the CBLITZ parameters can be modified on a grid-by-grid basis,
providing additional flexibility and efficiency for the solution of the linear
system of equations. If this data is introduced, it must immediately follow
the CBLITZ data. Any one, two, or all three of the parameter names may
be introduced in any order following the keyword CBLGRID. These
parameters may be particularly helpful with multi-grid systems involving
mixed levels of implicitness. This data must be followed by an
ENDCBLGRID keyword.
CBLGRID (NITG) (NOPTG) (RTOLG)

gridname1 (nitg1) (noptg1) (rtolg1)
gridname2 (nitg2) (noptg2) (rtolg2)
. . . .
gridnamen (nitgn) (noptgn) (rtolgn)
ENDCBLGRID
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-571

Definitions:
CBLGRID Alpha label indicating that the following data will

modify some of the CBLITZ parameters on a grid-
by-grid basis.
gridnamei Name of the grid.
NITG Alpha label indicating that this column of data will

change the maximum number of subgrid iterations
for the specified grid.
nitgi Maximum number of subgrid iterations to be

performed for this grid for each CBLITZ iteration.
NOPTG Alpha label indicating that this column of data will

change the ordering for the specified grid.
noptgi Gridblock ordering for the specified grid.
RTOLG Alpha label indicating that this column of data will

change the grid convergence tolerance for the
specified grid.
rtolgi Grid convergence tolerance for the specified grid.
ENDCBLGRID Alpha label indicating the end of the CBLITZ

parameter input by grid.
Example:
CBLGRID NITG
ROOT 1
OILCOLMN 1
ENDCBLGRID
From the previous example, the NITG parameter was first initialized to 3
for all grids. Then with the above example data, the NITG parameter is
reset to 1 for both the ROOT grid and the OILCOLMN grid. Thus the
CBLITZ solver would perform a maximum of three subgrid iterations on
each of the implicit radial well grids and one subgrid iteration on the
ROOT and OILCOLMN grids for each CBLITZ iteration.
13-572 Landmark - R2003.4

13.6 Well Data Options

For multi-grid systems, it may be necessary to specify in which grid(s) that
the well resides, in addition to the standard IW and JW well location. If no
additional data is entered, the well is assumed to be in the ROOT grid, and
the IW and JW are relative to that grid. However, if the well perforations
are in one or more of the grid refinements, then the grid name must be
specified on either the WELL card or the FPERF card. If the well
perforations are all within the same grid, then the grid may be specified on
the WELL card. If the well perforations are in two or more grids, then the
grid must be specified for each of the perforations, along with the proper
IW and JW relative to the grid.
13.6.1 Well Name and Location (WELL)
WELL . . . . (GRID) . . . .
. . . . (gridname) . .
Definitions:
GRID Alpha keyword indicating that this field will

contain the grid name in which the well is
perforated.
gridname Name of the grid in which this well is perforated. If

entered, the iw, jw well location must be relative to
this grid.
Example:
WELL N NAME IW JW GRID

1 P1 X X P1
2 P2 X X P2
3 P3 26 23 OILCOLMN
4 P4 X X P4
5 P5 5 10 OILCOLMN
6 P6 X X P6
8 P8 X X P8
9 P9 X X P9
10 P10 X X P10
11 P11 X X P11
13 P13 X X P13
15 P15 X X P15
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-573

FPERF
WELL . . . . (GRID) . . . .
. . . . (gridname) . .
Definitions:
GRID Column heading for gridname, the name of the grid

in which this well perforation is located. The iw, jw
and l, if entered for the perforation, must be relative
to this grid.
NOTE: 1. If the well is in a radial grid and numerical values for (IW, JW)
have not been specified in the FPERF data or in any previous
WELL name and location data, then perforations will be
automatically generated in IW=1, for JW=1,2,...,NTHETA for the
radial grid.
2. For radial wells the alpha label X can be specifed for IW and JW.
3. This is for radial refinements and root grid with FLOW360

option. For perforations in the first ring (IW=1) the following
applies:
d
wil = ------------------------------------------------------------
ln ------------- + skin + Sr
radb
radw
where d is the gridblock angle. The default radb is the gridblock
centroid (log mean radius with BLOCKTR option). The default
radw is ri.
Example:
FPERF
WELL L KH GRID IW JW
1 1 4320 P1 X X
X 2 972 P1 X X
2 1 872 P2 X X
X 2 84 P2 X X
4 1 648 P4 X X
6 1 2800 P6 X X
X 2 112 P6 X X
13-574 Landmark - R2003.4

13.7 Assign Gridblocks to Injection Regions (INJREGN)

See Section 4.4.6 for further discussion.
INJREGN nir (NOCASCADE)

i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (gridname)
Definitions:
NOCASCADE Alpha label indicating that this region number

should not be cascaded to any grids located within
the gridblocks defined in the data specified.
gridname Name of the grid to which this gridblock range

applies. If the gridname is not entered, the data is
assumed to apply to the root grid.
NOTE: If NOSASCADE is not entered, the region number will be cascaded to

lower level grids contained within these ranges.
13.8 Options Restricted to Use with Single-Grid Systems Only

Boundary Flux Option
Pattern Well Average Pressure Option
Pattern Element Option
13.9 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS)
FTRANS
(GRID name1 (name2))
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (tt)
(repeat as necessary)
Definitions:
GRID Data applies to a particular grid.
name1 Name of grid1. Default is ROOT.
name2 Name of grid2. Default is name1.
See Section 8.6.5 for additional definitions.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-575

13.10 Override Modification (OVER)
OVER array (array) (array) (array)

(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (#v)
(repeat as necessary)
Definitions:
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT.
NOTE: Operations only apply to the specified grid, i.e., no propagation.
13.11 Value Override (VOVER)
VOVER array
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
repeat as necessary
Definitions:
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT.
NOTE: Operations only apply to the specified grid, i.e., no propagation.
13-576 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
14
00000Tracer Option1
14.1 Introduction
This is short description of a set of tools which have been developed to
improve and expand the simulation capabilities in the analysis and
interpretation of tracer tests and in the design and performance analysis of
secondary recovery projects. The tools are built around the particle
tracking method which allows accurate simulation of tracer flow
associated with convection and physical dispersion. The method is nearly
numerical dispersion free and allows accurate simulation of tracer flow in
field scale simulation. The algorithm is implemented in VIP-EXECUTIVE
and allows simulation of tracer flow within the framework of three-
dimensional, multi-phase, non-steady state reservoir simulation. In
addition to accurate simulation of tracer flow the software allows: (1)
tracking of fronts in flooding operations; (2) construction of three-
dimensional flow trajectories and streamlines of velocity field; (3)
calculation of the areal sweep; (4) visualization and animation of tracer
flow. Both gas and water tracers are allowed in the tracer option. Tracers
can be phase partitioning or non-partitioning . Tracers can partition
between gas/oil, oil/water, gas/oil/water or gas/water (see note
following Section 14.2.3). 00
14.2 VIP Tracer Option Input Data Description

All tracer option related input cards in the simulation modules fall into
three sections: Utility Data, Recurrent Data, and Output Control Data. The
run control data of the Utility Data section include three parameters in the
DIM card which change the default dimension of the parameters used in
the tracer option and the FRONT card which invokes the front tracking
option. The TRACER card and the TRACIN card are recurrent data. The
TRACER card defines some parameters and specifies options which will
be used in the simulation run. The TRACIN card controls the tracer
injection. And, finally, the Output Control Data database section includes
the WTRACE card and the WTRPLOT card which control output to the
tracer, and the PRINT TRACER card which controls tracer option output
to the simulator output file. 00
1. Available as a separately licensed option. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-577

Tracer Option VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL

The card allows the user to change the default dimensions on any run
starting from initial conditions (time zero) and to increase the dimensions
passed on to a restart. 00
DIM NPRTM NTRCEM NTRWLM

nprtm ntrcem ntrwlm
00 Definitions:
NPRTM Alpha label for the maximum of the total number of

tracer particles to be defined in this run. Default is
5000.
nprtm The value of the corresponding parameter.
NTRCEM Alpha label for the maximum number of tracers to

ntrcem The value of the corresponding parameter.
NTRWLM Alpha label for the maximum number of

simultaneous tracer injectors to be defined in this
run. (Maximum number of TRACIN cards for this
run. See section 12.2.4). Default is 2.
ntrwlm The value of the corresponding parameter.
14.2.2 Activate Front Tracking Option (FRONT)

00 If entered the FRONT card must occur along with other utility data.
The FRONT card activates the front tracking option. It allows tracking of
the injected water front in a unit mobility ratio displacement (water-water
displacement) or the water front in an oil displacement by water. To use
the front tracking option the user must inject tracer (TRACIN card) at the
moment when the water injection starts. By default, activation of the
tracer option in VIP-CORE does not automatically activate the front
tracking option. This option cannot be used with the gas tracer option. 00
FRONT (WWDSP)
00 Definition:
WWDSP Optional alpha label indicating that this is water-

water displacement. Default is oil-water
displacement.
14-578 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Tracer Option
14.2.3 Define Parameters for Tracer Option (TRACER)

This group of input cards defines some parameters for tracer option
calculations. The TRACER card indicates the beginning of the group. The
remaining cards must closely follow. Most of the cards are optional. The
card order within the group is not important. This group of cards belongs
to the recurrent utility data cards of the simulation modules and can
appear several times within the input data set if it is necessary to redefine
some of the parameters later into the run. 00
TRACER ntrcw ntrcg (nsubt)

(NAMES name1 name2 ... namentrcw + ntrcg)
Kg
ntr Kw
KVALUE cname1 ( cname2 fac )
trname P KW
P KG
Kg
ntr Kw
KVALUE cname1 ( cname2 fac )
trname P KW
P KG
W

ISO G dspl

O
W

ANISO G dspl dspt

O
(BOUNDARY xdir ydir zdir)

(CENTER)
(ORIGIN)
(TRCOFF)
Definitions: 00
ntrcw Number of water tracers to be used in the run.
ntrcg Number of gas tracers to be used in the run.
nsubt Number of tracer substeps per simulator timestep.

Default is 1.
NAMES Alpha label indicating that names of tracers follow

on this card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-579

namei Name of tracer i. An alphanumeric label containing

up to 8 characters.
KVALUE Alpha label for specifying the k-value of a

partitioning tracer. Default is non partitioning.
ntr Tracer identification number.
trname Tracer identification name.
Kw Oil/water tracer partitioning k-value (constant).

Definition: (Mole fraction of tracer in the oil phase)/
(Mole fraction of tracer in the aqueous phase)
Kw = -0.5 is interpreted as Kw = infinite, and the
tracer is a non partitioning oil tracer.
Kg Gas/oil tracer partitioning k-value (constant).

Definition: (Mole fraction of tracer in the gas
phase)/(Mole fraction of tracer in the oil phase).
Kg = -0.5 is interpreted as Kg = infinite, and the
tracer is a non partitioning gas tracer.
cname1 Hydrocarbon component name used to compute Kg

internally by the simulator. Kg = k-value of cname1.
cname2 Hydrocarbon component name used to compute Kg

internally by the simulator as a linear combination
of the k-values of cname1 and cname2.
Kg = (k-value of cname1)* fac +
(k-value of cname2)*(1-fac)
fac Weighting factor for computing Kg from the

k-values of cname1 and cname2.
P, KW, KG Alpha labels indicating that (pressure, kvalue) table

data pairs will follow. When entering both KW and
KG data, either can be terminated by a value of -1 in
the appropriate pressure column. The model
interpolates these data in the ln(K) vs. ln(P) space.
ISO Alpha label which turns on isotropic dispersion

calculations. Defines the value of dispersivity
coefficient.
ANISO Alpha label which turns on anisotropic dispersion

calculations. Defines the values of longitudinal and
transversal dispersivity coefficients.
W Alpha label indicating the dispersivity specified is

for the water phase. Default applies to all three
phases.
14-580 Landmark - R2003.4

G Alpha label indicating the dispersivity specified is

for the gas phase. Default applies to all three
phases.
O Alpha label indicating the dispersivity specified is

for the oil phase. Default applies to all three phases.
dspl Longitudinal dispersivity, ft. Default is 0.
dspt Transversal dispersivity, ft. Default is 0.
BOUNDARY Alpha label which defines boundary conditions in

the x, y, and z directions. Physical dispersion of
tracer is modeled by appropriate random
adjustment of particle positions at the end of the
timesteps. This adjustment may bring a particle
outside the model. Particles can also cross the
boundary with convective flow due to large
timesteps.The user can prevent this by defining
appropriate boundary conditions.
xdir, ydir, zdir Alpha labels (FLOW, NOFLOW) which define

boundary conditions for dispersion calculations in
the x, y, and z directions, respectively. The FLOW
label indicates that particles can cross the boundary,
and the NOFLOW label specifies that particles will
be reflected by the boundary. Default is NOFLOW.
CENTER Alpha label which overrides default well locations

in the grid blocks.
ORIGIN Alpha label specifying that there is a well at the

origin of the radial grid system.
TRCOFF Alpha label which turns off tracer option

calculation.
NOTE: 1. For a water tracer, Kg is optional on the KVALUE line, while for
a gas tracer, Kw is optional on the KVALUE line.
2. For any tracer, if both Kw and Kg are defined, then three phase,
gas/oil/water partitioning will be modeled. (This will reduce
to gas/water partitioning if the oil phase is missing)
3. Gas/water tracer partitioning can be modeled as described by

note 2, or by setting Kw = 1, and defining Kg as the ratio (mole
fraction of tracer in the gas phase)/(mole fraction of tracer in
the water phase), or by setting Kg = 1, and defining Kw as the
ratio (mole fraction of tracer in the gas phase)/(mole fraction of
tracer in the water phase).
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-581

Example:
00 TRACER 0 3 2 ! FOR 3 GAS TRACERS

NAMES C-14 Co-60 SR-90
CENTER
ISO 1.
BOUNDARY FLOW FLOW NOFLOW
14.2.4 Inject Tracer (TRACIN)

The TRACIN card defines the tracer injections. Parameters in the card are
order dependent. 00
TRACIN ntr itrwell npart (nplanes) (trcvol) (trconc) (al1 al2)
00 Definitions:
ntr A tracer number from the list of tracers, or a tracer

name from those defined by the NAMES card.
itrwell The well number or name of the well injecting the

tracer.
npart The number of tracer particles to be introduced

with this tracer injection.
nplanes The number of planes along which to place new

particles. Default is 1 plane.
trcvol The volume of traced water or gas to be injected, in

bbls. Default is 1 bbl.
trconc The concentration of tracer injected. Default is 1.0
al1 al2 The values of two angles which define the sector
near the well to place the particles. The angles are
counter-clockwise with the positive direction of x-
axis, degrees. al1 is the starting angle, al2 is the
sector angle. Default is the full circle around the
well.
14-582 Landmark - R2003.4

14.2.5 Write Map Records to Database (WTRACE)

00 This card controls map output to the tracer data base.
TIME
( freq )

WTRACE TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions:
TIME Alpha label that causes the record to be written each

is not to print on the basis of TIME or DATE cards.
TNEXT Alpha label that causes the record to be written only

Default is not to print on the basis of the next TIME
or DATE card.

freq A number that causes the record to be written after

every freq timesteps. Default is 99999.


14.2.6 Write Plot Records to Database (WTRPLOT)

00 This card controls map output to the tracer data base.
TIME
( freq )

WTRPLOT TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions:

R2003.4 - Landmark 14-583


or DATE card.


14.2.7 Write Records to Tracer File (WTRDBG)

00 This card controls output to the tracer output file (Fortran unit 38).
TIME
( freq )

WTRDBG TNEXT
OFF
00 Definitions:


or DATE card.


14-584 Landmark - R2003.4

14.2.8 Write Tracer Summary (PRINT TRACER)

The PRINT card has an additional alpha label which causes output of the
tracer summary report. 00
TIME
( freq )

PRINT TRACER TNEXT
OFF
00 Definition:
TRACER Alpha label that causes the tracer summary report

to be written to the simulator output file.
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-585

14-586 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
15
00000Parallel Computing1
15.1 Parallel Grid Assignment
15.1.1 Introduction
Assignment of parallel processors to grids is a critical task to maintain
parallel efficiency. The goal of processor assignment should be to
maximize efficeincy while at the same time minimizing the required
parallel resources. Since a red/black ordering is used in the linear
equation solution, for any parallel simulation the maximum efficiency for
the solver is achieved by assigning two neighboring grids to each
processor so that calculations on red and/or black grids are
performed in an alternating fashion on the same processor. On the other
hand, for compositional simulations in which the solver CPU time is not
dominant, the maximum parallel performance can be obtained with each
grid being assigned to a separate processor.
15.1.1 Processor Mapping File

The mapping of grids to processors is assigned in the standard input file to
the simulator (i.e., fortran Unit 6). This file is generated automatically by
the PAVA job submittal panel. For command line execution the following
information is required. The file contains four types of information: the
location of the EXECFIL for VIP-EXEC, the location of restart files for the
parallel restarts, the grid and processor information and the assignment of
processors to grids. Each line of input data for the mapping file is
described below: 00
execfil
restart
nproc ngrids idebug
gridi processor
gridi+1 processor
. .
. .
. .
girdngrids processor
1. Not yet available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 15-587

Parallel Computing VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
Definitions: 00
execfil Fully qualified name of the execfil.dat file input to

VIP-EXEC.
restart Fully qualified name of the restart file read by VIP-

EXEC.
nproc Number of processors.
ngrids Number of grids.
idebug Debug control flag.
idebug = 0 for no debug output

idebug = 1 will produce debug output from all
processors.
gridi Particular grid assigned to a particular processor.

Grids are identified by numbers as printed in the
process id file of VIP-CORE, (fortran unit 15).
processor Processor number assigned to grid. Processor

number can be any number between 1 and nproc
inclusive.
Example Data: 00
8 grids plus ROOT grid and 4 processors
Grid2 Grid3 Grid4 Grid5
Grid6 Grid7 Grid8 Grid9
15-588 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL Parallel Computing
The mapping file would appear as follows:
/vip/usr/xxx/execfil.dat
/vip/usr/xxx/casei.rst
4 9 0
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 2
5 2
6 3
7 3
8 4
9 4
The ROOT grid is always grid number 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 15-589

Parallel Computing VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
15-590 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
A
References
1. Beggs, H. Dale, Gas Production Operations, OGCI Publications, pp.
103-104 (1984).
2. Peaceman, D.W., "Interpretation of Well-Block Pressures in Numerical

Reservoir Simulation", Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 183-194 (June, 1978).
3. Jain, A.K., "An Accurate Explicit Equation for Friction Factor", J.

Hydraulics Div. ASCE, Vol 2, No. Hy5 (May, 1976).
4. Wallis, J.R., "Incomplete Gaussian Elimination as a Preconditioning for

Generalized Conjugate Gradient Acceleration", SPE 12265 presented at
the Seventh SPE Symposium on Numerical Simulation, San Francisco
(1983).
5. Wallis, J.R., Kendall, R.P., and Little, T.E.: "Constrained Residual

Acceleration of Conjugate Residual Methods", paper SPE 13536
presented at the Eighth SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation,
Dallas (1985).
6. Meter, D.M. and Bird, R.B., "Tube Flow of Non-Newtonian Polymer

Solutions: Part I Laminar Flow and Rheological Models", AICHE
Journal, Vol. 10, No. 6, Nov. 1964, p. 1143-1150.
7. Hong, C., "Development of a 2-D Micellar/Polymer Simulator", PhD.

Dissertation, The University of Texas at Austin, 1982.
8. Hirasaki, G.J., "Ion Exchange with Clays in the Presence of Surfactant",

Soc. Pet. Eng. J. (April 1982), p. 181-192.
9. Modine, A.D., Coats,K.H., and Wells, M.W., "A Superposition Method

for representing Wellbore Crossflow in Reservoir Simulation," SPE
20746 presented at the 65th Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition of the Society of Petroleum Engineers, New Orleans (1990).
10. Young, L.C., "Equation of State Compositional Modeling on Vector

Processors", SPE paper 16023 presented at the Ninth SPE Symposium
on Reservoir Simulation, San Antonio, Texas, February 1-4, 1987.
11. Peng, D.Y., and Robinson, D.B., "A New Two-Constant Equation of
State", I and E.C. Fundamentals (1976) 15, No. 1, pp. 59-64.
R2003.4 - Landmark A-591

References VIP-EXECUTIVE REFERENCE MANUAL
12. Redlich, O., and Kwong, J.N.S., "On the Termodynamics of Solutions
V. - An Equation of State Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions", Chemical
Review (1949) Vol. 44, pp.52-63.
13. Odeh, A.S., An Equation for Calculating Skin Factor Due to

Restricted Entry, JPT, June 1980, pp. 964 - 965.
A-592 Landmark - R2003.4

Index
000000Keyword Index
A
ABORT 7-398
ACTION 5-312
ACTIVATE 12-565
ADDNGL 3-88
ADJTOL 7-405, 12-570
ADJWLFL 11-551
ADP1 9-436
ADP2 9-436
ALLCOMP 6-354
ALQ 3-139, 3-148
ANGLE 10-456
ANISO 13-579
AP1 9-436
AP2 9-436
AP3 9-436
AREA 4-195
ARTLFT 5-303
ASF 561
ATWGCL 3-160
ATWGCT 3-161
ATWGVA 3-159
AUTOCYCLE 2-48
B
BATCH 7-409, 7-410
BEGGS 3-74
BENEFIT 5-312, 5-313
BETAP 9-440
BHITAB 3-145, 10-492
BHP 3-129
BHP(IQI) 3-145
BHP(ITHP) 3-139, 3-145
BHPADD 3-147
BHPITN 3-136
BHPTAB 3-139
BHPWAG 3-171
R2003.4 - Landmark Keyword-593

BINARY 6-369, 6-370

BLITZ 7-403
BOUNDARY 13-579
BP 9-436
BRK 9-436
BUILDUP 6-348
C
C 1-23
CAINJ 9-442
CATEGORY 5-312
CAW 9-447
CBHPMN 7-399
CBLGRID 12-571
CBLITZ 12-569
CENTER 13-579
CHKTAB 7-399
CINJ 3-179
CLINJ 9-441, 9-443
CLW 9-447
CNDBNK 3-188
CNDBWL 3-189
COMP 3-79, 3-81
COMPERF 3-174
CONDENSATE 4-289
CONTRACT 556
CORERST 2-34
CP 9-434
CPADS 9-434
CPERF 3-185
CPINJ 9-441
CPLOT 2-42
CPROD 3-179
CRK 9-436
CROSS 6-370
CSE1 9-440
CSEP 9-440
CSTART 3-186
CSTOP 3-187
CURVE ELEVPR 10-456
CURVE TEMPPR 10-454, 10-459
CURVE TMGRPR 10-455
CURVE VCPR 10-457, 10-458, 10-479
CYCLETABLE 3-179
CYCLIC 3-184
Keyword-594 Landmark - R2003.4

D
DAMP 2-39
DATE 2-51
DCQ 556
DENSITY 3-153
DEPTH 10-455
DIAM 3-153
DIM 2-34, 9-433, 10-514, 13-578
DJKSEP 3-77
DLIQ 3-79, 3-81
DPBHMX 3-132
DRYTRG 3-88
DT 7-388, 9-446
DTMPL 12-566
DTPWM 5-306
DTQMAX 7-390
DTWAG 3-173
E
ECOLIM 3-108
EFF 5-325, 5-326
EFFSCL 4-268
EFFTAB 5-326
END 2-52
ENDCATEGORY 5-312
ENDGFO 556
ENDINC 1-24
ENDSEP 3-77
ENDSTEP 5-312, 5-313
ENDTUNING 11-541
ENDWINDOW 6-340
EPHIP 9-439
ESALT 9-434
EST 8-416
ETRGOP 4-220
EXCEL 7-402
F
FGRBGN 5-325
FGRINC 5-325
FILE 7-409
FIXGL 5-325
FLASH 8-415
FLOANG 3-127

FLOSTA 4-195
FLOWVEC 2-46
FORM 6-369, 6-370
FPERF 3-57, 12-574
FPROD 4-214, 4-216
FRONT 13-578
FTRANF 8-426
FTRANS 8-425, 12-575
FTWMIX 4-292
FXFORM 6-370
G
GAMHF 9-437
GAMMAC 9-437
GASCOND 4-225
GASFUL 4-214
GASMKP 4-217
GASPERC 8-418
GASPLANT 3-84
GASRATE 3-139
GASRMON 8-418
GASSKG 4-213
GASSLS 4-216
GASTHP 3-150
GATHER 4-195, 5-295
GAUSS 7-402
GEL 9-443
GFO 556
GIBBS 8-413
GIBOFF 8-415
GINJMOB 3-98
GINJOP 4-238
GLEFMN 4-267
GLGMAX 4-264
GLGMIN 4-265
GLGOP 4-270
GLIMIT 3-105
GLR 3-139
GLRADD 4-266
GLRM 5-312
GLRMAX 4-268
GLRMIN 4-268
GLRTAB 4-262
GLRTBP 4-263
GOR 3-110, 3-139
GORM 5-312
GORPEN 3-119
GPMIN 4-278
GRID 9-437

GSMIN 4-278
GTHPWL 3-149
H
HISTSYS 5-301
HITLIST 4-268
HTOUTPUT 10-509
I
IALQ 3-139
IBAT 3-54
IGC 3-54
IGLR 3-139
IGOR 3-139
IMPES 2-41
IMPGRID 12-564
IMPLICIT 2-40
IMPSTAB 7-393
IMPTHP 3-131
IMPWEL 7-407
INCLUDE 1-23
INJ 3-91
INJA 3-98
INJGR 4-254
INJMIN 4-211
INJREGN 4-243, 12-575
INJRGR 4-242
INJRNM 4-241
INJTAR 4-253
INPLACE 13-583, 13-584
INTERACTIVE 7-409
IOGR 3-139
IONEX 9-439
IPOLYT 9-447
IPRES 3-150
IPRTSS 6-358
IPUMP 4-256
IQGAS 3-139
IQI 3-145
IQLIQ 3-139
IQO 3-139
IRDIST 4-244
IRGAS 4-247
IRPCTA 4-243
IRSRCW 4-241
ISO 13-579

ITARG 4-207
ITEMP 3-150
ITHP 3-145
ITNGLG 4-273
ITNGRE 3-100
ITNLIM 7-391
ITNMPL 12-567
ITNSTP 3-99
ITNSTQ 3-99
ITNTHP 3-131
ITNWIMULT 3-192
ITOP 3-179
ITUBE 3-138
IW 3-54
IWCUT 3-139
IWGR 3-139
J
JW 3-54
K
KAC 8-416
KAC2 8-416
KEYCMP 3-84, 4-226, 4-229, 4-232
KMAX 8-416
KMAX2 8-416
KVALUES 3-79, 3-81
L
LDEST 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
LENGTH 10-454, 10-456, 10-459
LFRAC 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
LIFT 5-295
LIFTEFF 4-268
LINK 10-472
LIST 1-24
LKCPLD 2-47
LOCK 10-515
LPGFED 4-236
LPGOUT 4-237
LPGPLANT 4-232
LSCALE 4-208

M
MAP 2-45
MAPOUT 6-330, 9-444
MAPWT 6-354
MAPX 6-353
MAPXT 6-353
MAPY 6-353
MAPYT 6-353
MAPZ 6-353
MAPZT 6-353
MAXGOR 4-278
MAXOVR 7-394
MAXRNE 11-543
MAXSCALE 4-268
MAXWCUT 4-278
MBAWG 3-134
MIMKP 4-219
MINGOR 4-278
MINQG 4-278
MINQO 4-278
MINQW 4-278
MINRER 11-547
MINWCUT 4-278
MIPLANT 4-229
MITAG 3-160
MNFLCF 11-545
MNPFCF 11-545
MOBILITY 3-115
MODLAND 8-420
MULTFL 8-428
MULTIR 8-428
MUSTFLOW 5-321
MWL 3-79, 3-81
N
N 3-54
NAME 3-54
NAMES 13-579
NCOL 1-25
NETPAR 10-499
NEWBHPTAB 3-144
NEWSEP 3-86
NGLFED 4-234
NGLOUT 4-235
NGLPLANT 4-226
NI 4-232
NKEY 3-84, 4-226, 4-229, 4-232

NN 10-460, 10-464, 10-469, 10-470, 10-475

NODCON 10-481
NODE 10-481
NODES 10-475, 10-489, 10-517
NODSOURCE 10-489
NOFRICTION 3-74
NOHYSW 3-57
NOLIST 1-24
NONPWM 5-303
NOOUT 2-48
NOPINT 12-565
NOPRTI 9-434
NOPSAT 8-416
NOPWDEP 3-57
NOSKIP 1-25
NOVDB 2-46
NOWELL 4-289
NPRTM 13-578
NTOPTC 10-516
NTRCEM 13-578
NTRWLM 13-578
O
OBJCOEF 10-514
OGR 3-139
OLDINJ 3-97
OMEGAS 3-77
OMEGBS 3-77
ONTIME 3-118, 4-197
OPMIN 4-278
OPRSYS 4-290
OPTMBL 2-39
ORIGIN 13-579
OUTFILE 4-268
OUTPAVG 6-366
OUTPUT 6-330, 9-444
OUTRFT 6-358
OUTSEP 6-355
OUTWINDOW 6-340
OUTWT 6-354
OUTX 6-353
OUTXT 6-353
OUTY 6-353
OUTYT 6-353
OUTZ 6-353
OUTZT 6-353
OVER 8-421, 8-422, 9-447, 12-576

P
PAFACT 5-312, 5-313
PASS 5-312, 5-313
PATNCI 3-155
PATNPP 3-157
PATTERN 6-366
PATTN 3-154
PCTFQ 3-160
PCTMI 3-160
PCTMN 3-160
PERFPT 3-73
PERM 9-434
PFMCRV 4-268
PHASE 5-313
PHASID 8-431
PI 3-125
PIAGL 3-159
PINJ 3-95
PIPES 10-460
PIVOL 3-159
PJACO 2-39
PLANT 4-214, 4-216, 4-224
PLNTRY 3-84, 4-226, 4-229
PLOT 2-41
PLOTLIST 6-372
PLOTPTN 6-357
PLUS 4-226, 4-229
PMFACT 5-312, 5-313
PMPTAB 4-256
POLYF 9-436
POLYMER 9-434
POLYT 9-434
POR 9-434
POWN 9-437
PPOPT 10-479
PRDMIN 4-209
PREDICT 5-294
PRES 3-75, 10-492
PRESSURE 3-115, 3-150, 10-509
PRFLIM 3-110
PRFSTAT 3-71
PRIIR 4-251
PRINT 6-342
PRINT TRACER 13-585
PRINTOUT 6-357
PRIOP 4-250
PRMGOR 5-325
PROD 3-89
PROFILE 556

PROJNM 4-250
PROJWL 4-251
PRSDLT 5-324
PRSYS 5-302, 5-312, 5-313
PRTR 9-434
PRTSWT 10-520
PRWI 6-367
PRWSTA 6-368
PSAT 8-416
PSEUPRES 10-496
PSEUTAB 10-495
PSEUWS 10-497
PSEUXY 10-496
PTARG 4-199, 5-296
PTARGH 4-201
PTGFRQ 4-202
PTHLD 8-429
PTNGOR 3-159
PWMCAT 5-320
PWMDBG 5-307
PWMFILE 5-306
PWMFRQ 5-299
PWMGC 5-295
PWMOBN 5-305
PWMSTEP 5-312, 5-313
PWMTLP 5-303
PWMTRG 5-323
PWMWCN 5-324
PWMWPA 5-318
PWMWPM 5-319
Q
QEWS 3-139
QGAS 3-139
QGMIN 5-310
QI 3-145, 10-492
QLIFT 4-258, 10-492
QLIFTA 4-260
QLIFTM 4-271
QLIQ 3-139
QMAX 3-103
QMAXWG 3-170
QMIN 3-111
QMULT 3-112
QO 3-139
QOMIN 5-309
QOMINL 5-322
QRATE 4-214, 4-234, 4-235, 4-236, 4-237
QSALES 4-216

QSTMX 3-119
QUAL 3-94
QV 9-439
R
RATE 3-115
RCMPOR 3-166
RCMPPERF 3-164
RCMPUNT 3-164
RECFAC 4-223
REGSEP 6-356
RESTART 2-48
RFLOW 3-126
RIGDEF 4-273
RINJOP 4-239
RK 9-434
RKMULT 9-444
RUN 2-33
S
SEGREG 2-47
SEPARATOR 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
SET 10-457, 10-458
SHEAR 9-437
SKIP 1-25
SLVCUT 7-406
SOR 3-110
SOUCOM 10-490
SPRLIST 6-374
SS 8-416
SSLOPE 9-436
SSSID 6-359
SSSUM 6-359, 10-505
STAGE 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
START 2-50
STBCHK 2-39
STD 6-366
STOP 2-51
STORAGE 2-34
SUNITS 9-440
SWING 556
SYSSEP 5-325
SYSTB 5-299
SYSTEM 5-295

T
TAKE 556
TBADJ 11-531
TCUT 7-392
TEMP 3-75, 3-150, 10-454, 10-455, 10-459
TEST 3-115, 3-116
TESTGL 4-267
TFORM 6-369
TFPERF 11-544
THP 3-130, 3-139, 3-145, 5-296
THPGTB 3-150
TIME 1-22, 2-50
TINJ 3-94
TINJWAG 3-173
TITLE1 2-49
TITLE2 2-49
TITLE3 2-49
TOLD 7-395
TOLEX 7-405, 12-571
TOLMN 7-405, 12-570
TOLMX 7-405, 12-570
TOLR 7-396
TOLSCN 7-398
TOLST 7-405, 12-571
TOLWCN 7-398
TOTGAS 4-268
TRACER 13-579
TRACIN 13-582
TRACK 4-289
TRCKOF 4-289
TRCOFF 13-579
TRGOPT 4-203
TRGORD 4-205
TRGPWM 5-303
TRGQMN 4-206
TRGTOL 4-206
TRKTOL 4-289
TSFM 3-88
TSPN 11-544
TSTPRF 3-109
TTHP 11-549
TTUBING 11-544
TUBE 3-152
TUBING 10-464
TUNING 11-541
TWELL 11-544
TWLFL 11-544

V
VALVES 10-469
VC 10-457, 10-458
VDEST 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
VFRAC 3-75, 3-79, 3-81
VISC 3-150
VISCOSITY 3-153
VOLBAL 2-40
VOVER 8-423, 8-425, 9-447, 12-576
VP0 9-434
VSHFTS 3-77
W
WAG 3-167, 3-190
timestep controls 3-173
WAGPERF 3-158
WBGRAD 3-135
WCPLOT 6-349
WCUT 3-110, 3-139, 3-192, 4-262, 5-312, 5-326
WCUTLM 5-325
WDNDG 3-163
WELCON 10-485, 10-518, 11-543, 11-545, 11-549, 11-551
WELL 3-54, 3-57, 3-73, 3-118, 3-164, 4-264, 4-265, 4-276, 5-301, 5-309, 5-310, 5-318, 5-319, 5-
322, 6-374, 10-485, 10-490, 11-531, 11-541, 11-543, 11-544, 11-545, 11-547, 11-549, 11-
551, 556, 12-573
WFILE 6-349
WFLUX 6-349
WGLRMIN 4-268
WGR 3-139
WI 3-124
WIADJ 11-531
WIMULTAB 3-192
WIMUWL 3-191
WINJMOB 3-97, 3-99
WINJT 4-292
WKHMULT 3-120
WLASTR 6-351
WLGRP 6-371, 10-504, 10-507
WLIMIT 3-104, 3-107
WLTYCH 3-101
WLVEL 10-519
WLWDAT 3-128
WMAP 6-349
WMAPOLD 6-349
WMGL 5-312, 5-313
WMITN 5-294, 10-521
WNDGDV 3-162

WPLOT 6-349
WPMIN 4-278
WPWMDB 5-327
WREST 6-349
WRKCF1 4-284
WRKCF2 4-285
WRKCOEF 4-286
WRKDBG 4-288
WRKDLT 4-276
WRKFAIL 4-277
WRKFRQ 4-275
WRKGP1 4-281
WRKGP2 4-282
WRKLIM 4-278
WRKRTO 4-274
WRKWLM 4-277
WSAL 3-114
WSMIN 4-278
WTC 4-289
WTRACE 13-583, 13-584
WTRACK 6-351
WTRPMP 4-257
WTRTHP 3-153
WWDSP 13-578
X
XFOFF 3-133, 3-188
XFON 3-133
XKC 9-439
Y
YINJ 3-113
YINJA 3-114, 10-484
YINJMK 4-221
YINJT 4-290
YREINJ 4-222
Z
Z 3-150

Index
000000Subject Index
A
accelerated successive substitution 8-415
activate/deactivate grids
in LGR 12-565
anion concentration 9-441, 9-443
arbitrary gridblock connections
in LGR 12-575
area
how defined 4-196
injection target 4-207
production and injection summaries 6-344
production target 4-199
arithmetic operation
applying to grid 8-421
array data
additional for VIP-DUAL 8-422
cross-sections 6-370
from VIP-CORE, modifying 8-421
modifying for polymer 9-447
modifying individual values 8-423
modifying values (VIP-DUAL) 8-425
printing 9-444
printing of 6-330
array reports 6-343
artificial lift
at gathering centers 5-295
defining methods for 5-303
artificial lift quantity 3-148
automatic recompletion units 3-164
average pressure
calculation of 6-366
Aziz, Govier, Fogarasi correlation 3-175
R2003.4 - Landmark Subject-607

B
Beggs and Brill correlation 3-175
bibliography A-591
BLITZ solver 7-401
bottomhole injection pressure 3-145
bottomhole pressure
additive correction 3-147
alternate 3-144
damping factor 7-399
in hydraulics table 3-139
limiting 3-129
bottomhole pressure constraints 3-121
bottomhole pressure table
in predictive well management 5-299
boundary flux data
file format for 6-370
write control 6-350
boundary flux summary 6-346
buildup pressure
output control 6-348
C
calcium concentration 9-442
cation exchange 9-439
CBLITZ iterative matrix solver 12-569
CBLITZ solver 7-401
chloride concentration 9-441, 9-443
comments
inserting lines of comments 1-23
compaction regions 8-428
compositional model
definition of 1-3
content/frequency of output 6-342
convergence
tolerances for 7-395
convergence failures
how controlled 7-392
cross-sections
printing of 6-370
Subject-608 Landmark - R2003.4

D
damping factor
for bottomhole pressure 7-399
Darcy radial flow equations 3-174
data
beginning of 2-49
columns to be read 1-25
deck layout 1-7
injection pressure 3-95
injection temperature 3-94
line continuation 1-25
skip cards 1-25
time-dependent 2-33
dead oil model
definition of 1-3
debug
predictive well management 5-307
wells to be included 5-327
debug output
workover calculations 4-288
default dimensions 2-34
changes for POLYMER option 9-433
defaults
changes in 13-578
density
for water injectors 3-153
of gas, pressure-dependent 3-162
deviated wells 3-54
dimensions
changes to 13-578
default 2-34
divalent cation concentration 9-442
divalent salinity 9-440
drainage radius 3-96
drawdown
maximum constraint 3-132
Dunns and Ross correlation 3-175
dynamic vertical flow 3-177, 3-189
E
elevation profile
in pipes 10-456

end-of- file marker 2-52

endpoint method 3-96
enthalpy
of injected steam/water 3-96
EXCEL solver 7-401, 7-402
external files
how to include 1-24
extrapolation of table data 7-399
F
facility utilization summary 6-345
faults
conductive
solution options 2-47
transmissibility at connections 8-425
transmissibility at connections (VIP-DUAL) 8-426
field
field production and injection reports 6-343
files
controlling writing of 6-349
finite difference formulation
in LGR 12-563
flash calculation 8-415
control of 8-416
flow modeling
hydraulic tables 10-453
in well tubing strings 10-452
flow station
how defined 4-195
flow vector arrays 2-46
fluid tracking 4-289
output 4-290
results file format 6-369
tracked fluid 4-290
write control 6-351
flux file
format of 6-370
formulation

in LGR 12-563
formulation options 2-40
FORTRAN units 1-27
free field format
defined 1-22
friction loss
in wellbore 3-74
front tracking 13-578
fuel gas rate 4-214
fully coupled calculation 2-47
G
gas conditioning 4-225
gas lift
how defined 4-258
gas percolation 8-418
gas phase hysteresis 8-420
gas plant
liquid recovery factor 4-223
gas plant data 3-84
gas producers
algorithm for 3-148
gas rate
minimum for pressure systems 5-310
gas reinjection 4-238
gas remobilization 8-418
gas sales option 4-223
gas-oil ratio report 6-345
gathering center
how to define 4-195
pressure systems/artificial lift 5-295
Gaussian elimination 7-401, 7-402
gel
instantaneous 9-443
Gibbs energy minimization algorithm 8-413
gradients
wellbore 3-134
gridded wellbore 3-174, 3-188
grids
activate/deactivate 12-565
arbitrary gridblock connections 12-575

arithmetic operations on 8-421

compaction regions 8-428
injection regions 12-575
see also LGR
well locations in 12-573
Griffith, Lau, Hon, Pearson correlation 3-175
H
Hagedorn and Brown correlation 3-175
Hongs approximation 9-437
horizontal wells 3-74
hydrocarbon track file 6-385
hydrocarbon volumes
assignment 3-159
hysteresis
Lands constant 8-420
I
IMPES formulation 2-41
in LGR 12-563
IMPLICIT formulation 2-40
in LGR 12-563
implicit well options 7-407
inclined wells 3-74
include files
how to specify 1-24
injection rate
minimum 4-211
injection regions 4-207, 4-239
assigning gridblocks to 12-575
injection summary 6-342
injection target 3-160, 4-207
injection wells
additional injection rate 3-98
anions/chlorides 9-441, 9-443
assigning to a pattern 3-155
cations/calcium 9-442
effective gas target 4-220
how defined 3-91
how to specify pressure 3-95
how to specify quality 3-94
how to specify temperature 3-94

mobility 3-98
polymer concentration in 9-441
inner iterations
definition of 7-387
input-output
diagram of 1-29
instantaneous gel 9-443
interactive suspend option 7-408
iteration control
for IMPLICIT grids 12-567
in LGR 12-566
iteration summary 6-342
iterations
for predictive well management 5-294, 10-521
inner 7-387
outer 7-387
L
Lands constant 8-420
lift efficiency
vs. water cut 5-326
lift gas
composition of 10-484
link data
for multi-phase flow 10-472
liquid recovery factor 4-223
liquified petroleum gas (LPG) plant 4-232
maximum feed rate 4-236
maximum rate 4-237
local grid refinement (LGR)
overview 12-563
M
makeup gas
makeup gas rate 4-217
makeup MI rate 4-219
map file
array data 9-444
format of 2-45
inclusion of mole fractions 6-353
organization of 6-382

specifying arrays to write 6-330

water type tracking 6-354
marginal gas-oil ratio
material balance 2-39
material balance error
maximum allowed 7-398
matrix solvers
types defined 7-401
memory requirements
how calculated 2-34
miscible injectant plant 4-229
mobility 3-96
for injection wells 3-98
mole fractions
printing/mapping 6-353
multiphase compositional flow 10-452
multi-phase flow
link data 10-472
N
natural gas liquid (NGL) plant 4-226
maximum feed rate 4-234
maximum rate 4-235
Newton-Raphson method 8-415
node connections 10-481
node data 10-475
node spreadsheet file (SSSUM) 10-505
non-Darcy gas flow
near wells 3-162
nonlinearity 3-96
non-Newtonian fluid viscosity 9-438
O
oil incremental benefit
with gas lift 5-305
oil phase hysteresis 8-420
oil rate
minimum for flow to pressure system 5-309
minimum for pressure system 5-322
Orkiszewski correlation 3-175
outer iterations

definition of 7-387
output frequency
how controlled 2-50
output regions
assigning separator batteries 6-356
override modification
in LGR 12-576
P
parallel computing 14-587
particle tracking 13-577
pattern balancing 3-154
pattern element option 3-53
perforation relative permeability 3-57
perforations
grid location of 12-574
in wells 3-57
in wells (VIP-DUAL) 3-69
permeability reduction multiplier 9-444
phase equilibrium calculations 8-413
phase stability test 8-413
pipeline network
connecting wells to 10-485
general parameters 10-499
node connections 10-481
node data 10-475
options for simulation 10-449
pipe data 10-460
plotting output 10-508
printing data 10-504
plot
pipeline network data 10-508
production/injection compositional performance 6-350
production/injection performance 6-349
production/injection rate 6-357
plot file
format/data selection 2-41
compositional 2-42
organization of 6-375, 6-379
polymer concentration 9-434, 9-436
for injectors 9-441
polymer data 9-433
polymer inaccessible pore volume 9-439

pore volume
polymer inaccessible 9-439
predictive well management
data for steps 2 and 3 5-312
debug calculations 5-307
how arrays defined 5-294
marginal gas-oil ratio 5-325
overview 5-293
producing areas 5-318
producing mechanism 5-319
well category 5-320
pressure
constraints on 3-121
of injection wells 3-95
threshold for limiting grid block to grid block flow 8-429
pressure gradient
modeling in pipes 10-453
pressure history
data requirements 1-6
pressure system
defining for each well 5-301
minimum gas rate 5-310
minimum oil rate 5-309, 5-322
pressure systems
at gathering centers 5-295
printing 6-342
array data 6-330
arrays by cross-section 6-370
echo print 1-24
mole fractions 6-353
pipeline network data 10-504
tracer summary report 13-585
water type tracking 6-354
well and table data 6-357
well index 6-367
well properties 6-368
producing area
well location in 5-318
production history
production rate
minimum 4-209
tolerances for 5-303
production summary 6-342
production targets 4-199
frequency wells created 4-202

honoring 4-201
minimum rate 4-205
order for reducing phase rate 4-205
reducing the phase rate 4-202
well rate max. tolerance 4-206
production wells
assign to multiple patterns 3-157
how defined 3-89
production/injection compositional performance
plotting of 6-350
production/injection performance
plotting of 6-349
pumps
water injectors 4-255
R
radial flow 3-126
recurrent data
interactive changes to 7-411
region report 6-342
reinjected gas
reports
see printing
restart
how to perform 2-48
restart records
defined 1-27
save temporary restarts 6-351
write control 6-350
results file
control of 2-41
RFT report 6-345
wells to include 6-358
run termination 2-51
run title
how to specify 2-49
Russell Goodrich method 3-163
S
sales gas rate 4-216

salinity
effective divalent 9-440
salinity table 9-434, 9-436
scaleback
well rates 4-208
secondar recovery projects
design/analysis of 13-577
segregated flow
in conductive faults 2-47
separator batteries
assigning to output regions 6-356
separator battery number
for predictive well management 5-325
separator battery report 6-343
selecting batteries 6-355
shear rate
effect on viscosity 9-437
shrinkage gas rate 4-213
shutoffs
limit for automatic shutoff 4-277
SIMOUT map files
writing of 6-350
simulation statistics 6-345
simulator control
overview 7-387
single phase injectors 3-152
skin factor 3-162
well-rate dependent 3-163
solvers
CBLITZ 12-569
types defined 7-401
spreadsheet summary
options and variables 6-359
spreadsheet summary report 6-345
steam rate
for production wells 3-119
summary records
how written 1-27
surface facility modeling 3-87
surface facility report 6-342
surface pipeline network option 10-449
surface separators
black-oil modeling (VIP-ENCORE) 3-78
compositional modeling (VIP-COMP) 3-75
general data for 3-75
k-values 3-81

switching 3-86
T
table extrapolation 7-399
temperature
for injection wells 3-94
temperature gradient profile
in pipes and well tubing 10-455
temperature profile
in pipes and well tubing 10-454, 10-459
termination of run 2-51
time-dependent data 2-33
timestep
automatic selection of 7-387
controlling size of 2-50
maximum variable changes 7-394
timestep control
for IMPLICIT grids 12-566
for polymer option 9-446
in LGR 12-566
timestep cuts
maximum variable changes 7-394
timestep size
following well rate changes 7-390
how defined 7-388
maximum for IMPES 7-393
timestep summary
logical unit for output 6-358
timestep summary report 6-345
title
of run 2-49
tolerance
for convergence 7-395
for production rates 5-303
tracer injections 13-582
tracer output file 13-583, 13-584
tracer summary report 13-585
tracer tests
calculation parameters 13-579
options for 13-577
tracking
injected water front 13-578

of hydrocarbons 6-385
tracking output 6-346
transmissibility
at fault connections 8-425
at fault connections (VIP-DUAL) 8-426
trapped gas
remobilization of 8-418
tubing diameter 3-153
tubing length 3-152
tubinghead discharge pressure 3-145
tubinghead pressure
calculation for gas wells 3-150
constraints for single phase injectors 3-152
defining for well list 5-296
equations, set up 3-130
in hydraulics table 3-139
iteration control 3-131
limiting 3-130
table assignment for gas producers 3-149
tubinghead pressure constraints 3-121
U
units
table of 1-30
utility data 2-33
V
value override
in LGR 12-576
valve coefficient profile 10-457, 10-458, 10-479
vertical wells
name location 3-54
VIP-COMP
overview 1-1
surface separator modeling 3-75
VIP-CORE
array data, modifying 8-421
VIP-DUAL
fault connection transmissibility 8-426
override array values 8-425
override modification 8-422
overview 1-2

well perforations 3-69

VIP-ENCORE
default separator 3-78
overview 1-2
VIP-EXEC
files used 1-27
overview 1-1
sample input data 1-18
VIP-POLYMER
default dimension changes 9-433
overview 1-3
polymer concentration 9-434
salinity table 9-434
VIP-THERM
overview 1-3
viscosity
for water injectors 3-153
viscosity table
for gas wells 3-150
voidage injection
how defined 4-252
volume balance 2-40
W
water injector pumps 4-255
water tracking
mixing parameter 4-292
tracked water type 4-292
water tracking report 6-346
water type
tracking of 6-354
water-cut
vs. lift efficiency 5-326
water-oil hysteresis 3-57
well groups
for reporting 6-371
well index
printing of 6-367
well properties
printing of 6-368
well tubing data 10-464
wellbore crossflow 3-133
wellbore flash control 3-136
wellbore gradients 3-134

wellbore hydraulics table

assignment of 3-138
for injectors 3-145
specification of 3-139
wells
angles 3-159
artificial lift quantity 3-148
average pressure calculation 6-366
changing well type class 3-101
connections between 10-485
constraints on 3-103
conventional locations 3-53
crossflow in 3-133
data for 3-53
drawdown 3-132
dynamic vertical flow 3-177, 3-189
economic limit 3-108
flash control 3-136
flow rates
outer iteration number 3-99
fraction of time on 3-117
gas rate 3-105
gas-oil ratio 3-105
gas-oil ratio limits 3-110
gradients 3-134
grid location of 12-573
gridded wellbore 3-174, 3-188
hydrocarbon volumes 3-159
inclined and horizontal 3-74
individual performance 6-350
injected gas composition 3-113
interval between tests 3-115
lift gas composition 10-484
limiting bottomhole pressure 3-129
limiting tubinghead pressure 3-130
liquid-gas ratio 3-104
maximum rate 3-103
maximum rate each phase 3-112
maximum steam rate 3-119
maximum water cut 3-104, 3-107
MI injection target 3-160
minimum rate 3-111
mobility computation 3-98
name/location 3-53
pattern balancing 3-154

perforation tests 3-109

perforations 3-57, 3-174
perforations (in VIP-DUAL) 3-69
predictive management 5-293
pressure constraint 3-121
productivity/injectivity index 3-125
radial flow equation data 3-126
rate scaleback options 4-208
recompletion units 3-164
order for opening 3-166
see also injection/production wells
tubing diameter 3-153
tubing length 3-152
tubinghead pressure 5-296
type (production/injection) 3-89
water cut limits 3-110
water-alternating-gas injection 3-167
bottomhole pressure 3-171
maximum rates 3-170
timestep control 3-173
well index 3-124
well lists 1-26
well management 4-195
wellbore friction loss 3-74
workover rigs 4-273
workovers
automatic 4-273
benefit function limits 4-278
debug output from calculations 4-288
elapsed time between 4-276
failure rate 4-277
frequency of calculations 4-275
relative number 4-274
write files 6-349
Z
z-factor
for gas wells 3-150


Vip Exec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vip Exec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VIP-EXECUTIVE

Part No. 159682 R2003.4

Landmark Graphics Corporation

R2003.4 - Landmark iii

1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE) . . . . . . . . . 1-23

2.6.6 Run Termination (STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

3.5.6 Perforation Test Schedule (TSTPRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109

3.10.3 Z-factor/Viscosity Tables for Gas Producer THP

R2003.4 - Landmark vii

3.18.2 Selective Application of Condensate Banking (CNDBWL) . . . 3-189

viii Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.18 Maximum LPG Rate (LPGOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237

4.11.2 Relative Number of Workovers (WRKRTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274

5.3.5 Producing Mechanism (PWMWPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-319

6.21 Print Well Properties Summary (PRWSTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-368

xii Landmark - R2003.4

7.4.2 BATCH Card (BATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-410

R2003.4 - Landmark xiii

9.1.9 Salinity Units Card (SUNITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440

xiv Landmark - R2003.4

10.12 Lift Gas Composition (YINJA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-484

xvi Landmark - R2003.4

13.6.2 Describe Well Perforations (FPERF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-574

R2003.4 - Landmark xvii

xviii Landmark - R2003.4

About This Manual

The VIP-EXECUTIVE reservoir simulator contains the following program

VIP-ENCORE Multi-Component Black-Oil Model

VIP-COMP Equation-of-State Compositional Model

VIP-DUAL Dual-Porosity Model

VIP-POLYMER Polymer Flooding Model

VIP-THERM Thermal Model

These program modules work together to provide total flexibility in

R2003.4 - Landmark xix

reservoir. If VIP-COMP were included in the same program, the user

VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference. A detailed discussion of the

VIP-CORE Reference Manual. A complete summary of all keywords

R2003.4 - Landmark xxi

xxii Landmark -R2003.4

00 The documentation for VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-

1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

R2003.4 - Landmark 1-1

components. In addition, special techniques are implemented in VIP-

1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview

NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.

00 The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

1-2 Landmark - R2003.4

1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview

NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.

00 The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

1.1.5 VIP-THERM Option

The VIP-THERM compositional model is a fully implicit, n-component,

The VIP-THERM dead oil model is a fully implict three-phase reservoir

VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE initialization data may easily be converted to

1. Specify THERMAL card in VIP-CORE utility data (VIP-CORE Section

2. Specify NCV in the grid system data (VIP-CORE Sections 2.2.3.1 or

R2003.4 - Landmark 1-3

3. Replace Physical Property Constants table with VIP-THERM format

5. Specify heat capacity arrays in VIP-CORE array data (VIP-CORE

6. Specify heat loss data in VIP-CORE (VIP-CORE Chapter 12).

VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE recurrent data may easily be converted to

2. Specify TINJ for all gas injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.1).

3. Modify DT cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.1), ITNLIM cards (VIP-

00 Method 2: 10 312.5 215 16.5